Nse Book

Copyright © 2009 by National Stock Exchange of India Ltd.
(NSE)
Exchange Plaza, Bandra Kurla Complex,
Bandra (East), Mumbai 400 051 INDIA
All content included in this book, such as text, graphics, logos, images, data c
ompilation
etc. are the property of NSE. This book or any part thereof should not be copied
,
reproduced, duplicated, sold, resold or exploited for any commercial purposes.
Furthermore, the book in its entirety or any part cannot be stored in a retrieva
l system or
transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, r
ecording
or otherwise.
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1: SECURITIES MARKET IN INDIA AN OVERVIEW......................10
1.1 INTRODUCTION................................................................
........................................................... 10
1.2 PRODUCTS, PARTICIPANTS AND FUNCTIONS........................................
.............................. 11
1.3 SECURITIES MARKET AND FINANCIAL SYSTEM......................................
............................. 14
1.4 SECURITIES MARKET & ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT....................................
....................... 16
1.5 DERIVATIVES MARKET .........................................................
...................................................... 18
1.6 REGULATORY FRAMEWORK........................................................
.............................................. 19
1.6.1 Legislations .............................................................
.............................................................19
1.6.2 Rules Regulations and Regulators..........................................
...............................20
1.6.3 Reforms Since 1990s.......................................................
..............................................21
1.7 ROLE OF NSE IN INDIAN SECURITIES MARKET ....................................
............................... 33
CHAPTER 2: PRIMARY MARKET.......................................................
.......................................39
2.1 INTRODUCTION................................................................
........................................................... 39
2.2 MARKET DESIGN...............................................................
.......................................................... 39
2.2.1 DIP Guidelines, 2000 .....................................................
................................................39
2.2.2 Merchant Banking .........................................................
...................................................45
2.2.3 Credit Rating.............................................................
..........................................................46
2.2.4 Demat Issues..............................................................
........................................................46
2.2.5 Private Placement.........................................................
...................................................47
2.2.6 Virtual Debt Portal.......................................................
....................................................47
2.2.7 ADRs/GDRs ................................................................
..........................................................47
2.3 COLLECTIVE INVESTMENT VEHICLES..............................................
....................................... 49
2.3.1 Mutual Funds..............................................................
.........................................................49
2.3.2 Venture Capital Funds ....................................................
...............................................63
2.3.3 Collective Investment Schemes.............................................
.................................64
CHAPTER 3: SECONDARY MARKET.....................................................
.................................68
3.1 INTRODUCTION................................................................
........................................................... 68
3.2 MARKET DESIGN...............................................................
........................................................... 68
3.2.1 Stock Exchanges...........................................................
....................................................68
3.2.2 Membership in NSE ........................................................
.................................................72
3.2.3 Listing of securities.....................................................
....................................................75
3.2.4 Delisting of Securities...................................................
.................................................76
3.2.5 Listing of Securities on NSE..............................................
.........................................78
3.2.6 Dematerialisation ........................................................
.....................................................81
3.3 TRADING.....................................................................
.................................................................. 83
3.3.1 Trading Mechanism.........................................................
................................................83
3.3.2 Order Management .........................................................
................................................91
3.3.3 Trade Management .........................................................
................................................97
3.3.4 Auction...................................................................
................................................................98
3.3.5 Internet Broking..........................................................
................................................... 100
3.3.6 Wireless Application Protocol.............................................
.................................... 100
1
3.3.7 Trading Rules.............................................................
...................................................... 101
3.4 CLEARING AND SETTLEMENT ....................................................

.............................................104
3.4.1 Clearing and Settlement Mechanism.........................................

........................ 104
3.4.2 Rolling Settlement........................................................

................................................ 111
3.5 RISK MANAGEMENT ............................................................

......................................................117
3.5.1 Capital Adequacy Requirements.............................................

............................ 117
3.5.2 Margins ..................................................................

............................................................ 119
3.5.3 On-Line Exposure Monitoring ..............................................

................................. 128
3.5.4 Off-line Monitoring.......................................................

............................................... 128
3.5.5 Index-based Market-wide Circuit Breakers/ Price Bands for

Securities......................................................................
.................................................................. 129
3.5.6 Settlement Guarantee Mechanism............................................
........................ 130
3.5.7 Investor Protection Fund..................................................

....................................... 135
3.6 MARKET INDEX................................................................

..........................................................136
3.6.1 Understanding the index number............................................

.......................... 137
3.6.2 Understanding S&P CNX NIFTY...............................................

.............................. 141
3.6.3 India Index Services & Products Ltd. (IISL)...............................
.................. 144
CHAPTER 4: GOVERNMENT SECURITIES MARKET.........................................

...... 147
4.1 INTRODUCTION TO INDIAN DEBT MARKETS.........................................

.............................147
4.1.1 Market Subgroups..........................................................

............................................... 149
4.1.2 Instruments...............................................................
...................................................... 150
4.1.3 Participants..............................................................
........................................................ 151
4.2 PRIMARY MARKET..............................................................

........................................................154
4.2.1 Issuance Process-Government securities....................................

................... 154
4.2.2 Issuance Process Treasury Bills ............................................

.............................. 156
4.2.3 Participants..............................................................
........................................................ 157
4.3 SECONDARY MARKET............................................................

...................................................158
4.3.1 Trading of Government Securities on Stock Exchanges.......................

. 158
4.3.2 Repo and Reverse Repo.....................................................

....................................... 159
4.3.3 Negotiated Dealing System.................................................

.................................... 161
4.3.4 Wholesale Debt Market of NSE..............................................

............................... 163
4.3.5 Clearing and Settlement...................................................
........................................ 169
4.3.6 Retail Debt Market........................................................

................................................ 175
4.3.7 Interest Rate Derivatives.................................................

........................................ 177
4.3.8 Zero Coupon Yield Curve...................................................

....................................... 178
4.3.9 FIMMDA-NSE MIBID/MIBOR....................................................

............................... 181
4.3.10 NSE-VaR System...........................................................

............................................. 182
4.3.11 Bond Index...............................................................

...................................................... 182
CHAPTER 5: DERIVATIVES MARKET...................................................

............................. 186
5.1 DERIVATIVES.................................................................
............................................................186
5.1.1 Introduction..............................................................
..................................................... 186
5.1.2 Products, participants and functions......................................

........................... 187
5.1.3 Types of Derivatives......................................................

.............................................. 188
5.1.4 Derivatives Market in India ..............................................

....................................... 189
2
5.1.5 Membership of NSE.........................................................
............................................. 190
5.2 FUTURES AND OPTIONS ........................................................
..................................................191
5.2.1 Forward Contract..........................................................
................................................. 191
5.2.2 Futures...................................................................
............................................................. 192
5.2.3 Options ..................................................................
............................................................. 194
5.2.4 Pricing of Derivatives....................................................
.............................................. 197
5.3 TRADING SYSTEM..............................................................
........................................................200
5.3.1 Introduction..............................................................
....................................................... 200
5.3.2 Trading mechanism ........................................................
............................................. 200
5.3.3 Adjustments for corporate actions.........................................
............................ 205
5.3.4 Eligibility criteria for securities/indices traded in F&O.................
........... 205
5.3.5 Products and Contract specifications......................................
.......................... 208
5.4 CLEARING AND SETTLEMENT ....................................................
.............................................212
5.4.1 Introduction..............................................................
....................................................... 212
5.4.2 Clearing mechanism .......................................................
............................................. 213
5.4.3 Settlement mechanism......................................................
........................................ 213
5.4.4 Risk management ..........................................................
............................................... 218
CHAPTER 6: REGULATORY FRAMEWORK.................................................
.................... 233
6.1 SECURITIES CONTRACTS (REGULATION) ACT, 1956.................................

......................233
6.2 SECURITIES CONTRACTS (REGULATION) RULES, 1957...............................
...................237
6.3 SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE BOARD OF INDIA ACT, 1992............................
...............238
6.4 SEBI (STOCK BROKERS & SUB-BROKERS) REGULATIONS, 1992........................
.........241
6.5 SEBI (PROHIBITION OF INSIDER TRADING) REGULATIONS, 1992.....................
..........249
6.6 SEBI (PROHIBITION OF FRAUDULENT AND UNFAIR TRADE PRACTICES RELATING TO
SECURITIES MARKETS) REGULATIONS, 2003...........................................
.....................................253
6.7 THE DEPOSITORIES ACT, 1996..................................................
...........................................256
6.8 INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872...................................................
...........................................259
6.9 THE COMPANIES ACT, 1956.....................................................
..............................................260
6.10 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES ACT 2006.............................................
...................................264
6.11 INCOME TAX ACT, 1961.......................................................
...................................................266
6.12 MONEY LAUNDERING ACT, 2002.................................................
.........................................277
6.13 SECURITIES TRANSACTION TAX.................................................
.........................................279
CHAPTER 7 : MATHEMATICS AND STATISTICS..........................................
............ 288
7.1 MEASURES OF CENTRAL TENDENCY................................................

.....................................288
7.1.1 Mean......................................................................
............................................................... 288
7.1.2 The weighted Arithmetic mean..............................................
.............................. 288
7.1.3 Geometric Mean............................................................
................................................. 289
7.1.4 Variance and Standard Deviation...........................................
............................. 289
7.1.5 Coefficient of Variation .................................................
............................................. 290
7.1.6 Covariance................................................................
........................................................ 291
7.1.7 Coefficient of Correlation................................................
.......................................... 291
7.1.8 Normal Distribution.......................................................
............................................... 292
7.2 RETURN AND RISK.............................................................
........................................................292
3
7.2.1 Return and Risk of a Single Asset.........................................
.............................. 292
7.2.2 Return and Risk of a portfolio............................................

.................................... 294
7.3 FUNDAMENTAL ANALYSIS........................................................

...............................................298
7.3.1 Valuation of a Stock......................................................

.............................................. 298
7.3.2 Economic Analysis ........................................................

................................................ 300
7.3.3 Industry Analysis.........................................................

.................................................. 301
7.4 TECHNICAL ANALYSIS..........................................................

.....................................................302
7.4.1 Dow Theory................................................................

....................................................... 302
7.4.2 Charts....................................................................
.............................................................. 304
7.5 FINANCIAL STATEMENT ANALYSIS................................................

.........................................304
7.5.1 Balance Sheet.............................................................

..................................................... 304
7.5.2 Profit and Loss Account...................................................

.......................................... 306
7.5.3 Ratio Analysis ...........................................................

....................................................... 306
CHAPTER 8: CORPORATE FINANCE....................................................

.............................. 314
8.1 COST OF CAPITAL.............................................................

.........................................................314
8.1.1 Cost of Debt .............................................................
....................................................... 314
8.1.2 Cost of Preference Shares ................................................

....................................... 314
8.1.3 Cost of Equity............................................................

...................................................... 315
8.1.4 The Weighted Average Cost of Capital......................................

....................... 315
8.2 CAPITAL STRUCTURE ..........................................................

......................................................316
8.2.1 Net Income Approach.......................................................

.......................................... 316
8.2.2 Net Operating Income Approach.............................................

............................ 317
8.2.3 Traditional Approach......................................................

............................................. 317
8.2.4 Modigliani and Miller Approach............................................

................................. 318
8.3 CAPITAL BUDGETING ..........................................................

......................................................319
8.3.1 Net Present Value ........................................................

................................................. 319
8.3.2 Benefit-Cost Ratio........................................................

................................................. 321
8.3.3 Internal Rate of Return...................................................

........................................... 321
8.3.4 Payback Period............................................................

.................................................... 323
8.3.5 Accounting Rate of Return.................................................

...................................... 324
8.4 TIME VALUE OF MONEY ........................................................
...................................................324
8.4.1 Future Value of a Single Cash Flow .......................................

............................ 324
8.4.2 Future Value of an Annuity................................................

..................................... 325
8.4.3 Present Value of a Single Cash Flow ......................................

........................... 326
8.4.4 Present Value of an Annuity...............................................

.................................... 327
MODEL TEST . 329
4
List of Abbreviations
ADB Asian Development Bank
ADRs American Depository Receipts
AIFIs All India Financial Institutions
ALBM Automated Lending and Borrowing Mechanism
ALBRS Automated Lending and Borrowing under Rolling Settlement
AMC Asset Management Company
AMFI Association of Mutual Funds in India
ASC Accounting Standards Committee
ATM At-The-Money
ATSs Alternative Trading system
B2B Business-to-Business
BIFR Board for Industrial and Financial Reconstruction
BIS Bank for International Settlement
BLESS Borrowing and Lending Securities Scheme
BMC Base Minimum Capital
BSE The Stock Exchange, Mumbai
CBDT Central Board of Direct Taxes
CC Clearing Corporation
CCIL Clearing Corporation of India Limited
CDs Certificate of Deposits
CDSL Central Depository Services (India) Limited
CFM Carry Forward Margin
CFRS Carry Forward under Rolling Settlement
CH Clearing House
CIMC Collective Investment Management Company
CISs Collective Investment Schemes
CIVs Collective Investment Vehicles
CLF Collateralised Lending Facility
CM Clearing Member
CM Segment Capital Market Segment of NSE
CMIE Centre for Monitoring Indian Economy
COSI Committee on Settlement Issues
COTI Committee of Trade Issues
CP Custodial Participant
CPs Commercial Papers
CRAs Credit Rating Agencies
CRISIL Credit Rating Information Services of India Limited
CRR Cash Reserve Ratio
CSD Collateral Security Deposit
CSE Calcutta Stock Exchange
DCA Department of Company Affairs
DDBs Deep Discount Bonds
DEA Department of Economic Affairs
5
DFIs Development Financial Institutions
DIP Disclosure and Investor Protection
DNS Deferred Net Settlement
DPs Depository Participants
DRR Debenture Redemption Reserve
DSCE Debt Securities Convertible into Equity
DvP Delivery versus Payment
ECB Euro Commercial Borrowings
ECNS Electronic communication Networks
EDGAR Electronic Data Gathering, Analysis and Retrieval
EDIFAR Electronic Data Information Filing and Retrieval
EFT Eletronic Fund Transfer
ELSS Equity Linked Saving Schemes
EPS Earning Per Share
ETFs Exchange Traded Funds
F&O Futures and Options
F&O Futures and Options
FCCBs Foreign Currency Convertible Bonds
FDI Foreign Direct Investment
FDRs Foreign Deposit Receipts
FDs Fixed Deposits
FIBV International World Federation of Stock Exchanges
FIIs Foreign Institutional Investors
FIMMDA Fixed Income Money Markets and Derivatives Association
FIs Financial Institutions
FRAs Forward Rate Agreements
FVCIs Foreign Venture Capital Investors
GDP Gross Domestic Product
GDRs Global Deposit Receipts
GDS Gross Domestic Savings
GNP Gross National Product
GOI Government of India
G-Sec Government Securities
i-BEX ICICI Securities Bond Index
IBRD International Bank for Reconstruction and Development
ICAI Institute of Chartered Accountants of India
ICICI Industrial Credit and Investment Corporation of India Limited.
ICSE Inter-Connected Stock Exchange of India Limited
IDBI Industrial Development Bank of India
IFC International Finance Corporation
IFSD Interest Free Security Deposit
6
IIM Indian Institute of Management
IISL India Index Services and Products Limited
IOC Immediate or Cancel
IOSCO International Organisation of Securities Commission
IPF Investor Protection Fund
IPO Initial Public Offer
IRDA Insurance Regulatory and Development Authority
IRS Interest Rate Swap
ISIN International Securities Identification Number
ISSA International Securities Services Association
IT Information Technology
ITM In-The-Money
LAF Liquidity Adjustment Facility
LIC Life Insurance Corporation of India Limited
MCFS Modified Carry Forward System
MFs Mutual Funds
MFSS Mutual Fund Service System
MIBID Mumbai Inter-bank Bid Rate
MIBOR Mumbai Inter-bank Offer Rate
MMMF Money Market Mutual Fund
MNCs Multi National Companies
MOU Memorandum of Understanding
MTM Mark-To-Market
NASDAQ Natioanl Association of Securities Dealers Automated Quotation System
NAV Net Asset Value
NBFCs Non-Banking Financial Companies
NCAER National Council for Applied Economic Research
NCDs Non-convertible Debentures
NCDS Non-convertible Debt Securities
NCFM NSE's Certification in Financial Markets
NDS Negotiatied Dealing System
NEAT National Stock Exchange Automated Trading
NGOs Non Government Organisations
NIBIS NSE's Internet-based Information System
NIC National Informatics Centre
NPAs Non Performing Assets
NRIs Non Resident Indians
NSCCL National Securities Clearing Corporation of India Limited
NSDL Natioanl Securities Depository Limited
NSE Natioanl Stock Exchange of India Limited
OCBs Overseas Corporate Bodies
OECLOB Open Electronic Consolidated Limit Order Book
OIS Overnight Index Swaps
7
ORS Order Routing System
OTC Over the Counter
OTCEI Over the Counter Exchange of India Limited
OTM Out-of the-Money
P/E ratio Price Earning Ratio
PAN Permanent Account Number
PCM Professional Clearing Member
PDAI Primary Dealers Association of India
PDO Public Debt Office
PDs Primary Dealers
PRI Principal Return Index
PRISM Parallel Risk Management System
PSUs Public Sector Undertakings
PV Present Value
QIBs Qualified Institutional Buyers
RBI Reserve Bank of India
ROCs Registrar of Companies
RTGS Real time Gross Settlement
S&P Standard and Poor's
SAT Securities Appellate Tribunal
SC(R)A Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act, 1956
SC(R)R Securities Contracts (Regulation) Rules, 1957
SCMRD Society for Capital Market Research and Development
SDs Satellite Dealers
SEBI Securities and Exchange Board of India
SEC Securities Exchange Commission
SGF Settlement Guarantee Fund
SGL Subsidiary General Ledger
SGX-DT The Singapore Exchange Derivatives Trading Limited
SIPC Securities Investor Protection Corporation
SLR Statutory Liquidity Ratio
SPAN Standard Portfolio Analysis of Risks
SPV Special Purpose Vehicle
SROs Self Regulatory Orgaisations
SSS Securities Settlement System
STP Straight Through Processing
STRIPS Separate Trading of Registered Interest and Principal of Securities
SUS 99 Special Unit Scheme 99
T-Bills Treasury Bills
TDS Tax Deducted at Source
TM Trading Member
TRI Total Return Index
UTI Unit Trust of India
8
VaR Value at Risk
VCFs Venture Capital Funds
VCUs Venture Capital Undertakings
VSAT Very Small Aperture Terminal
WAN Wide Area Network
WAP Wireless Application Protocol
WDM Wholesale Debt Market Segment of NSE
YTM Yield to Maturity
ZCYC Zero Coupon Yield Curve
Distribution of weights in the Securities Market (Basic) Module
Curriculum
Chapter Title Weights (%)
1 Securities Market in India 10
2 Primary Market 10
3 Secondary Market 20
4 Government Securities Market 10
5 Derivatives Market 20
6 Regulatory Framework 10
7 Mathematics and Statistics 12
8 Corporate Finance 8
Note: Candidates are advised to refer to NSE s website: www.nseindia.com
while preparing for NCFM test(s) for announcements pertaining to
revisions/updations in NCFM modules or launch of new modules, if any.
9
CHAPTER 1: SECURITIES MARKET IN
INDIA AN OVERVIEW
1.1 INTRODUCTION
The securities markets in India have witnessed several policy initiatives,
which has refined the market micro-structure, modernised operations and
broadened investment choices for the investors. The irregularities in the
securities transactions in the last quarter of 2000-01, hastened the
introduction and implementation of several reforms. While a Joint
Parliamentary Committee was constituted to go into the irregularities and
manipulations in all their ramifications in all transactions relating to securit
ies,
decisions were taken to complete the process of demutualisation and
corporatisation of stock exchanges to separate ownership, management and
trading rights on stock exchanges and to effect legislative changes for
investor protection, and to enhance the effectiveness of SEBI as the capital
market regulator. Rolling settlement on T+5 basis was introduced in respect
of most active 251 securities from July 2, 2001 and in respect of balance
securities from 31st December 2001. Rolling settlement on T+3 basis
commenced for all listed securities from April 1, 2002 and subsequently on
T+2 basis from April 1, 2003. All deferral products such as carry forward were
banned from July 2, 2002.
At the end of March 2008, there were 1,381 companies listed at NSE and
1,236 companies were available for trading. The Capital Market segment of
NSE reported a trading volume of Rs.35,51,038 crore during 2007-08 and at
the end of March 2008, the NSE Market Capitalisation was Rs.48,58,122
crore.
The derivatives trading on the NSE commenced with the S&P CNX Nifty Index
Futures on June 12, 2000. The trading in index options commenced on June
4, 2001 and trading in options on individual securities commenced on July 2,
2001. Single stock futures were launched on November 9, 2001. Thereafter, a
wide range of products have been introduced in the derivatives segment on
the NSE. The Index futures and options are available on Indices -S&P CNX
Nifty, CNX Nifty Junior, CNX 100, CNX IT, Bank Nifty and Nifty Midcap 50.
Single stock futures are available on more than 250 stocks. The mini
derivative contracts (futures and options) on S&P CNX Nifty were introduced
for trading on January 1, 2008 while the Long term Options Contracts on S&P
CNX Nifty were launched on March 3, 2008.
10
Due to rapid changes in volatility in the securities market from time to time,
there was a need felt for a measure of market volatility in the form of an
index that would help the market participants. NSE launched the India VIX, a
volatility index based on the S&P CNX Nifty Index Option prices. Volatility
Index is a measure of market s expectation of volatility over the near term.
Other than the introduction of new products in the Indian stock markets, the
Indian Stock Market Regulator, Securities & Exchange Board of India (SEBI)
allowed the direct market access (DMA) facility to investors in India on April
3, 2008. To begin with, DMA was extended to the institutional investors. In
addition to the DMA facility, SEBI also decided to permit all classes of
investors to short sell and the facility for securities lending and borrowing
scheme was operationalised on April 21, 2008.
The Debt markets in India have also witnessed a series of reforms, beginning
in the year 2001-02 which was quite eventful for debt markets in India, with
implementation of several important decisions like setting up of a clearing
corporation for government securities, a negotiated dealing system to
facilitate transparent electronic bidding in auctions and secondary market
transactions on a real time basis and dematerialisation of debt instruments.
Further, there was adoption of modified Delivery-versus-Payment mode of
settlement (DvP III in March 2004). The settlement system for transaction in
government securities was standardized to T+1 cycle on May 11, 2005. To
provide banks and other institutions with a more advanced and more efficient
trading platform, an anonymous order matching trading platform (NDS-OM)
was introduced in August 2005. Short sale was permitted in G-secs in 2006 to
provide an opportunity to market participants to manage their interest rate
risk more effectively and to improve liquidity in the market. When issued
(WI) trading in Central Government Securities was introduced in 2006.
As a result of the gradual reform process undertaken over the years, the
Indian G-Sec market has become increasingly broad-based and characterized
by an efficient auction process, an active secondary market, electronic trading
and settlement technology that ensures safe settlement with Straight through
Processing (STP).
This chapter, however, takes a review of the stock market developments
since 1990. These developments in the securities market, which support
corporate initiatives, finance the exploitation of new ideas and facilitate
management of financial risks, hold out necessary impetus for growth,
development and strength of the emerging market economy of India.
1.2 PRODUCTS, PARTICIPANTS AND FUNCTIONS
Transfer of resources from those with idle resources to others who have a
productive need for them is perhaps most efficiently achieved through the
11
securities markets. Stated formally, securities markets provide channels for
reallocation of savings to investments and entrepreneurship and thereby
decouple these two activities. As a result, the savers and investors are not
constrained by their individual abilities, but by the economy s abilities to
invest and save respectively, which inevitably enhances savings and
investment in the economy.
Savings are linked to investments by a variety of intermediaries through a
range of complex financial products called securities which is defined in the
Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act, 1956 to include:
(1)
shares, scrips, stocks, bonds, debentures, debenture stock or other
marketable securities of a like nature in or of any incorporated
company or body corporate;
(a) derivatives;
(b) units
of any other instrument issued by any collective
investment scheme to the investors in such schemes;
(c) security receipt as defined in clause (zg) of section 2 of the
Securitisation and Reconstruction of Financial Assets and
Enforcement of Security Interest Act, 2002;
(d) units or any other such instrument issued to the investors
under any mutual fund scheme;
(e) any certificate or instrument (by whatever name called), issued
to an investor by any issuer being a special purpose distinct
entity which possesses any debt or receivable, including
mortagage debt, assigned to such entity, and acknowledging
beneficial interest of such investor in such debt or receivable,
including mortgage debt, as the case may be;
(2)
government securities,
(a) such other instruments as may be declared by the Central
Government to be securities; and
(3)
rights or interest in securities.
There are a set of economic units who demand securities in lieu of funds and
others who supply securities for funds. These demand for and supply of
securities and funds determine, under competitive market conditions in both
goods and securities market, the prices of securities which reflect the present
value of future prospects of the issuer, adjusted for risks and also prices of
funds.
It is not that the users and suppliers of funds meet each other and exchange
funds for securities. It is difficult to accomplish such double coincidence of
wants. The amount of funds supplied by the supplier may not be the amount
needed by the user. Similarly, the risk, liquidity and maturity characteristics
of the securities issued by the issuer may not match preference of the
supplier. In such cases, they incur substantial search costs to find each other.
Search costs are minimised by the intermediaries who match and bring the
suppliers and users of funds together. These intermediaries may act as
12
agents to match the needs of users and suppliers of funds for a commission,
help suppliers and users in creation and sale of securities for a fee or buy the
securities issued by users and in turn, sell their own securities to suppliers t
o
book profit. It is, thus, a misnomer that securities market disintermediates by
establishing a direct relationship between the savers and the users of funds.
The market does not work in a vacuum; it requires services of a large variety
of intermediaries. The disintermediation in the securities market is in fact an
intermediation with a difference; it is a risk-less intermediation, where the
ultimate risks are borne by the savers and not the intermediaries. A large
variety and number of intermediaries provide intermediation services in the
Indian securities market as may be seen from Table 1.1.
Table 1.1: Market Participants in Securities Market
Market Participants
Number as on
March 31
2007 2008
Securities Appellate Tribunal 1 1
Regulators* 4 4
Depositories 2 2
Stock Exchanges
With Equities Trading 21 19
With Debt Market Segment 2 2
With Derivative Trading 2 2
Brokers 9,443 9,487
Corporate Brokers 4,110 4,183
Sub-brokers 27,541 44,073
FIIs 996 1,319
Portfolio Managers 158 205
Custodians 15 15
Primary Dealers 17 16
Merchant Bankers 152 155
Bankers to an Issue 47 50
Debenture Trustees 30 28
Underwriters 45 35
Venture Capital Funds 90 106
Foreign Venture Capital Investors 78 97
Mutual Funds 40 40
Collective Investment Schemes 0 0
* DCA, DEA, RBI & SEBI.
The securities market, thus, has essentially three categories of participants,
namely the issuers of securities, investors in securities and the
intermediaries. The issuers and investors are the consumers of services
rendered by the intermediaries while the investors are consumers (they
subscribe for and trade in securities) of securities issued by issuers. In pursu
it
13
of providing a product to meet the needs of each investor and issuer, the
intermediaries churn out more and more complicated products. They educate
and guide them in their dealings and bring them together. Those who receive
funds in exchange for securities and those who receive securities in exchange
for funds often need the reassurance that it is safe to do so. This reassurance
is provided by the law and by custom, often enforced by the regulator. The
regulator develops fair market practices and regulates the conduct of issuers
of securities and the intermediaries so as to protect the interests of suppliers
of funds. The regulator ensures a high standard of service from intermediaries
and supply of quality securities and non-manipulated demand for them in the
market.
1.3 SECURITIES MARKET AND FINANCIAL SYSTEM
The securities market has two interdependent and inseparable segments, the
new issues (primary market) and the stock (secondary) market.
PRIMARY MARKET
The primary market provides the channel for sale of new securities. Primary
market provides opportunity to issuers of securities; government as well as
corporates, to raise resources to meet their requirements of investment
and/or discharge some obligation.
They may issue the securities at face value, or at a discount/premium and
these securities may take a variety of forms such as equity, debt etc. They
may issue the securities in domestic market and/or international market.
The primary market issuance is done either through public issues or private
placement. A public issue does not limit any entity in investing while in
private placement, the issuance is done to select people. In terms of the
Companies Act, 1956, an issue becomes public if it results in allotment to
more than 50 persons. This means an issue resulting in allotment to less than
50 persons is private placement. There are two major types of issuers who
issue securities. The corporate entities issue mainly debt and equity
instruments (shares, debentures, etc.), while the governments (central and
state governments) issue debt securities (dated securities, treasury bills).
The price signals, which subsume all information about the issuer and his
business including associated risk, generated in the secondary market, help
the primary market in allocation of funds.
SECONDARY MARKET
Secondary market refers to a market where securities are traded after being
initially offered to the public in the primary market and/or listed on the Stock
14
Exchange. Majority of the trading is done in the secondary market. Secondary
market comprises of equity markets and the debt markets.
The secondary market enables participants who hold securities to adjust their
holdings in response to changes in their assessment of risk and return. They
also sell securities for cash to meet their liquidity needs. The secondary
market has further two components, namely the over-the-counter (OTC)
market and the exchange-traded market. OTC is different from the market
place provided by the Over The Counter Exchange of India Limited. OTC
markets are essentially informal markets where trades are negotiated. Most
of the trades in government securities are in the OTC market. All the spot
trades where securities are traded for immediate delivery and payment take
place in the OTC market. The exchanges do not provide facility for spot trades
in a strict sense. Closest to spot market is the cash market where settlement
takes place after some time. Trades taking place over a trading cycle, i.e. a
day under rolling settlement, are settled together after a certain time
(currently 2 working days). Trades executed on the leading exchange
(National Stock Exchange of India Limited (NSE) are cleared and settled by a
clearing corporation which provides novation and settlement guarantee.
Nearly 100% of the trades settled by delivery are settled in demat form. NSE
also provides a formal trading platform for trading of a wide range of debt
securities including government securities.
A variant of secondary market is the forward market, where securities are
traded for future delivery and payment. Pure forward is out side the formal
market. The versions of forward in formal market are futures and options. In
futures market, standardised securities are traded for future delivery and
settlement. These futures can be on a basket of securities like an index or an
individual security. In case of options, securities are traded for conditional
future delivery. There are two types of options a put option permits the
owner to sell a security to the writer of options at a predetermined price while
a call option permits the owner to purchase a security from the writer of the
option at a predetermined price. These options can also be on individual
stocks or basket of stocks like index. Two exchanges, namely NSE and the
Bombay Stock Exchange, (BSE) provide trading of derivatives of securities.
The past few years in many ways have been remarkable for securities market
in India. It has grown exponentially as measured in terms of amount raised
from the market, number of stock exchanges and other intermediaries, the
number of listed stocks, market capitalisation, trading volumes and turnover
on stock exchanges, and investor population. Along with this growth, the
profiles of the investors, issuers and intermediaries have changed
significantly. The market has witnessed fundamental institutional changes
resulting in drastic reduction in transaction costs and significant
improvements in efficiency, transparency and safety.
15
Reforms in the securities market, particularly the establishment and
empowerment of SEBI, market determined allocation of resources, screen
based nation-wide trading, dematerialisation and electronic transfer of
securities, rolling settlement and ban on deferral products, sophisticated risk
management and derivatives trading, have greatly improved the regulatory
framework and efficiency of trading and settlement. Indian market is now
comparable to many developed markets in terms of a number of qualitative
parameters.
Stock Market Indicators:
The most commonly used indicator of stock market development is the size of
the market measured by stock market capitalization (the value of listed
shares on the country s exchanges) to GDP ratio. This ratio has improved
significantly in India in recent years. At the end of year 2001,the market
capitalization ratio stood at 23.1 and this has significantly increased to 103.2
1
% at end of March 2008.
Similarly, the liquidity of the market can be gauged by the turnover ratio
which equals the total value of shares traded on a country s stock exchange
divided by stock market capitalization. Turnover Ratio is a widely used
measure of trading activity and measures trading relative to the size of the
market.
As per the Standard and Poor s Global Stock Market Fact Book 2007, India
ranked 15th in terms of Market Capitalisation and 18th in terms of total traded
value in stock exchanges.
1.4 SECURITIES MARKET & ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT
Three main sets of entities depend on securities market. While the corporates
and governments raise resources from the securities market to meet their
obligations, the households invest their savings in the securities.
Corporate Sector: The 1990s witnessed emergence of the securities market
as a major source of finance for trade and industry. A growing number of
companies are accessing the securities market rather than depending on
loans from FIs/banks. The corporate sector is increasingly depending on
external sources for meeting its funding requirements. There appears to be
growing preference for direct financing (equity and debt) to indirect financing
(bank loan) within the external sources.
The listing agreements have been amended recently requiring the companies
to disclose shareholding pattern on a quarterly basis. As per the shareholding
pattern of companies listed on NSE at end of March 2008, it is observed that
on an average the promoters hold about 56.12% of total shares. Though the
16
non-promoter holding is about 41.91%, Individuals held only 13.07% and the
institutional holding (FIIs, MFs, VCFs-Indian and Foreign) accounted for
19.37%.
Governments: Along with increase in fiscal deficits of the governments, the
dependence on market borrowings to finance fiscal deficits has increased over
the years. During the year 1990-91, the state governments and the central
government financed nearly 14% and 18% respectively of their fiscal deficit
by market borrowing. In percentage terms, dependence of the state
governments on market borrowing did not increase much during the decade
1991-2001. However, their dependence on market borrowing has been
increasing since then to reach 38% during 2003-04. In case of central
government, it increased to 73% by 2007-08, The central government and
the state governments now-a-days finance about three fourth and one fourth
of their fiscal deficits respectively through borrowings from the securities
market.
Households: According to RBI data, household sector accounted for 84.8%
of gross domestic savings in Fixed Income Investment instruments during
2006-07. They invested 55.7% of financial savings in deposits, 24.2 % in
insurance/provident funds, and 6.5% in securities market including
government securities, units of mutual funds and other securities (out of
which investment in Gilts has been 0.2%). Thus, the fixed income bearing
instruments are the most preferred assets of the household sector(Table 1.2).
Table 1.2: Savings of Household Sector in Financial Assets
(In per cent)
Financial Assets 2004-05 2005-06 2006-07
Currency 8.5 8.7 8.6
Fixed income investments 85.4 89.9 84.8
Deposits 37 47.4 55.70
Insurance/Provident/Pension
Funds 28.9 24.2 24.2
Small Savings 19.5 12.3 4.9
Securities Market 6.0 7.2 6.5
Mutual Funds 0.4 3.6 4.8
Government Securities 4.9 2.4 0.2
Other Securities 0.7 1.2 1.5
Total 100.0 100.0 100.0
Source: RBI.
Though there was a major shift in the saving pattern of the household sector
from physical assets to financial assets and within financial assets, from bank
deposits to securities, the trend got reversed in the recent past due to high
17
real interest rates, prolonged subdued conditions in the secondary market,
lack of confidence by the issuers in the success of issue process as well as of
investors in the credibility of the issuers and the systems and poor
performance of mutual funds. The portfolio of household sector remains
heavily weighted in favour of physical assets and fixed income bearing
instruments.
1.5 DERIVATIVES MARKET
Trading in derivatives of securities commenced in June 2000 with the
enactment of enabling legislation in early 2000. Derivatives are formally
defined to include: (a) a security derived from a debt instrument, share, loan
whether secured or unsecured, risk instrument or contract for differences or
any other form of security, and (b) a contract which derives its value from the
prices, or index of prices, or underlying securities. Derivatives trading in Ind
ia
are legal and valid only if such contracts are traded on a recognised stock
exchange, thus precluding OTC derivatives.
Derivatives trading commenced in India in June 2000 after SEBI granted the
approval to this effect in May 2000. SEBI permitted the derivative segment of
two stock exchanges, i.e. NSE and BSE, and their clearing house/corporation
to commence trading and settlement in approved derivative contracts.
To begin with, SEBI approved trading in index futures contracts based on S&P
CNX Nifty Index and BSE-30 (Sensex) Index. This was followed by approval
for trading in options based on these two indices and options on individual
securities. The derivatives trading on the NSE commenced with S&P CNX Nifty
Index futures on June 12, 2000. The trading in S&P CNX Nifty Index options
commenced on June 4, 2001 and trading in options on individual securities
commenced on July 2, 2001. Single stock futures were launched on
November 9, 2001. In June 2003, SEBI-RBI approved the trading on interest
rate derivative instruments.
At NSE, Index futures and options are available on Indices-S&P CNX Nifty,
CNX IT Index, Bank Nifty Index, CNX Nifty Junior, CNX 100, Nifty Midcap 50.
Single stock futures and options are available on more than 200 stocks. India
is one of the largest markets in the world for single stock futures.
The Mini derivative Futures & Options contract on S&P CNX Nifty was
introduced for trading on January 1, 2008 while the long term option
contracts on S&P CNX Nifty were introduced for trading on March 3, 2008.
18
1.6 REGULATORY FRAMEWORK
The five main legislations governing the securities market are: (a) the SEBI
Act, 1992 which established SEBI to protect investors and develop and
regulate securities market; (b) the Companies Act, 1956, which sets out the
code of conduct for the corporate sector in relation to issue, allotment and
transfer of securities, and disclosures to be made in public issues; (c) the
Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act, 1956, which provides for regulation of
transactions in securities through control over stock exchanges; (d) the
Depositories Act, 1996 which provides for electronic maintenance and transfer
of ownership of demat securities; and (e) the Prevention of Money Laundering
Act, 2002 which prevents money laundering and provides for confiscation of
property derived from or involved in money laundering.
1.6.1 Legislations
Capital Issues (Control) Act, 1947: The Act had its origin during the war
in 1943 when the objective was to channel resources to support the war
effort. It was retained with some modifications as a means of controlling the
raising of capital by companies and to ensure that national resources were
channelled into proper lines, i.e. for desirable purposes to serve goals and
priorities of the government, and to protect the interests of investors. Under
the Act, any firm wishing to issue securities had to obtain approval from the
Central Government, which also determined the amount, type and price of
the issue. As a part of the liberalisation process, the Act was repealed in 1992
paving way for market determined allocation of resources.
SEBI Act, 1992: The SEBI Act, 1992 was enacted to empower SEBI with
statutory powers for (a) protecting the interests of investors in securities, (b
)
promoting the development of the securities market, and (c) regulating the
securities market. Its regulatory jurisdiction extends over corporates in the
issuance of capital and transfer of securities, in addition to all intermediarie
s
and persons associated with securities market. It can conduct enquiries,
audits and inspection of all concerned and adjudicate offences under the Act.
It has powers to register and regulate all market intermediaries and also to
penalise them in case of violations of the provisions of the Act, Rules and
Regulations made there under. SEBI has full autonomy and authority to
regulate and develop an orderly securities market.
Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act, 1956: It provides for direct and
indirect control of virtually all aspects of securities trading and the running
of
stock exchanges and aims to prevent undesirable transactions in securities. It
gives Central Government regulatory jurisdiction over (a) stock exchanges
through a process of recognition and continued supervision, (b) contracts in
securities, and (c) listing of securities on stock exchanges. As a condition of
recognition, a stock exchange complies with conditions prescribed by Central
19
Government. Organised trading activity in securities takes place on a
specified recognised stock exchange. The stock exchanges determine their
own listing regulations which have to conform to the minimum listing criteria
set out in the Rules.
Depositories Act, 1996: The Depositories Act, 1996 provides for the
establishment of depositories in securities with the objective of ensuring free
transferability of securities with speed, accuracy and security by (a) making
securities of public limited companies freely transferable subject to certain
exceptions; (b) dematerialising the securities in the depository mode; and (c)
providing for maintenance of ownership records in a book entry form. In order
to streamline the settlement process, the Act envisages transfer of ownership
of securities electronically by book entry without making the securities move
from person to person. The Act has made the securities of all public limited
companies freely transferable, restricting the company s right to use
discretion in effecting the transfer of securities, and the transfer deed and
other procedural requirements under the Companies Act have been dispensed
with.
Companies Act, 1956: It deals with issue, allotment and transfer of
securities and various aspects relating to company management. It provides
for standard of disclosure in public issues of capital, particularly in the fiel
ds
of company management and projects, information about other listed
companies under the same management, and management perception of risk
factors. It also regulates underwriting, the use of premium and discounts on
issues, rights and bonus issues, payment of interest and dividends, supply of
annual report and other information.
Prevention of Money Laundering Act, 2002: The primary objective of the
Act is to prevent money-laundering and to provide for confiscation of property
derived from or involved in money-laundering. The term money-laundering is
defined as whoever acquires, owns, possess or transfers any proceeds of
crime; or knowingly enters into any transaction which is related to proceeds
of crime either directly or indirectly or conceals or aids in the concealment of
the proceeds or gains of crime within India or outside India commits the
offence of money-laundering. Besides providing punishment for the offence of
money-laundering, the Act also provides other measures for prevention of
Money Laundering. The Act also casts an obligation on the intermediaries,
banking companies etc to furnish information, of such prescribed transactions
to the Financial Intelligence Unit- India, to appoint a principal officer, to
maintain certain records etc.
1.6.2 Rules Regulations and Regulators
The Government has framed rules under the SCRA, SEBI Act and the
Depositories Act. SEBI has framed regulations under the SEBI Act and the
Depositories Act for registration and regulation of all market intermediaries,
20
and for prevention of unfair trade practices, insider trading, etc. Under these
Acts, Government and SEBI issue notifications, guidelines, and circulars which
need to be complied with by market participants. The SROs like stock
exchanges have also laid down their rules and regulations.
The absence of conditions of perfect competition in the securities market
makes the role of regulator extremely important. The regulator ensures that
the market participants behave in a desired manner so that securities market
continues to be a major source of finance for corporate and government and
the interest of investors are protected.
The responsibility for regulating the securities market is shared by
Department of Economic Affairs (DEA), Department of Company Affairs
(DCA), Reserve Bank of India (RBI) and SEBI. The activities of these agencies
are coordinated by a High Level Committee on Capital Markets. The orders of
SEBI under the securities laws are appellable before a Securities Appellate
Tribunal (SAT)l.
Most of the powers under the SCRA are exercisable by DEA while a few others
by SEBI. The powers of the DEA under the SCRA are also con-currently
exercised by SEBI. The powers in respect of the contracts for sale and
purchase of securities, gold related securities, money market securities and
securities derived from these securities and ready forward contracts in debt
securities are exercised concurrently by RBI. The SEBI Act and the
Depositories Act are mostly administered by SEBI. The rules under the
securities laws are framed by government and regulations by SEBI. All these
are administered by SEBI. The powers under the Companies Act relating to
issue and transfer of securities and non-payment of dividend are administered
by SEBI in case of listed public companies and public companies proposing to
get their securities listed. The SROs ensure compliance with their own rules as
well as with the rules relevant for them under the securities laws.
1.6.3 Reforms Since 1990s
Corporate Securities Market
With the objectives of improving market efficiency, enhancing transparency,
preventing unfair trade practices and bringing the Indian market up to
international standards, a package of reforms consisting of measures to
liberalise, regulate and develop the securities market was introduced. The
practice of allocation of resources among different competing entities as well
as its terms by a central authority was discontinued. The issuers complying
with the eligibility criteria were allowed freedom to issue the securities at
market determined rates. The secondary market overcame the geographical
barriers by moving to screen based trading. Trades enjoyed counter-party
guarantee. The trading cycle shortened to a day and trades are settled within
2 working days, while all deferral products were banned. Physical security
certificates almost disappeared. A variety of derivative products were
21
permitted. The following paragraphs discuss the principal reform measures
undertaken since 1992.
SEBI Act, 1992: It created a regulator (SEBI), empowered it adequately and
assigned it with the responsibility for (a) protecting the interests of investor
s
in securities, (b) promoting the development of the securities market, and (c)
regulating the securities market. Its regulatory jurisdiction extends over
corporates in the issuance of capital and transfer of securities, in addition to
all intermediaries and persons associated with securities market. All market
intermediaries are registered and regulated by SEBI. They are also required
to appoint a compliance officer who is responsible for monitoring compliance
with securities laws and for redressal of investor grievances. The courts have
upheld the powers of SEBI to impose monetary penalties and to levy fees
from market intermediaries.
Enactment of SEBI Act is the first attempt towards integrated regulation of
the securities market. SEBI was given full authority and jurisdiction over the
securities market under the Act, and was given concurrent/delegated powers
for various provisions under the Companies Act and the SC(R)A. Many
provisions in the Companies Act having a bearing on securities market are
administered by SEBI. The Depositories Act, 1996 is also administered by
SEBI. A high level committee on capital markets has been set up to ensure
co-ordination among the regulatory agencies in capital markets.
DIP Guidelines: Major part of the liberalisation process was the repeal of the
Capital Issues (Control) Act, 1947 in May 1992. With this, Government s
control over issue of capital, pricing of the issues, fixing of premia and rates
of interest on debentures etc. ceased and the market was allowed to allocate
resources to competing uses. In the interest of investors, SEBI issued
Disclosure and Investor Protection (DIP) guidelines. The guidelines contain a
substantial body of requirements for issuers/intermediaries, the broad
intention being to ensure that all concerned observe high standards of
integrity and fair dealing, comply with all the requirements with due skill,
diligence and care, and disclose the truth, whole truth and nothing but truth.
The guidelines aim to secure fuller disclosure of relevant information about
the issuer and the nature of the securities to be issued so that investors can
take informed decisions. For example, issuers are required to disclose any
material risk factors and give justification for pricing in their prospectus. The
guidelines cast a responsibility on the lead managers to issue a due diligence
certificate, stating that they have examined the prospectus, they find it in
order and that it brings out all the facts and does not contain anything wrong
or misleading. Issuers are now required to comply with the guidelines and
then access the market. The companies can access the market only if they
fulfill minimum eligibility norms such as track record of distributable profits
and net worth. In case they do not do so, they can access the market only
through book building with minimum offer of 50% to qualified institutional
buyers. The norms for continued disclosure by listed companies also improved
22
availability of information. The information technology helped in easy
dissemination of information about listed companies and market
intermediaries. Equity research and analysis and credit rating improved the
quality of information about issues.
Screen Based Trading: The trading on stock exchanges in India used to
take place through open outcry without use of information technology for
immediate matching or recording of trades. This was time consuming and
inefficient. This imposed limits on trading volumes and efficiency. In order to
provide efficiency, liquidity and transparency, NSE introduced a nation-wide
on-line fully-automated screen based trading system (SBTS) where a member
can punch into the computer quantities of securities and the prices at which
he likes to transact and the transaction is executed as soon as it finds a
matching sale or buy order from a counter party. SBTS electronically matches
orders on a strict price/time priority and hence cuts down on time, cost and
risk of error, as well as on fraud resulting in improved operational efficiency.
It allows faster incorporation of price sensitive information into prevailing
prices, thus increasing the informational efficiency of markets. It enables
market participants to see the full market on real-time, making the market
transparent. It allows a large number of participants, irrespective of their
geographical locations, to trade with one another simultaneously, improving
the depth and liquidity of the market. It provides full anonymity by accepting
orders, big or small, from members without revealing their identity, thus
providing equal access to everybody. It also provides a perfect audit trail,
which helps to resolve disputes by logging in the trade execution process in
entirety. This diverted liquidity from other exchanges and in the very first
year of its operation, NSE became the leading stock exchange in the country,
impacting the fortunes of other exchanges and forcing them to adopt SBTS
also. As a result, manual trading disappeared from India. Technology was
used to carry the trading platform to the premises of brokers. NSE carried the
trading platform further to the PCs in the residences of investors through the
Internet and to hand-held devices through WAP for convenience of mobile
investors. This made a huge difference in terms of equal access to investors
in a geographically vast country like India.
Trading Cycle: The trades accumulated over a trading cycle and at the end
of the cycle, these were clubbed together, and positions were netted out and
payment of cash and delivery of securities settled the balance. This trading
cycle varied from 14 days for specified securities to 30 days for others and
settlement took another fortnight. Often this cycle was not adhered to. Many
things could happen between entering into a trade and its performance
providing incentives for either of the parties to go back on its promise. This
had on several occasions led to defaults and risks in settlement. In order to
reduce large open positions, the trading cycle was reduced over a period of
time to a week. The exchanges, however, continued to have different weekly
trading cycles, which enabled shifting of positions from one exchange to
another. Rolling settlement on T+5 basis was introduced in respect of
23
specified scrips reducing the trading cycle to one day. It was made mandatory
for all exchanges to follow a uniform weekly trading cycle in respect of scrips
not under rolling settlement. All scrips moved to rolling settlement from
December 2001. T+5 gave way to T+3 from April 2002 and T+2 since April
2003. The market also had a variety of deferral products like modified carry
forward system, which encouraged leveraged trading by enabling
postponement of settlement. The deferral products have been banned. The
market has moved close to spot/cash market.
Derivatives Trading: To assist market participants to manage risks better
through hedging, speculation and arbitrage, SC(R)A was amended in 1995 to
lift the ban on options in securities. However, trading in derivatives did not
take off, as there was no suitable legal and regulatory framework to govern
these trades. Besides, it needed a lot of preparatory work- the underlying
cash markets strengthened with the assistance of the automation of trading
and of the settlement system; the exchanges developed adequate
infrastructure and the information systems required to implement trading
discipline in derivative instruments. The SC(R)A was amended further in
December 1999 to expand the definition of securities to include derivatives so
that the whole regulatory framework governing trading of securities could
apply to trading of derivatives also. A three-decade old ban on forward
trading, which had lost its relevance and was hindering introduction of
derivatives trading, was withdrawn. Derivative trading took off in June 2000
on two exchanges. At NSE, Index futures and options are available on
Indices-S&P CNX Nifty, CNX IT Index, Bank Nifty Index, CNX Nifty Junior,
CNX 100, Nifty Midcap 50. Single stock futures and options are available on
more than 200 stocks. The Mini derivative Futures & Options contract was
introduced for trading on S&P CNX Nifty on January 1, 2008 while the long
term option contracts on S&P CNX Nifty were introduced for trading on March
3, 2008.
Demutualisation: Historically, brokers owned, controlled and managed stock
exchanges. In case of disputes, the self often got precedence over regulations
leading inevitably to conflict of interest. The regulators, therefore, focused o
n
reducing dominance of members in the management of stock exchanges and
advised them to reconstitute their governing councils to provide for at least
50% non-broker representation. This did not materially alter the situation. In
face of extreme volatility in the securities market, Government proposed in
March 2001 to corporatise the stock exchanges by which ownership,
management and trading membership would be segregated from one
another. Government offered a variety of tax incentives to facilitate
corporatisation and demutualization of stock exchanges.
NSE, however, adopted a pure demutualised governance structure where
ownership, management and trading are with three different sets of people.
This completely eliminated any conflict of interest and helped NSE to
aggressively pursue policies and practices within a public interest (market
24
efficiency and investor interest) framework. Currently, there are 19
demutualised stock exchanges.
Depositories Act: The earlier settlement system on Indian stock exchanges
gave rise to settlement risk due to the time that elapsed before trades are
settled. Trades were settled by physical movement of paper. This had two
aspects. First, the settlement of trade in stock exchanges by delivery of
shares by the seller and payment by the purchaser. The stock exchange
aggregated trades over a period of time to carry out net settlement through
the physical delivery of securities. The process of physically moving the
securities from the seller to the ultimate buyer through the seller s broker and
buyer s broker took time with the risk of delay somewhere along the chain.
The second aspect related to transfer of shares in favour of the purchaser by
the company. The system of transfer of ownership was grossly inefficient as
every transfer involved physical movement of paper securities to the issuer
for registration, with the change of ownership being evidenced by an
endorsement on the security certificate. In many cases the process of transfer
took much longer, and a significant proportion of transactions ended up as
bad delivery due to faulty compliance of paper work. Theft, forgery,
mutilation of certificates and other irregularities were rampant, and in
addition the issuer had the right to refuse the transfer of a security. All this
added to costs, and delays in settlement, restricted liquidity and made
investor grievance redressal time consuming and at times intractable.
To obviate these problems, the Depositories Act, 1996 was passed to provide
for the establishment of depositories in securities with the objective of
ensuring free transferability of securities with speed, accuracy and security by
(a) making securities of public limited companies freely transferable subject

to certain exceptions; (b) dematerialising the securities in the depository
mode; and (c) providing for maintenance of ownership records in a book
entry form. In order to streamline both the stages of settlement process, the
Act envisages transfer of ownership of securities electronically by book entry
without making the securities move from person to person. In order to
promote dematerialisation, the regulator mandated trading and settlement in
demat form in an ever-increasing number of securities in a phased manner.
The stamp duty on transfer of demat securities was waived. Two depositories,
namely, NSDL and CDSL, came up to provide instantaneous electronic
transfer of securities. All actively traded scrips are held, traded and settled
in
demat form. Demat settlement accounts for over 99% of turnover settled by
delivery. This has almost eliminated the bad deliveries and associated
problems.
To prevent physical certificates from sneaking into circulation, it is mandatory
for all IPOs to be compulsorily traded in dematerialised form. The admission
to a depository for dematerialisation of securities has been made a
prerequisite for making a public or rights issue or an offer for sale. It has al
so
25
been made compulsory for public listed companies making IPO of any security
for Rs.10 crore or more to do the same only in dematerialised form.
Risk Management: Market integrity is the essence of any financial market.
To pre-empt market failures and protect investors, the regulator/exchanges
have developed a comprehensive risk management system, which is
constantly monitored and upgraded. It encompasses capital adequacy of
members, adequate margin requirements, limits on exposure and turnover,
indemnity insurance, on-line position monitoring and automatic disablement,
etc. They also administer an efficient market surveillance system to curb
excessive volatility, detect and prevent price manipulations. Exchanges have
set up trade/settlement guarantee funds for meeting shortages arising out of
non-fulfillment/partial fulfillment of funds obligations by the members in a
settlement. As a part of the risk management system, the index based
market wide circuit breakers have also been put in place.
The anonymous electronic order book ushered in by the NSE did not permit
members to assess credit risk of the counter-party necessitated some
innovation in this area. To effectively address this issue, NSE introduced the
concept of a novation, and set up the first clearing corporation, viz. National
Securities Clearing Corporation Ltd. (NSCCL), which commenced operations in
April 1996. The NSCCL assures the counterparty risk of each member and
guarantees financial settlement. Counterparty risk is guaranteed through a
fine tuned risk management system and an innovative method of on-line
position monitoring and automatic disablement. NSCCL established a
Settlement Guarantee Fund (SGF). The SGF provides a cushion for any
residual risk and operates like a self-insurance mechanism wherein the
members contribute to the fund. In the event of failure of a trading member
to meet his obligations, the fund is utilized to the extent required for
successful completion of the settlement. This has eliminated counter-party
risk of trading on the Exchange. The market has now full confidence that
settlements will take place in time and will be completed irrespective of
default by isolated trading members. In fact such confidence is driving
volumes on exchanges.
Traditionally, brokerage firms in India have been proprietary or partnership
concerns with unlimited liabilities. This restricted the amount of capital that
such firms can raise. The growing volume of transactions made it imperative
for such firms to be well capitalised and professional. The necessary legal
changes were effected to open up the membership of stock exchanges to
corporates with limited liability, so that brokerage firms may be able to raise
capital and retain earnings. In order to boost the process of corporatisation,
capital gains tax payable on the difference between the cost of the individual s
initial acquisition of membership and the market value of that membership on
the date of transfer to the corporate entity was waived. In response, many
brokerage firms reorganised themselves into corporate entities.
26
Investor Protection: The SEBI Act established SEBI with the primary
objective of protecting the interests of investors in securities and empowers it
to achieve this objective. SEBI specifies the matters to be disclosed and the
standards of disclosure required for the protection of investors in respect of
issues and issues directions to all intermediaries and other persons associated
with the securities market in the interest of investors or of orderly
development of the securities market. The Central Government established a
fund called Investor Education and Protection Fund (IEPF) in October 2001 for
the promotion of awareness amongst investors and protection of the interest
of investors. The Government issued the following guidelines for the purpose
of financial assistance from IEPF:
(a)
Any organisation/entity/person with a viable project proposal on
investors education and protection would be eligible for assistance
from the fund.
(b)
The entity should be registered under the Societies Registration Act
or formed as Trusts or incorporated Companies; should be in
existence for a minimum period of 2 years prior to its date of
application for registration for assistance; should have a minimum of
20 members and a proven record of 2 years; and should have rules,
regulations and or by-laws for its governance and management.
(c)
No profit making entity shall be eligible for financial assistance from
the fund.
(d)
Notwithstanding the above, the Committee on IEPF can give a project
to any organisation.
(e)
The limit for each entity for assistance would be subject to 5% of the
budget of IEPF during that financial year and not exceeding 50% of
the amount to be spent on the proposed programme/activity.
DEA, DCA, SEBI and exchanges have set up investor grievance cells for
redressal of investor grievance. The exchanges maintain investor protection
funds to take care of investor claims, which may arise out of non-settlement
of obligations by a trading member for trades executed on the exchange.
DCA has also set up an investor education and protection fund for the
promotion of investors awareness and protection of interest of investors. All
these agencies and investor associations are organising investor education
and awareness programmes.
Globalisation: Indian securities market is getting increasingly integrated
with the rest of the world. Indian companies have been permitted to raise
resources from abroad through issue of ADRs, GDRs, FCCBs and ECBs.
ADRs/GDRs have two-way fungibility. Indian companies are permitted to list
their securities on foreign stock exchanges by sponsoring ADR/GDR issues
against block shareholding. NRIs and OCBS are allowed to invest in Indian
companies. FIIs have been permitted to invest in all types of securities,
including government securities. The investments by FIIs enjoy full capital
account convertibility. They can invest in a company under portfolio
investment route upto 24% of the paid up capital of the company. This can be
27
increased up to the sectoral cap/statutory ceiling, as applicable, provided this
has the approval of the Indian company s board of directors and also its
general body. Indian Stock Exchanges have been permitted to set up trading
terminals abroad. The trading platform of Indian exchanges is now accessed
through the Internet from anywhere in the world. Mutual Funds have been
permitted to set up off-shore funds to invest in equities of other countries.
They can also invest in ADRs/GDRs of Indian companies.
New Products in the F&O Segment: The year 2008 witnessed the launch
of new products in the F&O Segment. The mini derivative (futures and
options) contracts on S&P CNX Nifty were introduced for trading on January
1, 2008. The mini contracts are a fraction of normal derivative contracts and
extend greater affordability to individual investors, helps the individual
investor to hedge risks of a smaller portfolio, offers low levels of risk in ter
ms
of smaller level of possible downside compared to a big size contract and also
increases overall market liquidity and participation. The Long Term Options
Contracts on NSEs S&P CNX Nifty were launched on March 3, 2008. The long-
term options are similar to short-term options, but the later expiration dates
offer the opportunity for long-term investors to take a view on prolonged
price changes without needing to use a combination of shorter term option
contracts. The premiums for long term options tend to be higher than that of
short term option because the increased expiration period means increased
possibility of larger movement in the price of the underlying.
Short Selling: Pursuant to the recommendations of the Secondary Market
Advisory Committee (SMAC) of SEBI and the decision of the SEBI Board, it
was decided to permit all classes of investors to short sell.
Short selling is defined as selling a stock which the seller does not own at the
time of trade. It increases liquidity in the market, and makes price discovery
more efficient. Besides, it curbs manipulation of stocks as informed investors
are able to go short on stocks they feel are higher than fair value. This facili
ty
was available to non-institutional investors. Vide a circular in February 2008,
SEBI permitted all classes of investors, viz., retail and institutional investor
s
to short sell. It, however, does not permit naked short sales and accordingly,
requires participants to mandatorily honour their obligation of delivering the
securities at the time of settlement. It does not permit institutional investor
to
do day trading i.e., square-off their transactions intra-day. In other words, al
l
transactions are be grossed for institutional investors at the custodians level
and the institutions are required to fulfill their obligations on a gross basis.
The custodians, however, continue to settle their deliveries on a net basis
with the stock exchanges. It has put in a scheme for Securities Lending and
Borrowing to provide the necessary impetus to short sell. The facility of short
sales is made available in respect of securities traded in derivatives segment
of exchanges.
28
Securities Lending and Borrowing: SEBI issued a SLB scheme on
December 20, 2007. The salient features of the scheme are as under:
To begin with, the SLB would be operated through Clearing

Corporation/Clearing House of stock exchanges having nation-wide
terminals who will be registered as Approved Intermediaries (AIs)
under the SLS, 1997.
The SLB would take place on an automated, screen based, order-
matching platform which will be provided by the AIs. This platform
would be independent of the other trading platforms.
To begin with, the securities traded in derivatives segment would be
eligible for lending & borrowing under the scheme.
All categories of investors including retail, institutional etc. will be
permitted to borrow and lend securities. The borrowers and lenders
would access the platform for lending/borrowing set up by the AIs
through the clearing members (CMs) who are authorized by the AIs in
this regard.
The tenure of lending/borrowing would be fixed as standardised
contracts. To start with, contracts with tenure of 7 trading days may
be introduced.
The settlement cycle for SLB transactions would be on T+1 basis. The
settlement of lending and borrowing transactions would be
independent of normal market settlement.
The settlement of the lending and borrowing transactions should be
done on a gross basis at the level of the clients i.e. no netting of
transactions at any level will be permitted.
NSCCL, as an Approved Intermediary (AI) launched the Securities Lending &
Borrowing Scheme from April 21, 2008. Lending & Borrowing is carried on an
automated screen based platform where the order matching is done on basis
of price time priority. The borrowing has a fixed tenure of seven days with the
first leg settlement on T+1 day and reverse leg settlement on T+8 day.
Direct Market Acess: During April 2008, Securities & Exchange Board of
India (SEBI) allowed the direct market access (DMA) facility to the
institutional investors. DMA allows brokers to offer clients direct access to th
e
exchange trading system through the broker s infrastructure without manual
intervention by the broker. DMA facility give clients direct control over orders
,
help in faster execution of orders, reduce the risk of errors from manual order
entry and lend greater transparency and liquidity. DMA also leads to lower
impact cost for large orders, better audit trails and better use of hedging and
arbitrage opportunities through the use of decision support tools/algorithms
for trading.
Volatility Index: With rapid changes in volatility in securities market from
time to time, a need was felt for an openly available and quoted measure of
market volatility in the form of an index to help market participants. On
January 15, 2008, Securities and Exchange Board of India recommended
29
Exchange to construct and disseminate the volatility index. Volatility Index is
a measure, of the amount by which an underlying Index is expected to
fluctuate, in the near term, (calculated as annualised volatility, denoted in
percentage e.g. 20%) based on the order book of the underlying index
options. On April 08, 2008, NSE launched the Volatility Index, India VIX,
based on the Nifty 50 Index Option prices. From the best bid-ask prices of
Nifty 50 Options contracts, a volatility figure (%) is calculated which indicate
s
the expected market volatility over the next 30 calendar days. The India VIX
is a simple but useful tool in determining the overall volatility of the market
Cross Margining: Many trading members undertake transactions on both the
cash and derivative segments of an Exchange. They keep separate deposits
with the exchange for taking positions in two different segments. In order to
improve the efficiency of the use of the margin capital by market participants
and as in initial step towards cross margining across cash and derivatives
markets SEBI allowed Cross Margining benefit in May 2008.
For Cross margining the stock positions of the institutions in capital market
segment after confirmation by the custodian on T+1 day shall be compared
with the stock futures position of the same institution in derivative segment
based on the CP code of the institution at the end of the day. The position
shall be considered for cross margining only if the position in the capital
market segment off set the position in the derivative segment.
SEBI has allowed the following to start with: a. Cross margin is available for
institutional trades. b. Cross margin is available to positions in cash market
having corresponding off-setting positions in the stock futures market. c. For
positions in the cash market which have corresponding offsetting positions in
the stock futures, VaR margin is not be levied on the cash market position to
the extent of the off-setting stock futures market position. d. Extreme Loss
margin and Market to Market margin shall continue to be levied on the entire
cash market position. e. The near-month stock futures positions are not
considered for cross-margin benefit three days prior to expiry (the last
Thursday of every month) and there will be no change in the margins on the F
& O positions.
Government Securities Market
The government securities market has witnessed significant transformation in
the 1990s. With giving up of the responsibility of allocating resources from
securities market, government stopped expropriating seigniorage and started
borrowing at near-market rates. Government securities are now sold at
market related coupon rates through a system of auctions instead of earlier
practice of issue of securities at very low rates just to reduce the cost of
borrowing of the government. Major reforms initiated in the primary market
for government securities include auction system (uniform price and multiple
price method) for primary issuance of T-bills and central government dated
30
securities, a system of primary dealers and non-competitive bids to widen
investor base and promote retail participation, issuance of securities across
maturities to develop a yield curve from short to long end and provide
benchmarks for rest of the debt market, innovative instruments like, zero
coupon bonds, floating rate bonds, bonds with embedded derivatives,
availability of full range ( 91-day, 182 day and 364-day) of T-bills, etc. The
reforms in the secondary market include Delivery versus Payment system for
settling scripless SGL transactions to reduce settlement risks, SGL Account II
with RBI to enable financial intermediaries to open custody (Constituent SGL)
accounts and facilitate retail transactions in scripless mode, enforcement of a
trade-for-trade regime, settlement period of T+1 for all transactions
undertaken directly between SGL participants and for transactions routed
through NSE brokers, routing transactions through brokers of NSE, OTCEI and
BSE, repos in all government securities with settlement through SGL, liquidity
support to PDs to enable them to support primary market and undertake
market making, special fund facility for security settlement, etc. Other
measures include abolition of TDS on government securities and stamp duty
on transfer of demat debt securities.
Market Infrastructure: As part of the ongoing efforts to build debt market
infrastructure, two new systems, the Negotiated Dealing System (NDS) and
the Clearing Corporation of India Limited (CCIL) commenced operations on
February 15, 2002. NDS, interalia, facilitates screen based negotiated dealing
for secondary market transactions in government securities and money
market instruments, online reporting of transactions in the instruments
available on the NDS and dissemination of trade information to the market.
Government Securities (including T-bills), call money, notice/term money,
repos in eligible securities, Commercial Papers and Certificate of Deposits are
available for negotiated dealing through NDS among the members. The CCIL
facilitates settlement of transactions in government securities (both outright
and repo) on Delivery versus Payment (DVP-II) basis which provides for
settlement of securities on gross basis and settlement of funds on net basis
simultaneously. It acts as a central counterparty for clearing and settlement
of government securities transactions done on NDS.
Further, there was adoption of modified Delivery-versus-Payment mode of
settlement (DvP III in March 2004). The settlement system for transaction in
government securities was standardized to T+1 cycle on May 11, 2005. To
provide banks and other institutions with a more advanced and more efficient
trading platform, an anonymous order matching trading platform (NDS-OM)
was introduced in August 2005. Short sale was permitted in G-secs in 2006 to
provide an opportunity to market participants to manage their interest rate
risk more effectively and to improve liquidity in the market. When issued
(WI) trading in Central Government Securities was introduced in 2006.
Indian G-Sec market has become increasingly broad-based and characterized
31
by an efficient auction process, an active secondary market, electronic trading
and settlement technology that ensures safe settlement with Straight through
Processing (STP).
Research in Securities Market
In order to deepen the understanding and knowledge about Indian capital
market, and to assist in policy-making, SEBI has been promoting high quality
research in capital market. It has set up an in-house research department,
which brings out working papers on a regular basis. In collaboration with
NCAER, SEBI brought out a Survey of Indian Investors , which estimates
investor population in India and their investment preferences. SEBI has also
tied up with reputed national and international academic and research
institutions for conducting research studies/projects on various issues related
to the capital market. In order to improve market efficiency further and to set
international benchmarks in the securities industry, NSE supports a scheme
called the NSE Research Initiative with a view to develop an information base
and a better insight into the working of securities market in India. The
objective of this initiative is to foster research, which can support and
facilitate (a) stock exchanges to better design market micro-structure, (b)
participants to frame their strategies in the market place, (c) regulators to
frame regulations, (d) policy makers to formulate policies, and (e) expand the
horizon of knowledge. The Initiative has received tremendous response.
Testing and Certification
The intermediaries, of all shapes and sizes, who package and sell securities,
compete with one another for the chance to handle investors/issuers money.
The quality of their services determines the shape and health of the securities
market. In developed markets and in some of the developing markets, this is
ensured through a system of testing and certification of persons joining
market intermediaries in the securities market. This sort of arrangement
ensures that a person dealing with financial products has a minimum standard
of knowledge about them, market and regulations so as to assist the
customers in their dealings. This allows market participants and
intermediaries to build their own tailored staff development strategies and
improves career prospectus of certified professionals, while maintaining and
enhancing the confidence of the investors in the market.
A testing and certification mechanism that has become extremely popular and
is sought after by the candidates as well as employers is unique on-line
testing and certification programme called National Stock Exchange s
Certification in Financial Markets (NCFM). It is an on-line fully automated
nation-wide testing and certification system where the entire process from
generation of question paper, testing, assessing, scores reporting and
certifying is fully automated -there is absolutely no scope for human
intervention. It allows tremendous flexibility in terms of testing centres, date
s
and timing and provides easy accessibility and convenience to candidates as
32
he can be tested at any time and from any location. It tests practical
knowledge and skills, that are required to operate in financial markets, in a
very secure and unbiased manner, and certifies personnel who have a proper
understanding of the market and business and skills to service different
constituents of the market. It offers 14 securities market related modules.
The above reforms have come in stages. As some deficiency is noted or some
malpractice surfaces in the working of the market, the authorities initiate
further reforms and corrective steps. As such, the process of reform in the
securities market is far from complete. At the same time the reforms
undertaken so far have aimed to improve operational and informational
efficiency in the market by enabling the participants to carry out transactions
in a cost effective manner and providing them with full, relevant and accurate
information in time. A number of checks and balances have been built up to
protect investors, enhance their confidence and avoid systemic failure of the
market. Stability of the system as a whole has been protected by allowing for
contestability of the market and imposing entry criteria for issuers and
intermediaries. Financial integrity of the market is ensured by prudential
controls on intermediaries. .
1.7 ROLE OF NSE IN INDIAN SECURITIES MARKET
National Stock Exchange of India Limited (NSE) was given recognition as a
stock exchange in April 1993. NSE was set up with the objectives of (a)
establishing a nationwide trading facility for all types of securities, (b)
ensuring equal access to all investors all over the country through an
appropriate communication network, (c) providing a fair, efficient and
transparent securities market using electronic trading system, (d) enabling
shorter settlement cycles and book entry settlements, and (e) meeting the
international benchmarks and standards. Within a short span of life, above
objectives have been realized and the Exchange has played a leading role as
a change agent in transforming the Indian Capital Markets to its present form.
NSE has set up infrastructure that serves as a role model for the securities
industry in terms of trading systems, clearing and settlement practices and
procedures. The standards set by NSE in terms of market practices, products,
technology and service standards have become industry benchmarks and are
being replicated by other market participants. It provides screen-based
automated trading system with a high degree of transparency and equal
access to investors irrespective of geographical location. The high level of
information dissemination through on-line system has helped in integrating
retail investors on a nation-wide basis. The Exchange currently operates three
market segments, namely Capital Market Segment, Wholesale Debt Market
Segment and Futures an Options segment. NSE has been playing the role of a
catalytic agent in reforming the market in terms of microstructure and market
practices. Right from its inception, the exchange has adopted the purest form
of demutualised set up whereby the ownership, management and trading
33
rights are in the hands of three different sets of people. This has completely
eliminated any conflict of interest and helped NSE to aggressively pursue
policies and practices within a public interest framework. It has helped in
shifting the trading platform from the trading hall in the premises of the
exchange to the computer terminals at the premises of the trading members
located country-wide and subsequently to the personal computers in the
homes of investors and even to hand held portable devices for the mobile
investors. Settlement risks have been eliminated with NSE s innovative
endeavors in the area of clearing and settlement viz., reduction of settlement
cycle, professionalisation of the trading members, fine-tuned risk
management system, dematerialisation and electronic transfer of securities
and establishment of clearing corporation. As a consequence, the market
today uses the state-of-art information technology to provide an efficient and
transparent trading, clearing and settlement mechanism.
NSE provides a trading platform for of all types of securities-equity and debt,
corporate and government and derivatives. On its recognition as a stock
exchange under the Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act, 1956 in April 1993,
it commenced operations in the Wholesale Debt Market (WDM) segment in
June 1994, in the Capital Market (CM) segment in November 1994, and in
Futures & Options (F&O) segment in June 2000. The Exchange started
providing trading in retail debt of Government Securities in January 2003.
NSE accounts for nearly 70 % of the market share in capital market and 98 %
market share in the derivatives market.
The Wholesale Debt Market segment provides the trading platform for
trading of a wide range of debt securities. Its product, which is now
disseminated jointly with FIMMDA, the FIMMDA NSE MIBID/MIBOR is used as
a benchmark rate for majority of deals struck for Interest Rate Swaps,
Forwards Rate Agreements, Floating Rate Debentures and Term Deposits in
the country. Its Zero Coupon Yield Curve as well as NSE-VaR for Fixed
Income Securities have also become very popular for valuation of sovereign
securities across all maturities irrespective of its liquidity and facilitated t
he
pricing of corporate papers and GOI Bond Index.
NSEs Capital Market segment offers a fully automated screen based trading
system, known as the National Exchange for Automated Trading (NEAT)
system, which operates on a strict price/time priority. It enables members
from across the country to trade simultaneously with enormous ease and
efficiency. Its Futures & Options segment provides trading of a wide range of
derivatives like Index Futures, Index Options, Stock Options and Stock
Futures.
Technology and Application Systems in NSEIL
NSE is the first exchange in the world to use satellite communication
technology for trading. It uses satellite communication technology to energise
34
participation from 3056 VSATs from nearly 241 cities spread all over the
country.
Its trading system, called National Exchange for Automated Trading (NEAT),
is a state of-the-art client server based application. At the server end all
trading information is stored in an in-memory database to achieve minimum
response time and maximum system availability for users. It has uptime
record of 99.7%. The system also ensures data integrity with past record of a
single error in 10 million bits. For all trades entered into NEAT system, there
is uniform response time of less than 1.5 seconds. NSE has been continuously
undertaking capacity enhancement measures so as to effectively meet the
requirements of increased users and associated trading loads. NSE has also
put in place NIBIS (NSE s Internet Based Information System) for on-line
real-time dissemination of trading information over the Internet.
As part of its business continuity plan, NSE has established a disaster back-up
site at Chennai along with its entire infrastructure, including the satellite ea
rth
station and the high-speed optical fibre link with its main site at Mumbai. This
site at Chennai is
a replica of the production environment at Mumbai. The transaction data is
backed up on near real time basis from the main site to the disaster back-up
site through the 2 mbps high-speed link to keep both the sites all the time
synchronised with each other.
NSEIL is a technology driven exchange and since its inception it has been
harnessing technology to provide the best possible and efficient service to all
market participants and stake holders. The various application systems that it
uses for trading as well clearing and settlement and other operations are the
backbone of the Exchange. The application systems used for the day-to-day
functioning of the Exchange can be divided into (a) Front end applications and
(b) Back office applications.
In the front end, there are 6 applications:
(a)
NEAT CM system takes care of trading of securities in the
Capital Market segment that includes equities, debentures/notes
as well as retail Gilts. The NEAT CM application has a split
architecture wherein the split is on the securities and users. The
application runs on three Stratus systems with Open Strata Link
(OSL). The application has been benchmarked to support 15000
users and handle more than 15 million trades. This application
also provides data feed for processing to some other systems like
Index, OPMS through TCP/IP. This is a direct interface with the
Trading members of the CM segment of the Exchange for
entering the orders into the main system. There is a two way
communication between the NSE main system and the front end
terminal of the Trading Member.
35
(b)
NEAT WDM system takes care of trading of securities in the
Wholesale Debt Market (WDM) segment that includes Gilts,
Corporate Bonds, CPs, T-Bills, etc. This is a direct interface with
the Trading members of the WDM segment of the Exchange for
entering the orders/trades into the main system. There is a two
way communication between the NSE main system and the front
end terminal of the Trading Member.
(c)
NEAT F&O system takes care of trading of securities in the
Futures and Options (F&O) segment that includes Futures on
Index as well as individual stock and Options on Index as well as
individual stocks. This is a direct interface with the Trading
members of the F&O segment of the Exchange for entering the
orders into the main system. There is a two way communication
between the NSE main system and the front end terminal of the
Trading Member.
(d)
NEAT IPO system is an interface to help the initial public
offering of companies which are issuing the stocks to raise capital
from the market. This is a direct interface with the Trading
members of the CM segment who are registered for undertaking
order entry on behalf of their clients for IPOs. NSE uses the
NEAT IPO system that allows bidding in several issues
concurrently. There is a two way communication between the
NSE main system and the front end terminal of the Trading
Member.
(e)
NEAT MF system is an interface with the Trading members of
the CM segment for order collection of designated Mutual Funds
units.
(f)
Surveillance system offers the users a facility to
comprehensively monitor the trading activity and analyse the
trade data online and offline.
In the back office, the following important application systems are operative:
(i)
NCSS (Nationwide Clearing and Settlement System) is the
clearing and settlement system of the NSCCL for the trades
executed in the CM segment of the Exchange. The system has 3
important interfaces
a)
OLTL (Online Trade loading) that takes each and every
trade executed on real time basis and allocates the same to
the clearing members,
b)
Depository Interface that connects the depositories for
settlement of securities and Clearing Bank Interface that
connects the 13 clearing banks for settlement of funds. It
also interfaces with the clearing members for all required
reports.
c) Through collateral management system it keeps an account
of all available collaterals on behalf of all trading/clearing
members and integrates the same with the position
36
monitoring of the trading/clearing members. The system
also generates base capital adequacy reports.
(ii)
FOCASS is the clearing and settlement system of the NSCCL
for the trades executed in the F&O segment of the Exchange. It
interfaces with the clearing members for all required reports.
Through collateral management system it keeps an account of
all available collaterals on behalf of all trading/clearing
members and integrates the same with the position monitoring
of the trading/clearing members. The system also generates
base capital adequacy reports.
(iii)
OPMS the online position monitoring system that keeps track
of all trades executed for a trading member vis-à-vis its capital
adequacy.
(iv)
PRISM is the parallel risk management system for F&O trades
using Standard Portfolio Analysis (SPAN). It is a system for
comprehensive monitoring and load balancing of an array of
parallel processors that provides complete fault tolerance. It
provides real time information on initial margin value, mark to
market profit or loss, collateral amounts, contract-wise latest
prices, contract-wise open interest and limits.
(v)
Data warehousing that is the central repository of all data in
CM as well as F&O segment of the Exchange,
(vi)
Listing system that captures the data from the companies
which are listed in the Exchange for corporate governance and
integrates the same to the trading system for necessary
broadcasts for data dissemination process and
(vii)
Membership system that keeps track of all required details of
the Trading Members of the Exchange.
MODEL QUESTIONS
Ques:1 Which one of the following is not among the major legislations
governing the securities market?
(a) Capital Issues Act, 1947 (b) SEBI Act, 1992
(c) Companies Act 1956
(d) Depositories Act 1996
Correct Answer: (a)
Ques:2 Which of the following is not the main objective of SEBI?
(a) Protecting the interest of investors in securities market
(b) Protecting & development of forex market in India
(c) Promoting the development of securities market
(d) Regulating the securities market
37
Correct answer: (b)
Ques:3 All market intermediaries are registered and regulated by ______.
(a) DCA (b) SEBI
(c) MOF (d) RBI
Correct answer: (b)
Ques:4 The _________ issued by SEBI aim to secure fuller disclosure of the
relevant information about the issuer and the nature of issue so that
the investors can take informed decision.
(a) Disclosure & Investor Protection Guidelines
(b) SCRA
(c) SEBI (Stock Brokers and Sub brokers) Rule
(d) SEBI (Prohibition of Fraudulent and Unfair Trade Practices
Relating to Securities Markets) regulations
Correct answer: (a)
Ques:5 NSE s screen based trading system (SBTS) matches orders in the
________ priority basis.
(a) time/price
(b) price/time
(c) price/quantity
(d) quantity/price
Correct answer: (b)
Ques:6 The current trading cycle practiced by the exchanges is
(a) T+5
(b) T+3
(c) T+2
(d) T+1
Correct answer: (c)
Ques:7 Following problems have been eliminated by introduction of
Depositories act?
(a) Stamp duty on transfer of shares in dematerialized form
(b) reduction in the share transfer time to the buyer
(c) higher liquidity
(d) All of the above
Correct answer: (d)
Ques:8
For the promotion of awareness among the investors and the
protection of the interest of the investors the central government has
established
(a) investor education and protection fund
(b) investors grievance redressal cell
(c) settlement guarantee fund
(d) all of the above
Correct Answer: (a)
38
CHAPTER 2: PRIMARY MARKET
2.1 INTRODUCTION
Primary market provides opportunity to issuers of securities, Government as
well as corporates, to raise resources to meet their requirements of
investment and/or discharge some obligation. The issuers create and issue
fresh securities in exchange of funds through public issues and/or as private
placement. They may issue the securities at face value, or at a
discount/premium and these securities may take a variety of forms such as
equity, debt or some hybrid instrument. They may issue the securities in
domestic market and/or international market through ADR/GDR/ECB route.
2.2 MARKET DESIGN
The market design for primary market is provided in the provision of the
Companies Act, 1956, which deals with issues, listing and allotment of
securities. In addition, DIP guidelines of SEBI prescribe a series of disclosure
s
norms to be complied by issuer, promoter, management, project, risk factors
and eligibility norms for accessing the market. In this section, the market
design as provided in securities laws has been discussed.
2.2.1 DIP Guidelines, 2000
The issues of capital to public by Indian companies are governed by the
Disclosure and Investor Protection (DIP) Guidelines of SEBI, 2000. The
guidelines provide norms relating to eligibility for companies issuing
securities, pricing of issues, listing requirements, disclosure norms, lock-in
period for promoters contribution, contents of offer documents, pre-and post-
issue obligations, etc. The guidelines apply to all public issues, offers for sa
le
and rights issues by listed and unlisted companies.
Eligibility Norms
Any company issuing securities through the offer document has to satisfy the
following conditions:
A company making a public issue of securities has to file a draft

prospectus with SEBI, through an eligible merchant banker, at least 30
days prior to the filing of prospectus with the Registrar of Companies
(RoCs). The filing of offer document is mandatory for a listed company
issuing security through a rights issue where the aggregate value of
securities, including premium, if any, exceeds Rs.50 lakh. A company
39
cannot make a public issue unless it has made an application for listing
of those securities with stock exchange(s). The company must also
have entered into an agreement with the depository for
dematerialisation of its securities and also the company should have
given an option to subscribers/shareholders/investors to receive the
security certificates or securities in dematerialised form with the
depository. A company cannot make an issue if the company has been
prohibited from accessing the capital market under any order or
discretion passed by SEBI.
An unlisted company can make an Initial Public Offering (IPO) of

equity shares or any other security which may be converted into or
exchanged with equity shares at a later date, only if it meets all the
following conditions:
(a) The company has net tangible assets of at least Rs.3 crore in
each of the preceding 3 full years (12 months each),of which
not more than 50 % is held in monetary assets, provided that if
more than 50 % of the net tangible assets are held in monetary
assets, the company has made firm commitments to deploy
such excess monetary assets in its business/project.
(b) The company has a track record of distributable profits in terms
of section 205 of the Companies Act, 1956, for at least three
(3) out of immediately preceding five (5) years. Provided
further, that extraordinary items shall not be considered for
calculating distributable profits in terms of section 205 of
Companies Act,1956/
(c) The company has a net worth of atleast Rs.1 crore in each of
the preceding 3 full years (of 12 months each).
(d) In case the company has changed its name within the last one
year, at least 50% of the revenue for the preceding 1 full year
is earned by the company from the activity suggested by the
new name.
(e) The aggregate of the proposed issue and all previous issues
made in the same financial year in terms of the size(i.e offer
through offer document+firm allotment_promoters contribution
through the offer document),does not exceed five (5) times its
pre-issue net worth as per the audited balance sheet of the last
financial year.
An unlisted company not complying with any of the conditions
specified above may make an initial public offering (IPO) of equity
shares or any other security which may be converted into or
exchanged with equity shares at a later date, only if it meets the two
conditions given below.
(a) The issue is made through the book-building process, with
atleast 50 % of the net offer to public being allotted to the
Qualified Institutional Buyers (QIBs) failing which the full
40
subscription monies shall be refunded OR the project has at
least 15 % participation by Financial Institutions/Scheduled
Commercial Banks of which at least 10% comes from the
appraiser(s). In addition to this, at least 10% of the issue size
shall be allotted to QIBs, failing which the full subscription
monies shall be refunded.
(b) The minimum post-issue face value capital of the company shall
be Rs.10 crores OR there shall be a compulsory market making
for at least 2 years from the date of listing of the shares,
subject to the conditions that a) Market makers undertake to
offer buy and sell quotes for a minimum depth of 300 shares b)
market makers undertake to ensure that the bid-ask spread
(difference between quotations for sale and purchase) for their
quotes shall not at any time exceed10 % c) the inventory of the
market makers on each of such stock exchanges as on the date
of allotment of securities shall be at least 5% of the proposed
issue of the company.
A listed company shall be eligible to make a public issue of equity
shares or any other security which may be converted into or
exchanged with equity shares at a later date; provided that the
aggregate of the proposed issue and all previous issues made in the
same financial year in terms of size (i.e offer through offer
document+firm allotment+promoters contribution through the offer
document) issue size does not exceed 5 times its pre issue net worth
as per the audited balance sheet of the last financial year. Further, if
there is a change in the name of the issuer company within the last 1
year (reckoned from the date of filing of the offer document), the
revenue accounted for by the activity suggested by the new name is
not less than 50 % of its total revenue in the preceding 1 full year
period.
Infrastructure companies are exempt from the requirement of
eligibility norms if their project has been appraised by a public financial
institution or infrastructure development finance corporation or
infrastructure leasing and financing services and not less than 5% of
the project cost is financed by any of the institutions, jointly or
severally, by way of loan and/or subscription to equity or a
combination of both. Banks and rights issues of listed companies are
also exempt from the eligibility norms.
For public and rights issues of debt instruments irrespective of their
maturities or conversion period, it is mandatory to obtain credit rating
from a registered credit rating agency and to disclose the same in the
offer document. If the credit rating is obtained from more than one
credit rating agency, all the credit ratings, including the unaccepted
ones, need to be disclosed. .
Thus the quality of the issue is demonstrated by track record/appraisal by
approved financial institutions/credit rating/subscription by QIBs.
41
Pricing of Issues
The companies eligible to make public issue can freely price their equity
shares or any security convertible into equity at a later date in cases of
public/rights issues by listed companies and public issue by unlisted
companies. In addition, eligible infrastructure companies can freely price their
equity shares subject to compliance of disclosure norms as specified by SEBI
from time to time. The public and private sector banks can also freely price
their shares subject to approval by RBI. A company may issue shares to
applicants in the firm allotment category at higher price than the price at
which securities are offered to public. A listed company making a composite
issue of capital may issue securities at differential prices in its public and
rights issue. Further, an eligible company is free to make public/rights issue
in any denomination determined by it in accordance with the Companies Act,
1956 and SEBI norms.
Contribution of Promoters and lock-in
The promoters contribution in case of public issues by unlisted companies
and promoters shareholding in case of offers for sale should not be less than
20% of the post issue capital. In case of public issues by listed companies,
promoters should contribute to the extent of 20% of the proposed issue or
should ensure post-issue holding to the extent of 20% of the post-issue
capital. For composite issues, the promoters contribution should either be
20% of the proposed public issue or 20% of the post-issue capital. The
promoters should bring in the full amount of the promoters contribution
including premium at least one day prior to the issue opening date (which
shall be kept in an escrow account with a Scheduled Commercial Bank and
the said contribution/amount should be released by the company along with
the public issue proceeds). The requirement of promoters contribution is not
applicable in case of (i) public issue of securities which has been listed on a
stock exchange for at least 3 years and has a track record of dividend
payment for at least 3 immediate preceding years, (ii) companies where no
identifiable promoter or promoter group exists, and (iii) rights issues.
For any issue of capital to the public, the minimum promoter s contribution is
locked in for a period of 3 years. If the promoters contribution exceeds the
required minimum contribution, such excess is locked in for a period of one
year. Securities allotted in firm allotment basis are also locked in for a perio
d
of one year. The locked-in securities held by promoters may be pledged only
with banks or FIs as collateral security for loans granted by such banks or FIs,
provided the pledge of shares is one of the terms of sanction of loan.
Issue of Sweat Equity
The SEBI (Issue of Sweat Equity) Regulations, 2002 have been framed and
the main provisions laid down therein for issue of sweat equity are (a) under
the new guidelines, the Sweat Equity shares can be issued by a company to
its employees and directors as well as promoters, (b) the pricing of the sweat
equity shares should be as per the formula prescribed for that of preferential
42
allotment, (c) the sweat equity shares should be locked in for a period of 3
years from the date of Allotment. In case of a subsequent public issue being
made, lock in shall be as per the SEBI (DIP) Guidelines, 2000.
Issue Obligations
The lead merchant banker plays an important role in the pre-issue obligations
of the company. He exercises due diligence and satisfies himself about all
aspects of offering, veracity and adequacy of disclosures in the offer
document. Each company issuing securities has to enter into a Memorandum
of Understanding with the lead merchant banker, which specifies their mutual
rights, liabilities and obligations relating to the issue. In case of under-
subscription of an issue, the lead merchant banker responsible for
underwriting arrangements has to invoke underwriting obligations and ensure
that the underwriters pay the amount of devolvement. It should ensure the
minimum number of collection centres. It should also ensure that the issuer
company has entered into an agreement with all the depositories for
dematerialization of securities. All the other formalities related to post-issue
obligations like, allotment, refund and despatch of certificates are also taken
care by the lead merchant banker.
Book Building
Book Building means a process undertaken by which a demand for the
securities proposed to be issued by a body corporate is elicited and built up
and the price for such securities is assessed for the determination of the
quantum of such securities to be issued by means of a notice, circular,
advertisement, document or information memoranda or offer document.
Book building is a process of offering securities in which bids at various price
s
from investors through syndicate members are collected. Based on bids,
demand for the security is assessed and its price discovered. In case of
normal public issue, the price is known in advance to investor and the
demand is known at the close of the issue. In case of public issue through
book building, demand can be known at the end of everyday but price is
known at the close of issue.
In case of an issuer company makes an issue of 100% of the net offer to
public through 100% book building process-
i) Not less than 35 % of the net offer to the public shall be available
for allocation to retail individual investors.
ii) Not less than 15 % of the net offer to the public shall be available
for allocation to non institutional investors i.e. investors other than
retail individual investors and Qualified Institutional Buyers.
iii) Not more than 50% of the net offer to the public shall be available
for allocation to Qualified Institutional Buyers.
Provided that, 50 % of net to public should be mandatorily allotted to the
Qualified Institutional Buyers, in case the issuer company is making a public
43
issue. Further, in respect of issues made under Rule 19(2)(b) of Securities
Contract (Regulation) Rules 1957, there should be 60% mandatory allocation
to Qualified Institutional Buyers, and the percentage allocation to retail
individual investors and non institutional investors should be 30 % and 10%
respectively.
In case an issuer company makes an issue of 75% of the net offer to public
through book building process and 25% at the price determined through book
building-
i) In the book built portion, not less than 25% of the net offer to the
public should be available for allocation to non qualified
institutional buyers and not more than 50% of the net offer to the
public should be available for allocation to Qualified Institutional
Buyers.
ii) The balance 25% of the net offer to the public offered at a price
determined through book building should be available only to retail
individual investors who have either not participated or have not
received any allocation, in the book built portion.
Provided that 50% of net offer to public should be mandatorily allotted to
Qualified Institutional Buyers in case the issuer company is making a public
issue.
Out of the portion available for allocation to qualified institutional buyers in
case when the company makes an issue through 100% or 75% book building,
five percent should be allocated proportionately to mutual funds. Allotment to
retail individual or non-institutional investors is made proportionately. In cas
e
of under subscription in any category, the unsubscribed portions are allocated
to the bidders as per the proposed manner of allocation among respective
categories of investors, in the event of under subscription. The book built
portion, 100% or 75%, as the case may be, of the net offer to public, are
compulsorily underwritten by the syndicate members or book runners.
Other requirements for book building include: bids remain open for at least 3
days, only electronic bidding is permitted; bids are submitted through
syndicate members; bids can be revised; bidding demand is displayed at the
end of every day; allotments are made not later than 15 days from the
closure of the issue failing which interest at the rate of 15% shall be paid to
investors. The 100% book building has made the primary issuance process
comparatively faster and cost effective.
The DIP guidelines for book building provides that the company should be
allowed to disclose the floor price, just prior to the bid opening date, instead
of in the Red herring prospectus, which may be done by any means like a
public advertisement in newspaper etc. Flexibility should be provided to the
issuer company by permitting them to indicate a 20% price band. Issuer may
be given the flexibility to revise the price band during the bidding period and
44
the issuers should be allowed to have a closed book building i.e. the book will
not be made public.
On-line Initial Public Offers (IPO)
A company proposing to issue capital to public through on-line system of the
stock exchange has to comply with Section 55 to 68A of the Companies Act,
1956 and SEBI (DIP) Guidelines, 2000. The company is required to enter into
an agreement with the stock exchange(s) which have the requisite system for
on-line offer of securities. The agreement should cover rights, duties,
responsibilities and obligations of the company and the stock exchanges inter-
se, with provision for a dispute resolution mechanism between the company
and the stock exchange. The issuer company appoints a Registrar to the
Issue having electronic connectivity with the stock exchanges. The issuer
company can apply for listing of its securities at any exchange through which
it offers its securities to public through on-line system, apart from the
requirement of listing on the regional stock exchange. The stock exchange
appoints brokers for the purpose of accepting applications and placing orders
with the company. The lead manager would co-ordinate all the activities
amongst various intermediaries connected in the system.
In addition to the above, the DIP guidelines also provide details of the
contents of the offer document and advertisement, other requirements for
issues of securities, like those under Rule 19(2) (b) of SC(R) Rules, 1957. The
guidelines also lay down detailed norms for issue of debt instruments, issue of
capital by designated financial institutions and preferential/bonus issues.
Book Building through On-line IPO System
Book building is basically a process used in IPO for efficient price discovery,
wherein during the period for which the IPO is open, bids are collected from
investors at various prices, which are above or equal to the floor price. The
offer price is determined after the bid closing date. In it s strive to
continuously improve Indian securities market; NSE offers its infrastructure
for conducting online IPOs through book building. It helps to discover price as
well as demand for a security to be issued through a process of bidding by
investors. The advantages of this new system are: a) the investor parts with
money only after allotment, b) it eliminates refunds except in case of direct
applications and c) it reduces the time taken for issue process. Though the
guidelines for book building were issued in 1995, it is being used for IPOs
from 1999.
2.2.2 Merchant Banking
The merchant banking activity in India is governed by SEBI (Merchant
Bankers) Regulations, 1992. All merchant bankers have to be registered with
SEBI. The person applying for certificate of registration as merchant banker
has to be a body corporate other than a non-banking financial company, has
necessary infrastructure, and has at least two persons in his employment with
45
experience to conduct the business of the merchant banker. The applicant has
to fulfill the capital adequacy requirements, with prescribed minimum net
worth. The regulations specify the code of conduct to be followed by merchant
bankers, responsibilities of lead managers, payments of fees and disclosures
to SEBI. They are required to appoint a Compliance Officer, who monitors
compliance requirements of the securities laws and is responsible for
redressal of investor grievance.
2.2.3 Credit Rating
Credit rating is governed by the SEBI (Credit Rating Agencies) Regulations,
1999. The Regulations cover rating of securities only and not rating of fixed
deposits, foreign exchange, country ratings, real estates etc. CRAs can be
promoted by public financial institutions, scheduled commercial banks, foreign
banks operating in India with the approval of RBI, foreign credit rating
agencies recognised in the country of their incorporation, having at least five
years experience in rating, or any company or a body corporate having
continuous net worth of minimum Rs.100 crore for the previous five years.
CRAs would be required to have a minimum net worth of Rs. 5 crore. No
Chairman, Director or Employee of the promoters shall be Chairman, Director
or Employee of CRA or its rating committee. A CRA can not rate (i) a security
issued by its promoter, (ii) securities issued by any borrower, subsidiary, an
associate promoter of CRA, if there are common Chairman, Directors and
Employees between the CRA or its rating committee and these entities (iii) a
security issued by its associate or subsidiary if the CRA or its rating
committee has a Chairman, Director or Employee who is also a Chairman,
Director or Employee of any such entity.
For all public and rights issues of debt securities, an obligation has been cast
on the issuer to disclose in the offer documents all the ratings it has got
during the previous 3 years for any of its listed securities. CRAs would have to
carry out periodic reviews of the ratings given during the lifetime of the rated
instrument.
2.2.4 Demat Issues
As per SEBI mandate, all new IPOs are compulsorily traded in dematerialised
form. The admission to a depository for dematerialisation of securities is a
prerequisite for making a public or rights issue or an offer for sale. The
investors would however, have the option of either subscribing to securities in
physical form or dematerialised form. The Companies Act, 1956 requires that
every public listed company making IPO of any security for Rs.10 crore or
more shall issue the same only in dematerialised form.
46
2.2.5 Private Placement
The private placement involves issue of securities, debt or equity, to a limited
number of subscribers, such as banks, FIs, MFs and high net worth
individuals. It is arranged through a merchant/investment banker, who acts
as an agent of the issuer and brings together the issuer and the investor(s).
On the presumption that these are allotted to a few sophisticated and
experienced investors and the public at large does not have much stake in it,
the securities offered in a private placement are exempt from the public
disclosure regulations and registration requirements of the regulatory body.
What distinguishes private placement from public issues is while the latter
invite application from as many subscribers, the subscriptions in the private
placement are normally restricted to a limited number. In terms of the
Companies Act, 1956, offer of securities to more than 50 persons is deemed
to be public issue.
2.2.6 Virtual Debt Portal
The private placement of debt as well as transactions in debt securities are
generally effected through opaque negotiations. The result is inefficient price
discovery, fragmented market, low liquidity, poor disclosures and ineffective
audit trails. B2B portal, namely debtonnetindia provides a secure,
anonymous, neutral and flexible transactional platform for issue and trading
of fixed income instruments.
The debtonnetindia is a B2B web-enabled market place for primary issuance
of debt securities and provides investors and brokers similar levels of
efficiency and transparency on the primary market segment as exchange
system provides for secondary market in debt.
2.2.7 ADRs/GDRs
Indian companies are permitted to raise foreign currency resources through
two main sources:(a) issue of Foreign Currency Convertible Bonds (FCCBs)
more commonly known as Euro Issues and (b) issue of ordinary equity
shares through depository receipts, namely, Global Depository Receipts
(GDRs)/American Depository Receipts (ADRs) to foreign investors i.e.
institutional investors or individuals (including NRIs) residing abroad. A
depository receipt (DR) is any negotiable instrument in the form of a
certificate denominated in US dollars. The certificates are issued by an
overseas depository bank against certain underlying stock/shares. The shares
are deposited by the issuing company with the depository bank. The
depository bank in turn tenders DRs to the investors. A DR represents a
particular bunch of shares on which the receipt holder has the right to receive
dividend, other payments and benefits which company announces from time
to time for the share holders. However, it is non-voting equity holding. DRs
47
facilitate cross border trading and settlement, minimize transactions costs and
broaden the potential base, especially among institutional investors.
An American Depository Receipt (ADR) is a negotiable U.S. certificate
representing ownership of shares in a non-U.S. corporation. ADRs are quoted
and traded in U.S. dollars in the U.S. securities market. Also, the dividends
are paid to investor in U.S. dollars. ADRs were specifically designed to
facilitate the purchase, holding and sale of non-U.S. securities by U.S.
investor, and to provide a corporate finance vehicle for non-U.S. companies.
Any non-U.S. company seeking to raise capital in the U.S. or increase their
base of U.S. investor can issue ADRs. Advantages of ADRs are:
ADRs allow you to diversify your portfolio with foreign securities easily.
ADRs trade, clear and settle in accordance with U.S. market
regulations and permit prompt dividend payments and corporate
action notification.
If an ADR is exchange-listed, investor also benefits from readily
available price and trading information.
Global Depository Receipts (GDRs) may be defined as a global finance vehicle
that allows an issuer to raise capital simultaneously in two or more markets
through a global offering. GDRs may be used in either the public or private
markets inside or outside the US. GDR, a negotiable certificate usually
represents a company s publicly traded equity or debt.
ADRs and GDRs are identical from a legal, operational, technical and
administrative standpoint. The word global denotes receipts issued are on a
global basis that is to investors not restricted to US.
The FCCBs/GDRs/ADRs issued by Indian companies to non-residents have
free convertibility outside India. In India, GDRs/ADRs are reckoned as part of
foreign direct investment and hence need to conform to the existing FDI
policy. Resource mobilisation by Indian corporates through Euro issues by
way of FCCBs, GDRs and ADRs has been significant in the 1990s. As per
current guidelines, the proceeds of ADRs/GDRs/FCCBs cannot be used on
investment in real estate and stock markets. This prohibition not only puts
restriction on Indian bidders in the first stage offer to the Government, but
also to fund second stage of mandatory public offer under SEBI Takeover
Code. In order to promote the disinvestment programme, it has been decided
that ADR/GDR/FCCB proceeds could be used in the first stage acquisition of
shares in the disinvestment process and also in the mandatory second stage
offer to the public, in view of their strategic importance. It has been clarifie
d
by SEBI that the scheme of two-way fungibility of ADR/GDR issues will be
only operated for foreign investors other than OCBs.
As regards transfer of shares (on conversion of GDRs/ADRs into shares) in
favour of residents, the non-resident holder of GDRs/ADRs should approach
the Overseas Depository bank with a request to the Domestic Custodian bank
48
to get the corresponding underlying shares released in favour of the nonresident
investor for being sold by the non-resident or for being transferred in
the books of the issuing company in the name of the non-resident. In order to
improve liquidity in ADR/GDR market and eliminate arbitrage, RBI issued
guidelines in February 2002 to permit two-way fungibility for ADRs/GDRs
which means that investors (foreign institutional or domestic) in any company
that has issued ADRs/GDRs can freely convert the ADRs/GDRs into underlying
domestic shares. They can also reconvert the domestic shares into
ADRs/GDRs, depending on the direction of price change in the stock.
2.3 COLLECTIVE INVESTMENT VEHICLES
Three distinct categories of collective investment vehicles (CIVs) namely,
Mutual Funds, venture capital funds and collective investment schemes,
mobilize resources from market for investment purposes.
2.3.1 Mutual Funds
Put your money in trust, not trust in money entices the small investors, who
generally lack expertise to invest on their own in the securities market and
prefer some kind of collective investment vehicles, which can pool their
marginal resources, invest in securities and distribute the returns there from
among them on co-operative principles. The investors benefit in terms of
reduced risk, and higher returns arising from professional expertise of fund
managers employed by such investment vehicle. This was the original appeal
of mutual funds (MFs) which offer a path to stock market far simpler and
safer than the traditional call-a-broker-and-buy-securities route. This caught
the fancy of small investors leading to proliferation of MFs. In developed
financial markets, MFs have overtaken bank deposits and total assets of
insurance funds. In the USA, the number of MFs far exceeds the number of
listed securities.
MFs, thus, operate as CIV that pools resources by issuing units to investors
and collectively invests those resources in a diversified portfolio comprising o
f
stocks, bonds or money market instruments in accordance with objectives
disclosed in the offer document issued for the purpose of pooling resources.
The profits or losses are shared by investors in proportion to their
investments. The process gathered momentum in view of regulatory
protection, fiscal concession and change in preference of investors. The first
ever MF in India, the Unit Trust of India (UTI) was set up in 1964. This was
followed by entry of MFs promoted by public sector banks and insurance
companies in 1987. The industry was opened up to private sector in 1993
providing Indian investors a broader choice. Starting with an asset base of Rs.
25 crore in 1964, the industry has grown exponentially to Rs. 5,05,152 crore
with a total number of 40 MFs at the end of March 2008.
49
Regulation of Mutual Funds
The MF industry in India is governed by SEBI (Mutual Fund) Regulations,
1996, which lay the norms for the MF and its Asset Management Company
(AMC). SEBI requires all MFs to be registered with it. All MFs in India are
constituted as trusts. A MF is allowed to issue open-ended and closed-ended
schemes under a common legal structure. The SEBI (Mutual Fund)
Regulations, 1996 lay down detailed procedure for launching of schemes,
disclosures in the offer document, advertisement material, listing and
repurchase of closed-ended schemes, offer period, transfer of units,
investments, etc. SEBI Regulations also specify the qualifications for being the
sponsor of a fund; the contents of Trust Deed; rights and obligations of
Trustees; appointment, eligibility criteria, and restrictions on business
activities and obligations of the AMC and its Directors. The AMCs, members of
Board of trustees or directors of Trustee Company and other associated
company have to follow certain code of conduct. They should ensure that the
information disseminated to the unit holders is adequate, accurate, and
explicit. They should also avoid conflicts of interest in managing the affairs o
f
the schemes and keep the interest of all unit holders paramount in all
matters.
In addition to SEBI, RBI also supervises the operations of bank-owned MFs.
While SEBI regulates all market related and investor related activities of the
bank/FI-owned funds, any issues concerning the ownership of the AMCs by
banks fall under the regulatory ambit of the RBI.
Further, MFs, AMCs and corporate trustees are companies registered under
the Companies Act, 1956 and therefore answerable to regulatory authorities
empowered by the Companies Act. The Registrar of Companies ensures that
the AMC, or the Trustee Company complies with the provisions of the
Companies Act.
Many closed-ended schemes of the MFs are listed on one or more stock
exchanges. Such schemes are subject to regulation by the concerned stock
exchange(s) through a listing agreement between the fund and the stock
exchange.
MFs, being Public Trusts are governed by the Indian Trust Act, 1882. The
Board of Trustees or the Trustee Company is accountable to the office of the
Public Trustee, which in turn reports to the Charity Commissioner. These
regulators enforce provisions of the Indian Trusts Act.
Investment Restrictions
Investment policies of each MF scheme are dictated by the investment
objective of the scheme as stated in the offer document. However, the AMC
and its fund managers have to comply with the restrictions imposed by SEBI.
Investments should be made only in transferable securities in the money
50
market or in the capital market or in privately placed debentures or
securitised debts. Money collected under money market schemes should be
invested only in money market instruments. Investment by a MF should be
subject to following restrictions:
1. A mutual fund scheme should not invest more than 15% of its NAV in debt
instruments issued by a single issuer which are rated not below investment
grade by a credit rating agency authorised to carry out such activity under the
Act. Such investment limit may be extended to 20% of the NAV of the
scheme with the prior approval of the Board of Trustees and the Board of
asset management company provided that such limit should not be applicable
for investments in Government securities and money market instruments.
Further, that investment within such limit can be made in mortgaged backed
securitised debt which are rated not below investment grade by a credit
rating agency registered with SEBI.
A mutual fund scheme should not invest more than 10% of its NAV in unrated
debt instruments issued by a single issuer and the total investment in such
instruments should not exceed 25% of the NAV of the scheme. All such
investments should be made with the prior approval of the Board of Trustees
and the Board of asset management company.
2. No mutual fund under all its schemes should own more than ten per cent of
any company s paid up capital carrying voting rights.
3. Transfers of investments from one scheme to another scheme in the same
mutual fund should be allowed only if,
(a) such transfers are done at the prevailing market price for quoted
instruments on spot basis. Spot basis has the same meaning as
specified by stock exchange for spot transactions.
(b) the securities so transferred should be in conformity with the
investment objective of the scheme to which such transfer has been
made.
4. A scheme may invest in another scheme under the same asset
management company or any other mutual fund without charging any fees,
provided that aggregate interscheme investment made by all schemes under
the same management or in schemes under the management of any other
asset management company should not exceed 5% of the net asset value of
the mutual fund. However, this is not applicable to any fund of funds scheme.
5. Every mutual fund should buy and sell securities on the basis of deliveries
and shall in all cases of purchases, take delivery of relative securities and in
all cases of sale, deliver the securities, provided that a mutual fund may
engage in short selling of securities in accordance with the framework relating
to short selling and securities lending and borrowing specified by SEBI,
Provided further that a mutual fund may enter into derivatives transactions in
51
a recognized stock exchange, subject to the framework specified by the SEBI.
Further, the sale of government security already contracted for purchase
would be permitted in accordance with the guidelines issued by the Reserve
Bank of India in this regard.
6. Every mutual fund should get the securities purchased or transferred in the
name of the mutual fund on account of the concerned scheme, wherever
investments are intended to be of long-term nature.
7. Pending deployment of funds of a scheme in securities in terms of
investment objectives of the scheme, a mutual fund can invest the funds of
the scheme in short term deposits of scheduled commercial banks, subject to
the guidelines as may be specified by the board.
8. No mutual fund [scheme] should make any investment in,
(a) any unlisted security of an associate or group company of the sponsor; or
(b) any security issued by way of private placement by an associate or group
company of the sponsor; or
(c) the listed securities of group companies of the sponsor which is in excess
of 25 per cent of the net assets.
9. No scheme of a mutual fund should make any investment in any fund of
funds scheme.
10. No mutual fund scheme should invest more than 10 per cent of its NAV in
the equity shares or equity related instruments of any company. Provided
that, the limit of 10 per cent should not be applicable for investments in case
of index fund or sector or industry specific scheme.
11. A mutual fund scheme should not invest more than 5% of its NAV in the
unlisted equity shares or equity related instruments in case of open ended
scheme and 10% of its NAV in case of close ended scheme.
12. A fund of funds scheme will be subject to the following investment
restrictions:
(a) A fund of funds scheme should not invest in any other fund of funds
scheme;
(b) A fund of funds scheme should not invest its assets other than in schemes
of mutual funds, except to the extent of funds required for meeting the
liquidity requirements for the purpose of repurchases or redemptions, as
disclosed in the offer document of fund of funds scheme.
The mutual funds having an aggregate of securities which are worth Rs.10
crores or more as on the latest balance sheet, should settle their transactions
only through the dematerialized securities. The MF should not borrow except
to meet temporary liquidity needs of mutual funds for the purpose of
repurchase, redemption of units or payment of interest or dividend to the
52
unitholders. Further, the MF should not borrow more than 20 percent of the
net sales of the scheme and the duration of such a borrowing should not
exceed a period of six months. It should not advance any loans for any
purpose. It may lend and borrow securities in accordance with the framework
relating to short selling and securities lending and borrowing specified by
SEBI.The funds of a scheme shall not in any manner be used in carry forward
transaction, provided that a mutual fund may enter into short selling
transactions on a recognized stock exchange subject to the framework
specified by SEBI. A mutual fund may enter into short selling transactions on
a recognized stock exchange, subject to the framework relating to short
selling and securities lending and borrowing specified by the Board.
Investments in Foreign Securities by Mutual Funds
As per SEBI circular in April 2008, the aggregate ceiling for overseas
investments by mutual funds has been enhanced to US $ 7 billion and a
maximum of US$ 300 million to each mutual fund irrespective of size of
assets.
Disclosure of Performance
A MF is required to compute net asset value (NAV) of each scheme by
dividing net assets of the scheme by the number units outstanding on the
valuation date. The performance of a scheme is reflected in its NAV which is
disclosed on daily basis in case of open-ended schemes and on weekly basis
in case of close-ended schemes. The NAVs of MFs are required to be
published in newspapers. The NAVs are also available on the web sites of
MFs. All MFs are also required to put their NAVs and sale/repurchase prices on
the web site of Association of Mutual Funds in India AMFI by 8 p.m. everyday,
so that the investors and the newspapers can access NAVs of all MFs at one
place.
The price at which units may be sold or repurchased by a MF is made
available to investors. The repurchase price can not be lower than 93% of the
NAV and sale price can not be higher than 107% of NAV. The repurchase
price of a closed ended scheme shall, however, not be less than 95% of NAV.
The difference between repurchase and sale price shall not exceed 7% of the
sale price.
The MFs are required to publish their performance in the form of half-yearly
results which also include their returns/yields over a period of time i.e. last
six months, 1 year, 3 years, 5 years and since inception of schemes. The MFs
are required to send annual report or abridged annual report to the unit
holders at the end of the year.
All MFs are required to disclose the performance of the benchmark indices in
case of equity oriented schemes, debt oriented scheme and balanced fund
scheme while disclosing the yields of the schemes in the format of half-yearly
53
results. The MFs may select any of the indices available, e.g. BSE (Sensitive)
index, S&P CNX Nifty, BSE 100, BSE 200 or S&P CNX 500, depending on the
investment objective and portfolio of the scheme for equity schemes.In case
of debt / balanced schemes, the benchmarks have been developed by
research and rating agencies recommended by AMFI.
SEBI issued guidelines requiring mutual funds (MFs) to make certain
additional disclosures while making half-yearly portfolio disclosures. In
respect of equity oriented schemes, the MFs shall disclose portfolio turnover
ratio as a footnote and the name of the industry against the name of each
security in accordance with industry classification as recommended by AMFI.
In respect of debt oriented schemes, they shall disclose the average maturity
period as a footnote.
Code of Conduct
The MF regulations regulate conduct MFs and AMCs, their employees and
intermediaries in the following manner:
(i)
Trustees and AMCs must maintain high standards of integrity and
fairness in all their dealings and in the conduct of their business.
They must keep the interest of all unit holders paramount in all
matters.
(ii)
The sponsor of the MF, the trustees or the AMC or any of their
employees shall not render, directly or indirectly any investment
advice about any security in the publicly accessible media, whether
real-time or non real-time, unless a disclosure of his interest
including long or short position in the said security has been made,
while rendering such advice.
(iii)
Each director of the AMC would file details of his transactions of
dealing in securities with the trustees on a quarterly basis.
(iv)
The AMC shall file with the trustees the details of transactions in
securities by its key personnel. Also, the trustees shall furnish to
SEBI a certificate stating that they have satisfied themselves that
there have been no instances of self dealing or front running by
any of the trustees, directors and key personnel of the asset
management company.
(v)
The employees of AMCs and trust companies shall follow the
procedure and code of conduct laid down by SEBI for investments /
trading in securities. Specified categories of employees are
required to obtain prior approval before making personal
transactions.
The intermediaries are required to take necessary steps to protect the
interests of the clients, provide full and latest information of schemes to
investors, highlight risk factors of each scheme, avoid misinterpretation and
exaggeration, avoid any commission driven malpractices, not rebate
commission back to investors, and obtain AMFI certification.
54
Structure of Mutual Funds
A typical MF in India has the following constituents:
Fund Sponsor: A sponsor is any person who, acting alone or in combination
with another body corporate, establishes a MF. It obtains the certificate of
registration as a MF from SEBI. The sponsor of a fund is similar to the
promoter of a company. In accordance with SEBI Regulations, the sponsor
forms a trust and appoints a Board of Trustees, and also generally appoints
an AMC as fund manager. In addition, the sponsor also appoints a custodian
to hold the fund assets. The sponsor contributes at least 40% of the net
worth of the AMC. It must have a sound financial track record over five years
prior to registration and general reputation of fairness and integrity in all it
s
business transactions.
Mutual Fund: A MF is constituted in the form of a trust under the Indian
Trusts Act, 1882. The instrument of trust is executed by the sponsor in favour
of trustees and is registered under the Indian Registration Act, 1908. The
fund invites investors to contribute their money in the common pool, by
subscribing to units issued by various schemes established by the trust. The
assets of the trust are held by the trustee for the benefit of unit holders, who
are the beneficiaries of the trust. Under the Indian Trusts Act, the trust or th
e
fund has no independent legal capacity, it is the trustee(s) who have the legal
capacity.
Trustees: The MF or trust can either be managed by the Board of Trustees,
which is a body of individuals, or by a Trust Company, which is a corporate
body. Most of the funds in India are managed by a Board of Trustees. The
trustees are appointed with the approval of SEBI. Two thirds of trustees are
independent persons and are not associated with sponsors. The trustees
being the primary guardians of the unit holders funds and assets, a trustee
has to be a person of high repute and integrity. The Trustees, however, do
not directly manage the portfolio of securities. The portfolio is managed by
the AMC as per the defined objectives, in accordance with trust deed and
SEBI (MF) Regulations.
Asset Management Company: The AMC, which is appointed by the sponsor
or the Trustees and approved by SEBI, acts like the investment manager of
the Trust. It functions under the supervision of its Board of Directors, and als
o
under the direction of the Trustees and SEBI. AMC, in the name of the Trust,
floats and manages the different investment schemes as per the SEBI
Regulations and as per the Investment Management Agreement signed with
the Trustees.
Apart from these, the MF has some other fund constituents, such as
custodians and depositories, banks, transfer agents and distributors. The
custodian is appointed for a safe keeping of securities and participating in the
55
clearing system through approved depository. The bankers handle the
financial dealings of the fund. Transfer agents are responsible for issue and
redemption of units of MF. AMCs appoint distributors or brokers who sell units
on behalf of the Fund, and also serve as investment advisers. Besides
brokers, independent individuals are also appointed as agents for the
purpose of selling fund schemes to investors. The regulations require arm s
length relationship between the fund sponsors, trustees, custodians and AMC.
The agents and distributors are required to pass AMFI certification
programme.
Types of Mutual Funds
The 1990s witnessed emergence of a variety of funds. There are funds which
invest in growth stocks, funds which specialise in stocks of a particular sector
,
funds which assure returns to the investors, funds which invest in debt
instruments and fund which invest aggressively. Thus, we have income funds,
balanced funds, liquid funds, gilt funds, index funds, exchange traded funds,
sectoral funds and there are open-ended funds, closed-ended funds and
assured return funds-there is a fund for every requirement.
MF Types According to Maturity Period: MFs can be broadly classified as
open-ended fund or closed-ended funds.
An open-ended fund gives the investors an option to redeem and buy units
at any time from the fund. These schemes do not have a fixed maturity
period. They can conveniently buy and sell units at NAV related prices which
are declared on a daily basis. The key feature of open-end schemes is
liquidity.
A close-ended fund or scheme on the other hand has a stipulated maturity
period e.g. 5-7 years. In closed-ended funds, the investors have to wait till
given maturity date to redeem their units to the fund. However, to provide
liquidity, it is mandatory for closed-ended funds to get themselves listed on a
stock exchange within six months from the closure of the subscription. The
units of a close ended scheme may be converted to open ended scheme, if
the offer document of such scheme discloses the option and the period of
such conversion or the unit-holders are provided with an option to redeem
their units in full.
To safeguard the interests of investors, a mutual fund is required to submit to
SEBI a draft of the communication to unit holders which includes the latest
portfolio of the scheme in the format prescribed for half yearly disclosures,
the details of financial performance of the scheme since inception in the
manner prescribed under the Standard Offer Document along with
comparison with appropriate benchmarks and the addendum to the offer
document detailing the modifications (if any) made to the scheme. Further,
the unit-holders should be given a time period of at least 30 days for the
56
purpose of exercising the exit option. The unit-holders who opt to redeem
their holdings in part or full, should be allowed to exit at the NAV applicable
for the day on which such request is received, during the prescribed period.
Funds can also be classified as being tax-exempt or non-tax-exempt,
depending on whether they invest in securities that give tax-exempt returns
or not. Some schemes assure a specific return to the unit holders irrespective
of performance of the scheme. These are called assured return schemes. A
scheme cannot promise returns unless such returns are fully guaranteed by
the sponsor or AMC.
MF Types According to Investment Objective: MFs/schemes can also be
classified on the basis of the nature of their portfolios and investment
objective, i.e. whether they invest in equities or fixed income securities or
some combination of both. Such schemes may be open-ended or close-ended
schemes as described earlier. Such schemes may be classified mainly as
follows:
Growth/Equity Oriented Schemes provide capital appreciation over the
medium to long-term. These schemes normally invest a major part of their
corpus in equities and are good for investors having a long-term outlook
seeking appreciation over a period of time.
Income/Debt Oriented Schemes provide regular and steady income to
investors. Such schemes generally invest in fixed income securities such as
bonds, corporate debentures, government securities and money market
instruments. Such funds are less risky compared to equity schemes.
Balanced Funds provide both growth and regular income as such schemes
invest both in equities and fixed income securities in the proportion indicated
in their offer documents. These are appropriate for investors looking for
moderate growth.
Money Market or Liquid Funds provide easy liquidity, preservation of
capital and moderate income. These schemes invest exclusively in safer
short-term instruments such as treasury bills, certificates of deposit,
commercial paper and inter-bank call money, government securities, etc.
These funds are appropriate for corporate and individual investors as a means
to park their surplus funds for short periods.
Gilt Funds invest exclusively in government securities which have no default
risk.
Index Funds try to mirror a market index, like Nifty or Sensex, as closely as
possible by investing in all the stocks that comprise that index in proportions
equal to the weightage of those stocks in the index. Thus, index funds are
57
designed to replicate the performance of a well-established stock market
index or a particular segment of the stock market.
Unlike a typical MF, these are passively managed funds wherein the fund
manager invests the funds in the stocks comprising the index in similar ratios.
They may at times hold their stocks for the full year even if there are changes
in the composition of index. This helps in reducing transaction fees. While
reducing the risk associated with the market, index funds offer many benefits
to the investors. Firstly, the investor is indirectly able to invest in a portfo
lio
of a blue chip stock that constitutes the index. Next, they offer diversificatio
n
across a multiplicity of sectors as at least 20-25 sectors find their way into t
he
index. Added to these is the relatively low cost of management. Index funds
are considered appropriate for conservative long term investors looking at
moderate risk, moderate return arising out of a well-diversified portfolio.
A few index funds were launched in the recent past to reduce the bias of fund
managers in stock selection and to provide a return at par with the index.
They are UTI Master Index Fund, UTI Index Equity Fund, Franklin India Index
Fund and IDBI Principal Index Fund, etc. Templeton launched the Franklin
India Index Tax Fund in February 2001 which is the first tax saving index
fund based on S&P CNX Nifty.
There were a total of 23 index funds based on S&P Nifty at the end of March
2007.
Exchange Traded Funds (ETFs) may be described as baskets of securities
that are traded, like individual stocks, on an exchange. They are the
funds/schemes which invest in the securities of only those sectors or
industries as specified in the offer documents. For e.g. Pharmaceuticals,
Software, Fast Moving Consumer Goods (FMCG), Petroleum stocks, etc. The
returns in these funds are dependent on the performance of the respective
sectors/industries.
ETFs are innovative products, which first came into existence in the
USA in 1993. About 60% of trading volumes on the American Stock
Exchange are from ETFs. Among the popular ones are SPDRs (Spiders)
based on the S&P 500 Index, QQQs (Cubes) based on the Nasdaq-100
Index, iSHARES based on MSCI Indices and TRAHK (Tracks) based on
the Hang Seng Index. More than 60% of trading volume on Ame rican
Stock Exchange (AMEX) is in ETFs.
ETFs have a number of advantages over traditional open-ended index
funds:
a) they can be bought and sold on the exchange at prices that
are usually close to the actual intra-day NAV of the scheme.
b) They are an innovation to traditional MFs as they provide
investors a fund that closely tracks the performance of an index
with the ability to buy/sell on an intra-day basis.
58
c)
Unlike listed closed-ended funds, which trade at substantial
premia or more frequently at discounts to NAV, ETFs are
structured in a manner which allows to create new units and
redeem outstanding units directly with the fund, thereby
ensuring that ETFs trade close to their actual NAVs.
Like any other index fund, ETFs are usually passively managed funds
wherein subscription/redemption of units works on the concept of
exchange with underlying securities. Units can also be bought and sold
directly on the exchange. The funds have all the benefits of indexing
such as diversification, low cost and transparency. As the funds are
listed on the exchange, costs of distribution are much lower and the
reach is wider. These savings in cost are passed on to the investors in
the form of lower costs. Further, exchange traded mechanism helps
reduce to the minimal of the collection, disbursement and other
processing charges. The structure of ETFs is such that it protects long-
term investors from inflows and outflows of short-term investor. This is
because the fund does not bear extra transaction cost when
buying/selling due to frequent subscriptions and redemptions. Tracking
error, which is divergence between the price behaviour of a position or
portfolio and the price behaviour of a benchmark, of an ETF is likely to
be low as compared to a normal index fund. ETFs are highly flexible
and can be used as a tool for gaining instant exposure to the equity
markets, equitising cash or for arbitraging between the cash and
futures market.
ETFs launched on NSE:
(a) The first ETF in India, Nifty BeES (Nifty Benchmark Exchange
Traded Scheme) based on S&P CNX Nifty, was launched in
January 2002 by BENCHMARK Mutual Fund, an Asset
Management Company. It is bought and sold like any other
stock on NSE and has all characteristics of an index fund. One
can buy or sell Nifty BeES in exactly the same way as one
buys/sells any share. Nifty BeES are in dematerialised form and
is settled like any other share in rolling settlement.
(b) Junior BeES-The units of Nifty Junior Benchmark Exchange
Traded Scheme (Junior BeES) were admitted to dealings on the
Exchange w.e.f March 6, 2003. These units too are traded in
rolling settlement in dematerialised form only.
(c) Liquid BeES (Liquid Benchmark Exchange Traded Scheme) is
the first money market ETF (Exchange Traded Fund) in the
world. The investment objective of the Scheme is to provide
money market returns. Liquid BeES invests in a basket of call
money, short-term government securities and money market
instruments of short and medium maturities. It is listed and
traded on the NSE s Capital Market Segment and is settled on a
T+2 Rolling basis. The Fund endeavors to provide daily returns
to the investors, which accrue in the form of daily dividend,
that are compulsorily reinvested in the Fund daily. The units
59
arising out of dividend reinvestment are be allotted and
credited to the Demat account of the investors at the end of
every month. Such units of Liquid BeES are allotted and
credited daily, up to 3 decimal places.
NSDL and CDSL have waived all the charges (including
Custodian charges) relating to transactions in Liquid BeES in
the NSDL and CDSL depository systems respectively.
(d) S&P CNX NIFTY UTI NOTIONAL DEPOSITORY RECIEPTS
SCHEME (SUNDER) is a passively managed open-ended
exchange traded fund, with the objective to provide investment
returns that, before expenses, closely correspond to the
performance and yield of the basket of securities underlying the
S&P CNX NIFTY Index. SUNDER has all benefits of index funds
such as diversification, low cost and a transparent portfolio and
the flexibility of trading like a share. Thus it provides the best
features of both open-ended fund and a listed stock. SUNDER
commenced trading on NSE on July 16, 2003.
(e) Bank BeEs is an Open Ended Index Fund Listed on the NSE in
form an ETF and tracks the CNX Bank Index and was listed on
June 4, 2004.
(f)
PSU Bank Benchmark Exchange Traded Scheme
(PSUBNKBEES) was listed on NSE on November 1, 2007.
SPIcE , the first Exchange Traded Fund (ETF) on SENSEX, was
launched by Prudential ICICI Mutual Fund. An ETF is a hybrid product
having features of both an open-ended mutual fund and an exchange
listed security. The price of one SPIcE unit will be equal to
approximately 1/100th of SENSEX value. It was listed on January 13,
2003.
Gold Exchange Traded Fund
A gold exchange traded fund unit is like a mutual fund unit whose underlying
asset is Gold and is held in demat form. It is typically an Exchange traded
Mutual Fund unit which is listed and traded on a stock exchange.
Every gold ETF unit is representative of a definite quantum of pure gold and
the traded price of the gold unit moves in tandem with the price of the actual
gold metal.
The underlying asset in case of a gold ETF is gold which is held by a mutual
fund house issuing such units either in a physical form or through gold receipt
giving right of ownership. Authorised participants can redeem the gold ETF
units and can demand equivalent value of actual pure gold at any time. By
means of a Gold ETF (GETF), investors can participate in the gold bullion
market without taking any physical delivery of gold and buying and selling
through trading of a security on a stock exchange. The GETF aims at
providing returns which closely correspond to the returns provided by Gold.
60
The Gold ETFs listed on NSE are Gold BeEs (listed on March 19, 2007),
Goldshare ( listed on April 17, 2007), Kotak Gold ETF (Listed on August 8,
2007), Reliance Gold ETF(November 26, 2007) and Quantum Gold Fund Exchange
Traded Fund (listed on February 28, 2008).
Unit Trust of India
Experimentation with MFs in India, as mentioned earlier, began in 1964 with
the Unit Trust of India (UTI) set up by a special statute called the UTI Act,
1963. The objective of the statutory corporation was to encourage saving and
investment. UTI was not required to be registered with SEBI. Till recently, all
of UTI s schemes and its overall functioning were completely governed by the
UTI Act. However, schemes launched after July 1994 fell under SEBI purview
(and among the major schemes of UTI, only US-64 remained outside the
purview of SEBI till December 2002). In October 2002, Cabinet issued an
ordinance for restructuring UTI, including repealing the UTI Act. UTI was
finally bifurcated into UTI-I and UTI-II in December 2002. UTI-I comprised of
US-64 and other assured return schemes, while UTI-II got all the NAV-based
schemes. Further in February 2003, UTI-II was converted into UTI Mutual
Fund.
Management of MFs
SEBI amended (mutual fund) regulations, 1996 to provide that the meeting of
the trustees should be held at least once in two calendar months and at least
six such meetings should be held in every year. It provides that as a result of
non-recording of transactions, the NAV of a scheme should not be affected by
more than 1%. If the NAV of a scheme differs by more than 1% due to non-
recording of transactions, the investors or the scheme as the case may be,
shall be paid the difference in the amount. If the investors are allotted units
at a price higher than NAV or given a price lower than NAV at the time of sale
of their units, they shall be paid the difference in amount by the scheme. If
investors are charged lower NAV at the time of purchase of their units or are
given a higher NAV at the time of sale of their units, the AMC shall pay the
difference in amount to scheme.
SEBI amended its Mutual Funds Regulations, 1996 also to provide nomination
facility for the unit holders. The asset management company would now
provide an option to the unit holder to nominate a person in whom the units
held by him shall vest in the event of his death. Where the units are held
jointly, the joint unit holders may together nominate a person in whom all the
rights in the units shall vest in the event of death of all the joint unit holde
rs.
Risk Management System for Mutual Funds
MFs should ensure a minimum standard of due diligence or risk management
system in various areas of their operations like fund management, operations,
61
customer service, marketing and distribution, disaster recovery and business
contingency, etc. For the purpose, AMFI has prepared an operating manual
which covers risk management practices in various areas of operations under
three categories:
(i) Existing industry practices
(ii) Practices to be followed on mandatory basis and
(iii) Best Practices to be followed by all MFs.
AMFI has advised MFs to follow the following step-by-step approach to
implement the risk management system:
Identification of observance of each recommendation: The MFs shall
identify areas of current adherence as well as non-adherence of various risk
management practices under each of the aforesaid three categories. They
shall examine the areas where development or improvement of systems is
required. After identifying the same, the MFs shall review the progress made
on implementation of the systems on a monthly basis and shall ensure full
compliance of all the risk management practices within a period of six
months.
Review of progress of implementation: Boards of AMCs and trustee
companies shall review the progress made by their MFs with regard to risk
management practices and the same shall be reported to SEBI at the time of
sending quarterly compliance test reports and half-yearly trustee reports.
Review by Internal Auditors: After full implementation of the risk
management system, it shall be made a part of internal audit from April 1,
2003 onwards and the auditors would check on a constant basis about the
adequacy of risk management systems.
Sale and Repurchase Price of Units
To bring about uniformity in determination of sale and repurchase price of
mutual fund units applicable for investors, it has been decided by SEBI that a
uniform method should be used by all mutual funds. Applicable load as a
percentage of NAV would be added to NAV to calculate sale price and would
be subtracted from NAV to calculate repurchase price. The following formulae
should be used:
Sale Price = Applicable NAV × (1+ Sales Load, if any)
Repurchase Price = Applicable NAV × (1-Exit Load, if any)
NAV would be rounded off up to four decimal places in case of liquid/money
market MF schemes and up to two decimal places in respect of all other
schemes. The disclosures relating to these shall be made in the new offer
documents and while updating existing offer documents.
62
Mutual Fund Service System
While a good number of closed-ended schemes are traded on the Exchanges,
the facilities for transacting in open-ended schemes of the MFs are very
limited. The transactions in units of open-ended scheme take place directly
between the individual investor and the AMC. To fulfill the need for a common
platform for sale and repurchase of units of schemes managed by different
Funds, NSE/NSCCL provide a facility called Mutual Fund Service System
(MFSS), which enables investors to transact in the dematerialized units of
open-ended schemes of MFs. NSE with its extensive network covering around
400 cities and towns across the country offers a mechanism for electronic online
collection of orders from the market and NSCCL acts as a central agency
for the clearing and settlement of all the orders.
The salient features of the system are:
Orders for purchase and sale (redemption) of units from investors are
collected using the on-line order collection system of NSE.
Orders are settled using the Clearing and Settlement system of
NSCCL.
Orders are settled on order-to-order basis.
Settlement is done on rolling basis-i.e. orders entered on T day are
settled on T+2 (working days).
Settlement to the extent of securities/funds pay-in is made by the
Participants.
Securities are settled in dematerialised mode only.
Transactions are not covered by settlement guarantee.
Mutual Funds Distribution through Post Offices
On January 22, 2001, India Post in partnership with IDBI-Principal, launched
a scheme for distribution of MF products through select post offices. A pilot
project was initialised with distribution of MF products only in four cities of
Mumbai, Delhi, Patna and Kolkata. From June 15, 2001, the scheme was
extended to cover post offices in all major cities across the country.
Prudential ICICI and SBI Mutual Funds also tied up with the post offices for
distribution of their respective schemes. The MF supplies application forms for
their schemes to the post office for sale over the counter and any customer
who wishes to invest in MF can take a form from the counter, fill it in and
hand it back to the officials in the post office which in turn are handed over t
o
the MF office.
2.3.2 Venture Capital Funds
Venture capital fund means a fund established in the form of a trust or a
company including a body corporate and registered under these regulations
63
which has a dedicated pool of capital raised in a manner specified in the
regulations, and invests in accordance with the regulations.
`Venture capital undertaking means a domestic company whose shares are
not listed on a recognised stock exchange in India and which is engaged in
the business for providing services, production or manufacture of article or
things or does not include such activities or sectors which are specified in the
negative list by the Board with the approval of the Central Government by
notification in the Official Gazette in this behalf.
SEBI is the single-point nodal agency for registration and regulation of both
domestic and overseas VCFs. No approval of VCFs by tax authorities is
required. VCFs enjoy a complete pass-through status. There is no tax on
distributed or undistributed income of such funds. The income distributed by
the funds is only taxed in the hands of investors at the rates applicable to the
nature of income. This liberalisation is expected to give a strong boost to NRIs
in Silicon Valley and elsewhere to invest some of their capital, knowledge and
enterprise in ventures in their motherland.
Regulations for VCFs
i. The minimum investment in a VCF from any investor would not be less
than Rs. 5 lakh and the minimum corpus of the fund before it could
start activities should be at least Rs. 5 crore.
ii. A VCF can not invest in associated companies. The investment in a
single VCU can not exceed 25% of the corpus of VCF. At least 66.67%
of the investible funds shall be invested in unlisted equity shares or
equity linked instruments of venture capital undertakings.
iii. The VCF is eligible to participate in the IPO through book building route
as Qualified Institutional Buyer.
iv. Automatic exemption is granted from applicability of open offer
requirements in case of transfer of shares from VCFs in Foreign Venture
Capital Investors (FVCIs) to promoters of a venture capital undertaking.
v. VCF has to disclose the investment strategy at the time of application
for registration.
2.3.3 Collective Investment Schemes
A Collective investment scheme (CIS) is any scheme or arrangement made or
offered by any company under which the contributions, or payments made by
the investors, are pooled and utilised with a view to receive profits, income,
produce or property, and is managed on behalf of the investors.
CIS should satisfy the conditions, referred to in sub-section (2) of section
11AA of the SEBI Act. Investors do not have day to day control over the
management and operation of such scheme or arrangement.
64
As per the provisions of SEBI (Collective Investment Schemes) Regulations,
1999, which was notified on October 15, 1999, no existing CIS could launch
any new scheme or raise money from the investors even under the existing
schemes, unless a certificate of registration was granted to it by SEBI. SEBI
continued with its efforts aimed at protecting investors in Collective
Investment Schemes (CISs) by asking individual entities, which had failed to
apply for grant of registration, to wind up their schemes and repay investors,
and by issuing public notices cautioning investors about the risks associated
with CIS.
In terms of regulation, an existing CIS which has failed to make an
application for registration to SEBI; or has not been granted provisional
registration by SEBI; or have obtained provisional registration but failed to
comply with the provisions of regulations 71 is required to wind up its existing
schemes, make repayment to the investors and thereafter submit its winding
up and repayment report to SEBI.
Collective Investment Management Company
A Collective Investment Management Company is a company incorporated
under the provisions of the Companies Act, 1956 and registered with SEBI
under the SEBI (Collective Investment Schemes) Regulations, 1999, whose
object is to organise, operate and manage a Collective Investment Scheme. A
registered Collective Investment Management Company is eligible to raise
funds from the public by launching schemes. Such schemes have to be
compulsorily credit rated as well as appraised by an appraising agency. The
schemes also have to be approved by the Trustee and contain disclosures, as
provided in the Regulations, which would enable the investors to make
informed decision. A copy of the offer document of the scheme has to be filed
with SEBI and if no modifications are suggested by SEBI within 21 days from
the date of filing then the Collective Investment Management Company is
entitled to issue the offer document to the public for raising funds from them.
MODEL QUESTIONS:
Ques:1 A company making a public issue of securities has to file a draft
prospectus with SEBI at least ______ prior to the filing of prospectus
with the Registrar of Companies.
(a) 21 days
(c) one month
(b) 30 days
(d) 15 days
Correct Answer: (b)
65
Ques:2. In the case of a public issue through 100% book building route what
is the minimum percentage of shares that can be allocated to the
retail investors applying for Rs.1000 worth shares for subscription?
(a) 20%
(b) 25%
(c) 35%
(d) 45%
Correct Answer: (c)
Ques:3 At the time of public issue each company enters into a memorandum
of understanding with its________
(a) Auditors
(b)Directors
(c) Merchant Bankers
(d)SEBI
Correct Answer: (c)
Ques:4. In terms of Companies Act 1956, offer of securities to more than
_____ persons is deemed to be public issue.
(a) 50
(b) 40
(c) 100
(d) 75
Correct Answer: (a)
Ques:5 A holder of an ADR/GDR does not have right to _____.
(a) vote
(b) receive dividend
(c) receive corporate action notification
(d) trade the ADRs/GDRs in the stock market
Correct Answer: (a)
Ques:6 Which of the following is not true of a credit rating agency (CRA)?
(a) CRA has to have a minimum net worth of 5 crore
(b) CRA cannot rate the securities issued by its promoter
(c)
CRA cannot rate the securities issued by any borrower,
subsidiary, an associate promoter of CRA if there are
common Chairman, Directors or employee between CRA or its
rating committee and these entities.
(d) CRA can be promoted by any company or body corporate having
the net worth of 100 crore in previous 3 years.
Correct Answer: (d)
66
Ques:7 All Mutual Funds in India are constituted as a ______.
(a) Private Limited Company
(b) Public Limited Company
(c) Trust
(d) Partnership concern
Correct Answer: (c)
Ques:8. The sponsor of a mutual fund is similar to the ______ of a company.
(a) Promoter
(b) Director
(c) MD
(d) Shareholder
Correct Answer: (a)
67
CHAPTER 3: SECONDARY MARKET
3.1 INTRODUCTION
Secondary market is the place for sale and purchase of existing securities. It
enables an investor to adjust his holdings of securities in response to changes
in his assessment about risk and return. It also enables him to sell securities
for cash to meet his liquidity needs. It essentially comprises of the stock
exchanges which provide platform for trading of securities and a host of
intermediaries who assist in trading of securities and clearing and settlement
of trades. The securities are traded, cleared and settled as per prescribed
regulatory framework under the supervision of the Exchanges and SEBI.
3.2 MARKET DESIGN
3.2.1 Stock Exchanges
The stock exchanges are the exclusive centres for trading of securities. Listing
of companies on a Stock Exchange is mandatory to provide an opportunity to
investors to invest in the securities of local companies. The trading volumes
on exchanges have been witnessing phenomenal growth for last few years.
Since the advent of screen based trading system in 1994-95, it has been
growing by leaps and bounds and reported a total turnover of Rs.51,30,816
crore during 2007-08. The growth of turnover has, however, not been
uniform across exchanges as may be seen from Table 3.1. The increase in
turnover took place mostly at big exchanges(NSE and BSE) and it was partly
at the cost of small exchanges that failed to keep pace with the changes. The
business moved away from small exchanges to big exchanges, which adopted
technologically superior trading and settlement systems. The huge liquidity
and order depth of big exchanges further diverted liquidity of other stock
exchanges. The 19 small exchanges put together reported less than 0.02% of
total turnover during 2007-08, while 2 big exchanges accounted for over
99.98 % of turnover. For most of the exchanges, the raison d être for their
existence, i.e. turnover, has disappeared. NSE and BSE are the major
exchanges having nationwide operations. NSE operated through 2,956 VSATs
in 245 cities at the end of March 2008. .
68
(Table:3.1): Turnover on NSE vs. Turnover on other Exchanges
(in Rs.crore)
Exchange 2006-07 2007-08
NSE 19,45,287 35,51,038
BSE 9,56,185 15,78,857
Uttar Pradesh 799 475
Ahmedabad 0 0
Calcutta 694 446
Madras 1 0
OTCEI 0 0
Delhi 0 0
Hyderabad 92 0
Bangalore 0 0
ICSE 0
Magadh 0 0
Bhubaneshwar 1 0
Cochin 0 0
Coimbatore 0 0
Gauhati 0 0
Jaipur 0 0
Ludhiana 0 0
Madhya Pradesh 0 0
Mangalore 0 0
Pune 0 0
SKSE 0 0
Vadodara 0 0
Total 29,03,058 5,130,816
NSE+BSE 29,01,472 5,129,895
Total (Except
NSE + BSE) 1,586 921
Corporatisation & Demutualisation of Stock Exchanges:
Corporatisation means the succession of a recognized stock exchange, being
a body of individuals or a society registered under the Societies Registration
Act 1860 (21 of 1860) by another stock exchange, being a company
incorporated for the purpose of assisting, regulating or controlling the
business of buying, selling or dealing in securities carried on by such
individuals or society.
Demutualisation means the segregation of ownership and management from
the trading rights of the members of a recognized stock exchange in
69
accordance with the scheme approved by the Securities and Exchange Board
of India.
Demutualization is the process through which a member-owned company
becomes shareholder-owned company. Worldwide, stock exchanges have
offered striking example of the trend towards demutualization, as the London
Stock Exchange (LSE), New York Stock Exchange (NYSE), Toronto Stock
Exchange (TSE) and most other exchanges across the globe have moved
towards demutualization and India is no exception to it.
In January 2002, SEBI directed all the recognised stock exchanges to suitably
amend their Rules, Articles etc. within a period of two months from the date
of the order to provide that no broker member of the stock exchanges shall
be an office bearer of an exchange, i.e. hold the position of President, Vice
President, Treasurer etc. This was done to give effect to the decision taken by
SEBI and the policy decision of Government in regard to
demutualisation/corporatisation of exchanges by which ownership,
management and trading membership would be segregated from each other.
Corporatisation and demutualisation of stock exchanges are complex subjects
and involve a number of legal, accounting, Companies Act related and tax
issues. Therefore, SEBI set up in March 2002 a Group on Corporatisation &
Demutualisation of Stock Exchanges under the Chairmanship of Shri M. H.
Kania, former Chief Justice of India. The Group submitted its report in August
2002 with the following recommendations:
(a) A common model for corporatisation and demutualisation may be adopted
for all stock exchanges. Each stock exchange would be required to submit
a scheme drawn on the lines of the recommendations of the Group to
SEBI for approval. Any stock exchange failing to comply with the
requirement of corporatisation and demutualisation by the appointed date
may be derecognised.
(b) The SCRA may be amended to provide that a stock exchange should be a
company incorporated under the Companies Act. The stock exchanges set
up as association of persons or as companies limited by guarantee may be
converted into companies limited by shares.
(c) The Income Tax Act may be amended to provide that the accumulated
reserves of the stock exchange as on the day of corporatisation are not
taxed. The reserves may be taxed in the hands of the shareholders when
these are distributed to shareholders as dividend at the net applicable tax
rate. All future profits of the stock exchange after it becomes a for-profit
company may be taxed. Further, the issue of ownership rights (shares)
and trading rights in lieu of the card should not be regarded as transfer
and not attract capital gains tax. However, at the point of sale of any of
these two rights, capital gains tax would be attracted.
(d) The Indian Stamp Act and the Sales Tax laws may be amended to exempt
from stamp duty and sales tax, the transfer of the assets from the mutual
70
stock exchange and the issuance of shares by the new demutualised for-
profit company.
(e) While the Group favours the deposit system for trading rights, it likes to
leave the choice of adopting either the card or the deposit system to the
exchanges. If the deposit system is accepted, the value of the card will be
segregated into two independent rights namely the right to share in the
net assets and goodwill of the stock exchange and the right to trade on
the stock exchange.
(f) The three stakeholders viz. shareholders, brokers and investing public
through the regulatory body should be equally represented on the
governing board of the demutualised exchange. The roles and hence the
posts of the Chairman and Chief Executive should be segregated. The
Chairman should be a person who has considerable knowledge and
experience of the functioning of the stock exchanges and the capital
market. The Chairman of the Board should not be a practicing broker. The
exchange must appoint a CEO who would be solely responsible for the day
to day functioning of the exchange, including compliance with various
regulations and risk management practices. The board should not
constitute any committee which would dilute the independence of the
CEO.
(g) The demutualised stock exchanges should follow the relevant norms of
corporate governance applicable to listed companies in particular, the
constitution of the audit committee, standards of financial disclosure and
accounting standards, disclosures in the annual reports, disclosures to
shareholders and management systems and procedures. It would be
desirable for the demutualised exchanges to list its shares on itself or on
any other exchange. However, this may not be made mandatory; in case
the exchange is listed the monitoring of its listing conditions should be left
to the Central Listing Authority or SEBI.
(h) No specific form of dispersal need be prescribed but there should be a
time limit prescribed, say three years which can be extended by a further
maximum period of 2 years with the approval of SEBI, within which at
least 51% of the shares would be held by non-trading members of the
stock exchange. There should be a ceiling of 5% of the voting rights,
which can be exercised by a single entity, or groups of related entities,
irrespective of the size of ownership of the shares.
Thereafter, various activities associated with the C&D were completed by the
stock exchanges within time specified in the respective approved schemes.
During the year 2007, SEBI approved and notified the corporatisation and
Demutualisation Schemes of 19 stock exchanges, under Section 4B(8) of the
Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act, 1956.
Stock Exchanges Subsidiary
SEBI required with effect from February 28, 2003 that the small stock
exchanges which are permitted to promote/float a subsidiary/company to
71
carry out the following changes in management structure of their subsidiaries
and to ensure the compliance:
1.
The subsidiary company should appoint a CEO who should not hold
any position concurrently in the stock exchange (parent exchange).
The appointment, the terms and conditions of service, the renewal of
appointment and the termination of service of CEO should be subject
to prior approval of SEBI.
2.
The governing board of the subsidiary company should have the
following composition viz., (a) the CEO of the subsidiary company
should be a director on the Board of subsidiary and the CEO should not
be a sub-broker of the subsidiary company or a broker of the parent
exchange (b) at least 50% of directors representing on the Governing
Board of subsidiary company should not be sub-brokers of the
subsidiary company or brokers of the promoter/holding exchange and
these directors should be called the Public Representatives (c) the
public representatives should be nominated by the parent exchange
(subject to prior approval of SEBI) (d) public representatives should
hold office for a period of one year from the date of assumption of the
office or till the Annual General Meeting of subsidiary company
whichever is earlier (e) there should be a gap of at least one year after
a consecutive period of three years before re-nomination of any person
for the post of non-member director (f) the parent exchange should
appoint a maximum of two directors who are officers of the parent
exchange.
3.
The subsidiary company should have its own staff none of whom
should be concurrently working for or holding any position of office in
the parent exchange.
4.
The parent exchange should be responsible for all risk management of
the subsidiary company and shall set up appropriate mechanism for
the supervision of the trading activity of subsidiary company.
3.2.2 Membership in NSE
The trading platform of the Exchange is accessible to investors only through
the trading members who are subject to its regulatory discipline. Any person
can become a member by complying with the prescribed eligibility criteria and
exit by surrendering trading membership without any hidden/overt cost.
There are no entry/exit barriers to trading membership.
The members are admitted to the different segments of the Exchange subject
to the provisions of the Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act, 1956, the
Securities and Exchange Board of India Act, 1992, the Rules, circulars,
notifications, guidelines, etc., issued there under and the Bye laws, Rules and
Regulations of the Exchange.
The standards for admission of members laid down by the Exchange stress on
factors such as, corporate structure, capital adequacy, track record,
72
education, experience, etc. and reflect a conscious effort on the part of NSE
to ensure quality broking services so as to build and sustain confidence
among investors in the Exchange s operations.
Benefits to the trading membership of NSE include:
1.
access to a nation-wide trading facility for equities, derivatives, debt and
hybrid instruments/products,
2.
ability to provide a fair, efficient and transparent securities market to the
investors,
3.
use of state-of-the-art electronic trading systems and technology,
4.
dealing with an organisation which follows strict standards for trading &
settlement at par with those available at the top international bourses,
5.
a demutualised Exchange which is managed by independent and
experienced professionals, and
6.
dealing with an organisation which is constantly striving to move towards
a global marketplace in the securities industry.
New Membership
Membership of NSE is open to all persons desirous of becoming trading
members, subject to meeting requirements/criteria as laid down by SEBI and
the Exchange. The different segments currently available on the Exchange for
trading are:
A.
Capital Market
B.
Wholesale Debt Market
C.
Derivatives (Futures and Options) Market
Persons or Institutions desirous of securing admission as Trading Members
(Stock Brokers) on the Exchange may apply for any one of the following
segment groups:
1.
Wholesale Debt Market (WDM) segment
2.
Capital Market segment
3.
Capital Market (CM) and Wholesale Debt Market (WDM) segments
4.
Capital Market (CM) and Futures & Options (F&O) segments
5.
Capital Market (CM), Wholesale Debt Market (WDM) and Futures &
Options (F&O) segment,
6.
Clearing Membership of National Securities Clearing Corporation Ltd.
(NSCCL) as a Professional Clearing Member (PCM)
Eligibility Criteria for Membership:
The eligibility criteria and deposits/fees payable for trading membership are
summarised in Table 3.2. An applicant for membership must possess the
minimum stipulated networth. The networth for the purpose should be
calculated as stipulated by the Exchange/SEBI. In case the company is a
member of any other Stock Exchange(s), it should satisfy the combined
minimum networth requirements of all these Stock Exchanges including
73
NSEIL. The minimum paid up capital of a corporate applicant for trading
membership should be Rs. 30 lakh.
Table 3.2: Eligibilty Criteria for Membership
Particulars WDM
Segment
CM and F&O
Segments
CM and WDM
Segments
CM, WDM and
F&O Segments
Constitution Corporates/
Institutions
Individuals/Firms
/Corporates
Corporates/
Institutions
Corporates/
Institutions
Paid-up capital Rs. 30 lakh Rs. 30 lakh Rs. 30 lakh Rs. 30 lakh
Net Worth Rs. 200 lakh Rs 100 lakh* Rs. 200 lakh Rs. 200 lakh*
Interest Free
Security
Deposit (IFSD)
Rs. 150 lakh Rs. 125 lakh** Rs. 250 lakh Rs. 275 lakh**
Collateral
Security
Deposit (CSD)
-Rs. 25 lakh** Rs. 25 lakh Rs. 25 lakh**
Annual
Subscription
Rs. 1 lakh Rs. 1 lakh Rs. 2 lakh Rs. 2 lakh
Education At least two
directors
should be
graduates.
Proprietor/ two
partners/two
directors should
be graduates
Dealers should
also have passed
SEBI approved
certification test
for derivatives
and NCFM
Capital Market
(Basic or
Dealers) Module.
At least two
directors should
be graduates.
Dealers should
also have passed
NCFM Capital
Market (Basic or
Dealers) Module.
At least two
directors should
be graduates.
Dealers should
also have passed
SEBI approved
certification test
for derivatives
and NCFM
Capital Market
(Basic or
Dealers) Module.
Experience
----------------Two year's experience in securities market----------Track
Record The Applicant/Partners/Directors should not be defaulters on any stock
exchange. They must not be debarred by SEBI for being associated with
capital market as intermediaries. They must be engaged solely in the
business of securities and must not be engaged in any fund-based
activity.
*
No additional networth is required for self clearing members in the F&O
segment. However, a networth of Rs. 300 lakh is required for members
clearing for self as well as for other TMs.
**Additional Rs. 25 lakh is required for clearing membership on the F&O
segment. In addition, a member clearing for others is required to bring in
IFSD of Rs. 2 lakh and CSD of Rs. 8 lakh per trading member; he undertakes
to clear in the F&O segment.
Admission: Admission is a two-stage process with applicants requiring to go
through an examination (a module of NCFM) followed by an interview. The
examination is conducted so as to test the knowledge of the people
74
associated with the Exchange on different aspects of the capital/financial
markets in India, as it would ensure the conduct of fair, professional and
sound dealing practices. The purpose of the interview is to gain knowledge
about the prospects as to their capability and commitment to carry on stock
broking activities, financial standing, integrity, etc.
Based on the performance of the applicant in the written test, the interview
and fulfillment of other eligibility criteria, the application is forwarded to S
EBI.
On obtaining SEBI Registration, the TM is enabled to trade on the system and
issued user ids after payment of fees/deposits, submission of relevant
documents and satisfying all the formalities and requirements with regard to
the Exchange and NSCCL. The dealers on CM segment are required to clear
the Capital Market (Dealers) Module of NCFM while dealers on Futures &
Options Segment are required to clear the Derivatives Core Module of NCFM.
This is a pre-requisite without which user-ids are not issued.
3.2.3 Listing of securities
Listing means admission of securities of an issuer to trading privileges on a
stock exchange through a formal agreement. The prime objective of
admission to dealings on the Exchange is to provide liquidity and
marketability to securities, as also to provide a mechanism for effective
management of trading.
Listing Criteria
As per SEBI directive, an unlisted company may make an initial public offering
(IPO) of equity shares or any other security which may be converted into or
exchanged with equity shares at a later date, only if it meets all the following
conditions:
(a)
The company should have net tangible assets of at least Rs. 3 crore in
each of the preceding 3 full years (of 12 months each), of which not
more than 50% is held in monetary assets;
(b)
The company should have a track record of distributable profits in
terms of section 205 of the Companies Act, 1956, for at least three
(3) out of immediately preceding five (5) years;
(c)
The company should have a net worth of at least Rs. 1 crore in each of
the preceding 3 full years (of 12 months each);
(d)
In case the company has changed its name within the last one year,
atleast 50% of the revenue for the preceding 1 full year is earned by
the company from the activity suggested by the new name; and
(e)
The aggregate of the proposed issue and all previous issues made in
the same financial year in terms of size (i.e. offer through offer
document + firm allotment + promoters contribution through the offer
document), does not exceed five (5) times its pre-issue networth as
per the audited balance sheet of the last financial year.
75
Listing agreement
At the time of listing securities of a company on a stock exchange, the
company is required to enter into a listing agreement with the exchange. The
listing agreement specifies the terms and conditions of listing and the
disclosures that shall be made by a company on a continuous basis to the
exchange for the dissemination of information to the market.
Disclosure of audit qualifications:
SEBI has advised the Stock exchanges to modify the listing agreement to
incorporate disclosure of audit qualifications. The same would include:
disclosures of amounts at the year end and the maximum amount of

loans/ advances/ investments outstanding during the year from both
parent to subsidiary and vice versa,
un-audited quarterly results of all listed companies should be
subjected to Limited Review from the quarters ending on or after June
30, 2003,
publication of consolidated financial results along with stand-alone
financial results should be applicable on annual basis only. However,
companies may have option to publish consolidated financial results
along with stand alone financial results on a quarterly/half yearly
basis,
In addition to the above, the stock exchanges should also be required
to inform SEBI in cases where companies have failed to remove audit
qualifications.
3.2.4 Delisting of Securities
SEBI (Delisting of Securities) Guidelines 2003 are applicable to delisting of
securities of companies and specifically apply to:
(a)
Voluntary delisting being sought by the promoters of a company
(b)
Any acquisition of shares of the company (either by a promoter or by
any other person) or scheme or arrangement, by whatever name
referred to, consequent to which the public shareholding falls below
the minimum limit specified in the listing conditions or listing
agreement that may result in delisting of securities
(c)
Promoters of the companies who voluntarily seek to de-list their
securities from all or some of the stock exchanges
(d)
Cases where a person in control of the management is seeking to
consolidate his holdings in a company, in a manner which would
result in the public shareholding in the company falling below the
limit specified in the listing conditions or in the listing agreement that
may have the effect of company being de-listed
76
(e)
Companies which may be compulsorily de-listed by the stock
exchanges: provided that company shall not be permitted to use the
buy-back provision to delist its securities.
Voluntary Delisting
Any promoter or acquirer desirous of delisting securities of the

company under the provisions of these guidelines should obtain the
prior approval of shareholders of the company by a special resolution
passed at its general meeting, make a public announcement in the
manner provided in these guidelines, make an application to the
delisting exchange in the form specified by the exchange, and comply
with such other additional conditions as may be specified by the
concerned stock exchanges from where securities are to be de-listed.
Any promoter of a company which desires to de-list from the stock
exchange should determine an exit price for delisting of securities in
accordance with the book building process as stated in the guidelines.
The stock exchanges shall provide the infrastructure facility for display
of the price at the terminal of the trading members to enable the
investors to access the price on the screen to bring transparency to
the delisting process. The stock exchange shall also monitor the
possibility of price manipulation and keep under special watch the
securities for which announcement for delisting has been made.
Compulsory De-listing of Companies
The stock exchanges may de-list companies which have been

suspended for a minimum period of six months for non-compliance
with the listing agreement.
The stock exchanges have to give adequate and wide public notice
through newspapers and also give a show cause notice to a company.
The exchange shall provide a time period of 15 days within which
representation may be made to the exchange by any person who may
be aggrieved by the proposed delisting.
Where the securities of the company are de-listed by an exchange, the
promoter of the company should be liable to compensate the security
holders of the company by paying them the fair value of the securities
held by them and acquiring their securities, subject to their option to
remain security-holders with the company.
Reinstatement of De-listed Securities
Reinstatement of de-listed securities should be permitted by the stock
exchanges with a cooling period of 2 years. It should be based on the
respective norms/criteria for listing at the time of making the application for
listing and the application should be initially scrutinized by the CLA.
77
3.2.5 Listing of Securities on NSE
NSE plays an important role in helping Indian companies access equity
capital, by providing a liquid and well-regulated market. NSE has 1,381 (as on
31st March 2008) companies listed representing the length, breadth and
diversity of the Indian economy which includes from hi-tech to heavy
industry, software, refinery, public sector units, infrastructure, and financial
services. Listing on NSE raises a company s profile among investors in India
and abroad. Trade data is distributed worldwide through various news-
vending agencies. More importantly, each and every NSE listed company is
required to satisfy stringent financial, public distribution and management
requirements. High listing standards foster investor confidence and also bring
credibility into the markets.
NSE lists securities in its Capital Market (Equities) segment and its Wholesale
Debt Market segment. NSE trading terminals are now situated in 245 cities
across the length and breadth of India. Securities listed on the Exchange are
required to fulfill the eligibility criteria for listing. Various types of secur
ities of
a company are traded under a unique symbol and different series.
Benefits of Listing on NSE
Listing on NSE provides qualifying companies with the broadest access to
investors, the greatest market depth and liquidity, cost-effective access to
capital, the highest visibility, the fairest pricing, and investor benefits.
(a)
A premier marketplace: The sheer volume of trading activity ensures
that the impact cost is lower on the Exchange which in turn reduces the
cost of trading to the investor. NSE s automated trading system ensures
consistency and transparency in the trade matching which enhances
investors confidence and visibility of our market.
(b)
Visibility: The trading system provides unparallel level of trade and
post-trade information. The best 5 buy and sell orders are displayed on
the trading system and the total number of securities available for
buying and selling is also displayed. This helps the investor to know the
depth of the market. Further, corporate announcements, results,
corporate actions etc are also available on the trading system.
(c)
Largest exchange: NSE is the largest exchange in the county in terms
of trading volumes. The Equity segment of the NSE witnessed an
average daily turnover of Rs. 14,056 crore in March 2008. During the
year 2007-2008, NSE reported a turnover of Rs. 35,51,038 crore in the
equities segment accounting for nearly 70 % of the total Indian
securities market.
(d)
Unprecedented reach: NSE provides a trading platform that extends
across the length and breadth of the country. Investors from around 245
cities as on 31st March 2008 can avail of trading facilities on the NSE
78
Trading Network. The Exchange uses the latest communication
technology to give instant access from every location.
(e)
Modern infrastructure: NSE introduced for the first time in India, fully
automated screen based trading. The Exchange uses a sophisticated
telecommunication network with trading terminals connected through
2,956 VSATs (Very Small Aperture Terminals) at the end of March 2008.
(f)
Transaction speed: The speed at which the Exchange processes
orders, results in liquidity and best available prices. The Exchange's
trading system on an average processes 100,062 orders per minute. The
highest number of trades in a day of 68,12,991 was recorded on January
3, 2008 in the equity segment while 14,20,967 trades were recorded in
the F&O Segment on October 18, 2007.
(g)
Short settlement cycles: The Exchange has successfully completed
around 2032 settlements as on 31st March 2008 without any delays.
(h)
Broadcast facility for corporate announcements: The NSE network
is used to disseminate information and company announcements across
the country. Important information regarding the company is announced
to the market through the Broadcast Mode on the NEAT System as well
as disseminated through the NSE website. Corporate developments such
as financial results, book closure, announcements of bonus, rights,
takeover, mergers etc. are disseminated across the country thus
minimizing scope for price manipulation or misuse.
(i)
Trade statistics for listed companies: Listed companies are provided
with monthly trade statistics for all the securities of the company listed
on the Exchange.
(j)
Investor service centers: Six investor-service centers opened by NSE
across the country cater to the needs of investors.
Listing criteria:
The Exchange has laid down criteria for listing of new issues by companies
through IPOs, companies listed on other exchanges in conformity with the
Securities Contracts (Regulation) Rules, 1957 and directions of the Central
Government and the Securities and Exchange Board of India (SEBI). The
criteria include minimum paid-up capital and market capitalisation,
company/promoter's track record, etc. The listing criteria for companies in the
CM Segment are presented in Table 3.4. The issuers of securities are required
to adhere to provisions of the Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act, 1956, the
Companies Act, 1956, the Securities and Exchange Board of India Act, 1992,
and the rules, circulars, notifications, guidelines, etc. prescribed there under
.
79
Table 3.4: Listing Criteria for Companies on the CM Segment of NSE
Criteria Initial Public Offerings
(IPOs)
Companies listed on other
exchanges
Paid-up Equity
Capital
(PUEC)/Market
Capitalisation (MC)
/Net Worth
PUEC = Rs. 10 cr. and MC =
Rs. 25 cr.
PUEC = Rs. 10 cr. and MC = Rs.
25 cr. OR
PUEC = Rs. 25 cr. OR
MC = Rs. 50 cr. OR
The company shall have a net
worth of not less than Rs.50 crores
in each of the preceding financial
years.
Company/Promoter's
Track Record
Atleast 3 years track record of
either
a) the applicant seeking listing
OR
b) the promoters/promoting
company incorporated in or
outside India OR
c) Partnership firm and
subsequently converted into
Company not in existence as a
Company for three years and
approaches the Exchange for
listing. The Company
subsequently formed would be
considered for listing only on
fulfillment of conditions
stipulated by SEBI in this
regard.
Atleast three years track record of
either
a) the applicant seeking listing; OR
b) the promoters/promoting
company, incorporated in or
outside India.
Dividend Record /
Net worth /
Distributable Profits
-Dividend
paid in at least 2 out of
the last 3 financial years
immediately preceding the year in
which the application has been
made OR The networth of the
applicants atleast Rs.50 crores OR
The applicant has distributable
profits in at least two out of the
last three financial years.
Listing -Listed
on any other recognized
stock exchange for at least last
three years OR listed on the
exchange having nationwide
trading terminals for at least one
year.
80
Criteria Initial Public Offerings
(IPOs)
Companies listed on other
exchanges
Other Requirements (a) No disciplinary action by
other stock
exchanges/regulatory
authority in past 3 yrs.
(b) Satisfactory redressal
mechanism for investor
grievances,
(c ) distribution of
shareholding and
(d) details of litigation record
in past 3 years
(e) Track record of Directors
of the Company
(a) No disciplinary action by other
stock exchanges/regulatory
authority in past 3 yrs.
(b) Satisfactory redressal
mechanism for investor
grievances,
(c ) distribution of shareholding
and
(d) details of litigation record in
past 3 years.
(e) Track record of Directors of the
Company
(f) Change in control of a
Company/Utilisation of funds
raised from public
Note:
1.(a) In case of IPOs, Paid up Equity Capital means post issue paid up equity ca
pital.
(b) In case of Existing companies listed on other exchanges, the existing paid
up equity
capital as well as the paid up equity capital after the proposed issue for which
listing is sought
shall be taken into account.
2. (a) In case of IPOs, market capitalisation is the product of the issue price
and the post-issue
number of equity shares.
(b) In case of case of Existing companies listed on other stock exchanges the ma
rket
capitalisation shall be calculated by using a 12 month moving average of the mar
ket
capitalisation over a period of six months immediately preceding the date of app
lication. For
the purpose of calculating the market capitalisation over a 12 month period, the
average of the
weekly high and low of the closing prices of the shares as quoted on the Nationa
l Stock
Exchange during the last twelve months and if the shares are not traded on the N
ational Stock
Exchange such average price on any of the recognised Stock Exchanges where those
shares
are frequently traded shall be taken into account while determining market capit
alisation after
making necessary adjustments for Corporate Action such as Rights / Bonus Issue/S
plit.
3. In case of Existing companies listed on other stock exchanges, the requiremen
t of Rs.25
crores market capitalisation shall not be applicable to listing of securities is
sued by
Government Companies, Public Sector Undertakings, Financial Institutions, Nation
alised Banks,
Statutory Corporations and Banking Companies who are otherwise bound to adhere t
o all the
relevant statutes, guidelines, circulars, clarifications etc. that may be issued
by various
regulatory authorities from time to time
4. Net worth means paid-up equity capital + reserves excluding revaluation reser
ve miscellaneous
expenses not written off - negative balance in profit and loss account to the
extent not set off.
5. Promoters mean one or more persons with minimum 3 years of experience of each
of them
in the same line of business and shall be holding at least 20 % of the post issu
e equity share
capital individually or severally.
6. In case a company approaches the Exchange for listing within six months of an
IPO, the
securities may be considered as eligible for listing if they were otherwise elig
ible for listing at
the time of the IPO. If the company approaches the Exchange for listing after si
x months of an
IPO, the norms for existing listed companies may be applied and market capitalis
ation be
computed based on the period from the IPO to the time of listing.
3.2.6 Dematerialisation
Traditionally, settlement system on Indian stock exchanges gave rise to
settlement risk due to the time that elapsed before trades were settled.
81
Trades were settled by physical movement of certificates. This had two
aspects: First related to settlement of trade in stock exchanges by delivery of
shares by the seller and payment by the buyer. The stock exchange
aggregated trades over a period of time and carried out net settlement
through the physical delivery of securities. The process of physically moving
the securities from the seller to his broker to Clearing Corporation to the
buyer s broker and finally to the buyer took time with the risk of delay
somewhere along the chain. The second aspect related to transfer of shares in
favour of the purchaser by the issuer. This system of transfer of ownership
was grossly inefficient as every transfer involved the physical movement of
paper securities to the issuer for registration, with the change of ownership
being evidenced by an endorsement on the security certificate. In many cases
the process of transfer took much longer than the two months as stipulated in
the Companies Act, and a significant proportion of transactions ended up as
bad delivery due to faulty compliance of paper work. Theft, forgery,
mutilation of certificates and other irregularities were rampant, and in
addition the issuer had the right to refuse the transfer of a security. Thus, th
e
buyer did not get good title of the securities after parting with good money.
All this added to costs and delays in settlement, restricted liquidity and made
investor grievance redressal time-consuming and at times intractable.
To obviate these problems, the Depositories Act, 1996 was passed to provide
for the establishment of depositories in securities with the objective of
ensuring free transferability of securities with speed, accuracy and security by
making securities of public limited companies freely transferable

subject to certain exceptions;
dematerialising the securities in the depository mode; and
Providing for maintenance of ownership records in a book entry form.
In order to streamline both the stages of settlement process, the Depositories
Act envisages transfer of ownership of securities electronically by book entry
without making the securities move from person to person. The Act has made
the securities of all public limited companies freely transferable by restrictin
g
the company s right to use discretion in effecting the transfer of securities,
and dispensing with the transfer deed and other procedural requirements
under the Companies Act.
A depository holds securities in dematerialised form. It maintains ownership
records of securities and effects transfer of ownership through book entry. By
fiction of law, it is the registered owner of the securities held with it with t
he
limited purpose of effecting transfer of ownership at the behest of the owner.
The name of the depository appears in the records of the issuer as registered
owner of securities. The name of actual owner appears in the records of the
depository as beneficial owner. The beneficial owner has all the rights and
liabilities associated with the securities. The owner of securities intending to
avail of depository services opens an account with a depository through a
82
depository participant (DP). The securities are transferred from one account
to another through book entry only on the instructions of the beneficial
owner.
In order to promote dematerialisation of securities, NSE joined hands with
leading financial institutions to establish the National Securities Depository
Ltd. (NSDL), the first depository in the country, with the objective of
enhancing the efficiency in settlement systems as also to reduce the menace
of fake/forged and stolen securities. This has ushered in an era of
dematerialised trading and settlement. SEBI has made dematerialised
settlement mandatory in an ever-increasing number of securities in a phased
manner, thus bringing about an increase in the proportion of shares delivered
in dematerialised form. This was initially introduced for institutional investor
s
and was later extended to all investors. Starting with twelve scrips on January
15, 1998, all investors were required to mandatorily trade in dematerialised
form in respect of 2,335 securities as at end-June 2001. By November 2001,
3811 companies were under demat mode and the rest of the companies were
brought under compulsory demat mode by January 02, 2002. At the end of
March 2008, 7,364 and 5,943 companies were connected to NSDL and CDSL
respectively. The number of dematerialised securities together at NSDL &
CDSL increased from 39 billion at the end of March 2001 to 287 billion at the
end of March 2008.
Pursuant to the SEBI directive on providing facility for small investors holding
physical shares in the securities mandated for compulsory demat, the
Exchange has provided such facility for trading in physical shares not
exceeding 500 shares in the Limited Physical (LP) market segment.
Primarily all trades are now settled in dematerialized form. The share of
demat delivery in total delivery at NSE increased to almost 100% in value
terms.
3.3 TRADING
3.3.1 Trading Mechanism
The trading on stock exchanges in India used to take place through open
outcry without use of information technology for immediate matching or
recording of trades. This was time consuming and inefficient. This imposed
limits on trading volumes and efficiency. In order to provide efficiency,
liquidity and transparency, NSE introduced a nation-wide on-line fully-
automated screen based trading system (SBTS) where a member can punch
into the comp uter quantities of securities and the prices at which he likes to
transact and the transaction is executed as soon as it finds a matching sale or
buy order from a counter party.
83
SBTS electronically matches orders on a strict price/time priority and hence
cuts down on time, cost and risk of error, as well as on fraud resulting in
improved operational efficiency. It allows faster incorporation of price
sensitive information into prevailing prices, thus increasing the informational
efficiency of markets. It enables market participants, irrespective of their
geographical locations, to trade with one another simultaneously, improving
the depth and liquidity of the market. It provides full anonymity by accepting
orders, big or small, from members without revealing their identity, thus
providing equal access to everybody. It also provides a perfect audit trail,
which helps to resolve disputes by logging in the trade execution process in
entirety. This diverted liquidity from other exchanges and in the very first
year of its operation, NSE became the leading stock exchange in the country,
impacting the fortunes of other exchanges and forcing them to adopt SBTS
also. Today India can boast that almost 100% trading takes place through
electronic order matching.
Technology was used to carry the trading platform from the trading hall of
stock exchanges to the premises of brokers. NSE carried the trading platform
further to the PCs at the residence of investors through the Internet and to
handheld devices through Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) for
convenience of mobile investors. This made a huge difference in terms of
equal access to investors in a geographically vast country like India.
The trading network is depicted in Figure 3.1. NSE has main computer which
is connected through Very Small Aperture Terminal (VSAT) installed at its
office. The main computer runs on a fault tolerant STRATUS mainframe
computer at the Exchange. Brokers have terminals (identified as the PCs in
the Figure 3.1) installed at their premises which are connected through
VSATs/leased lines/modems. An investor informs a broker to place an order
on his behalf. The broker enters the order through his PC, which runs under
Windows NT and sends signal to the Satellite via VSAT/leased line/modem.
The signal is directed to mainframe computer at NSE via VSAT at NSE's office.
A message relating to the order activity is broadcast to the respective
member. The order confirmation message is immediately displayed on the PC
of the broker. This order matches with the existing passive order(s) otherwise
it waits for the active orders to enter the system. On order matching, a
message is broadcast to the respective member.
84
Figure 3.1: Trading Network
Satellite
Mainframe
HUB
ANTENNA
NSE Mainframe Broker's premises
The trading system operates on a strict price time priority. All orders received
on the system are sorted with the best priced order getting the first priority
for matching i.e., the best buy orders match with the best sell order. Similar
priced orders are sorted on time priority basis, i.e. the one that came in
early gets priority over the later one. Orders are matched automatically
by the computer keeping the system transparent, objective and fair. Where
an order does not find a match, it remains in the system and is displayed to
the whole market, till a fresh order comes in or the earlier order is cancelled
or modified. The trading system provides tremendous flexibility to the users
in terms of kinds of orders that can be placed on the system.
Several time-related (day, immediate or cancel), price-related (buy/sell limit
and stop loss orders) or volume related (Disclosed Quantity) conditions can
be easily built into an order. The trading system also provides complete
market information on-line. The market screen at any point of time provides
complete information on total order depth in a security, the five best buys
and sells available in the market, the quantity traded during the day in that
security, the high and the low, the last traded price, etc. Investors can also
know the fate of the orders almost as soon as they are placed with the
trading members. Thus the NEAT system provides an Open Electronic
85
Consolidated Limit Order Book (OECLOB). Limit orders are orders to buy or
sell shares at a stated quantity and stated price. If the price quantity
conditions do not match, the limit order will not be executed. The term limit
order book refers to the fact that only limit orders are stored in the book and
all market orders are crossed against the limit orders sitting in the book.
Since the order book is visible to all market participants, it is termed as an
Open Book .
NEAT SYSTEM
The NEAT system supports an order driven market, wherein orders match on
the basis of price and time priority. All quantity fields are in units and price
s
are quoted in Indian Rupees. The regular lot size and tick size for various
securities traded is notified by the Exchange from time to time.
Market Types
The Capital Market system (the NEAT system) has four types of active
markets:
Normal Market
All orders which are of regular lot size or multiples thereof are traded in the
Normal Market. For shares that are traded in the compulsory dematerialised
mode the market lot of these shares is one. Normal market consists of
various book types wherein orders are segregated as Regular lot orders,
Special Term orders, Negotiated Trade Orders and Stop Loss orders
depending on their order attributes.
Odd Lot Market
An order is called an odd lot order if the order size is less than regular lot
size. These orders do not have any special terms attributes attached to them.
In an odd-lot market, both the price and quantity of both the orders (buy and
sell) should exactly match for the trade to take place. Currently the odd lot
market facility is used for the Limited Physical Market as per the SEBI
directives. Pursuant to the directive of SEBI to provide an exit route for small
investors holding physical shares in securities mandated for compulsory
dematerialised settlement, the Exchange has provided a facility for such
trading in physical shares not exceeding 500 shares. This market segment is
referred to as 'Limited Physical Market' (small window). The Limited Physical
Market was introduced on June 7, 1999. The trading members are required to
ensure that shares are duly registered in the name of the investor(s) before
entering orders on their behalf on a trade date.
Auction Market
In the Auction Market, auctions are initiated by the Exchange on behalf of
trading members for settlement related reasons.
86
Retail Debt Market
In Retdebt market, government securities are traded. At present only the
Central Government Securities are allowed to trade.
Corporate Hierarchy
The trading member has the facility of defining a hierarchy amongst its users
of the NEAT system. This hierarchy comprises:
Corporate Manager
Branch 1
Branch 2
Dealer 11 Dealer 12 Dealer 21

Dealer 22
The users of the trading system can logon as either of the user types. The
significance of each type is explained below:
(a) Corporate Manager: The corporate manager is a term assigned to a user
placed at the highest level in a trading firm. Such a user receives the End
of Day reports for all branches of the trading member. The facility to set
Branch Order Value Limits and User Order Value Limits is available to the
corporate manager. Corporate Manager can view outstanding order and
trade of all users of the trading member. He can cancel/modify
outstanding order of all user of the trading member.
(b) Branch Manager: The branch manager is a term assigned to a user who
is placed under the corporate manager. The branch manager receives End
of Day reports for all the dealers under that branch. The branch manager
can set user order value limit for each of his branch. Branch Manager can
view outstanding order and trade of all users of his branch. He can
cancel/modify outstanding order of all user of his branch.
(c)
Dealer: Dealers are users at the lower most level of the hierarchy. A
dealer can view and perform order and trade related activities only for
oneself and does not have access to information on other dealers under
either the same branch or other branches.
Market Phases
The system is normally made available for trading on all days except
Saturdays, Sundays and NSE specified holidays. A trading day typically
consists of a number of discrete stages as explained below:
Opening
The trading member can carry out the following activities after login to the
NEAT system and before the market opens for trading:
87
(i)
Set up Market Watch (the securities which the user would like to
view on the screen.
(ii)
Viewing Inquiry screens.
At the point of time when the market is opening for trading, the trading
member cannot login to the system. A message Market status is changing.
Cannot logon for sometime is displayed. If the member is already logged in,
he cannot perform trading activities till market is opened.
Open Phase
The open period indicates the commencement of trading activity. To signify
the start of trading, a message is sent to all the trader workstations. The
market open time for different markets is notified by the Exchange to all the
trading members. Order entry is allowed when all the securities have been
opened. During this phase, orders are matched on a continuous basis. Trading
in all the instruments is allowed unless they are specifically prohibited by the
exchange. The activities that are allowed at this stage are Inquiry, Order
Entry, Order Modification, Order Cancellation (including quick order
cancellation) Order Matching and trade cancellation.
Market Close
When the market closes, trading in all instruments for that market comes to
an end. A message to this effect is sent to all trading members. No further
orders are accepted, but the user is permitted to perform activities like
inquiries and trade cancellation.
Surcon
Surveillance and Control (SURCON) is that period after market close during
which, the users have inquiry access only. After the end of SURCON period,
the system processes the data for making the system available for the next
trading day. When the system starts processing data, the interactive
connection with the NEAT system is lost and the message to that effect is
displayed at the trader workstation.
Major Segments of the NEAT Screen
The following windows are displayed on the Trader Workstation screen:
(a) Title bar: It displays trading system name i.e. NEAT, the date and the
current time.
(b) Ticker Window: The ticker displays information of all trades in the
system as and when it takes place. The user has the option of
selecting the securities that should appear in the ticker. Securities in
ticker can be selected for each market type. On the extreme right
hand of the ticker is the on-line index window that displays the current
index value of NSE indices namely S&P CNX Nifty, S&P CNX Defty, CNX
88
Nifty Junior, S&P CNX500, CNX Midcap, CNX IT, Bank Nifty, CNX 100
and Nifty Midcap 50. The user can scroll within these indices and view
the index values respectively. Index point change with reference to the
previous close is displayed along with the current index value. The
difference between the previous close index value and the current
index value becomes zero when the Nifty closing index is computed for
the day.The ticker window displays securities capital market segments.
The ticker selection facility is confined to the securities of capital
market segment only. The first ticker window, by default, displays all
the derivatives contracts traded in the Futures and Options segment.
(c) Tool Bar: The toolbar has functional buttons which can be used with
the mouse for quick access to various functions such as Buy Order
Entry, Sell Order Entry, Market By Price (MBP), Previous Trades (PT),
Outstanding Order (OO), Activity Log (AL), Order Status (OS), Market
Watch (MW), Snap Quote (SQ), Market Movement (MM), Market
Inquiry (MI), Auction Inquiry (AI), Order Modification (OM), Order
Cancellation (OCXL), Security List, Net Position, Online Backup,
Supplementary Menu, Index Inquiry, Index Broadcast and Help. All
these functions are also accessible through the keyboard.
(d) Market Watch: The Market Watch window is the main area of focus
for a trading member. This screen allows continuous monitoring of the
securities that are of specific interest to the user. It displays trading
information for the selected securities.
(e) Inquiry Window: This screen enables the user to view information
such as Market By Price (MBP), Previous Trades (PT), Outstanding
Orders (OO), Activity Log (AL) and so on. Relevant information for the
selected security can be viewed.
(f)
SnapQuote: The snap quote feature allows a trading member to get
instantaneous market information on any desired security. This is
normally used for securities that are not already set in the Market
Watch window. The information presented is the same as that of the
Marker Watch window.
(g) Order/Trade Window: This enables the user to enter/modify/cancel
orders and for also to send the request for trade cancellation.
(h) Message Window: This enables the user to view messages broadcast
by the Exchange such as corporate actions, any market news, auctions
related information etc. and other messages like order confirmation,
order modification, order cancellation, orders which have resulted in
quantity freezes/price freezes and the Exchange action on them, trade
confirmation, trade cancellation requests and Exchange action on
them, name and time when the user logs in/logs off from the system,
messages specific to the trading member, etc. These messages appear
as and when the event takes place in a chronological order.
Basket Trading
The purpose of Basket Trading is to provide NEAT users with a facility to
create offline order entry file for a selected portfolio. On inputting the value
,
89
the orders are created for the selected portfolio of securities according to the
ratios of their market capitalisations. All the orders generated through the
offline order file are priced at the available market price.
Quantity of shares of a particular security in portfolio are calculated as under
:
No. of Shares of a security in portfolio
Amount * Issued Capital for the Security
=
Current Portfolio Capitaliza tion
Where:
Current Portfolio Capitalisation = Summation [Last Traded Price (Previous
close if not traded) * No. of Issued shares]
In case at the time of generating the basket if any of the constituents are not
traded, the weightage of the security in the basket is determined using the
previous close price. This price may become irrelevant if there has been a
corporate action in the security for the day and the same has not yet been
traded before generation of the file. Similarly, basket facility will not be
available for a new listed security till the time it is traded.
Reverse Basket on Traded Quantity

The Reverse Basket Trading provides the users with an offline file for
reversing the trades that have taken place for a basket order. This file will
contain orders for different securities of the selected basket file. The Orders
are created according to the volume of trade that has taken place for that
basket. This helps to monitor the current status of the basket file as the lates
t
status of the orders are displayed in the list box. It is advisable to create ea
ch
basket with a different name and clean up the directories regularly and not
tamper with the original basket file once it has been loaded as it may give
erroneous results.
Index Trading
The purpose of Index Trading is to provide NEAT users with a facility of
buying and selling of Indices, in terms of securities that comprises the Index.
Currently, the facility is only for NIFTY securities. The users have to specify
the amount, and other inputs which are sent to the host, and the host
generates the orders.
The Index Trading provides users with the choice of gaining with the
rise/decline in Index values either by buying or selling them. The buying and
selling of Indices are simulated by entering orders in securities in proportion
to the composition of the chosen index.
Quantity of shares of a particular security of NIFTY is calculated as under:
90
No. of Shares of a security in index =
Amount * Issued Capital for the security
Current Market Capitaliza tion of the Index
Where,
Current Market Capitalisation of the Index = Summation [Last Traded Price
(Previous close if not traded) * No. of Issued Shares]
Buy Back Trades
The purpose of Buy Back Trade functionality is to give information to the
market about the buy back trades executed from the start of the buy back
period till current trading date in the securities whose buyback period is
currently on. The front screen shows Symbol, Series, Low price (Today), High
price (Today), Weightage. Average price, Volume (Today) and Previous day
Volume.
3.3.2 Order Management
Order Management consists of entering orders, order modification, order
cancellation and order matching.
Entering Orders
The trading member can enter orders in the normal market and auction
market. A user can place orders in any of the above mentioned markets by
invoking the respective order entry screens.
Active & Passive Orders: When any order enters the trading system, it is
an active order. It tries to find a match on the other side of the books. If it
finds a match, a trade is generated. If it does not find a match, the order
becomes a passive order and goes and sits in the order book.
Order Books: As and when valid orders are entered or received by the
trading system, they are first numbered, time stamped and then scanned for
a potential match. This means that each order has a distinctive order number
and a unique time stamp on it. If a match is not found, then the orders are
stored in the books as per the price/time priority. Price priority means that if
two orders are entered into the system, the order having the best price gets
the higher priority. Time priority means that if two orders having the same
price are entered, then the order that is entered first gets the higher priority
.
Best price for a sell order is the lowest price and for a buy order, best price
is
the highest price. The different order books in the Capital Market segment are
as detailed below:
91
(a)
Regular Lot Book: An order that has no special condition {(like All or
None (AON) or Minimum Fill (MF) or Stop Loss (SL)) associated with it
is a Regular Lot order. When a dealer places this order, the system
looks for a corresponding Regular Lot order existing in that market
(Passive orders). If it does not find a match at the time it enters the
system, the order is stacked in the Regular Lot book as a passive
order. By default, the Regular Lot book appears in the order entry
screen in the normal market. Buyback orders can be placed through
the Regular Lot (RL) book in the Normal Market. The member can
place a buyback order by specifying BUYBACKORD in the Client
Account field in the order entry screen. Such company buyback orders
will be identified in MBP screen by an * (asterisk) indicator against
such orders.
(b)
Special Terms Book: Orders which have a special term attribute
attached to it are known as special terms orders. When a special term
order enters the system, it scans the orders existing in the Regular Lot
book as well as Special Terms Book. Currently this facility is not
available in the trading system.
(c)
Stop Loss Book: Stop Loss orders are released into the market when
the last traded price for that security in the normal market reaches or
surpasses the trigger price. Before triggering, the order does not
participate in matching and the order cannot get traded. Untriggered
stop loss orders are stacked in the stop loss book. The stop loss orders
can be either a market order or a limit price order. For buy SL orders,
the trigger price has to be less than or equal to the limit price.
Similarly, for sell SL orders, the trigger price has to be greater than or
equal to the limit price.
(d)
Negotiated Trade Book: Two trading members can negotiate a trade
outside the Exchange. To regularise the trade each trading member
has to enter the respective order in the system. To enter Negotiated
Trade order details, select book type as NT. It is mandatory for the
trading member to enter the counterparty trading member id. When
both parties to a trade enter orders, then the request goes to the
Exchange for approval. The Exchange can either approve the request
or reject it. Further, the Exchange has the discretion to send either of
the two orders or both the orders to the Regular Lot book so that the
orders are available to the entire market. Currently this facility is not
available in the trading system.
(e)
Odd Lot Book: The Odd Lot book can be selected in the order entry
screen in order to trade in the Odd Lot market. Order matching in this
market takes place between two orders on the basis of quantity and
price. To enter orders in the odd lot market, select the book type as
OL.
(f)
RETDEBT Order Book: RETDEBT market orders can be entered into
the system by selecting the RETDEBT Order book. These orders scan
only the RETDEBT Order book for potential matches. If no suitable
92
match can be found, the order is stored in the book as a passive order.
To enter orders in the RETDEBT market, select the book type as 'D'.
(g)
Auction Order Book: Auction order book stores orders entered by the
trading members to participate in the Exchange initiated auctions.
Auction orders can be initiator orders, competitor orders and solicitor
orders. For further details kindly refer to section on 'Auction'.
Symbol & Series: Securities can be selected to the order entry screen from
any of the inquiry screens such as MBP, OO, PT, AL, MI and SQ. In case the
security is not set up in the Market Watch screen, the Security List can also
be used to select the codes as default values.
Order entry in a security is not possible if that security is either suspended
from trading or not eligible to trade in a particular market.
Quantity: Quantity should be mentioned in multiples of regular lot size for
that security.
Price: A user has the option to either enter the order at the default price or
overwrite it with any other desired price. If a user mentions a price, it should
be in multiples of the tick size for that particular security and within the day s
minimum/maximum price range.
In case of stop loss orders, a user has the flexibility of specifying a limit pr
ice
along with the trigger price.
Order Types and Conditions: The system allows the trading members to
enter orders with various conditions attached to them as per their
requirements. These conditions are broadly divided into Time Conditions,
Quantity Conditions, Price Conditions and Other Conditions. Several
combinations of the above are allowed thereby providing enormous flexibility
to the users. The order types and conditions are summarised below:
a)
Time Conditions
DAY : A DAY order, as the name suggests is an order that is valid for the
day on which it is entered. If the order is not executed during the day, the
system cancels the order automatically at the end of the day.
IOC: An Immediate or Cancel (IOC) order allows the user to buy or sell a
security as soon as the order is released into the system, failing which the
order is cancelled from the system. Partial match is possible for the order,
and the unmatched portion of the order is cancelled immediately.
b)
Quantity Conditions
DQ: An order with a Disclosed Quantity (DQ) allows the user to disclose
only a portion of the order quantity to the market. For e.g. if the order
quantity is 10,000 and the disclosed quantity is 2,000, then only 2,000 is
disclosed to the market.
93
Security Wise User Order Quantity Limit (SUOQL) : An additional
facility for setting up Security wise User wise Order Quantity Limits
(SUOQL) for buy and/or sell has now been provided.
(a) The Corporate Manager is allowed to set the SUOQL separately for buy
and sell orders for each security for all the Branch Managers (BMs) and
Dealers (except inquiry only users) under him including himself.
(b) It is possible to modify the SUOQL anytime during trading hours.
SUOQL should not be set lower than the used limit for that security.
For a Symbol both Buy and Sell quantity can be set to unlimited.
(c) The used limit field is displayed for buy and sell separately for each
security.
(d) Any activity like order modification or cancellation gets reflected in
used limit figure for the respective security and respective side.
(e) This limit is applicable for a symbol across all series, across all the
markets. SUOQL setting option is given in supplementary menu.
(f) A bulk upload facility to set the security wise buy sell limit through a
(comma separated values) csv file has been provided. In case of
failure to upload a particular record/s, failure message is written in the
input file in the form of an error code. The file is reusable.
(g) SUOQL bulk upload facility is not available during the market hours.
(h) After the limit is set successfully, the message is sent to the respective
CM/BM/dealer.
(i) A facility to limit trading to the securities set up in the SUOQL has
been provided. If limit trading option is set for a user, then the user is
allowed to place orders only for Symbols set in his SUOQL list by the
CM. It would however be possible to enable this facility without having
any security in the SUOQL list, which in turn prevents the user from
entering of any fresh orders.
(j) Corporate Manager has been given a facility to allow or disallow a user
from entering Index orders. By default all dealers will be allowed to
place index orders. Index orders are not validated for SUOQL limits.
However, orders once entered are updated in the used limits.
(k) It is possible that dealer is restricted to enter order in particular
security, but allowed to enter index order and that restricted security
is a part of Nifty.
(l) If the order is modified by CM/BM for a respective dealer then the used
limit will be updated accordingly, but in this case it can exceed the set
limit.
(m)
SUOQL used limit will not be validated and updated for Auction
orders.
Quantity Freeze: All orders with very large quantities receive quantity alert
at member terminal. If members enter any order exceeding the lowest of the
quantity given below, it results in an alert which reads as Order entered
exceeds alert quantity limit. Confirm availability of adequate capital to
94
proceed and only after the member clicks the button Yes the order will be
further processed for execution.
Quantity Freeze parameters:
0.5% of the issue size of the security or

value of the order is around Rs. 2.5 crores or
a global alert quantity limit of more than 25000 irrespective of the
issue size of the security, whichever is less.
c) Price Conditions
Market Orders: Market orders are orders for which price is specified as
'MKT' at the time the order is entered. For such orders, the system
determines the price.
Stop-Loss: This facility allows the user to release an order into the
system, after the market price of the security reaches or crosses a
threshold price called trigger price.
Trigger Price: Price at which an order gets triggered from the stop loss
book.
Limit Price: Price of the orders after triggering from stop loss book.
Price Freeze: Since no price bands are applicable in respect of securities
on which derivative products are available or securities included in indices
on which derivative products are available, in order to prevent members
from entering orders at non-genuine prices in such securities, the
exchange has decided to introduce operating range of 20% for such
securities. Any order above or below 20% over the base price should
come to the exchange as a price freeze.
Market Price Protection
Market Price protection functionality gives an option to a trader to limit
the risk of a market order, within a pre-set percentage of the Last Trade
Price (LTP).The pre-set Market price protection percentage is by default
set to 5% of the LTP. The users can change the pre-set Market price
protection percentage from the Order Limit Screen which can be invoked
from the Supplementary Menu. The set percentage will be applicable till
the Ntreltdr EXE is re-inflated.
At the time of order entry, the user can press (Page Up) when the cursor
is in the price field. In case of a buy order, this defaults a price value,
which is greater than LTP by a pre-set percentage. In case of a sell order
the default value will be lesser than the LTP by a pre set percentage. The
time condition in both cases will automatically change to IOC. The user
has the option to change any of the fields. Since the calculations are
based on LTP of broadcast for the security is not received, the default
value will be 'MARKET'
95
d) Other Conditions
PRO/CLI: A user can enter orders on his own account or on behalf of
clients. By default, the system assumes that the user is entering orders on
the trading member s own account.
Participant Code: By default, the system displays the trading member id
of the user in the participant field. Thus, all trades resulting from an order
are to be settled by that trading member. Non-custodial institutional
trade (NCIT) orders can be marked by the user at the order entry level
itself. Only a valid participant code can be entered. In case the participant
is suspended a message to this effect is displayed to the user on the order
entry screen.
Branch Order Value Limit Check: In addition to the checks performed
for the fields explained above, every order entry is checked for the branch
order value limit. In case the set order value limit is exhausted the
subsequent order is rejected by the system.
Order Modification
All orders can be modified in the system till the time they do not get fully
traded and only during market hours. Once an order is modified, the branch
order value limit for the branch gets adjusted automatically. Order
modification is rejected if it results in a price freeze, message displayed is
CFO request rejected .
Order Cancellation
Order cancellation functionality can be performed only for orders which have
not been fully or partially traded (for the untraded part of partially traded
orders only) and only during market hours and in preopen period.
Order Matching
The buy and sell orders are matched on Book Type, Symbol, Series, Quantity
and Price.
Matching Priority: The best sell order is the order with the lowest price and
a best buy order is the order with the highest price. The unmatched orders
are queued in the system by the following priority:
(a) By Price: A buy order with a higher price gets a higher priority and
similarly, a sell order with a lower price gets a higher priority. E.g. Consider
the following buy orders:
1) 100 shares @ Rs. 35 at time 10:30 a.m.
2) 500 shares @ Rs. 35.05 at time 10:43 a.m.
The second order price is greater than the first order price and therefore is
the best buy order.
96
(b) By Time: If there is more than one order at the same price, the order
entered earlier gets a higher priority. E.g. Consider the following sell orders:
Both orders have the same price but they were entered in the system at
different time. The first order was entered before the second order and
therefore is the best sell order.
As and when valid orders are entered or received by the system, they are first
numbered, time stamped and then scanned for a potential match. This means
that each order has a distinctive order number and a unique time stamp on it.
If a match is not found, then the orders are stored in the books as per the
price/time priority.
An active buy order matches with the best passive sell order if the price of the
passive sell order is less than or equal to the price of the active buy order.
Similarly, an active sell order matches with the best passive buy order if the
price of the passive buy order is greater than or equal to the price of the
active sell order.
3.3.3 Trade Management
A trade is an activity in which a buy and a sell order match with each other.
Matching of two orders is done automatically by the system. Whenever a
trade takes place, the system sends a trade confirmation message to each of
the users involved in the trade. The trade confirmation slip gets printed at the
trader workstation of the user with a unique trade number. The system also
broadcasts a message to the entire market through the ticker window
displaying the details of the trade.
Trade Verification
With a facility to verify trades on the NSE website, an investor who has
received a contract note from a trading member of the Exchange, can check
whether the trade has been executed on the Exchange. This facility is
available on the NSE website for the Capital Market, Derivatives (F&O) and
Retail Debt Market segments.
Trade details are available for verification on the same day (i.e. T itself) aft
er
19:00 hours IST as well as trade details of all trades for the last 5 trading
days are available on the website. (i.e. trades executed on 'T' day, can be
verified till the T+4th day. The investor needs to input minimum details of the
trade viz. client code (provided by the trading member), security details
(symbol and series), order number, trade number, trade quantity and price
(excluding brokerage). All the above details are mandatory. If an identical
match is found for the details provided, a confirmation along with the details
of the trade is displayed to the investor. If no match is found, a message is
97
displayed to that effect. Where no match is found, investors are advised to
contact their trading member for clarification.
Trade Cancellation
The user can use trade cancellation screen for cancelling trades done during
the day. If the user is a corporate manager of a trading member firm, he can
request for trade cancellation for the trades of any dealer of the trading
members firm and if he is a branch manager of a branch, then he can request
for trade cancellation for the trades for any dealer of the branch of the tradin
g
member firm.
The user can request for trade cancellation either from the previous trades
screen or by using the function key provided in the workstation. The trade
cancellation request is sent to the Exchange for approval and message to that
effect is displayed in the message window. The counterparty to the trade also
receives the message. The counterparty then has to make similar request on
the same trading day. Once both the parties to trade send the trade
cancellation request, the Exchange either approves or rejects it. The message
to that effect is displayed in the message window.
When a request for the trade cancellation is approved by the Exchange, the
parties to trade receive a system message confirming the trade cancellation
and the trade cancellation slip is printed at their respective trader
workstations. If the Exchange rejects the trade cancellation request, the trade
cancellation rejection slip is printed at their respective trader workstations.
If
counter party to the trade does not entered a trade cancellation request the
Exchange reject the trade cancellation request.
3.3.4 Auction
Auctions are initiated by the Exchange on behalf of trading members for
settlement related reasons. The main reasons are shortages,bad deliveries
and objections. There are three types of participants in the auction market:
(a) Initiator: The party who initiates the auction process is called an initiato
r.
(b) Competitor: The party who enters on the same side as of the initiator is
called a competitor.
(c) Solicitor: The party who enters on the opposite side as of the initiator is
called a solicitor.
The trading members can participate in the Exchange initiated auctions by
entering orders as a solicitor. E.g. If the Exchange conducts a Buy-In auction,
the trading members entering sell orders are called solicitors.
When the auction starts, the competitor period for that auction also starts.
Competitor period is the period during which competitor order entries are
allowed. Competitor orders are the orders which compete with the initiator s
order i.e. if the initiator s order is a buy order, then all the buy orders for th
at
auction other than the initiator s order are competitor orders. And if the
98
initiator order is a sell order then all the sell orders for that auction other
than
the initiators order are competitor orders.
After the competitor period ends, the solicitor period for that auction starts.
Solicitor period is the period during which solicitor order entries are allowed.
Solicitor orders are the orders which are opposite to the initiator order i.e. i
f
the initiator order is a buy order, then all the sell orders for that auction ar
e
solicitor orders and if the initiator order is a sell order, then all the buy or
ders
for that auction are solicitor orders.
After the solicitor period, order matching takes place. The system calculates
trading price for the auction and all possible trades for the auction are
generated at the calculated trading price. After this the auction is said to be
complete. Competitor period and solicitor period for any auction are set by
the Exchange.
Entering Auction Orders: Auction order entry allows the user to enter
orders into auctions that are currently running.
Auction Order Modification: The user is not allowed to modify any auction
orders.
Auction Order Cancellation: The user can cancel any solicitor order placed
by him in any auction provided the solicitor period for that auction is not over
.
Auction Order Matching: When the solicitor period for an auction is over,
auction order matching starts for that auction. During this process, the
system calculates the trading price for the auction based on the initiator order
and the orders entered during the competitor and the solicitor period. At
present for Exchange initiated auctions, the matching takes place at the
respective solicitor order prices.
All auction orders are entered into the auction order book. The rules for
matching of auctions are similar to that of the regular lot book except for the
following points:a)
Auction order matching takes place at the end of the solicitor period for the
auction.
b) Auction matching takes place only across orders belonging to the same
auction.
c) All auction trades take place at the auction price.
Example 1: Member A places a buy order for 1000 shares of ABC Ltd. in the
NEAT system at 11:22:01 for Rs.155 per share. Member B places a sell order
for 2000 shares of ABC Ltd. at 11:22:02 for Rs.150 per share. Assume that
no other orders were available in the system during this time. Whether the
trade will take place and if yes, at what price?
Yes, 1000 shares will get traded at Rs.155 per share (the passive price).
99
Example 2: Auction is held in TISCO for 5,000 shares.
a) The closing price of TISCO on that day was Rs.155.00
b) The last traded price of TISCO on that day was Rs.150.00
c) The price of TISCO last Friday was Rs.151.00
d) The previous days' close price of TISCO was Rs.160.00
What is the maximum allowable price at which the member can put a sell
order in the auction for TISCO? (Assuming that the price band applicable for
auction market is +/-15%)
Max price applicable in auction = Previous days' close price * Price band
= Rs.160*1.15 =Rs.184.00
3.3.5 Internet Broking
SEBI Committee has approved the use of Internet as an Order Routing
System (ORS) for communicating clients' orders to the exchanges through
brokers. ORS enables investors to place orders with his broker and have
control over the information and quotes and to hit the quote on an on-line
basis. Once the broker s system receives the order, it checks the authenticity
of the client electronically and then routes the order to the appropriate
exchange for execution. On execution of the order, it is confirmed on real
time basis. Investor receives reports on margin requirement, payments and
delivery obligations through the system. His ledger and portfolio account get
updated online.
NSE launched internet trading in early February 2000. It is the first stock
exchange in the country to provide web-based access to investors to trade
directly on the exchange. The orders originating from the PCs of the investors
are routed through the Internet to the trading terminals of the designated
brokers with whom they are connected and further to the exchange for trade
execution. Soon after these orders get matched and result into trades, the
investors get confirmation about them on their PCs through the same internet
route.
3.3.6 Wireless Application Protocol
SEBI has also approved trading through wireless medium on WAP Platform.
NSE.IT launched the Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) in November 2000.
This provides access to its order book through the hand held devices, which
use WAP technology. This serves primarily retail investors who are mobile and
want to trade from any place when the market prices for stocks at their
choice are attractive. Only SEBI registered members who have been granted
permission by the Exchange for providing Internet based trading services can
introduce the service after obtaining permission from the Exchange.
100
3.3.7 Trading Rules
Insider Trading
Insider trading is prohibited and is considered an offence. The SEBI
(Prohibition of Insider Trading) Regulations, 1992 prohibit an insider from
dealing (on his own behalf or on behalf of others) in listed securities when in
possession of unpublished price sensitive information or communicate,
counsel or procure directly or indirectly any unpublished price sensitive
information to any person who while in possession of such unpublished price
sensitive information should not deal in securities. Price sensitive information
is any information, which if published, is likely to materially affect the price
of
the securities of a company. Such information may relate to the financial
results of the company, intended declaration of dividends, issue of securities
or buy back of securities, amalgamation, mergers, takeovers, any major
policy changes, etc. SEBI, on the basis of any complaint or otherwise,
investigates/inspects the allegation of insider trading. On the basis of the
report of the investigation, SEBI may prosecute persons found prima facie
guilty of insider trading in an appropriate court or pass such orders as it may
deem fit. Based on inspection, an adjudicating officer appointed by SEBI can
impose monetary penalty.
In order to strengthen insider trading regulations, SEBI mandated a code of
conduct for listed companies, its employees, analysts, market intermediaries
and professional firms. The insider trading regulations were amended to
include requirements for initial and continual disclosure of shareholding by
directors or officers, who are insiders, and substantial shareholders (holding
more than 5% shares/voting rights) of listed companies. The listed companies
are also mandated to adopt a code of disclosure with regard to price sensitive
information, market rumours, and reporting of shareholding/ownership, etc.
Unfair Trade Practices
The SEBI (Prohibition of Fraudulent and Unfair Trade Practices in relation to
the Securities Market) Regulations, 2003 enable SEBI to investigate into
cases of market manipulation and fraudulent and unfair trade practices. These
regulations empower SEBI to investigate into violations committed by any
person, including an investor, issuer or an intermediary associated with the
securities market. The regulations define frauds as acts, expression, omission
or concealment committed whether in a deceitful manner or not by a person
or by any other person or agent while dealing in securities in order to induce
another person with his connivance or his agent to deal in securities, whether
or not there is any wrongful gain or avoidance of any loss. The regulations
specifically prohibit dealing in securities in a fraudulent manner, market
manipulation, misleading statements to induce sale or purchase of securities,
and unfair trade practices relating to securities. SEBI can conduct
investigation, suo moto or upon information received by it, through an
investigation officer in respect of conduct and affairs of any person
buying/selling/dealing in securities. Based on the report of the investigating
101
officer, SEBI can initiate action for suspension or cancellation of registration
of an intermediary.
Takeovers
The restructuring of companies by way of takeover is governed by the SEBI
(Substantial Acquisition of Shares and Takeovers) Regulations, 1997. As per
the regulations
No acquirer shall acquire shares or voting rights which (taken together

with shares or voting rights, if any, held by him or by persons acting in
concert with him), entitle such acquirer to exercise to exercise 15% or
more of the voting rights in a company, unless such acquirer makes a
public announcement to acquire shares of such company in accordance
with the regulations.
No acquirer who, together with persons acting in concert with him, has
acquired, in accordance with the provisions of law, 15 percent or more
but less than 55 percent of the shares or voting rights in a company,
shall acquire, either by himself or through or with person acting in
concert with him, additional shares or voting rights entitling him to
exercise more than 5 percent of the voting rights, in any financial year
ending on 31st March unless such acquirer makes a public
announcement to acquire shares in accordance with the regulations.
No acquirer, who together with persons acting in concert with him
holds, 55 percent or more but less than 75 percent of the shares or
voting rights in a target company, shall acquirer either by himself or
though persons acting in concert with hi him any additional shares or
voting rights therein, unless he makes a public announcement to
acquire shares in accordance with the Regulations.
Where an acquirer (together with persons acting in concert with him)
holds 55% or more but less than 75% of the shares or voting rights
in a target company, is desirous of consolidating his holding while
ensuring that the public shareholding in the target company does not
fall below the minimum level permitted by the Listing Agreement, he
may do so only by making a public announcement in accordance with
the Regulations.
Irrespective of whether or not there has been any acquisition of
shares or voting rights in a company, no acquirer shall acquire control
over the target company, unless such person makes a public
announcement to acquire shares and acquires such shares in
accordance with the regulations. Provided that it does not apply to any
change in control which takes place in pursuance to a special
resolution passed by the shareholders in a general meeting.
The public offer made by the acquirer to the shareholders of the target
company shall be for a minimum twenty percent of the voting capital
of the company and where the public offer is made under sub-
regulation 2A of regulation 11 the minimum size of the public offer
shall be lesser of the following-(a) twenty percent of the voting capital
of the company; or (b) such other lesser percentage of the voting
102
capital of the company as would, assuming full subscription to the
offer, enable the acquirer, together with the persons acting in concert
with him, to increase his holding to the maximum level possible, which
is consistent with the target company meeting the requirements of
minimum public shareholding laid down in the Listing Agreement.
The regulations give enough scope to existing shareholders for consolidation
and also cover the scenario of indirect acquisition of control. The applications
for takeovers are scrutinized by the Takeover Panel constituted by SEBI
(Regulation 4). The public announcement to be made is required to be made
in the newspaper. Simultaneously with publication of the public
announcement in the newspapers, a copy of the same should be submitted to
SEBI though merchant banker, to all the stock exchanges on which the shares
of the company are listed for being notified on the notice board and to the
target company at its registered office for being placed before the Board of
Directors of the company.
Further, the regulations also deals with appointment of merchant banker,
timing of public announcement of offer, contents of public announcement of
offer, Offer price , Creeping acquisition, General obligations of the acquirer,
General Obligations of the board of directors of the target company, General
obligations of the merchant banker, Competitive bid etc.
Buy back
Buy back aims at improving liquidity in the shares of companies and helps
corporates in enhancing the shareholders wealth. Under the SEBI (Buy Back
of Securities) Regulations, 1998, a company is permitted to buy back its
shares from:
a) the existing security holders on a on a proportionate basis through the
tender offer,
b) the open market through stock exchanges, and book building process;
and
c) shareholders holding odd lot shares.
The regulations provide for extensive disclosures in the explanatory statement
to be annexed to the notice for the general meeting and the letter of offer.
The company has to disclose the pre and post-buy back holdings of the
promoters. With a view to ensure completion of the buy back process
speedily, the regulations provide for time bound steps in every mode.
For example, as per the offer procedure prescribed under Regulation 10 an
offer for buy back shall not remain open for more than 30 days and the
verification of shares received in buy back has to be completed within 15 days
of the closure of the offer. The payments for accepted securities has to be
made within 7 days of the completion of verification and bought back shares
have to be extinguished and physically destroyed within 7 days of the date of
the payment.
103
To ensure security for performance of its obligation, the company making an
offer for buy back will have to open an escrow account.
Price Bands
Stock market volatility is generally a cause of concern for both policy makers
as well as investors. To curb excessive volatility, SEBI has prescribed a
system of price bands. The price bands or circuit breakers bring about a
coordinated trading halt in all equity and equity derivatives markets nationwide
.
An index-based market-wide circuit breaker system at three stages of
the index movement either way at 10%, 15% and 20% has been prescribed.
The breakers are triggered by movement of either S&P CNX Nifty or Sensex,
whichever is breached earlier (please see chapter 5 for details). As an
additional measure of safety, individual scrip-wise price bands have been
fixed as below:
Daily price bands of 2% (either way) on securities as specified by the

Exchange.
Exchange.
Exchange.
No price bands are applicable on: scrips on which derivative products
are available or scrips included in indices on which derivative products
are available. In order to prevent members from entering orders at
non-genuine prices in such securities, the Exchange has fixed
operating range of 20% for such securities.
Price bands of 20% (either way) on all remaining scrips (including
debentures, warrants, preference shares etc).
The price bands for the securities in the Limited Physical Market are the same
as those applicable for the securities in the Normal Market. For auction
market the price bands of 20% are applicable. There are no price bands for
those securities which are available for trading in the Futures and Options
segment and securities which form part of the indices on which trading is
available in the Futures and Options segment.
3.4 CLEARING AND SETTLEMENT
3.4.1 Clearing and Settlement Mechanism
Introduction
The clearing and settlement mechanism in Indian securities market has
witnessed several innovations. These include use of the state-of-art
information technology, compression of settlement cycle, dematerialisation
and electronic transfer of securities, securities lending and borrowing,
104
professionalisation of trading members, fine-tuned risk management system,
emergence of clearing corporations to assume counterparty risk etc.
The stock exchanges in India were following a system of account period
settlement for cash market transactions and then the T+2 rolling settlement
was introduced for all securities. The members receive the funds/securities in
accordance with the pay-in/pay-out schedules notified by the respective
exchanges.
Given the growing volume of trades and market volatility, the time gap
between trading and settlement gives rise to settlement risk. In recognition of
this, the exchanges and their clearing corporations employ risk management
practices to ensure timely settlement of trades. The regulators have also
prescribed elaborate margining and capital adequacy standards to secure
market integrity and protect the interests of investors.
The trades are settled irrespective of default by a member and the exchange
follows up with the defaulting member subsequently for recovery of his dues
to the exchange. Due to setting up of the Clearing Corporation, the market
has full confidence that settlements will take place on time and will be
completed irrespective of possible default by isolated trading members.
Movement of securities has become almost instantaneous in the
dematerialised environment.
Two depositories viz., National Securities Depositories Ltd. (NSDL) and
Central Depositories Services Ltd. (CDSL) provide electronic transfer of
securities and more than 99% of turnover is settled in dematerialised form.
All actively traded scrips are held, traded and settled in demat form. The
obligations of members are downloaded to members/custodians by the
clearing agency. The members/custodians make available the required
securities in their pool accounts with depository participants (DPs) by the
prescribed pay-in time for securities. The depository transfers the securities
from the pool accounts of members/custodians to the settlement account of
the clearing agency. As per the schedule determined by the clearing agency,
the securities are transferred on the pay-out day by the depository from the
settlement account of the clearing agency to the pool accounts of
members/custodians. The pay-in and pay-out of securities is effected on the
same day for all settlements. Select banks have been empanelled by clearing
agency for electronic transfer of funds. The members are required to maintain
accounts with any of these banks.
The members are informed electronically of their pay-in obligations of funds.
The members make available required funds in their accounts with clearing
banks by the prescribed pay-in day. The clearing agency forwards funds
obligations file to clearing banks which, in turn, debit the accounts of
members and credit the account of the clearing agency.
105
In some cases, the clearing agency runs an electronic file to debit members
accounts with clearing banks and credit its own account. On pay-out day, the
funds are transferred by the clearing banks from the account of the clearing
agency to the accounts of members as per the member s obligations. In the
T+2 rolling settlement, the pay-in and pay-out of funds as well as securities
take place 2 working days after the trade date.
Transaction Cycle
A person holding assets (securities/funds), either to meet his liquidity needs
or to reshuffle his holdings in response to changes in his perception about risk
and return of the assets, decides to buy or sell the securities. He finds out th
e
right broker and instructs him to place buy/sell order on an exchange.
The order is converted to a trade as soon as it finds a matching sell/buy
order. The trades are cleared to determine the obligations of counterparties to
deliver securities/funds as per settlement schedule. Buyer/seller delivers
funds/securities and receives securities/ funds and acquires ownership over
them. A securities transaction cycle is presented in Figure 3.2
Figure 3.2: Transaction cycle
Clearing of
Trades
Decision to
Trade
Settlement
of Trades
Placing Order
Transaction Cycle
TradeExecutionFunds/
Securities
Settlement Process
While NSE provides a platform for trading to its trading members, the
National Securities Clearing Corporation Ltd. (NSCCL) determines the
106
funds/securities obligations of the trading members and ensures that trading
members meet their obligations. NSCCL becomes the legal counterparty to
the net settlement obligations of every member. This principle is called
`novation' and NSCCL is obligated to meet all settlement obligations,
regardless of member defaults, without any discretion.
Once a member fails on any obligations, NSCCL immediately cuts off trading
and initiates recovery. The clearing banks and depositories provide the
necessary interface between the custodians/clearing members (who clear for
the trading
members or their own transactions) for settlement of funds/securities
obligations of trading members.
The core functions involved in the process are:
a) Trade Recording: The key details about the trades are recorded to
provide basis for settlement. These details are automatically recorded
in the electronic trading system of the exchanges.
b)
Trade Confirmation: The counterparties to trade agree upon the
terms of trade like security, quantity, price, and settlement date, but
not the counterparty which is the NSCCL. The electronic system
automatically generates confirmation by direct participants. The
ultimate buyers/sellers of securities also affirm the terms, as the
funds/securities would flow from them, although the direct participants
are responsible for settlement of trade.
c)
Determination of Obligation: The next step is determination of what
counter-parties owe, and what counter-parties are due to receive on
the settlement date. The NSCCL interposes itself as a central
counterparty between the counterparties to trades and nets the
positions so that a member has security wise net obligation to receive
or deliver a security and has to either pay or receive funds.
d)
Pay-in of Funds and Securities: The members bring in their
funds/securities to the NSCCL. They make available required securities
in designated accounts with the depositories by the prescribed pay-in
time. The depositories move the securities available in the accounts of
members to the account of the NSCCL. Likewise members with funds
obligations make available required funds in the designated accounts
with clearing banks by the prescribed pay-in time. The NSCCL sends
electronic instructions to the clearing banks to debit member s
accounts to the extent of payment obligations. The banks process
these instructions, debit accounts of members and credit accounts of
the NSCCL.
e)
Pay-out of Funds and Securities: After processing for shortages of
funds/securities and arranging for movement of funds from surplus
107
banks to deficit banks through RBI clearing, the NSCCL sends
electronic instructions to the depositories/clearing banks to release
pay-out of securities/funds. The depositories and clearing banks debit
accounts of the NSCCL and credit accounts of members. Settlement is
complete upon release of pay-out of funds and securities to
custodians/members. The settlement process for transactions in
securities in the CM segment of NSE is presented in the Figure 3.3.
f)
Risk Management: A sound risk management system is integral to
an efficient settlement system. The NSCCL ensures that trading
members obligations are commensurate with their net worth. It has
put in place a comprehensive risk management system, which is
constantly monitored and upgraded to pre-empt market failures. It
monitors the track record and performance of members and their net
worth; undertakes on-line monitoring of members positions and
exposure in the market, collects margins from members and
automatically disables members if the limits are breached.
Figure 3.3: Settlement Process in CM segment of NSE
NSE
NSCCL
Custodians/CMs
Clearing BanksDepositories
1
8
6 7
9
10
5
2 3
4
11
Explanations:
(1)
Trade details from Exchange to NSCCL (real-time and end of day
trade file).
(2)
NSCCL notifies the consummated trade details to CMs/custodians who
affirm back. Based on the affirmation, NSCCL applies multilateral
netting and determines obligations.
108
(3) Download of obligation and pay-in advice of funds/securities.
(4) Instructions to clearing banks to make funds available by pay-in time.
(5) Instructions to depositories to make securities available by pay-intime.
(6) Pay-in of securities (NSCCL advises depository to debit pool account
of custodians/CMs and credit its account and depository does it).
(7) Pay-in of funds (NSCCL advises Clearing Banks to debit account of
custodians/CMs and credit its account and clearing bank does it).
(8) Pay-out of securities (NSCCL advises depository to credit pool account
of custodians/CMs and debit its account and depository does it).
(9) Pay-out of funds (NSCCL advises Clearing Banks to credit account of
custodians/CMs and debit its account and clearing bank does it).
(10) Depository informs custodians/CMs through DPs.
(11) Clearing Banks inform custodians/CMs.
Settlement Agencies
The NSCCL, with the help of clearing members, custodians, clearing banks
and depositories settles the trades executed on exchanges. The roles of each
of these entities are explained below:
(a) NSCCL: The NSCCL is responsible for post-trade activities of a stock
exchange. Clearing and settlement of trades and risk management are its
central functions. It clears all trades, determines obligations of members,
arranges for pay-in of funds/securities, receives funds/securities,
processes for shortages in funds/securities, arranges for pay-out of
funds/securities to members, guarantees settlement, and collects and
maintains margins/collateral/base capital/other funds.
(b) Clearing Members: They are responsible for settling their obligations as
determined by the NSCCL. They have to make available funds and/or
securities in the designated accounts with clearing bank/depositories, as
the case may be, to meet their obligations on the settlement day. In the
capital market segment, all trading members of the Exchange are required
to become the Clearing Member of the Clearing Corporation.
(c) Custodians: Custodian is a clearing member but not a trading member.
He settles trades assigned to him by trading members. He is required to
confirm whether he is going to settle a particular trade or not. If it is
confirmed, the NSCCL assigns that obligation to that custodian and the
custodian is required to settle it on the settlement day. If the custodian
rejects the trade, the obligation is assigned back to the trading / clearing
member.
(d) Clearing Banks: Clearing banks are a key link between the clearing
members and NSCCL for funds settlement. Every clearing member is
required to open a dedicated clearing account with one of the clearing
banks. Based on his obligation as determined through clearing, the
clearing member makes funds available in the clearing account for the
pay-in and receives funds in case of a pay-out.
109
(e) Depositories: Depositories help in the settlement of the dematerialised
securities. Each custodian/clearing member is required to maintain a
clearing pool account with the depositories. He is required to make
available the required securities in the designated account on settlement
day. The depository runs an electronic file to transfer the securities from
accounts of the custodians/clearing member to that of NSCCL. As per the
schedule of allocation of securities determined by the NSCCL, the
depositories transfer the securities on the pay-out day from the account of
the NSCCL to those of members/custodians.
(f) Professional Clearing Member: NSCCL admits special category of
members namely, professional clearing members. Professional Clearing
Member (PCM) may clear and settle trades executed for their clients
(individuals, institutions etc.). In such an event, the functions and
responsibilities of the PCM would be similar to Custodians. PCMs may also
undertake clearing and settlement responsibility for trading members. In
such a case, the PCM would settle the trades carried out by the trading
members connected to them. The onus for settling the trade would be
thus on the PCM and not the trading member. A PCM has no trading rights
but has only clearing rights, i.e. he just clears the trades of his associate
trading members and institutional clients.
Risks in Settlement
The following two kinds of risks are inherent in a settlement system:
(1)
Counterparty Risk: This arises if parties do not discharge their
obligations fully when due or at any time thereafter. This has two
components, namely replacement cost risk prior to settlement and
principal risk during settlement.
(a) The
replacement cost risk arises from the failure of one of the
parties to transaction. While the non-defaulting party tries to
replace the original transaction at current prices, he loses the
profit that has accrued on the transaction between the date of
original transaction and date of replacement transaction. The
seller/buyer of the security loses this unrealised profit if the
current price is below/above the transaction price. Both parties
encounter this risk as prices are uncertain. It has been reduced
by reducing time gap between transaction and settlement and by
legally binding netting systems.
(b) The principal risk arises if a party discharges his obligations but
the counterparty defaults. The seller/buyer of the security suffers
this risk when he delivers/makes payment, but does not receive
payment/delivery. This risk can be eliminated by delivery vs.
payment mechanism which ensures delivery only against
payment. This has been reduced by having a central counterparty
110
(NSCCL) which becomes the buyer to every seller and the seller
to every buyer.
(c)
A variant of counterparty risk is liquidity risk which arises if one
of the parties to transaction does not settle on the settlement
date, but later. The seller/buyer who does not receive
payment/delivery when due, may have to borrow funds/securities
to complete his payment/delivery obligations.
(d)
Another variant is the third party risk which arises if the parties
to trade are permitted or required to use the services of a third
party which fails to perform. For example, the failure of a clearing
bank which helps in payment can disrupt settlement. This risk is
reduced by allowing parties to have accounts with multiple banks.
Similarly, the users of custodial services face risk if the
concerned custodian becomes insolvent, acts negligently etc.
(2)
System Risk: This comprises of operational, legal and systemic risks.
The operational risk arises from possible operational failures such as
errors, fraud, outages etc. The legal risk arises if the laws or regulations
do not support enforcement of settlement obligations or are uncertain.
Systemic risk arises when failure of one of the parties to discharge his
obligations leads to failure by other parties. The domino effect of
successive failures can cause a failure of the settle ment system. These
risks have been contained by enforcement of an elaborate margining
and capital adequacy standards to secure market integrity, settlement
guarantee funds to provide counter-party guarantee, legal backing for
settlement activities and business continuity plan, etc.
3.4.2 Rolling Settlement
Introduction
Under rolling settlement, all trades executed on a trading day are settled X
days later. This is called T+X rolling settlement, where T is the trade date
and X is the number of business days after trade date on which settlement
takes place. The rolling settlement has started on T+2 basis in India, implying
that the outstanding positions at the end of the day T are compulsorily
settled 2 days after the trade date.
Rolling settlement was first introduced in India by OTCEI. As dematerialisation
took off, NSE provided an option to settle the trades in demat securities on
rolling basis. In January 2000, SEBI made rolling settlement compulsory for
trades in 10 scrips selected on the basis of the criteria that they were in the
compulsory demat list and had daily turnover of about Rs.1 crore or more.
This list, however, did not include scrips, which had carried forward trading
facility. SEBI reviewed the progress of rolling settlement in February 2000.
Consequent on the review, SEBI added a total of 156 scrips under rolling
settlement. 74 companies, which had changed names to infotech companies,
111
were included in compulsory rolling settlement from May 8, 2000. 31 NBFCs,
which are listed and traded on the BSE, but whose applications for certificate
of registration were rejected by RBI, were covered under compulsory rolling
settlement from May 8, 2000. 17 scrips, which exhibited high volatility (i.e.,
of more than 110% for 7 weeks or more in the last 10 weeks) were also
included in compulsory rolling settlement from May 8, 2000. In addition, 34
companies out of 199 companies, which were already included in compulsory
demat trading for all investors and did not have carry forward facility in any
of the exchanges and had signed agreements with both the depositories were
included for compulsory rolling settlement from March 21, 2000.
Following Finance Minister s announcement on March 13, 2001 that the rolling
settlement would be extended to 200 category A stocks in MCFS (Modified
Carried Forward System), ALBM (Automated Lending and Borrowing
Mechanism) and BLESS (Borrowing and Lending Security Scheme) by July,
2001, SEBI decided that all 263 scrips included in the ALBM/BLESS or MCFS
in any stock exchange or in the BSE-200 list would be traded only in the
compulsory rolling settlement on all the exchanges from July 2, 2001.
Further, SEBI mandated rolling settlement for the remaining securities from
December 31, 2001. SEBI introduced T+5 rolling settlement in equity market
from July 2001. Subsequently shortened the settlement cycle to T+3 from
April 1, 2002. After having gained experience of T+3 rolling settlement and
also taking further steps such as introduction of STP (Straight Through
Processing), it was felt appropriate to further reduce the settlement cycle to
T+2 thereby reducing the risk in the market and to protect the interest of
investors. As a result, SEBI, as a step towards easy flow of funds and
securities, introduced T+2 rolling settlement in Indian equity market from 1st
April 2003. The time schedule prescribed by SEBI for depositories and
custodians for T+2 rolling settlement is as given in Table 3.5.
Table 3.5: Time schedule of Rolling Settlement:
S.No Day Time Description of
activity
1 T Trade Day
2 T+1 By 1.00 pm Confirmation of all
trades (including
custodial trades).
By 2.30 pm Processing and
Downloading of
obligation files to
brokers/custodians
3 T+2 By 11.00 am Pay-in of securities
and funds
By 1.30 pm Pay-out of securities
and funds
112
As per SEBI directive, the Custodians should adhere to the following activities
for implementation of T+2 rolling settlement w.e.f. April 1, 2003:
1. Confirmation of the institutional trades by the custodians latest by 1.00
p.m. on T+1.
2. Pay-in to be made before 11:00 a.m. on T+2.
Rolling settlement offers several advantages over account period settlement:
(a) The account period settlement does not discriminate between an investor
transacting on the first day and an investor transacting on the last day of
the trading period, as trades are clubbed together for the purposes of
settlement and all investors realise the securities and/or funds together.
Hence some investors have to wait longer for settlement of their
transactions. Under rolling settlement, the investors trading on a
particular day are treated differently from the investors trading on the
preceding or succeeding day. All of them wait for X days from the trade
date for settlement. Further, the gap between the trade date and the
settlement date is less under rolling settlement making both securities and
funds easily convertible.
(b) The account period settlement combines the features of cash as well as
futures markets and hence distorts price discovery process. In contrast,
rolling settlement, which segregates cash and futures markets and
thereby removes excessive speculation, helps in better price discovery.
(c) Account period settlement allows build up of large positions over a trading
period of five days and consequently, there is a pressure to close them
out on the last trading day, leading to significant market volatility. This
does not happen under rolling settlement, where positions can be built
during a day only.
(d) There is scope for both intra-settlement and intra-day speculation under
account period settleme nt, which allows large outstanding positions and
hence poses greater settlement risks. In contrast, since all open positions
under rolling settlement at the end of a date T are necessarily settled X
working days later, it limits the outstanding positions and reduces
settlement risk.
(e) Till recently, it was possible to shift positions from one exchange to
another under account period as they follow different trading cycles.
Rolling settlement took care of this by making trading cycle uniform.
Settlement Cycle
The NSCCL clears and settles trades as per well-defined settlement cycle. The
settlement cycle for the CM segment of NSE is presented in Table 3.6. NSCCL
notifies the consummated trade details to clearing members/custodians on
the trade day. The custodians affirm back the trades to NSCCL by T+1 day.
Based on the affirmation, NSCCL nets the positions of counterparties to
determine their obligations. A clearing member has to pay-in/pay-out funds
and/or securities.
113
A member has a security-wise net obligation to receive/deliver a security. The
obligations are netted for a member across all securities to determine his fund
obligations and he has to either pay or receive funds. Members pay-in/payout
obligations are determined latest by T+1 day and are forwarded to them
on the same day so that they can settle their obligations on T+2 day. The
securities/funds are paid-in/paid-out on T+2 days and the settlement is
complete in 2 days from the end of the trade day.
Under Limited Physical Market segment, settlement for trades is done on a
trade-for-trade basis and delivery obligations arise out of each trade. The
settlement cycle for this segment is same as for the rolling settlement
Table 3.6: Settlement Cycle in CM Segment of NSE:
Activity T+3 Rolling
Settlement
(From April 1,
2002)
T+2 Rolling
Settlement
(From April 1,
2003)
Trading T T
Custodial Confirmation T+1 T+1
Determination of
Obligation
T+1 T+1
Securities/Funds Pay-in T+3 T+2
Securities/Funds Pay-out T+3 T+2
Valuation Debit T+3 T+2
Auction T+4 T+3
Bad Delivery Reporting T+5 T+4
Auction Pay-in/Pay-out T+6 T+5
Close Out T+6 T+5
Rectified Bad Delivery
Pay-in/Pay-out
T+7 T+6
Re-bad Delivery Reporting T+9 T+8
Close Out of Re-bad
Delivery
T+10 T+9
Pay-in and Pay-out of Funds
NSCCL offers Clearing Members the facility of settlement of funds obligations
through 13 Clearing Banks, namely Axis Bank Ltd, Canara Bank, HDFC Bank,
IndusInd Bank, ICICI Bank, Bank of India, IDBI Bank, Hongkong & Shanghai
Banking Corporation Ltd., Kotak Mahindra Bank, Standard Chartered Bank,
Union Bank of India, State Bank of India and Citibank N.A. Clearing Members
are required to open clearing account with any one bank for the purpose of
settlement of their transactions. They are also required to authorise their
Clearing Bank to access their clearing account for debiting, crediting,
114
reporting of balances and any other information in accordance with the advice
received from NSCCL. Clearing accounts are used exclusively for clearing and
settlement of transactions, i.e. for settling funds and other obligations to/
from the NSCCL, including payments of margins and penal charges. Clearing
Banks debit/ credit the clearing account of clearing members as per
instructions received from the NSCCL electronically.
Members are informed of their funds obligation for various settlements
through the daily clearing data download. Members are also provided daily
funds statement which gives date-wise details of each debit/ credit
transaction in the member s clearing account. The summary statement
provided to members summarises the debit/ credit information for a quick
reference. Members can refer to these statements and provide for funds
accordingly.
Member's account may be debited for various types of transactions on a daily
basis. A member is required to ensure that adequate funds are available in
the clearing accounts towards all obligations, by the scheduled date and time.
It is possible that the total value of funds pay-in receivable by a bank is
different from the value of funds payout from the bank i.e. the pay-in may be
either more than the payout in a bank, or vice versa. In such cases, funds
need to be transferred from the bank where there is excess pay-in to the
bank where there is a shortage in pay-in. Based on estimated pay-in and payout
of funds, on the day preceding the payout day, NSCCL advises the banks
having pay-in in excess of pay-out to issue pay orders to the banks having
pay-in less than the pay-out. The deficit banks accordingly get the funds to
facilitate timely payout.
Shortfall of Funds Pay-in
Members are required to ensure that adequate funds are available in their
clearing bank account towards all obligations, on the scheduled date and
time. Based on current trends, settlement cycles, risk factors and other trade
practices, in all cases of funds shortages, NSCCL may initiate various actions
including withdrawing the trading facility of the member, withholding the
securities pay-out due to the member, requiring the member to make
advance pay-in, etc. as per the prescribed rules and regulations and circular
instructions issued in this regard (Circular ref. No. NSCC/CM/C&S/337
Download No. NSE/CMPT/6122 dt. May 9, 2005).
The above provisions shall apply if net cumulative fund shortage for a
member is:
1.
Equal to or greater than Rs. Five (5) lakhs at the end of pay-in.
2.
Equal to or greater than Rs. Two (2) lakhs for six (6) or more occasions in
the last three (3) months on any given day
115
In case, the member is disabled on account of (2) above, on making good the
shortage amount, the member shall be permitted to trade subject to its
providing a deposit equivalent to its cumulative funds shortage as the 'funds
shortage collateral'. Such deposit shall be kept with the Clearing Corporation
for a period of ten settlements and shall be released only if no further funds
shortages are reported for the member in next ten consecutive settlements.
Members may further note that there shall not be any margin benefit or any
interest payment on the amount so deposited as 'funds shortage collateral'.
The amount may be provided by way of cash, fixed deposit receipts, or bank
guarantee, equivalent to the cumulative funds shortage.
In addition, the member will be required to pay a penal charge at the rate of
0.07% per day computed on the amount outstanding at the end of the day,
till the amount is recovered.
However, the above actions are not constant and are subject to periodical
review.
Pay-in and Pay-out of Securities
In order to settle trades in the dematerialised securities, a clearing member
needs to open a clearing account with a depository participant (DP).
Clearing members are informed of their securities obligation for various
settlements through the daily clearing data download and reports. Clearing
members are also provided final delivery/ receipt statement and delivery
details statement.
Before pay-in, selling investors instruct DP to transfer security balances from
their beneficiary accounts to clearing member s pool account. At or before the
time and day specified for pay-in by NSCCL, the clearing member instructs his
DP to move the required balance from his pool account to his delivery
account. On the pay-in day, the depository sends the balances to NSCCL at
the scheduled time. The balances in respective clearing members' delivery
accounts are first transferred to NSCCL s pool account which is then matched
with the obligations generated by NSCCL system. The quantity and securities
matched are accepted and credited to the pool account of the receiving
clearing members through depository. The quantity and securities, not
matched for any reason whatsoever, are not accepted and as such credited
back to Pool Accounts of the delivering clearing members. On receipt of payout
instructions from NSCCL, the depository credits the clearing members'
pool accounts or clients beneficiary accounts in case of client direct payout
instructions. From the pool accounts, the clearing members distribute the
deliveries to the buying clients by issuing instructions to his DP.
116
Straight Through Processing
Straight Through Processing (STP) implies the automation of the entire
process of securities transactions right from trade initiation to settlement.
3.5 RISK MANAGEMENT
A sound risk management system is integral to/pre-requisite for an efficient
clearing and settlement system. The National Securities Clearing Corporation
Ltd. (NSCCL), a wholly owned subsidiary of NSE, was incorporated in August
1995. It was set up to bring and sustain confidence in clearing and settlement
of securities; to promote and maintain, short and consistent settlement
cycles; to provide counter-party risk guarantee, and to operate a tight risk
containment system. NSCCL commenced clearing operations in April 1996.
NSCCL ensures that trading members obligations are commensurate with
their net worth. In recognition of the fact that market integrity is the essence
of any financial market and believing in the philosophy that prevention is
better than cure, NSCCL has put in place a comprehensive risk management
system which is constantly monitored and upgraded to pre-empt market
failures.
Risk containment measures include capital adequacy requirements of
members, monitoring of member performance and track record, stringent
margin requirements, position limits based on capital, online monitoring of
member positions and automatic disablement from trading when limits are
breached.
To safeguard the interest of the investors, NSE administers an effective
market surveillance system to curb excessive volatility, detect and prevent
price manipulation and follows a system of price bands. Further, the exchange
maintains strict surveillance over market activities in liquid and volatile
securities.
3.5.1 Capital Adequacy Requirements
The core of the risk management is the liquid assets deposited by members
with the exchange / clearing corporation. The trading members are required
to provide liquid assets which adequately cover various margins & base
minimum capital requirements. Liquid assets of the member include their
Initial membership deposits including the security deposits. Members may
provide additional collateral deposit towards liquid assets, over and above
their minimum membership deposit requirements.
The acceptable forms of capital towards liquid assets and the applicable
haircuts are listed below:
117
1.
Cash Equivalents: Cash, Bank Fixed Deposits with approved custodians,
Bank Guarantees from approved banks, Government Securities with 10%
haircut, Units of liquid mutual funds or government securities mutual
funds with 10% haircut.
2.
Other Liquid assets:
(i)
Liquid (Group I) Equity Shares in demat form, as specified by NSCCL
from time to time deposited with approved Custodians. Haircuts applied
are equivalent to the VaR margin for the respective securities.
(ii)
Mutual fund units other than those listed under cash equivalents decided
by NSCCL from time to time. Haircut equivalent to the VaR margin for
the units computed using the traded price if available, or else, using the
NAV of the unit treating it as a liquid security.
Table3.7: Capital Adequacy Norms for Membership on NSE
(Rs. in lakh)
Particulars
(all values in Rs. Lakh)
CM and F&O
segment
CM, WDM and
F&O segment
Net worth 1 100 200
Interest free security deposit
(IFSD) 2
125 275
Collateral security deposit (CSD) 3 25 25
Annual subscription 1 2
1:
No additional networth is required for self clearing members. However, a networt
h of
Rs. 300 Lakh is required for TM-CM and PCM.
2 & 3:
Additional Rs. 25 Lakh is required for clearing memberships (SCM, TM-CM). In add
ition,
the clearing member is required to bring in IFSD of Rs. 2 Lakh and CSD of Rs. 8
Lakh
per trading member he undertakes to clear and settle.
Additional Base Capital
Members may provide additional margin/collateral deposit (additional base
capital) to NSCCL, over and above their minimum deposit requirements (base
capital), towards margins. Members may submit such deposits in any one
form or combination of the following forms:
Cash
Fixed Deposit Receipts (FDRs) issued by approved banks and deposited
with approved Custodians or NSCCL.
118
Bank Guarantee in favour of NSCCL from approved banks in the specified
format. If a Bank guarantee is submitted from bank, whose networth is
above Rs.500 crores, then the same is considered as cash component and
all other Bank guarantees will be considered as non-cash component as
per past procedures.
Approved securities in demat form deposited with approved Custodians.
Government Securities, the haircut for the Government Securities shall be
10%.
Units of the schemes of liquid mutual funds or government securities
mutual funds. The haircuts for units of liquid funds or government
securities mutual funds shall be 10% of Net Asset Value (NAV). Units of all
Mutual Funds schemes except Liquid Mutual Funds and Government
Securities Mutual Funds (in demat) are eligible security for the purpose of
non-cash component of additional capital and margin.
All Additional Base Capital (ABC) given in the form of cash / FDR/BG s
from approved Banks (hereinafter referred to as 'Cash Component')
should be atleast 50% of the capital in respect of every trading member.
Incase where non -cash component is more than 50 % of the total
capital, the excess non-cash component is ignored for the purpose
margins requirements.
3.5.2 Margins
Margins form a key part of the risk management system. In the stock
markets there is always an uncertainty in the movement of share prices. This
uncertainty leads to risk which is addressed by margining system of stock
markets. Let us understand the concept of margins with the help of a
following example.
Example: Suppose an investor, purchases 1000 shares of xyz company at
Rs.100/-on January 1, 2008. Investor has to give the purchase amount of
Rs.1,00,000/-(1000 x 100) to his broker on or before January 2, 2008.
Broker, in turn, has to give this money to stock exchange on January 3, 2008.
There is always a small chance that the investor may not be able to bring the
required money by required date. As an advance for buying the shares,
investor is required to pay a portion of the total amount of Rs.1,00,000/-to
the broker at the time of placing the buy order. Stock exchange in turn
collects similar amount from the broker upon execution of the order. This
initial token payment is called margin.
It is important to remember that for every buyer there is a seller and if the
buyer does not bring the money, seller may not get his / her money and vice
versa. Therefore, margin is levied on the seller also to ensure that he/she
gives the 100 shares sold to the broker who in turn gives it to the stock
exchange.
119
In the above example, assume that margin was 15%. That is investor has to
give Rs.15,000/-(15% of Rs.1,00,000/) to the broker before buying. Now
suppose that investor bought the shares at 11 am on January 1, 2008.
Assume that by the end of the day price of the share falls by Rs.25/-. That is
total value of the shares has come down to Rs.75,000/-. That is buyer has
suffered a notional loss of Rs.25,000/-. In our example buyer has paid
Rs.15,000/-as margin but the notional loss, because of fall in price, is
Rs.25,000/-. That is notional loss is more than the margin given.
In such a situation, the buyer may not want to pay Rs.1,00,000/-for the
shares whose value has come down to Rs.75,000/-. Similarly, if the price has
gone up by Rs.25/-, the seller may not want to give the shares at
Rs.1,00,000/-. To ensure that both buyers and sellers fulfill their obligations
irrespective of price movements, notional losses are also need to be collected.
Prices of shares keep on moving every day. Margins ensure that buyers bring
money and sellers bring shares to complete their obligations even though the
prices have moved down or up.
IMPOSITION OF MARGINS
For imposition of margins, the stocks are categorized on basis of their trading
frequency and impact cost.
The criteria for categorization of stocks for imposition of margins is mentioned
below:
The securities are classified into three groups based on their liquidity.
The Stocks which have traded atleast 80% of the days for the previous
six months constitute Group I (Liquid Securities) and Group II (Less
Liquid Securities). Out of the scrips identified above, the scrips having
mean impact cost of less than or equal to 1% are categorized under
Group I and the scrips where the impact cost is more than 1, are
categorized under Group II. The remaining stocks are classified into
Group III (Illiquid Securities).
The impact cost is calculated on the 15th of each month on a rolling
basis considering the order book snapshots of the previous six months.
On the basis of the impact cost so calculated, the scrips are moved
from one group to another group from the 1st of the next month.
120
Group Trading frequency
(over the previous six
months*)
Impact Cost (over
the previous six
months*)
Liquid Securities
(Group I)
At least 80 % of the
days
Less than or equal to
1 %
Less Liquid
Securities (Group
II)
At least 80 % of the
days
More than 1 %.
Illiquid Securities
(Group III)
Less than 80 % of the
days
N/A
* For securities that have been listed for less than 6 months, the trading frequ
ency and the
impact cost is computed using the history of the scrip.
Categorisation of newly listed securities
For the first month and till the time of monthly review a newly listed
security is categorised in that Group where the market capitalization of
the newly listed security exceeds or equals the market capitalization of
80% of the securities in that particular group. Subsequently, after one
month, whenever the next monthly review is carried out, the actual
trading frequency and impact cost of the security is computed, to
determine the liquidity categorization of the security.
In case any corporate action results in a change in ISIN, then the
securities bearing the new ISIN is treated as newly listed security for
group categorization.
Let us deal with this aspect in more detail while exploring different types of
margins.
Daily margins payable by the trading members in the Cash market consists of
the following:
1) Value at Risk (VaR) margin
2) Extreme Loss Margin
3) Mark to Market Margin
The margins are computed at client level. A member entering an order, needs
to enter the client code. Based on this information, margin is computed at the
client level, which will be payable by the trading members on upfront basis.
Let us see in details what is meant by these margins.
Value at Risk Margin
VaR is a single number, which encapsulates whole information about the risk in a
portfolio. It measures potential loss from an unlikely adverse event in a normal
market
environment. It involves using historical data on marke t prices and rates, the
current
121
portfolio positions, and models (e.g., option models, bond models) for pricing t
hose
positions. These inputs are then combined in different ways, depending on the
method, to derive an estimate of a particular percentile of the loss distributio
n,
typically the 99th percentile loss.
Computation of VaR Margin
VaR Margin is a margin intended to cover the largest loss that can be
encountered on 99% of the days (99% Value at Risk). For liquid securities, the
margin covers one-day losses while for illiquid securities; it covers three-day
losses so as to allow the clearing corporation to liquidate the position over th
ree
days. This leads to a scaling factor of square root of three for illiquid securi
ties.
For liquid securities, the VaR margins are based only on the volatility of the
security while for other securities, the volatility of the market index is also
used
in the computation.
Computation of the VaR margin requires the following definitions:
Security sigma means the volatility of the security computed as at the end of
the previous trading day. The computation uses the exponentially weighted
moving average method applied to daily returns in the same manner as in the
derivatives market.
Security VaR means the higher of 7.5% or 3.5 security sigmas.
Index sigma means the daily volatility of the market index (S&P CNX Nifty or
BSE Sensex) computed as at the end of the previous trading day. The
computation uses the exponentially weighted moving average method applied to
daily returns in the same manner as in the derivatives market.
Index VaR means the higher of 5% or 3 index sigmas. The higher of the
Sensex VaR or Nifty VaR would be used for this purpose.
The VaR Margins are specified as follows for different groups of securities:
Liquidity
Categorization
One-Day VaR Scaling factor
for illiquidity
VaR Margin
Liquid Securities
(Group I)
Security VaR 1.00 Security VaR
Less Liquid
Securities (Group
II)
Higher of
Security VaR and
three times Index
VaR
1.73
(square root of
3.00)
Higher of 1.73
times Security VaR
and 5.20 times
Index VaR
Illiquid Securities
(Group III)
Five times Index
VaR
1.73
(square root of
3.00)
8.66 times Index
VaR
122
All securities are classified into three groups for the purpose of VaR margin as
discussed above. For the securities listed in Group I, scrip wise daily volatili
ty
calculated using the exponentially weighted moving average methodology is
applied to daily returns. The scrip wise daily VaR would be 3.5 times the
volatility so calculated subject to a minimum of 7.5%. For the securities listed
in Group II, the VaR margin is higher of scrip VaR (3.5 sigma) or three times
the index VaR, and it shall be scaled up by root 3. For the securities listed in
Group III, the VaR margin would be equal to five times the index VaR and
scaled up by root 3.
Upfront margin rates (VaR margin + Extreme Loss Margin) applicable for all
securities in Trade for Trade-Surveillance (TFTS) shall be 100 %.
VaR margin rate for a security constitutes the following:
(1) Value at Risk (VaR) based margin, which is arrived at, based on the
methods stated above. The index VaR, for the purpose, would be the
higher of the daily Index VaR based on S&P CNX NIFTY or BSE SENSEX.
The index VaR would be subject to a minimum of 5%.
(2) Security specific Margin: NSCCL may stipulate security specific margins
for the securities from time to time.
The VaR margin rate computed as mentioned above will be charged on the
net outstanding position (buy value-sell) of the respective clients on the
respective securities across all open settlements. There would be no netting
off of positions across different settlements. The net positions at a client lev
el
for a member are arrived at and thereafter, it is grossed across all the clients
including proprietary position to arrive at the gross open position.
For example, in case of a member, if client A has a buy position of 1000 in a
security and client B has a sell position of 1000 in the same security, the net
position of the member in the security would be taken as 2000. The buy
position of client A and sell position of client B in the same security would
not be netted. It would be summed up to arrive at the member s open
position for the purpose of margin calculation.
Collection of VaR Margin:
(a) The VaR margin is collected on an upfront basis by adjusting against the
total liquid assets of the member at the time of trade.
(b) The VaR margin is collected on the gross open position of the member. The
gross open position for this purpose would mean the gross of all net
positions across all the clients of a member including its proprietary position.
123
(c) For this purpose, there would be no netting of positions across different
settlements.
(d) Upfront margin rates (VaR margin + Extreme Loss Margin) applicable for
all securities in Trade for Trade-Surveillance (TFTS) shall be 100 %.
(e) The Intra-day VAR files shall be generated based on the prices at 11.00
a.m., 12.30 p.m., 2.00 p.m., and 3.30 p.m. everyday. Such intra-day VAR
files shall be used for margining of intra-day member positions. In
addition to the above, a VAR file at end of day and begin of day shall be
provided and the same is applicable on the positions for next trading day
Mark-to-Market Margin
Mark to market loss is calculated by marking each transaction in security to
the closing price of the security at the end of trading. In case the security ha
s
not been traded on a particular day, the latest available closing price at the
NSE is to be considered as the closing price. In case the net outstanding
position in any security is nil, the difference between the buy and sell values
is considered as notional loss for the purpose of calculating the mark to
market margin payable.
The mark to market margin (MTM) is collected from the member before the
start of the trading of the next day.
The MTM margin is collected/adjusted from/against the cash/cash equivalent
component of the liquid net worth deposited with the Exchange.
The MTM margin is collected on the gross open position of the member. The
gross open position for this purpose would mean the gross of all net positions
across all the clients of a member including its proprietary position. For this
purpose, the position of a client would be netted across its various securities
and the positions of all the clients of a broker would be grossed.
There would be no netting off of the positions and setoff against MTM profits
across two rolling settlements i.e. T day and T-1 day. However, for
computation of MTM profits/losses for the day, netting or setoff against MTM
profits would be permitted.
In case of Trade for Trade Segment (TFT segment) each trade is marked to
market based on the closing price of that security.
The MTM margin so collected is released on completion of pay-in of the
settlement.
124
Lets us understand the MTM computation with the help of the following
example:
Client Security
T-1
day T day
Total
profit/loss
of Client
MTM
for
broker
Client A Security X 800 300
Security Y -500 -1200
Total 300 -900 -900
Client B Security Z 700 -400
Security W -1000 800
Total -300 400 -300
Client C Security X 1000 500
Security Z -1500 -800
Total -500 -300 -800
Client D Security Y 700 -200
Security R -300 800
Total 400 600 1000
Member -2000
For a Client A, his MTM profit/ loss would be calculated separately for his
positions on T-1 and T day (two different rolling settlements). For the same day
positions of the client, his losses in some securities can be set off/netted aga
inst
profits of some other securities. Thus, we would arrive at the MTM loss/profit
figures of the two different days T and T-1. These two figures cannot be netted.
Any loss will have to be collected and same will not be setoff against profit
arising out of positions of the other day.
Thus, as stated above MTM profits / losses would be computed for each of the
clients; Client A, Client B, Client C etc. As regards collection of margin from
the
broker, the MTM would be grossed across all the clients i.e. no setoff of loss o
f
one client with the profit of another client. In other words, only the losses wi
ll be
added to give the total MTM loss that the broker has to deposit with the
exchange.
In this example, the broker has to deposit MTM Margin of Rs.2000/.
Extreme Loss Margin
The Extreme Loss Margin for any security is higher of:
125
(1) 5%, or
(2) 1.5 times the standard deviation of daily logarithmic returns of the
security price in the last six months. This computation is done at the end
of each month by taking the price data on a rolling basis for the past six
months and the resulting value is applicable for the next month.
The Extreme Loss Margin is collected/ adjusted against the total liquid assets
of the member on a real time basis. The Extreme Loss Margin is collected on
the gross open position of the member. The gross open position for this
purpose would mean the gross of all net positions across all the clients of a
member including its proprietary position. There would be no netting off of
positions across different settlements. The Extreme Loss Margin collected is
released on completion of pay-in of the settlement.
Margin Shortfall
In case of any shortfall in margin:
· The members are not permitted to trade with immediate effect.
· Penalty for margin violation
Penalty applicable for margin violation is levied on a monthly basis based on
slabs as mentioned below:
Instances of
Disablement
Penalty to be levied
1st instance 0.07% per day
2nd to 5th instance of
disablement
0.07% per day +Rs.5000/- per instance from
2nd to 5th instance
6th to 10th instance of
disablement
0.07% per day+ Rs. 20000 ( for 2nd to 5th
instance) +Rs.10000/- per instance from 6th
to 10th instance
11th instance onwards 0.07% per day +Rs. 70,000/-(for 2nd to
10th instance) +Rs.10000/- per instance
from 11th instance onwards. Additionally, the
member will be referred to the Disciplinary
Action Committee for suitable action
Instances as mentioned above refer to all disablements during market hours
in a calendar month. The penal charge of 0.07% per day is applicable on all
disablements due to margin violation anytime during the day.
126
Margins for institutional deals:
Institutional businesses i.e., transactions done by all institutional investors
shall be margined in the capital market segment from T+1 day subsequent to
confirmation of the transactions by the custodians. For this purpose,
institutional investors shall include:
Foreign Institutional Investors registered with SEBI. (FII)

Mutual Funds registered with SEBI. (MF)
Public Financial Institutions as defined under Section 4A of the
Companies Act, 1956. (DFI)
Banks, i.e., a banking company as defined under Section 5(1)(c) of the
Banking Regulations Act, 1949. (BNK)
Insurance companies registered with IRDA. (INS)
Levy of margins:
Institutional transactions shall be identified by the use of the

participant code at the time of order entry.
In respect of institutional transactions confirmed by the custodians the
margins shall be levied on the custodians.
In respect of institutional transactions rejected/not accepted by the
custodians the margins shall be levied on the members who have
executed the transactions.
The margins shall be computed and levied at a client (Custodial
Participant code) level in respect of institutional transactions and
collected from the custodians/members.
Reporting and other procedures regarding Institution transactions shall
continue as per the current procedure.
Retail Professional Clearing Member:
In case of transactions which are to be settled by Retail Professional
Clearing Members (PCM), all the trades with PCM code shall be included in
the trading member s positions till the same are confirmed by the PCM.
Margins shall be collected from respective trading members until
confirmation of trades by PCM.
On confirmation of trades by PCM, such trades will be reduced from the
positions of trading member and included in the positions of PCM. The
PCM shall then be liable to pay margins on the same.
Exemption upon early pay-in of securities
In cases where early pay-in of securities is made prior to the securities
pay-in, such positions for which early pay-in (EPI) of securities is made
127
shall be exempt from margins. The EPI of securities would be allocated to
clients having net deliverable position, on a random basis unless specific
client details are provided by the member/ custodian. However, member/
custodian shall ensure to pass on appropriate early pay-in benefit of
margin to the relevant clients. Additionally, member/custodian can specify
the clients to whom the early pay-in may be allocated.
Exemption upon early pay-in of funds
In cases where early pay-in of funds is made prior to the funds pay-in,
such positions for which early pay-in (EPI) of funds is made shall be
exempt from margins based on the client details provided by the member/
custodian. Early pay-in of funds specified by the member/custodians for a
specific client and for a settlement shall be allocated against the securities
in the descending order of the net buy value of outstanding position of the
client.
3.5.3 On-Line Exposure Monitoring
NSCCL has put in place an on-line monitoring and surveillance system
whereby exposure of the members is monitored on a real time basis. A
system of alerts has been built in so that both the member and NSCCL are
alerted as per pre-set levels (reaching 70%, 85%, 90%, 95% and 100%)
when the members approach their allowable limits. The system enables
NSSCL to further check the micro-details of members' positions, if required
and take pro-active action.
The on-line surveillance mechanism also generates various alerts/reports on
any price/volume movement of securities not in line with past
trends/patterns. For this purpose the exchange maintains various databases
to generate alerts. Alerts are scrutinised and if necessary taken up for follow
up action. Open positions of securities are also analysed. Besides this, rumors
in the print media are tracked and where they are price sensitive, companies
are contacted for verification. Replies received are informed to the members
and the public.
3.5.4 Off-line Monitoring
Off-line surveillance activity consists of inspections and investigations. As pe
r
regulatory requirement, a minimum of 20% of the active trading members
are to be inspected every year to verify the level of compliance with various
rules, byelaws and regulations of the Exchange. Usually, inspection of more
members than the regulatory requirement is undertaken every year. The
inspection verifies if investor interests are being compromised in the conduct
of business by the members.
128
The investigation is based on various alerts, which require further analysis. If
further analysis reveals any suspicion of irregular activity which deviates from
the past trends/patterns and concentration of trading at NSE at the member
level, then a more detailed investigation is undertaken. If the detailed
investigation establishes any irregular activity, then disciplinary action is
initiated against the member. If the investigation suggests suspicions of
possible irregular activity across exchanges and/or possible involvement of
clients, then the same is informed to SEBI.
3.5.5 Index-based Market-wide Circuit Breakers/ Price
Bands for Securities
An index based market-wide circuit breaker system applies at three stages of
the index movement either way at 10%, 15% and 20%. These circuit
breakers bring about a coordinated trading halt in trading on all equity and
equity derivatives markets across the country. The breakers are triggered by
movements in either Nifty 50 or Sensex, whichever is breached earlier.
In case of a 10% movement in either of these indices, there would be a

one-hour market halt if the movement takes place before 1:00 p.m. In
case the movement takes place at or after 1:00 p.m. but before 2:30 p.m.
there would be trading halt for ½ hour. In case movement takes place at
or after 2:30 p.m. there will be no trading halt at the 10% level and
market would continue trading.
In case of a 15% movement of either index, there should be a two-hour
halt if the movement takes place before 1 p.m. If the 15% trigger is
reached on or after 1:00 p.m. but before 2:00 p.m., there should be a
one-hour halt. If the 15% trigger is reached on or after 2:00 p.m. the
trading should halt for remainder of the day.
In case of a 20% movement of the index, trading should be halted for the
remainder of the day.
NSE may suo moto cancel the orders in the absence of any immediate
confirmation from the members that these orders are genuine or for any
other reason as it may deem fit. The Exchange views entries of non-genuine
orders with utmost seriousness as this has market wide repercussion. As an
additional measure of safety, individual scrip-wise price bands have been
fixed as below:
Daily price bands of 2% (either way) on a set of specified securities
129
Price bands of 20% (either way) on all the remaining securities (including
debentures, warrants, preference shares etc. which are traded on CM
segment of NSE),
No price bands are applicable on scrip on which derivative products are
available or scrips included in indices on which derivative products are
available. However in order to prevent members from entering orders at non-
genuine prices in such securities, the Exchange has fixed operating range of
20% for such securities.
The price bands for the securities in the Limited Physical Market are the same
as those applicable for the securities in the Normal Market. For Auction
market the price bands of 20% are applicable.
3.5.6 Settlement Guarantee Mechanism
NSCCL assumes the counter party risk of each member and guarantees
financial settlement. Counter party risk is guaranteed through a fine tuned
risk management system and an innovative method of on-line position
monitoring and automatic disablement. A large Settlement Guarantee Fund
provides the cushion for any residual risk. In the event of failure of a trading
member to meet settlement obligations or committing default, the Fund is
utilized to the extent required for successful completion of the settlement.
This has eliminated counter party risk of trading on the Exchange. The market
has now full confidence that settlements will take place in time and will be
completed irrespective of possible default by isolated trading members. The
concept of guaranteed settlements has completely changed the way market
safety is perceived.
The Settlement Guarantee Fund is an important element in facilitating the
settlement process. The Fund operates like a self-insurance mechanism and is
funded through the contributions made by trading members, transaction
charges, penalty amounts, fines etc. recovered by NSCCL.
A part of the cash deposit and the entire security deposit of every clearing
member with the Exchange has been converted into an initial contribution
towards the Settlement Guarantee Fund, as indicated below:
Equity Segment
Type of Member Cash
Deposit
(Rs. Lakh)
Security Deposit in the
form of Bank FDR/
guarantee or securities
(Rs. Lakh)
Individual/ partnership firms 6.00
17.50
Corporates 9.00
25.00
130
There is a provision that as and when volumes of business increase, members
may be required to make additional contributions allowing the fund to grow
alongwith the market volumes.
Direct Pay-out of Securities
NSCCL has put in place a system for giving direct pay-out of securities to
investor s account. The system is applicable for both the depositories. The
trading member/ clearing member indicates the beneficiary account to which
the securities payout is to be made by way of file upload. In order to
smoothen the back office work of the trading members for providing this
information, NSCCL has provided a front end for creating the file through
which the information is passed on to NSCCL. On the pay-out day, pay-out
goes to such investors' account directly from NSCCL. In case of any wrong
information provided by the trading member, the pay-out goes to the pool
account of the trading member.
No-delivery Period
Whenever a book closure or a record date is announced by a company for
corporate actions other than AGM, EGM, dividend & Bonus, the exchange sets
up a no-delivery period for that security. During this period, trading is
permitted in the security. However, these trades are settled only after the no-
delivery period is over. This is done to ensure that investor s entitlement for
the corporate benefits is clearly determined.
Penalty
The Clearing Corporation levies penalties on trading members for non-
compliances and defaults like:
1.
Funds Shortages
2.
Securities Shortages
3.
Margin Shortages
4.
Security Deposit Shortages
5.
Client Code Modification
6.
Non-acceptance / rejection / allocation of Institutional trades
7.
Ineligible client in Inter-institutional deals
8.
Others
1.
Funds Shortages : Members failing to fulfill their funds obligations (all
markets including the valuation debit raised on account of securities
shortages) to Clearing Corporation shall be subjected to the following
penalty structure:131
Type of Non-Fulfillment Penalty Charge % per
day
Value Rs. 5 lakhs or more 0.07
Value less than Rs. 5 lakhs 0.07
2.
Securities Shortages in respect of cleared deals:-Members failing
to fulfill their securities deliverable obligations to Clearing Corporation
shall be subjected to the following penalty structure:Type
of Non-
Fulfillment
Penalty Charge % per day on
value of shortage
Security Shortage 0.05
3.
Margin Shortages : Penalty for violation on account of initial margin
limit/exposure margin and/or open interest limit may be levied on a
monthly basis based on slabs mentioned below:
Instances of
Disablement
Penalty to be levied
1st instance 0.07% per day
2nd to 5th instance
of disablement
0.07% per day +Rs.5000/- per instance from 2nd to 5th
instance
6th to 10th instance
of disablement
0.07% per day+ Rs. 20000 ( for 2nd to 5th instance)
+Rs.10000/- per instance from 6th to 10th instance
11th instance
onwards
0.07% per day +Rs. 70,000/-(for 2nd to 10th instance)
+Rs.10000/per
instance from 11th instance onwards.
Additionally, the member will be referred to the Disciplinary
Action Committee for suitable action
Instances as mentioned above shall refer to all disablements during
market hours in a calendar month. The penal charge of 0.07% per day
shall be applicable on all disablements due to margin violation anytime
during the day.
4.
Security deposit shortage: Penal charges for shortages in the minimum
deposit requirement is 0.07% per day.
5.
Client code modification: Penalties shall be imposed in respect of client
code modifications in non-institutional orders only. The penalty structure
is given below :
Percentage of modified client codes for
non-institutional orders beyond the first 5
orders to total non-institutional orders
(matched) on a daily basis
Amount (in Rs)
Less than or equal to 1% NIL
Greater than 1% but less than or equal to 5% 500/- per day
Greater than 5% but less than or equal to 10% 1000/- per day
Greater than 10% 10000/-per day
132
6.
Non-acceptance / rejection / allocation of Institutional trades:
Penalty is imposed where the institutional trades are rejected / non-
accepted by Custodians or not allocated by the trading members. A penalty
at the rate of 0.10% of the total value of all such transactions for a
settlement for a member or Rs.10,000/- whichever is lower.
7.
Ineligible client in Inter-institutional deals: Clearing and settlement
procedure for inter-institutional deals involves eligibility of clients. For sel
l
orders only FIIs are permitted, for buy orders FIIs, DFIs, Banks, Mutual
Funds and Insurance Companies and such other institutions as may be
approved from time to time. Where RBI has stipulated collective limits for
FIIs, NRIs, PIOs etc in certain securities, these entities shall be permitted to
place orders on both buy and sell sides.
Penalties are imposed if trades are executed by ineligible clients as under:
If the selling client is not eligible -the trade shall be compulsorily

closed out and a penalty of Rs.25000 shall be imposed.
If the buying client is not eligible - a penalty at the rate of 1% of the
value of the trade or Rs 1 lakh whichever is lower shall be imposed.
8.
Others :There are certain penalties imposed on members which are
related to physical settlement :
1.
Failure to give Good Delivery: In case of bad deliveries rectified,
delayed good delivery processing charges will be at the rate of 0.09 % per
day computed from the day on which securities were originally due to be
brought in up to the day on which the securities are replaced/rectified.
In case of bad deliveries not rectified, bad delivery processing charges will
be @ 0.09% per day computed from the day on which securities were
originally due to be brought in upto
(i)
the day on which the securities are brought in or
(ii)
till auction settlement is completed or
(iii)
where auction is partially successful or not successful and the deal
is deemed closed out or
When the deal is squared off and the corresponding funds
adjustments are completed, whichever is later.
In case of auction bad deliveries and rectified / replaced objection cases
which are reported as bad delivery, the penal interest will be 0.09% per
day from the rectification date till the date of closing out.
Type of Default Charges
Wrong claims of dividend, bonus,
interest etc.
Rs. 100/- per claim
Same set of shares reported
twice under objection
10% of value of shares reported
under objection subject to a
minimum of Rs. 5,000/-per claim
133
2. Incorrect claim for corporate benefits:
Incorrect undertaking on 10% of the value of shares reported
form 6-I under objection, subject to a minimum
of Rs. 5,000/-per claim.
3.
Late withdrawal of company objection: Processing fee for late
withdrawal at the rate of Rs. 2 per share subject to a minimum of
Rs.200/-shall be levied for all withdrawals where a member has not
withdrawn the invalid/incorrect objection/corporate benefits claim on the
scheduled withdrawal date, for the following reasons:
a.
The shares under objection have not been introduced by the member
on the Exchange, however he is not able to produce the delivery slip /
delivery details statement on the scheduled withdrawal day.
b.
Where the Introducing Member (IM) had not approached the Clearing
House on the scheduled withdrawal date on account of
oversight/mistake.
Members wanting to avail 'late' withdrawals will be required to affix prepaid
coupons for the late withdrawal fee, at the time of reporting the
same. Acceptance of such late withdrawals shall be subject to approval
only.
4.
Trade for Trade
S.No. Types of default Penalty Charge
a. Non settlement of
trade
0.5% of the trade value
b. Cancellation of trade Rs. 1000/-per trade per side
c. Failure to settle
within the stipulated
time
Rs. 500/-per trade per day, subject to
maximum of 2.50 times the value of the
trade for each side with a ceiling of Rs.
10000/d.
Failure to report
within the stipulated
time
Rs. 500/-per trade per day subject to
maximum of 2.50 times the value of the
trade for each side with a ceiling of Rs.
5000/
Investigation and Inspection
As per regulatory requirement, a minimum of 20% of the active trading
members are to be inspected every year to verify the level of compliance with
various rules, byelaws and regulations of the Exchange. Usually, inspection of
more members than the regulatory requirement is undertaken every year.
134
The inspection randomly verifies if investor interests are being compromised
in the conduct of business by the members. The investigation is based on
various alerts which require further analysis. If further analysis suggests any
possible irregular activity which deviates from the past trends/patterns and
concentration of trading at NSE at the member level, then a more detailed
investigation is undertaken. If the detailed investigation establishes any
irregular activity, then disciplinary action is initiated against the member. If
the investigation suggests possible irregular activity across exchanges and/or
possible involvement of clients, then the same is informed to SEBI.
3.5.7 Investor Protection Fund
Investor Protection Fund (IPF) has been set up as a trust under Bombay
Public Trust Act, 1950 under the name and style of National Stock Exchange
Investor Protection Fund Trust and is administered by the Trustees. The IPF is
maintained by NSE to make good investor claims, which may arise out of
non-settlement of obligations by the trading member, who has been declared
defaulter / expelled, in respect of trades executed on the Exchange. The IPF
is utilised to settle claims of such investors where the trading me mber
through whom the investor has dealt has been declared a defaulter or
expelled by the Exchange. Payments out of the IPF may include claims
arising on account of non payment of funds by the defaulter /expelled
member or non receipt of securities purchased by the investor through the
trading member who has been declared a defaulter/expelled member .
Quantum of Compensation: The maximum amount of claim payable from
the IPF to the investor is Rs. 11 lakh.
Procedure for filing claims: A notice is published in widely circulated daily
newspapers notifying the trading member who has been declared
defaulter/expelled member. Claims against the defaulter/expelled member
specified in the notice are required to be made, on or before three months
from the date of such notice. The claimant is required to submit the requisite
documents/details in substantiation of his claim. The admissibility of the claim
is decided by the Defaulters Committee which recommends the payment of
the admissible amount out of the Investor Protection Fund in case of
insufficient assets in respect of the defaulter /expelled member vesting in the
Exchange. Both the Committee and the Trustees may at any time and from
time to time require any person to produce and deliver any documents or
statements of evidence necessary to support any claim made or necessary for
the purpose of establishing his claim. In default of delivery of such
documents, the Committee and the Trustees may disallow (wholly or partly)
any claim made by him.
On recommendation by the Defaulters Committee, the Trustees, if satisfied
that the default on which the claim is founded was actually committed, may
admit the claim and act accordingly. The Trustees have an absolute discretion
135
as regards the mode and method of assessing the nature of the claims including
their genuineness and at their discretion may accept, reject or partially grant
or
allow claims and make payment thereof subject to the limits mentioned above
The Trustees in disallowing (whether wholly or partly) a claim for
compensation shall serve notice of such disallowance on the claimant.
Transaction Costs
Liquidity to a large extent depends on transaction costs. Lower the
transaction cost, the lower is the bid-ask spread and higher the volumes.
SEBI released a Working Paper titled Trade Execution Cost of Equity Shares
in India in January 2002. The study has measured implicit (indirect) costs in
terms of quoted spread (possible cost of trading in a stock) and effective bid-
ask spread (actual cost incurred by an investor to execute a trade in a stock)
and their behaviour in relation to volume traded, market capitalisation,
volatility and market hour. The major findings of the study are as follows:
1.
Effective spread is, by and large, lower than the quoted spread.
2.
Market micro-structural changes appear to have influenced spread
size.
3.
The spread is inversely related to volume traded and market
capitalisation and positively related to volatility (variance). Efforts to
reduce volatility will also lead to reduction in bid-ask spread.
4.
Speed and time of arrival of information in the market also affects
trade cost. The spreads are very high at the open of market hours and
they slowly taper off as trading progresses. An investor who postpones
his decision to buy or sell towards close of trading saves more than
50% in terms of spread.
5.
Spreads are mostly independent of quantity quoted and traded.
3.6 MARKET INDEX
Traditionally, indices have been used as benchmarks to monitor markets and
judge performance. Modern indices were first proposed by two 19th century
mathematicians: Etienne Laspeyres and Hermann Paasche. The grandfather
of all equity indices is the Dow Jones Industrial Average which was first
published in 1896; since then indices have come a long way -not only in their
sophistication -but also in the variety.
There are three main types of indices, namely price index, quantity index and
value index. The price index is most widely used. It measures changes in the
levels of prices of products in the financial, commodities or any other markets
from one period to another. The indices in financial markets measure changes
in prices of securities like equities, debentures, government securities, etc.
The most popular index in financial market is the stock (equity) index which
uses a set of stocks that are representative of the whole market, or a
specified sector, to measure the change in overall behaviour of the markets or
sector over a period of time.
136
A stock index is important for its use:
1.
as the lead indicator of the performance of the overall economy or a
sector of the economy: A good index tells us how much richer or
poorer investors have become.
2.
as a barometer for market behaviour: It is used to monitor and
measure market movements, whether in real time, daily, or over
decades, helping us to understand economic conditions and prospects.
3.
as a benchmark for portfolio performance: A managed fund can
communicate its objectives and target universe by stating which index
or indices serve as the standard against which its performance should
be judged.
4.
as an underlying for derivatives like index futures and option. It also
underpins products such as, exchange-traded funds, index funds etc.
These index-related products form a several trillion dollar business and
are used widely in investment, hedging and risk management.
5.
as it supports research (for example, as benchmarks for evaluating
trading rules, technical analysis systems and analysts' forecasts); risk
measurement and management; and asset allocation.
In addition to the above functional use, a stock index reflects changing
expectations of the market about future of the corporate sector. The index
rises if the market expects the future to be better than previously expected
and drops if the expectation about future becomes pessimistic.
Price of a stock moves for two reasons, namely, company specific
development (product launch, closure of a factory, arrest of chief executive)
and development affecting the general environment (nuclear bombs, election
result, budget announcement), which affects the stock market as a whole.
The stock index captures the second part, that is, impact of environmental
change on the stock market as a whole. This is achieved by averaging which
cancels out changes in prices of individual stocks.
3.6.1 Understanding the index number
An index is a summary measure that indicates changes in value(s) of a
variable or a set of variables over a time or space. It is usually computed by
finding the ratio of current values(s) to a reference (base) value(s) and
multiplying the resulting number by 100 or 1000. For instance, a stock
market index is a number that indicates the relative level of prices or value of
securities in a market on a particular day compared with a base-day price or
value figure, which is usually 100 or 1000.
137
Illustration: The values of a market portfolio at the close of trading on Day
1 and Day 2 are:
Value of portfolio Index value
DAY1
(base day)
Rs. 20,000 1000
Day 2 Rs. 30,000 1500
Assume that Day 1 is the base day and the value assigned to the base day
index is 1000. On Day 2 the value of the portfolio has changed from Rs.
20,000 to Rs. 30,000, a 50% increase. The value of the index on Day 2
should reflect a corresponding 50% increase in market value.
Thus,
Portfolio Value of Day2Index on Day2 = * Index Value of Base Day

PortfolioValue of Base Day
Rs. 30,000
= *1000
Rs. 20,000
= 1500
Day 2's index is 1500 as compared to the 1000 of day 1.
The above illustration only serves as an introduction to how an index is
constructed. The daily computation of a stock index involves more complexity
especially when there are changes in market capitalization of constituent
stocks, e.g., rights offers, stock dividend etc.
Attributes of an index
A good stock market index should have the following attributes:
(a) Capturing behaviour of portfolios: A good market index should
accurately reflect the behaviour of the overall market as well as of
different portfolios. This is achieved by diversification in such a manner
that a portfolio is not vulnerable to any individual stock or industry risk. A
well-diversified index is more representative of the market. However there
are diminishing returns from diversification. There is very little gain by
diversifying beyond a point. Including illiquid stocks, actually worsens the
index since an illiquid stock does not reflect the current price behaviour of
the market, its inclusion in index results in an index, which reflects,
delayed or stale price behaviour rather than current price behaviour of the
market. Thus a good index should include the stocks which best represent
the universe.
138
(b) Including liquid stocks : Liquidity is much more than reflected by
trading frequency. It is about ability to transact at a price, which is very
close to the current market price. For example, when the market price of
a stock is at Rs.320, it will be considered liquid if one can buy some
shares at around Rs.320.05 and sell at around Rs.319.95. A liquid stock
has very tight bid-ask spread. Impact cost is the most practical and
operational definition of liquidity.
(c) Maintaining professionally: An index is not a constant. It reflects he
market dynamics and hence changes are essential to maintain its
representative character. This necessarily means that the same set of
stocks would not satisfy index criteria at all times. A good index
methodology must therefore incorporate a steady pace of change in the
index set. It is crucial that such changes are made at a steady pace.
Therefore the index set should be reviewed on a regular basis and, if
required, changes should be made to ensure that it continues to reflect
the current state of market.
Methodology for index construction
Stock market indices differ from one another basically in their sampling
and/or weighting methods.
SAMPLING METHOD
Unlike market indices such as American Stock Market Index and the Hong
Kong Stock Exchange All-Ordinaries Index that comprise of all stocks listed in
a market, under sampling method, an index is based on a fraction or a certain
percentage of select stocks which is highly representative of total stocks liste
d
in a market.
WEIGHTING METHOD
In a value-weighted index, the weight of each constituent stock is
proportional to its market share in terms of market capitalization. In an index
portfolio, we can assume that the amount of money invested in each
constituent stock is proportional to its percentage of the total value of all
constituent stocks. Examples include all major stock market indices like S&P
CNX Nifty.
There are three commonly used methods for constructing indices:
· Price weighted method
· Equally weighted method
· Market capitalisation weighted method
A price-weighted index is computed by summing up the prices, of the
various securities included in the index, at time 1, and dividing it by the sum
of prices of the securities at time 0 multiplied by base index value. Each stock
is assigned a weight proportional to its price.
139
Example: Assuming base index = 1000, price weighted index consisting of 5
stocks tabulated below would be:
COMPANY
Share
Price at
Time- 0
Share
Price at
Time- 1
Reliance 351.75 340.50
AB & U 329.10 350.30
INFOSYS 274.60 280.40
HLL 1335.25 1428.75
Tata Tea 539.25 570.25
Total 2829.95 2970.20
2970.20
Index = *1000 = 1049.56
2829.95
An equally weighted index assigns equal weight to each stock. This is
achieved by adding up the proportionate change in the price of each stock,
dividing it by no of stocks in the index and multiplying by base index value.
Assuming base index = 1000, equally weighted index consisting of 5 stocks
tabulated in the earlier example would be calculated as:
340.50 350.30 280.40 1428.75 570.25
+++ +
351.75 329.10 274.60 1335.25 539.25
Index = * 1000
5
5.1810682
= *1000 =1036.21
5
Market capitalisation weighted index: The most commonly used weight is
market capitalization (MC), that is, the number of outstanding shares
multiplied by the share price at some specified time. In this method,
Current Market Capitalization
Index = * Base Value
Base Market Capitalization
Where,
Current MC = Sum of (number of outstanding shares*Current Market
Price) all stocks in the index
Base MC = Sum of (number of outstanding shares*Market Price) all
stocks in index as on base date
Base value = 100 or 1000
140
Assuming base index = 1000, market capitalisation weighted index consisting
of 5 stocks tabulated in the earlier example would be calculated as:
COMPANY
Current
Market
Capitalization
(Rs. Lakh)
Base Market
Capitalization
(Rs. Lakh)
Reliance 1668791.10 1654247.50
AB & U 872686.30 860018.25
INFOSYS 1452587.65 1465218.80
HLL 2675613.30 2669339.55
Tata Tea 660887.75 662559.30
Total 7330566.10 7311383.40
7330566.10
Index = *1000 = 1002.62
7311383.40
Difficulties in index construction:
The major difficulties encountered in constructing an appropriate index are:
· deciding the number of stocks to be included in the index,
· selecting stocks to be included in the index,
· selecting appropriate weights, and
· selecting the base period and base value.
3.6.2 Understanding S&P CNX NIFTY
S&P CNX Nifty (Nifty), the most popular and widely used indicator of the stock
market in the country, is a 50-stock index comprising the largest and the
most liquid stocks from about 25 sectors in India. These stocks have a MC of
over 50% of the total MC of the Indian stock market. The index was
introduced in 1995 by the National Stock Exchange (NSE) keeping in mind it
would be used for modern applications such as index funds and index
derivatives besides reflecting the stock market behaviour. NSE maintained it
till July 1998, after which the ownership and management rights were
transferred to India Index Services & Products Ltd. (IISL), the only
professional company in India which provides index services.
Choice of index set size:
While trying to construct Nifty, a number of calculations were done to arrive
at the ideal number of stocks. A simple index construction algorithm was
implemented which did not pre-specify the size of the index set, but added
and deleted stocks based on criteria of MC and liquidity. Ten index time-series
141
(from 1990 to 1995) were generated by using various thresholds for addition
and deletion of stocks from/into the index set. These index sets turned out to
range from 69 to 182 stocks as of end-1995 indicating that the ideal number
of stocks for the index could be somewhere in the range 69 to 182. For each
of these ten index time-series, the correlation between the index time-series
and thousands of randomly chosen portfolios was calculated. This gave a
quantitative sense of how increasing the index set size helps improve the
extent to which the index reflects the behaviour of the market. It was
observed that the gain from increasing the number of stocks from 69 to 182
was quite insignificant. It was corroborated by the theory on portfolio
diversification, which suggests that diversifying from 10 to 20 stocks results
in considerable reductions in risk, while the gains from further diversification
are smaller. An analysis of liquidity further suggested that the Indian market
had comfortable liquidity of around 50 stocks. Beyond 50, the liquidity levels
became increasingly lower. Hence the index set size of 50 stocks was chosen.
Selection of stocks:
From early 1996 onwards, the eligibility criteria for inclusion of stocks in S&P
CNX Nifty are based on the criteria of Market Capitalization (MC), liquidity and
floating stock.
Market capitalisation: Stocks eligible for inclusion in Nifty must have a six
monthly average market capitalisation of Rs.500 crore or more during the last
six months.
Liquidity (Impact cost): Liquidity can be measured in two ways: Traditionally
liquidity is measured by volume and number of trades. The new international
practice of measuring liquidity is in terms of impact cost. An ideal stock can
be traded at its ruling market price. However practically, when one tries to
buy a stock, one pays a price higher than the ruling price for purchase, or
receives a price lower than the ruling price from sale, due to sufficient
quantity not being available at the ruling price. This difference from the
ruling price in percentage terms is the impact cost. It is defined as the
percentage degradation suffered in the price for purchase or sale of a
specified quantity of shares, when compared to the ideal price. It can be
computed for each individual stock based on order book snapshots. It can
also be computed for a market index based on the impact cost of constituent
stocks, using their respective index weights. The impact cost of a market
index is effectively the cost incurred when simultaneously placing market
orders for all constituents of the index, in the proportion of their weights in
the index. A highly liquid market index is one where the impact cost of
buying or selling the entire index is low.
It is the percentage mark up suffered while buying / selling the desired
quantity of a stock compared to its ideal price, that is, (best buy + best
sell)/2.
142
Let us assume the order book for a stock looks as follows:
Buy Sell
Quantity Price Quantity Price
1000 98 1000 99
2000 97 1500 100
1000 96 1000 101
To buy 1500 stocks,
Ideal price = 99 + 98 = 98.5
2
Actual buy price = 1000 * 99 + 500 * 100 = 99.33
1500
Impact cost = 99.33 -98.5 X 100 = 0.84%
(For 1500 stocks) 98.5
Impact cost for sell can also be worked out. The impact cost criterion requires
that the stocks traded for 85% of the trading days at an impact cost of less
than 0.75% can be included in the index.
Floating Stock: Companies eligible for inclusion in S&P CNX Nifty should have
atleast 12% floating stock. For this purpose, floating stock shall mean stocks
which are not held by the promoters and associated entities (where
identifiable) of such companies.
Base date and value:
The base date selected for S&P CNX Nifty index is the close of prices on
November 3, 1995, which marks the completion of one year of operations of
NSE s Capital Market segment. The base value of the index has been set at
1000.
S&P CNX Nifty has a historical time series dating back to January 1990. It is
worth explaining the manner of calculation of the series. On 1st July 1990,
BSE (the Stock Exchange, Bombay) data for the preceding six months was
analysed to shortlist a set of stocks which had adequate liquidity. The top fift
y
companies were included in the index set, and the index time series was
calculated for three months from 1st July 1990 to 30th September 1990. The
index set was re-calculated afresh at this point (i.e. by dropping some low-
liquidity or low MC stocks, and adding better alternatives), and this new index
set was used for the next three months, and so on. This methodology avoided
selection bias associated with the simple back-calculation, which generates
higher returns in the back-calculated series than is really the case. This
happens because the index set chosen today is likely to contain stocks, which
have fared well in the recent past. Conversely, stocks that fared badly in the
past are likely to have lower MC and hence not get included in today s index
set. The historical time-series of Nifty truly reflects the behaviour of an inde
x
143
populated with the biggest 50 stocks, which have required levels of liquidity
through out.
Index maintenance
An index is required to be maintained professionally to ensure that it
continues to remain a consistent benchmark of the equity markets. This
involves transparent policies for inclusion and exclusion of stocks in the index
and for day-to-day tracking and giving effect to corporate actions on
individual stocks. At IISL, an Index Policy Committee comprising of eminent
professionals from mutual funds, broking houses, financial institutions,
academicians etc. formulates policy and guidelines for management of the
Indices. An Index Maintenance Sub-Committee, comprising of representatives
from NSE, CRISIL, S&P and IISL takes all decisions on addition/ deletion of
stocks in any Index and the day to day index maintenance.
On-line computation and dissemination:
The index is calculated afresh every time a trade takes place in an index
stock. Hence, we often see days where there are more than 5,00,000
observations for Nifty. The index data base provides data relating to Open,
High, Low, and Close values of index every day, the number of shares traded
for each of the index stocks, the sum of value of the stocks traded of each of
the index stocks, the sum of the MC of all the stocks in the index etc.
Nifty is calculated on-line and disseminated over trading terminals across the
country. This is also disseminated on real-time basis to information vendors
such as Bloomberg, Reuters etc.
3.6.3 India Index Services & Products Ltd. (IISL)
IISL is jointly promoted by NSE, the leading stock exchange and The Credit
Rating and Information Services of India Ltd. (CRISIL), the leading credit
rating agency in India. IISL has a consulting and license agreement with
Standard & Poor s (S&P), the leading index services provider in the world.
S&P CNX Nifty, the most popular and widely used indicator of the stock
market in India, is the owned and ma naged by IISL, which also maintains
over 80 indices comprising broad based benchmark indices, sectoral indices
and customised indices. The prominent indices provided by IISL include:
Name of the Index Description
S&P CNX Nifty 50-stock large M Cap Index
S&P CNX 500 A broad based 500 stock Index
S&P CNX Defty US $ denominated Index of S&P CNX Nifty
S&P CNX Industry indices The S&P CNX 500 in classified in 72 industry
sectors. Each such sector forms an Index by
itself.
144
Name of the Index Description
CNX Nifty Junior 50-stock Index which comprise the next rung of
large and liquid stocks after S&P CNX Nifty
CNX PSE Index Public Sector Enterprises Index
CNX MNC Index Multinational Companies Index
CNX IT Index Information Technology Index
CNX FMCG Index Fast Moving Consumer Goods Index
CNX Midcap Midcap Index
MODEL QUESTIONS
Ques:1
In which of the following market types Central Government securities
are allowed to trade?
(a) Normal Market
(b) Odd lot Market
(c) Auction Market
(d) Retdebt Market
Correct Answer: (d)
Ques:2. Basket Trading allows the trader to ______.
(a) create offline order entry file for a selected portfolio
(b) buy/sell nifty stock
(c) only buy selected portfolio
(d) trade only on selected portfolio
Correct Answer: (a)
Ques:3 What is the prevailing price band for Nifty/derivative stocks?
(a)10%
(b) 15%
(c) 20%
(d) No band
Correct Answer: (d)
Ques:3
The market price protection functionality_______.
(a) limits the risk of a market order within a pre-set percentage of
the last traded price
(b) limits over all risk of the market
(c) protects the market from price fluctuations
145
Correct Answer: (a)
Ques:4. Auction price applicable is _______.
(a) previous day s close price (b) last trade price on that day
(c) that day s close price (d) previous day s last trade price
Correct Answer: (a)
Ques:5 A professional clearing member is _________.
(a) a trading and clearing member and is entitled to settle trades for
clients/trading members
(b) a trading and clearing member and is not entitled to settle trades
for client
(c) only a clearing member and can clear and settle trades for his
clients
(d) none of the above
Correct answer: (c)
Ques:6 Custodial Trades are confirmed by the custodians on _____ day.
(a)T (b) T + 1
(c) T + 2 (d) none of the above
Correct answer: (b)
Ques:7 Delivery versus Payment (DVP) mechanism is ensured through:
(a) Pay-in first and Pay-out later,
(b) Pay-out first and Pay-in later,
(c) Pay-in and Pay-out simultaneously
(d) None of the above
Correct answer: (d)
146
CHAPTER 4: GOVERNMENT
SECURITIES MARKET
4.1 INTRODUCTION TO INDIAN DEBT MARKETS
The debt market in India comprises of two main segments, viz., the
government securities market and the corporate securities market. The
market for government securities is the most dominant part of the debt
market in terms of outstanding securities, market capitalisation, trading
volume and number of participants. It sets benchmark for the rest of the
market.
The short-term instruments in this segment are used by RBI as instrument of
monetary policy. The main instruments in the government securities market
are fixed rate bond, floating rate bonds, zero coupon bonds and inflation
index bonds, partly paid securities, securities with embedded derivatives,
treasury bills and the state government bonds. The corporate debt segment
includes private corporate debt, bonds issued by public sector units (PSUs)
and bonds issued by development financial institutions (DFIs). This segment
is not very deep and liquid. The market for debt derivatives has not yet
developed appreciably.
The government securities market has witnessed significant transformation in
the 1990s in terms of market design. The most significant developments
include introduction of auction-based price determination for government
securities, development of new instruments and mechanisms for government
borrowing as well as participation by new market participants, increase in
information dissemination on market borrowings and secondary market
transactions, screen based negotiations for trading, and the development of
the yield curve for government securities for marking-to-market portfolios of
banks. During the last one decade, RBI introduced the system of primary
dealers (PDs) and satellite dealers (since discontinued from December 2002),
introduced delivery versus payment (DvP) in securities settlement, expanded
the number of players in the market with facility for non-competitive bidding
in auctions, and allowed wider participation in constituent Subsidiary General
Ledger (SGL) accounts. The government securities market also benefited
from emergence of liquidity arrangement through the Liquidity Adjustment
Facility (LAF), expansion of the repo markets, complete stoppage of
automatic monetisation of deficits, and emergence of self regulatory bodies,
such as, the Primary Dealers Association of India (PDAI) and the Fixed
Income Money Markets and Derivatives Association (FIMMDA).Continuous
reforms in the G-Sec market are being undertaken for improving market
design and liquidity.
147
To enhance liquidity and efficiency, some important initiatives have been
taken such as: (i) introduction of repo/reverse repo operations in government
securities to facilitate participants of manage short term liquidity mismatches
(ii) operationalisation of Negotiated Dealing system (NDS), an automated
electronic trading platform (c) establishment of Clearing Corporation of India
Ltd. (CCIL) for providing an efficient and guaranteed settlement platform (d)
introduction of G-secs in stock exchanges (e) introduction of Real time Gross
Settlement System (RTGS) which addresses settlement risk and facilitates
liquidity management, (g) adoption of a modified Delivery-versus-Payment
mode of settlement which provides for net settlement of both funds and
securities legs and (h) announcement of an indicative auction calendar for
Treasury Bills and Dated Securities.
Several initiatives have been taken to widen the investor base for government
securities. To enable small and medium sized investors to participate in the
primary auction of government securities, a Scheme of Non Competitive
Bidding was introduced in January 2002, this scheme is open to any person
including firms, companies, corporate bodies, institutions, provident funds
and any other entity prescribed by RBI.
In order to provide banks and other institutions with a more efficient trading
platform, an anonymous order matching trading platform (NDS-OM) was
made operational from August 1, 2005.
To provide an opportunity to market participants to manage their interest rate
risk more effectively and to improve liquidity in the secondary market, short
sales was permitted in dated government securities during 2006. When
Issued (WI) trading in Central government securities was also introduced in
2006. WI trades are essentially forward transactions in a security which is stil
l
to be issued.
The settlement system for transactions in government securities was
standardized to T+1 cycle with a view to provide the participants with more
processing time at their disposal and therefore, to enable better management
of both funds as well as risk.
Indian G-Sec market has now become increasingly broad-based,
characterised by an efficient auction process, an active secondary market and
a fairly liquid yield curve up to 30 years. An active Primary Dealer (PD)
system and electronic trading and settlement technology that ensure safe
settlement with Straight Through Processing (STP) and central counterparty
guarantee support the market now.
These reforms have resulted in a marked change in the nature of instruments
offered, a wider investor base and a progressive movement towards market
148
determined interest rates. The market for government securities has,
however, remained largely captive and wholesale in nature, with banks and
institutions being the major investors in this segment. While the primary
market for government securities witnessed huge activity due to increased
borrowing needs of the government, only a small part of the outstanding
stock finds its way into the secondary market.
The number of transactions in the secondary market continues to be small
relative to the size of outstanding debt and the size of the participants. The
liquidity continues to be thin despite a shift to screen-based trading on NSE.
The holding of G-Secs among the financial institutions has been more
diversified, particularly , with the emergence of insurance and pension funds
as a durable investor class for the long-term securities. This became possible
due to the sustained efforts devoted to elongation of the maturity profile of
government securities.
4.1.1 Market Subgroups
The various subgroups in debt market in India are discussed below:
Government securities form the oldest and most dominant part of the debt
market in India. The market for government securities comprises the
securities issued by the central government, state governments and state-
sponsored entities. In the recent past, local bodies such as municipal
corporations have also begun to tap the debt market for funds. The
Central Government mobilises funds mainly through issue of dated
securities and T-bills, while State Governments rely solely on State
Development Loans. The major investors in sovereign papers are banks,
insurance companies and financial institutions, which generally do so to
meet statutory requirements.
Bonds issued by government-sponsored institutions like DFIs,
infrastructure-related institutions and the PSUs, also constitute a major
part of the debt market. The gradual withdrawal of budgetary support to
PSUs by the government since 1991 has increased their reliance on the
bond market for mobilising resources. The preferred mode of raising
capital by these institutions has been private placement, barring an
occasional public issue. Banks, financial institutions and other corporates
have been the major subscribers to these issues.
The Indian corporate sector relies, to a great extent, on raising capital
through debt issues, which comprise of bonds and Commercial Papers
(CPs). Of late, most of the bond issues are being placed through the
private placement route. These bonds are structured to suit the
requirements of investors and the issuers, and include a variety of tailor-
made features with respect to interest payments and redemption.
Corporate bond market has seen a lot of innovations, including securitised
products, corporate bond strips, and a variety of floating rate instruments
with floors and caps. In the recent years, there has been an increase in
issuance of corporate bonds with embedded put and call options. While
149
some of these securities are traded on the stock exchanges, the
secondary market for corporate debt securities is yet to fully develop.
In addition to above, there is another segment, which comprises of short-

term paper issued by banks, mostly in the form of certificates of deposit
(CDs). This segment is, however, comparatively less dominant.
The Indian debt market also has a large non-securitised, transactions-
based segment, where players are able to lend and borrow amongst
themselves. This segment comprises of call and notice money markets,
inter-bank market for term money, market for inter-corporate loans, and
market for ready forward deals (repos). Typically, short-term instruments
are traded in this segment.
The market for interest rate derivatives like FRAs, IRSs, and OISs
(Overnight Index Swaps) is emerging to enable banks, PDs and FIs to
hedge interest rate risks.
4.1.2 Instruments
Debt instruments represent contracts whereby one party lends money to
another on pre-determined terms with regard to rate of interest to be paid by
the borrower to the lender, the periodicity of such interest payment, and the
repayment of the principal amount borrowed. In the Indian securities
markets, we use the term bond for debt instruments issued by the Central
and State governments and public sector organisations, and the term
debentures for instruments issued by private corporate sector. In this
workbook the terms bonds, debentures and debt instruments have been used
inter-changeably.
The principal features of a bond are:
Maturity: In the bond markets, the terms maturity and term-to-maturity,

are used quite frequently. Maturity of a bond refers to the date on which
the bond matures, or the date on which the borrower has agreed to repay
(redeem) the principal amount to the lender. The borrowing is
extinguished with redemption, and the bond ceases to exist after that
date. Term to maturity, on the other hand, refers to the number of years
remaining for the bond to mature. Term to maturity of a bond changes
everyday, from the date of issue of the bond until its maturity.
Coupon: Coupon refers to the periodic interest payments that are made
by the borrower (who is also the issuer of the bond) to the lender (the
subscriber of the bond). Coupon rate is the rate at which interest is paid,
and is usually represented as a percentage of the par value of a bond.
Principal: Principal is the amount that has been borrowed, and is also
called the par value or face value of the bond. The coupon is the product
of the principal and the coupon rate.
150
4.1.3 Participants
Debt markets are pre-dominantly wholesale markets, with institutional
investors being major participants. Banks, financial institutions, mutual funds,
provident funds, insurance companies and corporates are the main investors
in debt markets. Many of these participants are also issuers of debt
instruments. The small number of large players has resulted in the debt
markets being fairly concentrated, and evolving into a wholesale negotiated
dealings market. Most debt issues are privately placed or auctioned to the
participants. Secondary market dealings are mostly done on telephone,
through negotiations. In some segments, such as the government securities
market, market makers in the form of primary dealers have emerged, which
enable a broader holding of treasury securities. Debt funds of the mutual fund
industry, comprising of liquid funds, bond funds and gilt funds, represent a
recent mode of intermediation of retail investments into the debt markets.
The market participants in the debt market are described below:
(a) Central Government raises money through bond and T-bill issues to fund
budgetary deficits and other short and long-term funding requirements.
(b) Reserve Bank of India (RBI), as investment banker to the government,
raises funds for the government through dated securities and T-bill
issues, and also participates in the market through open-market
operations in the course of conduct of monetary policy. RBI also conducts
daily repo and reverse repo to moderate money supply in the economy.
RBI also regulates the bank rates and repo rates, and uses these rates as
tools of its monetary policy. Changes in these benchmark rates directly
impact debt markets and all participants in the market as other interest
rates realign themselves with these changes.
(c) Primary Dealers (PDs), who are market intermediaries appointed by RBI,
underwrite and make market in government securities by providing two-
way quotes, and have access to the call and repo markets for funds.
Their performance is assessed by RBI on the basis of their bidding
commitments and the success ratio achieved at primary auctions. In the
secondary market, their outright turnover has to three times their
holdings in dated securities and five times their holdings in treasury bills.
Satellite dealers constituted the second tier of market makers till
December 2002.
(d) State governments, municipal and local bodies issue securities in the
debt markets to fund their developmental projects as well as to finance
their budgetary deficits.
(e) Public Sector Undertakings (PSUs) and their finance corporations are
large issuers of debt securities. They raise funds to meet the long term
and working capital needs. These corporations are also investors in
bonds issued in the debt markets.
151
(f) Corporates issue short and long-term paper to meet their financial
requirements. They are also investors in debt securities issued in the
market.
(g) Development Financial Institutions (DFIs) regularly issue
bonds for
funding their financing requirements and working capital needs. They
also invest in bonds issued by other entities in the debt markets. Most FIs
hold government securities in their investment and trading portfolios.
(h) Banks are the largest investors in the debt markets, particularly the
government securities market due to SLR requirements. They are also
the main participants in the call money and overnight markets. Banks
arrange CP issues of corporates and are active in the inter-bank term
markets and repo markets for their short term funding requirements.
Banks also issue CDs and bonds in the debt markets. They also issue
bonds to raise funds for their Tier-II capital requirement.
(i) The investment norms for insurance companies make them large
participants in government securities market.
(j) Mutual funds have emerged as important players in the debt market,
owing to the growing number of debt funds that have mobilised
significant amounts from the investors. Most mutual funds also have
specialised debt funds such as gilt funds and liquid funds. Mutual funds
are not permitted to borrow funds, except for meeting very short-term
liquidity requirements. Therefore, they participate in the debt markets
pre-dominantly as investors, and trade on their portfolios quite regularly.
(k) Foreign Institutional Investors (FIIs) are permitted to invest in treasury
and corporate bonds, within certain limits.
(l) Provident and pension funds are large investors in the debt markets. The
prudential regulations governing the deployment of the funds mobilised
by them mandate investments pre-dominantly in treasury and PSU
bonds. They are, however, not very active traders in their portfolio, as
they are not permitted to sell their holdings, unless they have a funding
requirement that cannot be met through regular accruals and
contributions.
(m)
Charitable institutions, trusts and societies are also large investors in
the debt markets. They are, however, governed by their rules and byelaws
with respect to the kind of bonds they can buy and the ma nner in
which they can trade on their debt portfolios.
(n) Since January 2002, retail investors have been permitted submit noncompetiti
ve
bids at primary auction through any bank or PD. They submit
bids for amounts of Rs. 10,000 and multiples thereof, subject to the
condition that a single bid does not exceed Rs. 1 crore. The noncompetitive
bids upto a maximum of 5% of the notified amount are
accepted at the weighted average cut off price / yield.
(o) NDS, CCIL and WDM are other participants which are discussed in greater
detail in subsequent sections.
152
The matrix of issuers, investors, instruments in the debt market and their
maturities are presented in Table 4.1.
Table 4.1: Participants and Products in Debt Markets
Issuer Instruments Maturity Investors
Central
Government
Dated
Securities
2 - 30
years
RBI, Banks, Insurance
Companies, Provident Funds,
Mutual Funds, PDs,
Individuals.
Central
Government
T-Bills 91/182/364
days
RBI, Banks, Insurance
companies, Provident Funds,
PDs, Mutual Funds,
Individuals.
State
Government
Dated
Securities
5-13 years Banks, Insurance Companies,
Provident Funds, Individuals
PSUs Bonds,
Structured
Obligations
5-10 years Banks, Insurance Companies,
Provident Funds, Mutual
Funds, Individuals,
Corporates.
Corporates Debentures,
Bonds
1 - 12
years
Banks. Mutual Funds,
Corporates, Individuals.
Corporates,
PDs
Commercial
Papers
15 days to
1 year
Banks, Mutual Funds,
Financial Institutions,
Corporates, Individuals, FIIs
Scheduled
Commercial
Banks
15 days to
1 year
Banks, Corporations,
Individuals, companies,
trusts, funds, associations,
FIs, non-resident Indians
Select
Financial
Institutions
(under
Umbrella
Limit fixed
RBI)
Certificates of
Deposits
(CD)
1 year to
10 years
Scheduled
Commercial
Banks
Bank bonds 1-10 years
Corporations, Individuals,
Companies, Trusts, Funds,
Associations, FIs, nonresident
Indians
PSU
Municipal
bonds
0-7 Years
Banks, Corporations,
Individuals, companies,
trusts, funds, associations,
FIs, non-resident Indians
153
4.2 PRIMARY MARKET
4.2.1 Issuance Process-Government securities
The issue of government securities is governed by the terms and conditions
specified in the general notification of the government and also the terms and
conditions specified in the specific notification issued in respect of issue of
each security. The terms and conditions specified in the general notification
are discussed in this section.
Any person including firm, company, corporate body, institution, state
government, provident fund, trust, NRI, OCB predominantly owned by NRIs
and FII registered with SEBI and approved by RBI can submit offers,
including in electronic form, for purchase of government securities. Payment
for the securities are made by the applicants on such dates as mentioned in
the specific notification, by means of cash or cheque drawn on RBI or
Banker's pay order or by authority to debit their current account with RBI or
by Electronic Fund Transfer in a secured environment. Government securities
are issued for a minimum amount of Rs.10,000/- (face value) and in multiples
of Rs.10,000/-thereafter. These are issued to the investors by credit to their
SGL account or to a Constituents SGL account of the institution as specified
by them, maintained with RBI or by credit to their Bond Ledger Account
maintained with RBI or with any institution authorised by RBI, or in the form
of physical certificate. These are repaid at Public Debt Offices of RBI or any
other institution at which they are registered at the time of repayment. If
specified in the specific notification, the payment for securities and the
repayment thereof can be made in specified installments.
Government issues securities through the following modes:
(a) Issue of securities through auction: The securities are issued through
auction either on price basis or on yield basis. Where the issue is on price
basis, the coupon is pre-determined and the bidders quote price per
Rs.100 face value of the security, at which they desire to purchase the
security. Where the issue is on yield basis, the coupon of the security is
decided in an auction and the security carries the same coupon till
maturity. On the basis of the bids received, RBI determines the
maximum rate of yield or the minimum offer price as the case may be at
which offers for purchase of securities would be accepted at the auction.
The auctions for issue of securities (on either yield basis or price basis)
are held either on Uniform price method or on Multiple price method.
Where an auction is held on Uniform price method, competitive bids
offered with rates up to and including the maximum rate of yield or the
prices up to and including the minimum offer price, as determined by
RBI, are accepted at the maximum rate of yield or minimum offer price
154
so determined. Bids quoted higher than the maximum rate of yield or
lower than the minimum price are rejected. Where an auction is held on
Multiple price method, competitive bids offered at the maximum rate of
yield or the minimum offer price, as determined by RBI, are accepted.
Other bids tendered at lower than the maximum rate of yield or higher
than the minimum offer price are accepted at the rate of yield or price as
quoted in the respective bid. Bids quoted higher than the maximum rate
of yield or lower than the minimum price are rejected.
Individuals and specified institutions (read retail investors ) can
participate in the auctions on non-competitive basis. Allocation of the
securities to non-competitive bidders are made at the discretion of RBI
and at a price not higher than the weighted average price arrived at on
the basis of the competitive bids accepted at the auction or any other
price announced in the specific notification. The nominal amount of
securities that would be allocated to retail investors on non-competitive
basis is restricted to a maximum 5 percentage of the aggregate nominal
amount of the issue, within or outside the nominal amount which is
issued at the weighted average price of the issue at the auction.
(b) Issue of securities with pre-announced coupon rates: The coupon
on such securities is announced before the date of floatation and the
securities are issued at par. In case the total subscription exceeds the
aggregate amount offered for sale, RBI may make partial allotment to all
the applicants.
(c) Issue of securities through tap sale: No aggregate amount is
indicated in the notification in respect of the securities sold on tap. Sale
of such securities may be extended to more than one day and the sale
may be closed at any time on any day.
(d) Issue of securities in conversion of maturing treasury bills/dated
securities: The holders of treasury bills of certain specified maturities
and holders of specified dated securities are provided an option to
convert their holding at specified prices into new securities offered for
sale. The new securities could be issued on an auction/pre-announced
coupon basis. RBI may participate in auctions as a non-competitor or
subscribe to the government securities in other issues. Allotment of
securities to RBI are made at the cut off price/yield emerging in the
auction or at any other price/yield decided by the government. In order
to maintain a stable interest rate environment, RBI accepts private
placement of government securities. Such privately placed securities and
securities that devolve on RBI are subsequently offloaded through RBI s
open market operations.
Government issues the following types of Government securities:
(a) Securities with fixed coupon rates: These securities carry a specific
coupon rate remaining fixed during the term of the security and payable
periodically. These may be issued at a discount, at par or at a premium
to the face value and are redeemed at par.
155
(b) Floating Rate Bonds: These securities carry a coupon rate which
varies according to the change in the base rate to which it is related.
The description of the base rate and the manner in which the coupon
rate is linked to it is announced in the specific notification. The coupon
rate may be subject to a floor or cap.
(c) Zero Coupon Bonds: These are issued at a discount and redeemed at
par. No interest payment is made on such bonds before maturity. On the
basis of the bids received through tenders, RBI determines the cut-off
price at which tenders for purchase such bonds would be accepted at the
auction.
(d) Securities with Embedded Derivatives: These securities are repaid
at the option of government/holder of the security, before the specified
redemption date, where a call option / put option is specified in the
specific notification and repaid on the date of redemption specified in the
specific notification, where neither a call option nor a put option is
specified/ exercised.
(e) Indexed Bond: Interest payments of these bonds are based on
Wholesale Price Index/ Consumer Price Index.
4.2.2 Issuance Process Treasury Bills
Treasury bills (T-bills) are short-term debt instruments issued by the Central
government. Three types of T-bills are issued: 91-day, 182-day and 364-day,
T-bills are sold through an auction process announced by the RBI at a
discount to its face value. RBI issues a calendar of T-bill auctions. It also
announces the exact dates of auction, the amount to be auctioned and
payment dates. T-bills are available for a minimum amount of Rs. 25,000 and
in multiples of Rs. 25,000. Banks and PDs are major bidders in the T-bill
market. Both discriminatory and uniform price auction methods are used in
issuance of T-bills. The auctions of all T-bills are multiple/discriminatory pri
ce
auctions, where the successful bidders have to pay the prices they have
actually bid for. Non-competitive bids, where bidders need not quote the rate
of yield at which they desire to buy these T-bills, are also allowed from
provident funds and other investors. RBI allots bids to the non-competitive
bidders at the weighted average yield arrived at on the basis of the yields
quoted by accepted competitive bids at the auction. Allocations to noncompetitiv
e
bidders are outside the amount notified for sale. Non-competitive
bidders therefore do not face any uncertainty in purchasing the desired
amount of T-bills from the auctions.
Pursuant to the enactment of FRBM Act with effect from April 1, 2006, RBI is
prohibited from participating in the primary market and hence devlovement
on RBI is not allowed. Auction of all the Treasury Bills are based on multiple
price auction method at present. The notified amounts of the auction is
decided every year at the beginning of financial year ( Rs.500 crore each for
91-day and 182-day Treasury Bills and Rs.1,000 crore for 364-day Treasury
156
Bills for the year 2008-09) in consultation with GOI. RBI issues a Press
Release detailing the notified amount and indicative calendar in the beginning
of the financial year. The auction for MSS amount varies depending on
prevailing market condition. Based on the requirement of GOI and prevailing
market condition, the RBI has description to change the notified amount. Also,
it is description of the RBI to accept, reject or partially accept the notified
amount depending on prevailing market condition.
Cut-Off Yields
T-bills are issued at a discount and are redeemed at par. The implicit yield in
the T-bill is the rate at which the issue price (which is the cut-off price in t
he
auction) has to be compounded, for the number of days to maturity, to equal
the maturity value.
Yield, given price, is computed using the formula:
= ((100-Price)*365)/ (Price * No of days to maturity)
Similarly, price can be computed, given yield, using the formula:

= 100/(1+(yield% * (No of days to maturity/365))
For example, a 182-day T-bill, auctioned on January 18, at a price of Rs.
95.510 would have an implicit yield of 9.4280% computed as follows:

= ((100-95.510)*365)/(95.510*182)
9.428% is the rate at which Rs. 95.510 will grow over 182 days, to yield Rs.
100 on maturity. Treasury bill cut-off yields in the auction represent the
default-free money market rates in the economy, and are important
benchmark rates.
4.2.3 Participants
Primary dealers (PDs) are important intermediaries in the government
securities markets. There are 19 PDs operating in the market. They act as
underwriters in the primary market for government securities, and as market
makers in the secondary market. PDs underwrite a portion of the issue of
government security that is floated for a pre-determined amount. Normally,
PDs are collectively offered to underwrite up to 100% of the notified amount
in respect of all issues where amounts are notified. The underwriting
commitment of each PD is broadly decided on the basis of its size in terms of
its net owned funds, its holding strength, the committed amount of bids and
the volume of turnover in securities. Several facilities have been extended to
PDs given their special role in the government debt market. RBI provides
liquidity support to the PDs through LAF against collateral of government
securities and through repo operations/refinance. PDs are also given favoured
access to the RBI s open market operations. PDs are permitted to borrow and
lend in the money market, including call money market. PDs can also raise
funds through CPs and have access to finance from commercial banks as any
other corporate borrower.
157
Satellite dealers (SDs) formed the second tier of trading and distribution of
government securities. They were expected to further strengthen the
infrastructure of distribution, enhance liquidity, provide a retail outlet and
encourage holding among a wider investor base. They were given the facility
of SGL, CSGL, current accounts, liquidity support through reverse repo, issue
of CPs, etc. However, the Satellite Dealers Scheme was discontinued since
December 2002.
4.3 SECONDARY MARKET
4.3.1 Trading of Government Securities on Stock
Exchanges
With a view to encouraging wider participation of all classes of investors,
including retail, trading in government securities through a nationwide,
anonymous, order driven screen based trading system on stock exchanges
and settlement through the depositories, in the same manner in which trading
takes place in equities, has been introduced with effect from January 16,
2003. Accordingly, trading of dated Government of India (GOI) securities in
dematerialized form has started on automated order driven system of the
National Stock Exchange (NSE), The Bombay Stock Exchange, Mumbai (BSE)
and the Over the Counter Exchange of India (OTCEI). .
This trading facility is in addition to the reporting/trading facility in the
Negotiated Dealing System. Being a parallel system, the trades concluded on
the exchanges will be cleared by their respective clearing
corporations/clearing houses. The trades of RBI regulated entities have to be
settled either directly with clearing corporation/clearing house (in case they
are clearing members) or else through clearing member custodian.
Primary Dealers (PDs) are expected to play an active role in providing
liquidity to the government securities market and promote retailing. They
may, therefore, make full use of proposed facility to distribute government
securities to all categories of investors through the process of placing and
picking-up orders on the exchanges.
PDs may open demat accounts with a Depository Participant (DP) of
NSDL/CDSL in addition to their accounts with RBI. Value free transfer of
securities between SGL/CSGL and demat accounts is enabled by PDO-Mumbai
subject to operational guidelines being issued by our Department of
Government and Bank Accounts (DGBA).
Operational Guidelines:
1.
PDs should take specific approval from their Board of Directors to
enable them to trade in the Stock Exchanges.
158
2.
PDs may undertake transactions only on the basis of giving and taking
delivery of securities.
3.
Brokers/trading members shall not be involved in the settlement
process; all trades have to be settled either directly with clearing
corporation/clearing house (in case they are clearing members) or else
through clearing member custodians.
4.
The trades done through any single broker will also be subject to the
current regulations on transactions done through brokers.
5.
At the time of trade, securities must be available with the PDs either in
their SGL or in the demat account.
6.
A standardized settlement on T+1 basis of all outright secondary
market transactions in Government Securities has been adopted to
provide the participants more processing time for transactions and to
help in better funds as well as risk management.
7.
In the case of repo transactions in Government Securities, however,
market participants will have the choice of settling the first leg on
either T+0 basis or T+1 basis, as per their requirements.
8.
Any settlement failure on account of non-delivery of securities/ non-
availability of clear funds will be treated as SGL bouncing and the
current penalties in respect of SGL transactions will be applicable.
Stock Exchanges will report such failures to the respective Public Debt
Offices.
9.
PDs who are trading members of the Stock Exchanges may have to
put up margins on behalf of their non-institutional client trades. Such
margins are required to be collected from the respective clients. PDs
are not permitted to pay up margins on behalf of their client trades
and incur overnight credit exposure to their clients. In so far as the
intra day exposures on clients for margins are concerned, the PDs
should be conscious of the underlying risks in such exposures.
10. PDs who intend to offer clearing /custodial services should take
specific approval from SEBI in this regard. Similarly, PDs who intend to
take trading membership of the Stock Exchanges should satisfy the
criteria laid down by SEBI and the Stock Exchanges.
Most of the secondary market trades in government securities are negotiated
between participants (Banks, FIs, PDs, MFs) having SGL accounts with RBI.
These may be negotiated directly between counter parties or negotiated
through brokers. NDS of RBI provides an electronic platform for negotiating
trades in government securities. If a broker is involved, the trade is reported
to the concerned exchange. Trades are also executed on electronic platform
of the WDM segment of NSE. WDM segment of NSE provides trading and
reporting facilities for government securities.
4.3.2 Repo and Reverse Repo
Repo or Repurchase Agreements are short-term money market instruments.
Repo is nothing but collateralized borrowing and lending through
159
sale/purchase operations in debt instruments. Under a repo transaction, a
holder of securities sells them to an investor with an agreement to repurchase
at a predetermined date and rate. In a typical repo transaction, the counter-
parties agree to exchange securities and cash, with a simultaneous
agreement to reverse the transactions after a given period. To the lender of
cash, the securities lent by the borrower serves as the collateral; to the
lender of securities, the cash borrowed by the lender serves as the collateral.
Repo thus represents a collateralized short term lending.
A reverse repo is the mirror image of a repo. When one is doing a repo, it is
reverse repo for the other party. For, in a reverse repo, securities are
acquired with a simultaneous commitment to resell.
Hence, whether a transaction is a repo or a reverse repo is determined only in
terms of who initiated the first leg of the transaction. When the reverse
repurchase transaction matures, the counter-party returns the security to the
entity concerned and receives its cash along with a profit spread.
In a repo transaction, the securities should be sold in the first leg at market
related prices and repurchased in second leg at derived price. The sale and
repurchase should be accounted for in the repo account. On the other hand,
in a reverse repo transaction, the securities should be purchased in the first
leg at market related prices and sold in second leg at derived price. The
purchase and sale should be accounted for in the reverse repo account.
Illustration:
Details of Repo in a coupon bearing security:
Security offered under Repo 11.43% 2015
Coupon payment dates 7 August and 7 February
Market Price of the security
offered under Repo (i.e. price
of the security in the first leg)
Rs.113.00 (1)
Date of the Repo 19 January, 2003
Repo interest rate 7.75%
Tenor of the re po 3 days
Broken period interest for the
first leg*
11.43%x162/360x100=5.1435 (2)
Cash consideration for the first
leg
(1) + (2) = 118.1435 (3)
Repo interest** 118.1435x3/365x7.75%=0.0753 (4)
Broken period interest for the
second leg
11.43% x 165/360x100=5.2388 (5)
Price for the second leg (3)+(4)-(5) = 118.1435 + 0.0753
- 5.2388
= 112.98
(6)
Cash consideration for the
second leg
(5)+(6) = 112.98 + 5.2388
= 118.2188
(7)
160
* Computation of days based on 30/360 day count convention
** Computation of days based on Actual/365 day count convention applicable
to money market instruments
4.3.3 Negotiated Dealing System
The first step towards electronic bond trading in India was the introduction of
the RBIs Negotiated Dealing System in February 2002.
NDS, interalia, facilitates screen based negotiated dealing for secondary
market transactions in government securities and money market instruments,
online reporting of transactions in the instruments available on the NDS and
dissemination of trade information to the market. Government Securities
(including T-bills), call money, notice/term money, repos in eligible securities
are available for negotiated dealing through NDS among the members. NDS
members concluding deals in the telephone market in instruments available
on NDS, are required to report the deal on NDS system within 15 minutes of
concluding the deal. NDS interfaces with CCIL for settlement of government
securities transactions for both outright and repo trades done/reported by
NDS members. Other instruments viz, call money, notice/term money,
commercial paper and certificate of deposits settle as per existing settlement
procedure.
With the objective of creating a broad-based and transparent market in
government securities and thereby enhancing liquidity in the system, the NDS
is designed to provide:
Electronic bidding in primary market auctions (T-Bills, dated securities,

state government securities) by members,
Electronic bidding for OMO of RBI including repo auctions under LAF,
Screen based negotiated dealing system for secondary market operations,
Reporting of deals in government securities done among NDS members
outside the system (over telephone or using brokers of exchanges) for
settlement,
Dissemination of trade information to NDS members,
Countrywide access of NDS through INFINET,
Electronic connectivity for settlement of trades in secondary market both
for outright and repos either through CCIL or directly through RBI, and
Creation and maintenance of basic data of instruments and members.
The functional scope of the NDS relating to trading includes:
giving/receiving a Quote,
placing a call and negotiation (with or without a reference to the quote),
entering the deals successfully negotiated,
setting up preferred counterparty list and exposure limits to the
counterparties,
161
dissemination of on-line market information such as the last traded prices
of securities, volume of transactions, yield curve and information on live
quotes,
interface with Securities Settlement System for facilitating settlement of
deals done in government securities and treasury bills.
facility for reporting on trades executed through the exchanges for
information dissemination and settlement in addition to deals done
through NDS.
The system is designed to maintain anonymity of buyers and sellers from the
market but only the vital information of a transaction viz., ISIN of the
security, nomenclature, amount (face value), price/rate and/ or indicative
yield, in case applicable, are disseminated to the market, through Market and
Trade Watch.
The benefits of NDS include:
Transparency of trades in money and government securities market,

Electronic connectivity with securities settlement systems, thus,
eliminating submission of physical SGL form,
Settlement through electronic SGL transfer,
Elimination of errors and discrepancies and delay inherent in manual
processing system, and
Electronic audit trail for better monitoring and control.
NDS was intended to be used principally for bidding in the primary auctions of
G-secs conducted by RBI, and for trading and reporting of secondary market
transactions. However, because of several technical problems and system
inefficiencies, NDS was being used as a reporting platform for secondary
market transactions and not as a dealing system. For actual transactions, its
role was limited to placing bids in primary market auctions. Much of
secondary market in the bond market continued to be broker intermediated.
It was therefore, decided to introduce a screen-based (i.e electronic)
anonymous order matching system, integrated with NDS. This system
(NDS-OM) has become operational with effect from August 1, 2005. While
initially only banks and primary dealers could trade on it, NDS-OM has been
gradually expanded to cover other institutional players like insurance
companies, mutual funds, etc. Further, NDS-OM has been extended to cover
all entities required by law or regulation to invest in Government securities
such as deposit taking NBFCs, Provident Funds, Pension Funds, Mutual Funds,
Insurance Companies, Cooperative Banks, Regional Rural Banks, Trusts, etc.
The trades agreed on this system flow directly to CCIL for settlement.
The order matching system is a transparent, screen based and anonymous
trading platform, Investors enter purchase/sale (bid and offer) orders on the
system for individual securities they wish to deal in. The system ranks the
orders in terms of prices and, for more than one order at the same price, in
terms of timing of the orders (the earlier order gets priority). It then tries t
o
162
match the sale orders with the purchase orders available on the system.
When a match occurs, the trade is confirmed. The counterparties are not
aware of each others identities- hence the anonymous nature of the system.
The NDS-OM has several advantages over the erstwhile telephone based
market. It is faster, transparent, straight through processing, audits trails fo
r
transactions and cheaper. Straight through processing (STP) of transactions
means that, for participants using CCILs clearing and settlement system, once
a deal has been struck on NDS-OM, no further human intervention is
necessary right upto settlement, thus eliminating possibilities human errors.
4.3.4 Wholesale Debt Market of NSE
The wholesale debt market (WDM) segment of NSE commenced operations on
June 30, 1994 and provided the first formal screen-based trading facility for
the debt market in the country. Initially, government securities, T-bills and
bonds issued by PSUs were made available in this segment. This range has
been widened to include non-traditional instruments like floating rate bonds,
zero coupon bonds, index bonds, CPs, CDs, corporate debentures, state
government loans, SLR and non-SLR bonds issued by financial institutions,
units of mutual funds and securitised debt. The WDM trading system, known
as NEAT (National Exchange for Automated Trading), is a fully automated
screen based trading system, which enables members across the country to
trade simultaneously with enormous ease and efficiency. The trading system
is an order driven system, which matches best buy and sell orders on a
price/time priority.
Trading system provides two market sub-types: continuous market and
negotiated market. In continuous market, the buyer and seller do not know
each other and they put their best buy/sell orders, which are stored in order
book with price/time priority. If orders match, it results into a trade. The
trades in WDM segment are settled directly between the participants, who
take an exposure to the settlement risk attached to any unknown counter-
party. In the NEAT-WDM system, all participants can set up their counter-
party exposure limits against all probable counter-parties. This enables the
trading member/participant to reduce/minimise the counter-party risk
associated with the counter-party to trade. A trade does not take place if both
the buy/sell participants do not invoke the counter-party exposure limit in the
trading system.
In the negotiated market, the trades are normally decided by the seller and
the buyer outside the exchange, and reported to the Exchange through the
broker. Thus, deals negotiated or structured outside the exchange are
disclosed to the market through NEAT-WDM system. In negotiated market, as
buyers and sellers know each other and have agreed to trade, no counter-
party exposure limit needs to be invoked.
163
The trades on the WDM segment could be either outright trades or repo
transactions with flexibility for varying days of settlement (T+0 to T+2) and
repo periods (1 to 14 days). For every trade, it is necessary to specify the
number of settlement days and the trade type (repo or non-repo), and in the
event of a repo trade, the repo term.
The Exchange facilitates trading members to report off-market deals in
securities in cases where the repo period is more than the permissible days in
the trading system (14 days) or where the securities are not available for
trading on the Exchange as they do not meet the listing requirements. These
trades are required to be reported to the Exchange within 24 hours of the
issuance of contract note.
Membership in NSE:
Membership of NSE-WDM segment is open to all persons desirous of
becoming trading members, subject to meeting requirements/criteria as laid
down by SEBI and the Exchange Please refer to the chapter 3 for details.
Listing:
All Government securities and Treasury bills are deemed to be listed
automatically as and when they are issued. Other securities, issued publicly
or placed privately, could be listed or admitted for trading, if eligible as per
rules of the Exchange by following prescribed procedure:
1.
All Listing are subject to compliance with Byelaws, Rules and other
requirements framed by the Exchange from time to time in addition to
the SEBI and other statutory requirements.
2.
The Issuer of security proposed for listing has to forward an
application in the prescribed format, which forms a part of the Listing
Booklet.
3.
Every issuer, depending on the category and type of security has to
submit along with application, such supporting documents/information
as stated in the Listing booklet and as prescribed by the Exchange
from time to time.
4.
On getting an in-principal consent of the exchange the issuer has to
enter into a listing agreement in the prescribed format under its
common seal.
5.
Upon listing, the Issuer has to comply with all requirements of law,
any guidelines/directions of Central Government, other Statutory or
local authority.
6.
The Issuer shall also comply with the post listing compliance as laid
out in the listing agreement and shall also comply with the rules, byelaws,
regulations and any other guidelines of the Exchange as
amended from time to time.
7.
Listing on WDM segment does not imply a listing on CM segment also
or vice versa.
8.
If the equity shares of an issuer are listed on other stock exchanges
but not listed on Capital Market segment of the Exchange, though
164
eligible, then the debt securities of the said issuer will not be permitted
to be listed on the WDM segment.
9.
The Exchange reserves the right to change any of the requirements
indicated in the Listing booklet without prior notice.
Certain securities like Treasury Bills and other securities issued by
Government of India available in demat form are eligible for Repo. Every
security in the trading system is given a symbol representative of the
security.
The market capitalisation of the securities on the WDM segment has been
increasing steadily. The segment has also seen a marked increase in the
number of securities available for trading other than the traditional
instruments like Govt. securities and T-bills.
The listing requirements for securities on the WDM segment are presented in
Table 4.2.
Table 4.2: Listing Criteria for Securities on WDM Segment
Issuer Eligibility Criteria for listing
Public Issue /Private Placement
Corporates (Public limited · Paid-up capital of Rs.10 crores; or
companies and Private limited · Market capitalisation of Rs.25 crores
companies) (In case of unlisted companies Networth more
than Rs.25 crores)
· Credit rating
Public Sector Undertaking,
Statutory Corporation
established/ constituted under
Special Act of Parliament
/State Legislature, Local
bodies/authorities,
· Credit rating
Mutual Funds:
Units of any SEBI registered
Mutual Fund/scheme :
· Investment objective to
invest predominantly in
debt or
· Scheme is traded in
secondary market as debt
instrument
· Qualifies for listing under SEBI s
Regulations
Infrastructure companies
· Tax exemption and
recognition as
infrastructure company
under related
statutes/regulations
· Qualifies for listing under the respective Acts,
Rules or Regulations under which the securities
are issued.
· Credit rating
165
Issuer Eligibility Criteria for listing
Public Issue /Private Placement
Financial Institutions u/s. 4A
of Companies Act, 1956
including Industrial
Development Corporations
Public Issue Private Placement
Qualifies for listing under the
respective Acts, Rules or
Regulations under which the
securities are issued.
Credit rating
Banks · Scheduled banks
· Networth of Rs.50 crores
or above
· Qualifies for listing under
the respective Acts, Rules
or Regulations under
which the securities are
issued.
· Scheduled Banks
· Networth of
Rs.50 crores or
above
· Credit rating
Trading Mechanism:
The trades on the WDM segment can be executed in the Continuous or
Negotiated market. In the continuous market, orders entered by the trading
members are matched by the trading system on time price priority. For each
order entering the trading system, the system scans for a probable match in
the order books. On finding a match, a trade takes place. In case the order
does not find a suitable counter order in the order books, it is stored in the
order books as a passive order. This could later match with any future order
entering the order book and result into a trade. This future order, which
results in matching of an existing order, is called the active order. In the
negotiated market, deals are negotiated outside the exchange between the
two counter parties and are reported on the trading system for approval.
The WDM trading system recognises three types of users-Trader, Privileged
and Inquiry. Trading Members can have all the three user types whereas
Participants are allowed privileged and inquiry users only. The user-id of a
trader gives access for entering orders on the trading system. The privileged
user has the exclusive right to set up counter party exposure limits. The
Inquiry user can only view the market information and set up the market
watch screen but cannot enter orders or set up exposure limits.
An Issuer shall ensure compliance with SEBI circulars/guidelines and any other l
aw,
guidelines/directions of Central Government, other Statutory or local authority
issued on regulating the listing of debt instruments from time to time.
The WDM supports two kinds of trades:
Repo trades (RE), which are reversed after a specific term, allowed only in
specified securities, and
166
· Non-Repo (NR) trades, which are for outright sales and purchase, allowed
in all securities.
Trading in debt as outright trades or as repo transactions can be for varying
days of settlement and repo periods. For every security it is necessary to
specify the number of settlement days (whether for same day settlement or
T+1 etc. depending on what is permitted by the Exchange), the trade type
(whether Repo or Non Repo), and in the event of a Repo trade, the Repo
term. Order matching is carried out only between securities which carry the
same conditions with respect to settlement days, trade type and repo period,
if any.
The security itself is represented by three fields
· Security Type (e.g. GS for Government Securities),

· Security (e.g. CG2010 -Central Government maturing in 2010) and
· Issue (e.g. 6.25%).
All order matching is on the basis of descriptors. All inquiries also require th
e
selection of valid descriptors. There are 6 fields, which together form an
entity, which is called Security Descriptor in the system:
Security
Type
Security Issue Settlement
days
Trade Type Repo
Term
GS CG2001 11.55% 1 Non Repo -
TB 364D 060901 1 Repo 7
All trade matching is essentially on the basis of descriptor, its price (for non
repos)/
rate (for repos) volume and order conditions and types. All volumes,
in order entry screens and display screens, are in Rs. lakh unless informed to
the trading members otherwise. All prices are in Rupees. Repo rates are in
percentages.
A maximum of two decimal places are allowed for values and four decimal
places for prices. The Exchange sets the multiples (incremental value) in
which orders can be entered for different securities. The Exchange announces
from time to time the minimum order size and increments thereof for various
securities traded on the Exchange.
Maximum Brokerage & Transaction Charges in Government
Securities:
In light of the recent fraudulent transactions in the guise of government
securities transactions in physical format, RBI decided to accelerate the
measures for further reducing the scope for trading in physical form. The
measures are as follows:
(i) For banks which do not have SGL account with RBI, only one CSGL
account can be opened.
167
(ii) In case the
CSGL accounts are opened with a scheduled commercial
bank, the account holder has to open a designated funds account (for all
CSGL related transactions) with the same bank.
(iii) The entities maintaining the CSGL/designated funds accounts will be
required to ensure availability of clear funds in the designated funds
accounts for purchases and of sufficient securities in the CSGL account
for sales before putting through the transactions.
(iv)No further transactions by the bank should be undertaken in physical
form with any broker with immediate effect.
(v) Banks
should ensure that brokers approved for transacting in
Government securities are registered with the debt market segment of
NSE/BSE/OTCEI.
(vi)It should also be ensured that users of NDS deal directly on the system
and use the system for transactions on behalf of their clients.
Brokerage Charges:
NSE has specified the maximum rates of brokerage that can be levied by
trading members for trades on WDM. The rate depends on the type of
security and value of transactions.
The rate for central government securities ranges from 5 paise to 25 paise for
every Rs. 100 of transactions. Similarly it ranges from 10 paise to 50 paise
for state government securities. It is 1% of the order value for debentures,
securitised debt and commercial paper. Details are as under:
Govt. Of India Securities and T-Bills
Order Value upto Rs.10 million 25 ps. per Rs.100
More than 10 million upto 50 million 15 ps. per Rs.100
More than 50 million upto 100 million 10 ps per Rs.100
More than 100 million 5 ps per Rs.100
State Govt. Securities & Institutional Bonds
Order Value upto Rs.2.5 million 50 ps. per Rs.100
More than 2.5 million upto 5 million 30 ps. per Rs.100
168
PSU & Floating Rate Bonds
Order Value upto Rs.10 million 50 ps. per Rs.100
More than 10 million upto 50 million 25 ps. per Rs.100
Commercial paper and Debentures 1% of the order value
A trading member is required to pay transaction charges @ Rs. 0.25 per lakh
of turnover subject to maximum of Rs. 1 lakh per year. However, this has
been waived at present for trading members.
4.3.5 Clearing and Settlement
A fast, transparent and efficient clearing system constitutes the basic
foundation of a well developed secondary market in government securities.
Dematerialised holding of government securities in the form of Subsidiary
General Ledger (SGL) was introduced to enable holding of securities in an
electronic book entry form by participants. The book entry form enhances the
transactional efficiency and mitigates risks associated with the physical
movement of securities by obviating the movement of physical movement of
physical securities during transfers. A dematerialization drive has also been
undertaken to convert all physical holdings of government securities into
dematerialized form. Consequently, at present about 99 % of government
securities holdings (in value terms) are held in dematerialized form.
The Delivery versus Payments (DvP) system in India was operationalised in
1995 to synchronise transfer of securities with cash payments, thereby
eliminating settlement risk in securities transactions. The Reserve Bank
operates a government securities settlement system for financial entities with
SGL accounts in its Public Debt Offices through DvP System. Under the
current system, banks, financial institutions, insurance companies and PDs
are allowed to hold SGL accounts for securities and current accounts for cash.
For these participants, the settlement is done through the DvP system. Other
participants such as corporates, mutual funds, provident funds, co-operative
banks and societies, and individuals, who are not allowed to hold direct SGL
accounts with the Reserve Bank, can operate via the constituents SGL
account maintained by SGL account holders. Detailed guidelines have been
issued to ensure that entities providing custodial services for their
constituents employ appropriate accounting practices and safeguards.
The DvP system, which was initially on the basis of gross settlement for both
securities and funds (DvP I method), shifted to DvP-II method where
settlement for securities was on a gross basis but settlement of funds was on
169
a net basis. Both funds and securities are settled on a net basis (DvP-III
method) since 2004. Each security is deliverable/ receivable on a net basis for
a particular settlement cycle and securities are netted separately for SGL and
CSGL transactions. Netting of funds is done on a multilateral basis. These
changes facilitated the rollover of repurchase transactions and also sale of
securities purchased during the same settlement cycle without waiting for
delivery. The DvP III has helped participants to manage their interest rate
risk more efficiently by enabling them to cover their positions on the day of
allotment in the auction. Net settlement of funds has also enhanced trading
activity by reducing the fund requirement (gross to net) during the settlement
cycle.
All trades in government securities are reported to RBI-SGL for settlement.
The trades are settled on gross basis through the DvP III system, net
settlement of securities and funds simultaneously. Central government
securities and T-bills are held as dematerialised entries in the SGL of RBI. The
PDO, which oversees the settlement of transactions through the SGL, enables
the transfer of securities from one participant to another. Transfer of funds is
effected by crediting/debiting the current account of the seller/buyer,
maintained with the RBI. Securities are transferred through credits/debits in
the SGL account. In order to do this, the SGL Form is filled by the seller,
countersigned by the buyer, and sent to the RBI. The buyer transfers funds
towards payment. The SGL form contains transfer instruction for funds and
securities signed by both counter-parties and has to be submitted to RBI
within one working day after the date of signing the form. The SGL form
provides details of the buyer and the seller, the security, the clean price,
accrued interest and details of credit in the current account.
Most transactions in government securities are placed through brokers.
Buyers and sellers confirm transactions through phone and fax, after the deal
is made. Brokers are usually paid a commission of 0.50 paise per market lot
(of Rs. 5 crore), for deals upto Rs. 20 crore. Larger deals attract fixed
commissions.
Gross settlement occasionally leads to gridlock in the DvP system due to
shortfall of funds on a gross basis in the current accounts of one or more SGL
account holders, though sufficient balance are available to settle on net basis.
To take care of such unusual occurrences, the scheme of special fund facility
provides intra-day funds to banks and primary dealers against un-drawn
collateralised lending facility and liquidity support facility from RBI.
The CCIL was established on February 15, 2002 to act as the clearing house
and as a central counterparty through novation for transactions in
government securities. The CCIL has 154 members participating in the
securities settlement segment. The establishment of CCIL has ensured
guaranteed settlement of trades in government securities, thereby imparting
considerable stability to the markets. Through the multilateral netting
170
arrangement, this mechanism has reduced funding requirements from gross
to net basis, thereby reducing liquidity risk and greatly mitigating
counterparty credit risk. The CCIL has been equipped with the risk
management system to limit the settlement risk. Operational guidelines were
issued to the CCIL in April 2003 for a limited purpose government securities
lending scheme. Accordingly, the CCIL has been permitted to enter into an
arrangement with any of its members for borrowing government securities for
the purpose of handling securities shortage in settlement. All transactions in
government securities concluded or reported on NDS as well as transactions
on the NDS-OM have to be necessarily settled through the CCIL. The net
obligations of members are arrived at by the CCIL for both funds and
securities and then sent to the Reserve Bank for settlement under the DvP
mechanism.
As a step towards introducing the national settlement system (NSS) with the
aim of settling centrally the clearing positions of various clearing houses, the
integration of the integrated accounting system (IAS) with the real time gross
settlement system (RTGS) was initiated in August, 2006. This facilitates
settlement of various CCIL-operated clearings (inter-bank government
securities, inter-bank foreign exchange, CBLO and National Financial Switch)
through multilateral net settlement batch (MNSB) mode in the RTGS in
Mumbai. On stabilisation of MNSB in Mumbai, settlements at other centres
under the NSS would be taken up in a phased manner.
The government securities market earlier followed both T+0 and T+1
settlement systems. In order to provide participants with more processing
time and facilitate better funds and risk management, the settlement cycle for
secondary market government securities transactions has been standardised
to T+1, effective May 11, 2005.
Constituent SGL Accounts
Subsidiary General Ledger (SGL) account is a facility provided by RBI to large
banks and financial institutions to hold their investments in government
securities and T-bills in the electronic book entry form. Such institutions can
settle their trades for securities held in SGL through a DvP mechanism, which
ensures simultaneous movement of funds and securities. As all investors in
government securities do not have an access to the SGL accounting system,
RBI has permitted such investors to open a gilt with any entity authorized by
RBI for this purpose and thus avail of the DvP settlement. RBI has permitted
NSCCL, NSDL, CDSL, SHCIL, banks, and PDs to offer constituent SGL account
facility to an investor who is interested in participating in the government
securities market. The facilities offered by the constituent SGL accounts are
dematerialisation, re-materialisation, buying and selling of transactions,
corporate actions, and subscription to primary market issues. All entities
regulated by RBI [including FIs, PDs, cooperative banks, RRBs, local area
banks, NBFCs] should necessarily hold their investments in government
securities in either SGL (with RBI) or CSGL account.
171
Clearing Corporation of India Limited
The Clearing Corporation of India Limited (CCIL), promoted by the banks and
financial institutions, was incorporated in April 2001 to support and facilitate
clearing and settlement of trades in government securities (and also trades in
forex and money markets).
CCIL commenced its operations with settlement of secondary market
transactions in Government securities sans novation, under DVP II mode, but
in two months time it moved to extend Guaranteed Settlement as a central
counter party. When CCIL initially commenced operations it was given the
mandate to facilitate settlement of all Repo and outright transactions upto
Rs.200 million. Though settlement through CIIL of outright transactions
beyond 200 million was not mandatory, around 65 % of such trades were
settled by CCIL. However, with effect from April 2003, it was made
mandatory for all trades reported on the NDS to be settled through CCIL,
irrespective of the value. CCIL switched over to the DVP III mode settlement
since April 2, 2004. Currently about 94% of the trades are settled through
CCIL while remaining are generally trades where RBI is the counterparty and
trades between custodian and its own GILT account holder which are directly
settled at RBI. CCIL undertakes the clearing and settlement of all outright as
well as repo transactions reported by members in the NDS and flow to CCIL
for settlement. The final settlement of all transactions relating to government
securities takes place in the books of RBI at their Public Debt Office/ Deposits
Account Department, Mumbai. The settlement is achieved in DVP III mode
viz. both funds and securities are settled on net basis. CCIL guarantees
settlement of trade and is the central counter-party to every trade. The
inception of guaranteed clearing and settlement of government securities has
brought about significant improvements in the efficiency, transparency,
liquidity and risk management/measurement practices in the market.
CCIL has developed an anonymous trading platform, NDS-OM in August 2005
for the RBI to facilitate transparent and efficient trading in the government
securities market. The key features of this system like its order matching on
time-priority basis for dated securities, anonymity, real time information
dissemination leading to better price discovery and straight through
processing (STP) linkages to CCIL settlement system etc. has resulted in a
significant shift in the trading patterns in the gilts market from being an
opaque telephone driven system to an anonymous an transparent one.
Initially, limited to banks and primary dealers, the gradual extension of
trading in this platform to other NDS members like insurance companies,
mutual funds and non-NDS members like provident funds, port trusts etc. has
ensured that trading in the government securities market has become
transparent for the participants. Trading in T-bills and when issued securities
was facilitated on this platform with effect from July 31, 2006.
172
The members pay one-time membership fees of Rs. 1 lakh. In addition, they
pay the fees for different services as under:
Sr.
No.
Particulars Charges
1 Securities
Settlement
(Outright)
Rs.150 per crore of face value, Minimum
Rs.25/Maximum
Rs.5,000/-per Trade.
2 Treasury Bills
Settlement
(Outright)
Rs.75 per crore of face value, Minimum
Rs.25/Maximum
Rs.5,000/-per Trade
3 Settlement of Repo
Trades
Rs. 15/-per crore of face value for repo
trades subject to Minimum of Rs. 15/- and
Maximum of Rs. 1,500/-for each leg.
4 Clearcorp
Transaction Charges
CBLO (AUTION
MARKET)
Rs. 5/- per crore of face value per deal per
member
subject to Minimum of Rs. 5/-- and
Maximum
of Rs. 500/-per deal.
5 Clearcorp
Transaction Charges
CBLO (NORMAL
MARKET)
Rs. 5/- per crore of face value per deal per
member
subject to Minimum of Rs. 5/-- and
Maximum
of Rs. 500/- per trade.
6 CBLO Transaction
Charges
CBLO (AUCTION
MARKET)
Rs. 10/-per crore of face value per deal per
Member subject to minimum of Rs. 10/-and
a maximum of Rs.1,000/-per deal for each
member to be charged at the time of initial
borrowings and lending.
7 CBLO Transaction
Charges
CBLO (NORMAL
MARKET)
Rs. 10/-per crore of face value per deal per
member subject to Minimum of Rs.10/- and
a Maximum of Rs1,000/-per deal.
8 Settlement of Forex
transactions
Rs.100/- per traded accepted for
settlement.
9 Settlement of CLS
transactions
CLS Charges plus 75 cents.
173
Sr.
No.
Particulars Charges
10 Delayed payment of
Transaction Charges
and System Usage
Charges- For
Securities and Forex
Transactions (if
payment is made
after 10th of a
calendar month.)
5 basis point per day on the amount of
Charges
Members conclude trades, on-line, on the NDS platform, via the INFINET
network, a secure closed-user group (CUG) hybrid network consisting of
VSATs and leased lines. After trades have been concluded on the NDS, details
are forwarded to the CCIL system, via INFINET, for settlement. All Repo deals
by NDS members irrespective of amount are settled through CCIL.
CCIL has in place a comprehensive risk management system. It encompasses
strict admission norms, measures for risk mitigation (in the form of exposure
limit, settlement Guarantee Fund, liquidity arrangements, continuous position
monitoring and loss allocation procedure) penalties in case of default etc.
Each member contributes collaterals (partly in cash and partly in acceptable
securities) to a Settlement Guarantee Fund (SGF), against which CCIL avails
of a line of credit from a bank(s) so as to be able to complete settlement in
case a situation of shortage resulting from a member's default is experienced.
The price risk (on account of securities held by CCIL pending settlement of
trades and transfer of ownership to the respective members) is mitigated by
stipulating that members contribute additional collaterals in the form of Initia
l
and Mark-to-Market (MTM) Margins. Securities contributed by, and standing
to the credit of, members (their "SGF Contribution") are marked to market at
fortnightly intervals, and calls for additional collateral made if needed. In ca
se
of funds shortages, CCIL completes settlement by utilizing the cash
component of the concerned member s contribution to SGF and/or the lines of
credit available to CCIL from banks and/or by entering into a reverse repo
transaction with market participants. In case of securities shortages, CCIL
arranges to complete settlement by transferring the security/ securities to the
member concerned, either from its Settlement Guarantee Fund SGL Account
or from its own Proprietary SGL Account at RBI, or by paying a cash
compensation in lieu thereof, to the member to whom the security was to be
delivered. The rupee funds payable to the defaulting member are withheld,
and the securities utilised in completing settlement replenished the next day.
The defaulting member has to pay a penalty for defaulting on its obligations
and bear any other costs incurred by CCIL in meeting the default situation.
174
4.3.6 Retail Debt Market
With a view to encouraging wider participation of all classes of investors
across the country (including retail investors) in government securities, the
Government, RBI and SEBI have introduced trading in government securities
for retail investors. Trading in this retail debt market segment (RDM) on NSE
has been introduced w.e.f. January 16, 2003.
RDM Trading:
Trading takes place in the existing Capital Market segment of the Exchange
and in the same manner in which the trading takes place in the equities
(Capital Market) segment. The RETDEBT Market facility on the NEAT system
of Capital Market Segment is used for entering transactions in RDM session.
The trading holidays and market timings of the RDM segment are the same as
the Equities segment.
Trading Parameters: The trading parameters for RDM segment are as below:
Face Value Rs. 100/Permitted
Lot Size 10
Tick Size Rs. 0.01
Operating Range +/-5%
Mkt. Type Indicator D (RETDEBT)
Book Type RD
Trading in Retail Debt Market is permitted under Rolling Settlement, where in
each trading day is considered as a trading period and trades executed during
the day are settled based on the net obligations for the day. Settlement is on
a T+2 basis i.e. on the 2nd working day. For arriving at the settlement day all
intervening holidays, which include bank holidays, NSE holidays, Saturdays
and Sundays are excluded. Typically trades taking place on Monday are
settled on Wednesday, Tuesday's trades settled on Thursday and so on.
Eligibility: Trading Members who are registered members of NSE in the
Capital Market segment and Wholesale Debt Market segment are allowed to
trade in Retail Debt Market (RDM) subject to fulfilling the capital adequacy
norms. Trading Members with membership in Wholesale Debt Market segment
only, can participate in RDM on submission of a letter in the prescribed
format.
RDM Clearing & Settlement:
National Securities Clearing Corporation Limited (NSCCL) is the clearing and
settlement agency for all deals executed in Retail Debt Market.
175
Salient features of Clearing and Settlement in Retail Debt Market
segment:
Clearing and settlement of all trades in the Retail Debt Market shall be
subject to the Bye Laws, Rules and Regulations of the Capital Market
Segment and such regulations, circulars and requirements etc. as may
be brought into force from time to time in respect of clearing and
settlement of trading in Retail Debt Market (Government securities).
Settlement in Retail Debt Market is on T + 2 Rolling basis viz. on the
2nd
working day. For arriving at the settlement day all intervening
holidays, which include bank holidays, NSE holidays, Saturdays and
Sundays are excluded. Typically trades taking place on Monday are
settled on Wednesday, Tuesday's trades settled on Thursday and so
on.
Clearing and settlement would be based on netting of the trades in a

day.
NSCCL shall compute member obligations and make available
reports/data by T+1. The obligations shall be computed separately for
this market from the obligations of the equity market.
The settlement schedule for the Retail Debt Market (Government
Securities)
Day Description
T Trade Date
T + 1 (03:30 p.m.) Custodial Confirmation
T + 2 (11.00 a.m.) Securities & Funds pay-in
T + 2 Securities & Funds pay-out
Funds settlement and securities settlement are through the existing

clearing banks and depositories of NSCCL, in a manner similar to the
Capital Market segment. The existing clearing bank accounts shall be
used for funds settlement.
The existing CM pool account with the depositories that is currently
operated for the CM segment, will be utilized for the purpose of
settlements of securities.
In case of short deliveries, unsettled positions shall be closed out. The
close out would be done at Zero Coupon Yield Curve valuation for
prices plus a 5% penalty factor. The buyer shall be eligible for the
highest traded price from the trade date to the date of close out or
closing price of the security on the close out date plus interest
calculated at the rate of overnight FIMMDA-NSE MIBOR for the close
out date whichever is higher and the balance should be credited to the
Investor Protection Fund.
The penal actions and penalty point is similar to as in Capital Markets
176
RDM Risk Management:
Base Capital & Networth Requirements
Clearing members of Capital Market and Trading members of the WDM

segment of the Exchange will be allowed to participate in clearing and
settlement of trades done in Government securities, subject to a
minimum net worth of Rs.1 crore.
An initial contribution to the Settlement Guarantee Fund (SGF) of this
market by way of interest free security deposit (IFSD) of Rs.5 lakh is
required to be kept with NSCCL. A member desirous of participating in
this segment may opt to set aside a contribution of Rs.5 lakh from his
additional base capital available on the Capital Market segment and /
or Futures & Options segment (s) towards this IFSD.
Margins & Gross Exposure Limits
Mark to market margins will be applicable on all-open positions in

government securities and shall be calculated on the basis of ZCYC
prices. This margin shall be payable on T + 1 day.
Custodial trades on behalf of Provident Funds transacting through the
SGL-II accounts shall be eligible for margin exemption.
The gross exposure in respect of these securities shall not exceed 20
times of the IFSD. Any member desirous of a higher exposure will be
required to bring in additional base capital as in Capital Market
segment.
4.3.7 Interest Rate Derivatives
Deregulation of interest rate exposed market participants to a wide variety of
risks. To manage and control these risks and to deepen money market,
scheduled commercial banks, primary dealers and all India financial
institutions have been permitted to undertake forward rate agreements
(FRAs) and interest rate swaps (IRSs).
A FRA is a financial contract between two parties to exchange interest
payments for a notional principal amount on settlement date, for a specified
period from start date to maturity date. Accordingly, on the settlement date,
based on contract (fixed) and the settlement rate, cash payments are made
by the parties to one another. The settlement rate is the agreed bench-mark/
reference rate prevailing on the settlement date.
An IRS is a financial contract between two parties exchanging or swapping a
stream of interest payments for a notional principal amount on multiple
177
occasions during a specified period. Such contracts generally involve
exchange of a fixed to floating rates of interest. Accordingly, on each
payment date that occurs during the swap period cash payments based on
fixed/floating and floating rates, are made by the parties to one another.
FRAs/IRSs provide means for hedging the interest rate risk arising on account
of lendings or borrowings made at fixed/ variable interest rates.
Scheduled commercial banks (excluding Regional Rural Banks), primary
dealers (PDs) and all-India financial institutions (FIs) undertake FRAs/ IRSs as
a product for their own balance sheet management or for market making.
Banks/FIs/PDS offer these products to corporates for hedging their
(corporates) own balance sheet exposures.
Banks / PDS/ FIs can undertake different types of plain vanilla FRAs/ IRS.
Swaps having explicit/implicit option features such as caps/floors/collars are
not permitted. The parties are free to use any domestic money or debt
market rate as benchmark rate for entering into FRAs/ IRS, provided
methodology of computing the rate is objective, transparent and mutually
acceptable to counterparties. The interest rates implied in the foreign
exchange forward market can also used as a benchmark for undertaking
FRAs/IRSs. There are no restrictions on the minimum or maximum size of
notional principal amounts of FRAs/ IRSs. There are also no restrictions on
the minimum or maximum tenor of the FRAs/ IRSs.
4.3.8 Zero Coupon Yield Curve
The zero coupon yield curve (ZCYC) starts from the basic premise of time
value of money that a given amount of money due today has a value
different from the same amount due at a future point of time. An individual
willing to part with his money today has to be compensated in terms of a
higher amount due in future in other words, he has to be paid a rate of
interest on the principal amount. The rate of interest to be paid would vary
with the time period that elapses between today (when the principal amount
is being foregone) and the future point of time (at which the amount is
repaid). At any point of time therefore, we would observe different spot rates
of interest associated with different terms to maturity; longer maturity
offering a term spread relative to shorter maturity. The term structure of
interest rates, or ZCYC, is the set of such spot interest rates. This is the
principal factor underlying the valuation of most fixed income instruments.
Fixed income instruments can be categorized by type of payments. Most fixed
income instruments pay to the holder a periodic interest payment, commonly
known as the coupon, and an amount due at maturity, the redemption value.
There exist some instruments that do not make periodic interest payments;
the principal amount together with the entire outstanding amount of interest
on the instrument is paid as a lump sum amount at maturity. These
instruments are also known as zero coupon instruments (Treasury Bills
provide an example of such an instrument). These are sold at a discount to
178
the redemption value, the discounted value being determined by the interest
rate payable (yield) on the instrument.
Keeping in mind the requirements of the banking industry, financial
institutions, mutual funds, insurance companies, etc. that have substantial
investment in sovereign papers, NSE disseminates a 'Zero Coupon Yield
Curve' (NSE Zero Curve) to help in valuation of securities across all maturities
irrespective of its liquidity in the market. This product has been developed by
using Nelson-Siegel model to estimate the term structure of interest rate at
any given point of time. The spot rate function may be specified as follows:
[1 -exp(
-m)]
-m
r(m,b) = b + (b + b )*{ t } -b *exp( )
012 2
(
m) t
t
where m denotes related maturity for the cash flows in a bond and b
=[ß0, ß1, ß2 and tau] are parameters to be estimated. Here ß0 is the level
parameter and commonly interpreted as long term (long term in
mathematical sense approaching infinity) rate, ß1 is slope parameter, ß2 is
curvature parameter and tau (t ) is scale parameter while (ß0 + ß1) gives
the short term rate. Alternatively it can also be said that ß0 is the
contribution of long term component, ß1 is the contribution of short term
component, ß2 indicates the contribution of medium term component, tau
is the decay factor and ß2 & tau determine the shape of the curve.
The appeal of the NS functional form lies in its flexibility to cover the entire
range of possible shapes that the ZCYC can take, depending on the value of
the estimated parameters. Once the functional form is specified and the
parameter values are generated [b0 , b1 , b2 and t ], these values are used to
calculate the spot rates for any term greater than 0 using the above equation.
These spot rates are used to calculate the present value (commonly known as
the estimated price or model price) of the cash flows and combine them to
get the value of the bond. The present value arrived at is the estimated price
(p_est) for each bond. These estimated values now can be compared with the
observed market prices. It is common to observe market prices (pmkt) that
deviate from this value. But the objective of a good estimation is to reduce
the difference between the observed market prices and the estimated prices.
Illustration:
Given the following ZCYC Parameters for the settlement date March 15, 2003
as b0 = 7.7103; b1 = 0.5398; b2 = 3.2907 and Tau (t ) = 4.1902, what is
the Model price of a security with semi-annual coupon of 6.25 %, maturing on
March 23, 2004?
179
Explanation: Since half yearly coupon payment is Rs 6.25, on maturity date
we receive Rs 106.25. [Redemption value (Rs.100) + half yearly coupon
(Rs.6.25)]
Coupon
date
Coupon
Rate
Distance in
years from
Settlement
date
Appropriate
Zcyc spot rates Present Value
(A) (m) ( C )
A / ( 1+ (C/200) ^
(m*2)
23-Mar-03 6.25 0.02 7.1633329 6.2404
23-Sep-03 6.25 0.53 7.0129545 6.0274
23-Mar-04 106.25 1.02 6.8890368 99.1262
ZCYC Model Price: 111.394062
[1 -exp(
-m)]
t
r(m,b) = b + (b + b )*{ } -b *exp(
-m)
012 2
(
m) t
t
In the above table, appropriate Zcyc spot rates, using NS model (the above
formula), are calculated as follows:
Term Appropriate Zcyc Spot rates Using N-S Model
0.02 7.7103+ (( -0.5398 + -3.2907) * ( 1-Exp(-0.02 / 4.1902))/((0.02 / 4.1902))
- 3.2907 * Exp ( -0.02 / 4.1902 ) = 7.1633329
0.53 7.7103+ (( -0.5398 + -3.2907) * ( 1-Exp(-0.53 / 4.1902))/((0.53 / 4.1902))
-3.2907 * Exp ( -0.53 / 4.1902 ) = 7.0129545
1.02 7.7103+ (( -0.5398 + -3.2907) * ( 1-Exp(-1.02 / 4.1902))/((1.02 / 4.1902))
-3.2907 * Exp ( -1.02 / 4.1902 ) = 6.8890368
The ZCYC is estimated and has been successfully tested by using daily WDM
trades data. This is being disseminated daily. The ZCYC depicts the
relationship between interest rates in the economy and the associated term to
maturity. It provides daily estimates of the term structure of interest rates
180
using information on secondary market trades in government securities from
the WDM segment. The term structure forms the basis for the valuation of all
fixed income instruments. Modeled as a series of cash flows due at different
points of time in the future, the underlying price of such an instrument is
calculated as the net present value of the stream of cash flows. Each cash
flow, in such a formulation, is discounted using the interest rate for the
associated term to maturity; the appropriate rates are read off the estimated
ZCYC. Once estimated, the interest rate-maturity mapping is used to compute
underlying valuations even for securities that do not trade on a given day.
Changes in the economy cause shifts in the term structure, changing the
underlying valuations of fixed income instruments. The daily ZCYC captures
these changes, and is used to track the value of portfolios of government
securities on a day-to-day basis.
4.3.9 FIMMDA-NSE MIBID/MIBOR
NSE has been computing and disseminating the NSE Mumbai Inter-bank Bid
Rate (MIBID) and NSE Mumbai Inter-bank Offer Rate (MIBOR) for the
overnight money market from June 15, 1998, the 14-day MIBID/MIBOR from
November 10, 1998 and the 1 month and 3 month MIBID/MIBOR from
December 1, 1998. Further, the exchange introduced a 3 Day FIMMDA-NSE
MIBID-MIBOR on all Fridays with effect from June 6, 2008.
In view of the robust methodology of computation of these rates and their
extensive use by market participants, these have been co-branded with Fixed
Income and Money Market Derivatives Association (FIMMDA) from March 4,
2002. These are now known as FIMMDA-NSE MIBID/MIBOR from March 4,
2002. These rates are used as benchmarks for majority of deals struck for
interest rate swaps, forward rate agreements, floating rate debentures and
term deposits.
FIMMDA-NSE MIBID/MIBOR are based on rates polled by NSE from a
representative panel of 33 banks/institutions/primary dealers. Currently,
quotes are polled and processed daily by the Exchange at 0940 (IST) for
overnight rate, at 1130 (IST) for the 14 day, 1 month and 3 month rates and
0940 (IST) for 3 Day rate as on the last working day of the week. The rates
polled are then processed using the bootstrap method to arrive at an efficient
estimate of the reference rates. The overnight rates are disseminated daily
and 3 Day rate are disseminated on the last working day of the week to the
market at about 0955 (IST) and the 14 day, 1 month and 3 month rates at
about 1145 (IST).Overnight Rates for Saturdays is calculated and
disseminated at 1030Hrs. These are broadcast through NEAT-WDM trading
system immediately on release and also disseminated through website of NSE
and FIMMDA and through email.
181
4.3.10 NSE-VaR System
NSE has developed a Value-at-Risk (VaR) system for measuring the market
risk inherent in Government of India (GOI) securities. NSE-VaR system builds
on the NSE database of daily yield curves-the NSE-ZCYC which is now well
accepted in terms of its conceptual soundness and empirical performance,
and is increasingly being used by market participants as a basis for valuation
of fixed income instruments. The NSE-VaR system provides measures of VaR
using 5 alternative methods (normal (variance-covariance), weighted normal,
historical simulation, weighted historical simulation and extreme value
theory). Together, these 5 methods provide a range of options for ma rket
participants to choose from.
NSE-VaR system releases daily estimates of security-wise VaR at 1-day and
multi-day horizons for securities traded on WDM segment of NSE and all
outstanding GOI securities with effect from January 1, 2002. Participants can
compute their portfolio risk as weighted average of security-wise VaRs, the
weights being proportionate to the market value of a given security in their
portfolio.
4.3.11 Bond Index
While there exists an array of indices for the equity market, a well-
constructed and widely accepted bond index is conspicuous by its absence.
There are a few additional difficulties in construction and maintenance of debt
indices. First, on account of the fixed maturity of bonds vis-à-vis the
perpetuity of equity, the universe of bonds changes frequently (new issues
come in while existing issues are redeemed). Secondly, while market prices
for the constituents of an equity index are normally available on all trading
days over a long period of time, market prices of constituent bonds in a bond
index, irrespective of the selection criteria used, may not be available daily.
This is on account of the fact that the liquidity of a security varies over its
lifetime and, in addition, can witness significant fluctuations over a short
period of time. However, market participants need an index to compare their
performance with as well as the performance of different classes of assets.
NSE Government Securities Index
The increased activity in the government securities market in India and
simultaneous emergence of mutual (gilt) funds has given rise to the need for
a well-defined Bond Index to measure returns in the bond market. The NSE-
Government Securities Index prices components off the NSE Benchmark
ZCYC, so that movements reflect returns to an investor on account of change
in interest rates only, and not those arising on account of the impact of
idiosyncratic factors. The index is available from January 1, 1997. The index
182
would provide a benchmark for portfolio management by various investment
managers and gilt funds. It could also form the basis for designing index
funds and for derivative products such as options and futures.
Salient features of the Index:
The base date for the index is 1st January 1997 and the base date
index value is 100
The index is calculated on a daily basis from 1st January 1997
onwards; weekends and holidays are ignored.
The index uses all Government of India bonds issued after April 1992.
These were issued on the basis of an auction mechanism that imparted
some amount of market-relatedness to their pricing. Bonds issued
prior to 1992 were on the basis of administered interest rates.
Each day, the prices for all these bonds are estimated off the NSE
Benchmark-ZCYC for the day.
The constituents are weighted by their market capitalisation.
Computations are based on arithmetic and not geometric calculations.
The index uses a chain-link methodology i.e. today's values are based
on the previous value times the change since the previous calculations.
This gives the index the ability to add new issues and also remove old
issues when redeemed.
Coupons and redemption payments are assumed to be re-invested
back into the index in proportion to the constituent weights.
Both the Total Returns Index and the Principal Returns Index are
computed.
The indices provided are: Composite, 1-3, 3-8, 8+ years, TB index, GS
index
MODEL QUESTIONS
Ques:1 Calculate the ZCYC Spot rate for 2 Year maturity when ß0=5.1596,
ß1= -0.3615, ß2=4.5209, ?=13.1202?
(a) 5.135786
(b) 5.127548
(c) 5.142458
(d) 5.139978
Correct Answer: (a)
Solution:
Using the formula: R (m, b) = ß0+ (ß 1+ ß2)*{1-exp (-m/?)}/ (m/?) ß2*
exp (-m/?) we get: 5.1596+((-0.3615+4.5209)*(1-EXP(2/
13.202))/((2/13.202))-4.5209*EXP (-2/13.202)) = 5.135786
183
Ques:2 Which instruments constitute the major portion of trades in secondary
market of the debt segment?
(a) Dated Central Government securities.
(b) Treasury Bills
(c) Debentures
(d) Commercial Papers.
Correct Answer: (a)
Ques:3 What is the maximum % allocated to non-competitive bidders in
Government securities auction?
(a)
10% (b)15%
(c)
5 % (d)20%
Correct Answer: (c)
Ques:4 What are the various types of Government securities?
(a)
Only Fixed coupon Bonds & Floating rate Bonds.
(b)
Only Floating rate Bonds & Zero Coupon Bonds.
(c)
Only zero Coupon Bonds & Securities with embedded
Derivatives
(d)
Fixed coupon Bonds, Floating rate Bonds, Zero Coupon Bonds &
Securities with embedded Derivatives
Correct Answer: (d)
Ques:5 What is the settlement period allowed for Government Securities?
(a)
T+0 & T+3 (b) T+1 & T+3
(b)
T+2 & T+3 (d) T+1
Correct Answer: (d)
Ques:6 Presently which of the following T-bills is traded in the market?
(a) 91 Days, 182 and 364 Days T-Bill
(b) 14 Days & 364 Days T-Bill
(c) 182 Days & 364 Days T-Bill
(d) 14 Days & 91 Days T-bill
Correct Answer: (a)
184
Ques:7. When are the FIMMDA-NSE MIBID/MIBOR rates polled daily by NSEWDM?
(a) At 9.30 am & 11.30 am

(b) At 9.40 am & 11.40 am
(c) At 9.50 am & 11.30 am
(d) At 9.40 am & 11.30 am
Correct Answer: (d)
Ques:8. Which are the instruments used to calculate ZCYC?
(a) Only Central Government Securities.
(b) Only T-Bill
(c) Both T-bill & Central Government Securities.
(d) Corporate Debentures ,CD & CP
Correct Answer: (c)
Ques:9 What are the various securities on which Repo trades are allowed by
RBI?
(a) Only Central Government Securities.
(b) Only Treasury Bills
(c) Only Central Government Securities & Treasury bills
(d) Central
Government securities, Treasury Bills & State
Government securities
(e) Central Government Securities, Treasury bills & corporate debts.
Correct Answer: (d)
185
CHAPTER 5: DERIVATIVES MARKET
5.1 DERIVATIVES
5.1.1 Introduction
Derivative is a product whose value is derived from the value of one or more
basic variables, called bases (underlying asset, index or reference rate), in a
contractual manner. The underlying asset can be equity, forex, commodity or
any other asset. For example, wheat farmers may wish to sell their harvest at
a future date to eliminate the risk of a change in prices by that date. Such a
transaction is an example of a derivative. The price of this derivative is drive
n
by the spot price of wheat which is the underlying .
The International Monetary Fund defines derivatives as "financial instruments
that are linked to a specific financial instrument or indicator or commodity
and through which specific financial risks can be traded in financial markets in
their own right. The value of a financial derivative derives from the price of
an underlying item, such as an asset or index. Unlike debt securities, no
principal is advanced to be repaid and no investment income accrues".
The emergence of the market for derivative products, most notably forwards,
futures and options, can be traced back to the willingness of risk-averse
economic agents to guard themselves against uncertainties arising out of
fluctuations in asset prices. By their very nature, the financial markets are
marked by a very high degree of volatility. Through the use of derivative
products, it is possible to partially or fully transfer price risks by locking in
asset prices. As instruments of risk management, these generally do not
influence the fluctuations in the underlying asset prices. However, by locking-
in asset prices, derivative products minimise the impact of fluctuations in
asset prices on the profitability and cash flow situation of risk-averse
investors.
Derivative products initially emerged as hedging devices against fluctuations
in commodity prices and commodity-linked derivatives remained the sole
form of such products for almost three hundred years. The financial
derivatives came into spotlight in post-1970 period due to growing instability
in the financial markets. However, since their emergence, these products
have become very popular and by 1990s, they accounted for about two-thirds
of total transactions in derivative products. In recent years, the market for
financial derivatives has grown tremendously both in terms of variety of
instruments available, their complexity and also turnover. The factors
generally attributed as the major driving force behind growth of financial
derivatives are (a) increased volatility in asset prices in financial markets, (
b)
186
increased integration of national financial markets with the international
markets, (c) marked improvement in communication facilities and sharp
decline in their costs, (d) development of more sophisticated risk
management tools, providing economic agents a wider choice of risk
management strategies, and (e) innovations in the derivatives markets, which
optimally combine the risks and returns over a large number of financial
assets, leading to higher returns, reduced risk as well as transaction costs as
compared to individual financial assets. In the class of equity derivatives,
futures and options on stock indices have gained more popularity than on
individual stocks, especially among institutional investors, who are major
users of index-linked derivatives. Even small investors find these useful due
to high correlation of the popular indices with various portfolios and ease of
use. The lower costs associated with index derivatives vis-à-vis derivative
products based on individual securities is another reason for their growing
use.
5.1.2 Products, participants and functions
Derivative contracts have several variants. The most common variants are
forwards, futures, options and swaps. The following three broad categories of
participants hedgers, speculators, and arbitrageurs trade in the derivatives
market.
Hedgers face risk associated with the price of an asset. They use futures
or options markets to reduce or eliminate this risk.
Speculators wish to bet on future movements in the price of an asset.
Futures and options contracts can give them an extra leverage; that is,
they can increase both the potential gains and potential losses in a
speculative venture.
Arbitrageurs are in business to take advantage of a discrepancy between
prices in two different markets. If, for example, they see the futures price
of an asset getting out of line with the cash price, they will take offsetting
positions in the two markets to lock in a profit.
The derivatives market performs a number of economic functions. First, prices
in an organised derivatives market reflect the perception of market
participants about the future and lead the prices of underlying to the
perceived future level. The prices of derivatives converge with the prices of
the underlying at the expiration of the derivative contract. Thus, derivatives
help in discovery of future as well as current prices. Second, the derivatives
market helps to transfer risks from those who have them but may not like
them to those who have an appetite for them. Third, derivatives, due to their
inherent nature, are linked to the underlying cash markets. With the
introduction of derivatives, the underlying market witnesses higher trading
volumes because of participation by more players who would not otherwise
participate for lack of an arrangement to transfer risk. Fourth, speculative
trades shift to a more controlled environment of derivatives market. In the
187
absence of an organised derivatives market, speculators trade in the
underlying cash markets. Margining, monitoring and surveillance of the
activities of various participants become extremely difficult in these kinds of
mixed markets. Fifth, an important incidental benefit that flows from
derivatives trading is that it acts as a catalyst for new entrepreneurial activi
ty.
The derivatives have a history of attracting many bright, creative, well-
educated people with an entrepreneurial attitude. They often energise others
to create new businesses, new products and new employment opportunities,
the benefit of which are immense. Finally, derivatives markets help increase
savings and investment in the long run. Transfer of risk enables market
participants to expand their volume of activity.
5.1.3 Types of Derivatives
The most commonly used derivatives contracts are forwards, futures and
options which we shall discuss in detail later. Here we take a brief look at
various derivatives contracts that have come to be used.
Forwards: A forward contract is a customised contract between two entities,
where settlement takes place on a specific date in the future at today s pre-
agreed price.
Futures: A futures contract is an agreement between two parties to buy or
sell an asset at a certain time in the future at a certain price. Futures
contracts are special types of forward contracts in the sense that the former
are standardised exchange-traded contracts.
Options: Options are of two types calls and puts. Calls give the buyer the
right but not the obligation to buy a given quantity of the underlying asset, at
a given price on or before a given future date. Puts give the buyer the right,
but not the obligation to sell a given quantity of the underlying asset at a
given price on or before a given date.
Warrants: Options generally have lives of upto one year, the majority of
options traded on options exchanges having maximum maturity of nine
months. Longer-dated options are called warrants and are generally traded
over-the-counter.
LEAPS: The acronym LEAPS means Long Term Equity Anticipation Securities.
These are options having a maturity of upto three years.
Baskets: Basket options are options on portfolios of underlying assets. The
underlying asset is usually a moving average or a basket of assets. Equity
index options are a form of basket options.
Swaps: Swaps are private agreements between two parties to exchange cash
flows in the future according to a prearranged formula. They can be regarded
as portfolios of forward contracts. The two commonly used swaps are:
Interest rate swaps: These entail swapping only the interest related
cash flows between the parties in the same currency
Currency Swaps: These entail swapping both principal and interest
between the parties, with the cash flows in one direction being in a
different currency than those in the opposite direction.
188
Swaptions: Swaptions are options to buy or sell a swap that will become
operative at the expiry of the options. Thus, swaptions is an option on a
forward swap. Rather than have calls and puts, the swaptions market has
receiver swaptions and payer swaptions A receiver swaption is an option to
receive fixed and pay floating. A payer swaption is an option to pay fixed and
receive floating.
5.1.4 Derivatives Market in India
The first step towards introduction of derivatives trading in India was the
promulgation of the Securities Laws (Amendment) Ordinance, 1995, which
withdrew the prohibition on options in securities. The market for derivatives,
however, did not take off, as there was no regulatory framework to govern
trading of derivatives. SEBI set up a 24-member committee under the
Chairmanship of Dr. L. C. Gupta on November 18, 1996 to develop
appropriate regulatory framework for derivatives trading in India. The
committee submitted its report on March 17, 1998 prescribing necessary precondit
ions
for introduction of derivatives trading in India. The committee
recommended that derivatives should be declared as securities so that
regulatory framework applicable to trading of securities could also govern
trading of securities. SEBI also set up a group in June 1998 under the
chairmanship of Prof. J. R. Varma, to recommend measures for risk
containment in derivatives market in India. The report, which was submitted
in October 1998, worked out the operational details of margining system,
methodology for charging initial margins, broker net worth, deposit
requirement and real-time monitoring requirements.
The SCRA was amended in December 1999 to include derivatives within the
ambit of securities and the regulatory framework was developed for
governing derivatives trading. The act also made it clear that derivatives shall
be legal and valid only if such contracts are traded on a recognised stock
exchange, thus precluding OTC derivatives. The government also rescinded in
March 2000, the three-decade old notification, which prohibited forward
trading in securities.
Derivatives trading commenced in India in June 2000 after SEBI granted the
final approval to this effect in May 2000. SEBI permitted the derivatives
segments of two stock exchanges NSE and BSE, and their clearing house/
corporation to commence trading and settlement in approved derivatives
contracts. To begin with, SEBI approved trading in index futures contracts
based on S&P CNX Nifty and BSE-30 (Sensex) index. This was followed by
approval for trading in options which commenced in June 2001 and the
trading in options on individual securities commenced in July 2001. Futures
contracts on individual stocks were launched in November 2001. Futures and
Options contracts on individual securities are available on more than 200
securities. Trading and settlement in derivative contracts is done in
accordance with the rules, byelaws, and regulations of the respective
189
exchanges and their clearing house/ corporation duly approved by SEBI and
notified in the official gazette.
5.1.5 Membership of NSE
NSE admits members on its derivatives segment (more popularly referred to
as F&O segment) in accordance with the rules and regulations of the
Exchange and the norms specified by SEBI. NSE follows 2-tier membership
structure stipulated by SEBI to enable wider participation. Those interested in
taking membership on F&O segment are required to take membership of CM
and F&O segment or CM, WDM and F&O segment . Trading and clearing
members are admitted separately. Essentially, a clearing member (CM) does
clearing for all his trading members (TMs), undertakes risk management and
performs actual settlement. The eligibility criteria for membership on F&O
segment are summarised in tables 5.1 and 5.2. The trading members are
required to have qualified users and sales persons, who have passed a
certification programme approved by SEBI.
Refer to chapter 3 for further details about eligibility criteria of the
membership.
Table 5.1: Eligibility Criteria for Membership on F&O Segment of NSE
Particulars New Members
CM and F&O
Segment
CM, WDM and
F&O Segment
Net Worth1 Rs. 100 lakh Rs. 200 lakh
Interest Free Security Deposit (IFSD)2 Rs. 125 lakh Rs. 275 lakh
Collateral Security Deposit (CSD)2 Rs. 25 lakh Rs. 25 lakh
Annual Subscription Rs. 1 lakh Rs. 2 lakh
Note: (1) No additional networth is required for self-clearing members in F&O se
gment.
However, networth of Rs. 300 lakh is required for members clearing for self as w
ell as
for other trading member.
(2) Additional Rs. 25 lakh is required for clearing membership. In addition, the
clearing
member is required to bring in IFSD of Rs. 2 lakh and CSD of Rs. 8 lakh per trad
ing
member in the F&O segment.
Table 5.2: Requirements for Professional Clearing Membership (PCM)
Particulars F&O Segment CM and F&O Segment
Eligibility Trading members of NSE/SEBI registered
Custodians / Recognised Banks
Net Worth Rs. 300 lakh
Interest Free Security Deposit (IFSD) Rs. 25 lakh Rs. 34 lakh
Collateral Security Deposit (CSD) Rs. 25 lakh Rs. 50 lakh
Annual Subscription Nil Rs. 2.5 lakh
Note: The PCM is required to bring in IFSD of Rs. 2 lakh and CSD of Rs. 8 lakh p
er trading
member whose trades he undertakes to clear in the F&O segment.
190
5.2 FUTURES AND OPTIONS
In recent years, derivatives have become increasingly important in the field of
finance. While futures and options are now actively traded on many
exchanges, forward contracts are popular on the OTC market.
5.2.1 Forward Contract
A forward contract is an agreement to buy or sell an asset on a specified date
for a specified price. One of the parties to the contract assumes a long
position and agrees to buy the underlying asset on a certain specified future
date for a certain specified price. The other party assumes a short position
and agrees to sell the asset on the same date for the same price. Other
contract details like delivery date, price and quantity are negotiated bilateral
ly
by the parties to the contract. The forward contracts are normally traded
outside the exchanges.
The salient features of forward contracts are:
They are bilateral contracts and hence exposed to counter party risk.
Each contract is custom designed, and hence is unique in terms of
contract size, expiration date and the asset type and quality.
The contract price is generally not available in public domain.
On the expiration date, the contract has to be settled by delivery of the
asset.
If the party wishes to reverse the contract, it has to compulsorily go to
the same counterparty, which often results in high prices being charged.
However, forward contracts in certain markets have become very
standardised, as in the case of foreign exchange, thereby reducing
transaction costs and increasing transactions volume. This process of
standardisation reaches its limit in the organised futures market.
Forward contracts are very useful in hedging and speculation. The classic
hedging application would be that of an exporter who expects to receive
payment in dollars three months later. He is exposed to the risk of exchange
rate fluctuations. By using the currency forward market to sell dollars
forward, he can lock on to a rate today and reduce his uncertainty. Similarly
an importer who is required to make a payment in dollars two months hence
can reduce his exposure to exchange rate fluctuations by buying dollars
forward.
If a speculator has information or analysis, which forecasts an upturn in a
price, then he can go long on the forward market instead of the cash market.
The speculator would go long on the forward, wait for the price to rise, and
then take a reversing transaction to book profits. Speculators may well be
required to deposit a margin upfront. However, this is generally a relatively
191
small proportion of the value of the assets underlying the forward contract.
The use of forward markets here supplies leverage to the speculator.
Forward markets world-wide are afflicted by several problems:
-Lack of centralisation of trading,
-Illiquidity, and
-Counterparty risk
In the first two of these, the basic problem is that of too much flexibility and
generality. The forward market is like a real estate market in that any two
consenting adults can form contracts against each other. This often makes
them design terms of the deal which are very convenient in that specific
situation, but makes the contracts non-tradable. Counterparty risk arises from
the possibility of default by any one party to the transaction. When one of the
two sides to the transaction declares bankruptcy, the other suffers. Even
when forward markets trade standardised contracts, and hence avoid the
problem of illiquidity, still the counterparty risk remains a very serious issue
.
5.2.2 Futures
Futures markets were designed to solve the problems that exist in forward
markets. A futures contract is an agreement between two parties to buy or
sell an asset at a certain time in the future at a certain price. But unlike
forward contracts, the futures contracts are standardised and exchange
traded. To facilitate liquidity in the futures contracts, the exchange specifies
certain standard features of the contract. It is a standardised contract with
standard underlying instrument, a standard quantity and quality of the
underlying instrument that can be delivered, (or which can be used for
reference purposes in settlement) and a standard timing of such settlement.
A futures contract may be offset prior to maturity by entering into an equal
and opposite transaction. More than 99% of futures transactions are offset
this way. The standardised items in a futures contract are:
· Quantity of the underlying
· Quality of the underlying
· The date and the month of delivery
· The units of price quotation and minimum price change
· Location of settlement
Distinction between futures and forwards contracts: Forward contracts
are often confused with futures contracts. The confusion is primarily because
both serve essentially the same economic functions of allocating risk in the
presence of future price uncertainty. However futures are a significant
improvement over the forward contracts as they eliminate counterparty risk
and offer more liquidity. Table 5.3 lists the distinction between the two.
192
Table 5.3 Distinction between futures and forwards
Futures
Forwards
Trade on an organised exchange OTC in nature
Standardised contract terms Customised contract terms
Hence more liquid Hence less liquid
Requires margin payments No margin payment
Follows daily settlement Settlement happens at end of period
Futures terminology
Spot price: The price at which an asset trades in the spot market.
Futures price: The price at which the futures contract trades in the
futures market.
Contract cycle: The period over which a contract trades. The index
futures contracts on the NSE have one month, two-month and three-
month expiry cycles which expire on the last Thursday of the month.
Thus a January expiration contract expires on the last Thursday of
January and a February expiration contract ceases trading on the last
Thursday of February. On the Friday following the last Thursday, a new
contract having a three-month expiry is introduced for trading.
Expiry date: It is the date specified in the futures contract. This is the
last day on which the contract will be traded, at the end of which it will
cease to exist.
Contract size: The amount of asset that has to be delivered under one
contract. Also called as lot size.
Basis: In the context of financial futures, basis can be defined as the
futures price minus the spot price. There will be a different basis for each
delivery month for each contract. In a normal market, basis will be
positive. This reflects that futures prices normally exceed spot prices.
Cost of carry: The relationship between futures prices and spot prices
can be summarised in terms of what is known as the cost of carry. This
measures the storage cost plus the interest that is paid to finance the
asset less the income earned on the asset.
Initial margin: The amount that must be deposited in the margin
account at the time a futures contract is first entered into is known as
initial margin.
Marking-to-market: In the futures market, at the end of each trading
day, the margin account is adjusted to reflect the investor s gain or loss
193
depending upon the futures closing price. This is called marking to
market.
Maintenance margin: This is somewhat lower than the initial margin.

This is set to ensure that the balance in the margin account never
becomes negative. If the balance in the margin account falls below the
maintenance margin, the investor receives a margin call and is expected
to top up the margin account to the initial margin level before trading
commences on the next day.
5.2.3 Options
Options are fundamentally different from forward and futures contracts. An
option gives the holder of the option the right to do something. The holder
does not have to exercise this right. In contrast, in a forward or futures
contract, the two parties have committed themselves to doing something.
Whereas it costs nothing (except margin requirements) to enter into a futures
contract, the purchase of an option requires an upfront payment.
Options terminology
Index options: These options have the index as the underlying. Some
options are European while others are American. Like index futures
contracts, index options contracts are also cash settled.
Stock options: Stock options are options on individual stocks. Options
currently trade on over 500 stocks in the United States. A contract gives
the holder the right to buy or sell shares at the specified price.
Buyer of an option: The buyer of an option is the one who by paying
the option premium buys the right but not the obligation to exercise his
option on the seller/writer.
Writer of an option: The writer of a call/put option is the one who
receives the option premium and is thereby obliged to sell/buy the asset
if the buyer wishes to exercise his option.
There are two basic types of options, call options and put options.
Call option: A call option gives the holder the right but not the obligation
to buy an asset by a certain date for a certain price.
Put option: A put option gives the holder the right but not the obligation
to sell an asset by a certain date for a certain price.
Option price: Option price is the price which the option buyer pays to
the option seller. It is also referred to as the option premium.
194
Expiration date: The date specified in the options contract is known as
the expiration date, the exercise date, the strike date or the maturity.
Strike price: The price specified in the options contract is known as the
strike price or the exercise price.
American options: American options are options that can be exercised
at any time upto the expiration date. Most exchange-traded options are
American.
European options: European options are options that can be exercised
only on the expiration date itself. European options are easier to analyse
than American options, and properties of an American option are
frequently deduced from those of its European counterpart.
In-the-money option: An in-the-money (ITM) option is an option that
would lead to a positive cash flow to the holder if it were exercised
immediately. A call option on the index is said to be in-the-money when
the current value of index stands at a level higher than the strike price
(i.e. spot price > strike price). If the value of index is much higher than
the strike price, the call is said to be deep ITM. On the other hand, a put
option on index is said to be ITM if the value of index is below the strike
price.
At-the-money option: An at-the-money (ATM) option is an option that
would lead to zero cash flow if it were exercised immediately. An option
on the index is at-the-money when the value of current index equals the
strike price (i.e. spot price = strike price).
Out-of-the-money option: An out-of-the-money (OTM) option is an
option that would lead to a negative cash flow it was exercised
immediately. A call option on the index is said to be out-of-the-money
when the value of current index stands at a level which is less than the
strike price (i.e. spot price < strike price). If the index is much lower than
the strike price, the call is said to be deep OTM. On the other hand, a put
option on index is OTM if the value of index is above the strike price.
Intrinsic value of an option: The option premium can be broken down
into two components intrinsic value and time value. Intrinsic value of an
option is the difference between the market value of the underlying
security/index in a traded option and the strike price. The intrinsic value
of a call is the amount when the option is ITM, if it is ITM. If the call is
OTM, its intrinsic value is zero.
Time value of an option: The time value of an option is the difference
between its premium and its intrinsic value. Both calls and puts have
195
time value. An option that is OTM or ATM has only time value. Usually,
the maximum time value exists when the option is ATM. The longer the
time to expiration, the greater is an option s time value, all else equal. At
expiration, an option should have no time value. While intrinsic value is
easy to calculate, time value is more difficult to calculate. Historically,
this made it difficult to value options prior to their expiration. Various
option pricing methodologies were proposed, but the problem wasn't
solved until the emergence of Black-Scholes theory in 1973.
Distinction between Futures and options
Options are different from futures in several interesting senses. At a practical
level, the option buyer faces an interesting situation. He pays for the option i
n
full at the time it is purchased. After this, he only has an upside. There is no
possibility of the options position generating any further losses to him (other
than the funds already paid for the option). This is different from futures,
which is free to enter into, but can generate very large losses. This
characteristic makes options attractive to many occasional market
participants, who cannot put in the time to closely monitor their futures
positions.
Buying put options is buying insurance. To buy a put option on Nifty is to buy
insurance which reimburses the full extent to which Nifty drops below the
strike price of the put option. This is attractive to many people, and to mutual
funds creating guaranteed return products . The Nifty index fund industry will
find it very useful to make a bundle of a Nifty index fund and a Nifty put
option to create a new kind of a Nifty index fund, which gives the investor
protection against extreme drops in Nifty. Selling put options is selling
insurance, so anyone who feels like earning revenues by selling insurance can
set himself up to do so on the index options market.
More generally, options offer non-linear payoffs whereas futures only have
linear payoffs . By combining futures and options, a wide variety of
innovative and useful payoff structures can be created.
Table 5.4 Distinction between futures and options
Futures Options
Exchange traded, with novation Same as futures.
Exchange defines the product Same as futures.
Price is zero, strike price moves Strike price is fixed, price moves.
Price is zero Price is always positive.
Linear payoff Non-linear payoff.
Both long and short at risk Only short at risk.
196
5.2.4 Pricing of Derivatives
Pricing Futures:
Stock index futures began trading on NSE on the 12th June 2000. Stock
futures were launched on 9th November 2001. The volumes and open interest
on this market has been steadily growing. Looking at the futures prices on
NSE s market, have you ever felt the need to know whether the quoted prices
are a true reflection of the price of the underlying index/stock? Have you
wondered whether you could make risk-less profits by arbitraging between
the underlying and futures markets? If so, you need to know the cost-of-carry
to understand the dynamics of pricing that constitute the estimation of fair
value of futures.
The cost of carry model: We use fair value calculation of futures to decide the
no-arbitrage limits on the price of a futures contract. This is the basis for th
e
cost-of-carry model where the price of the contract is defined as:
F = S + C
Where,
F = Futures price; S = Spot price; C = Holding costs or carry costs.
This can also be expressed as:
T
F = S (1 + r)
r = Cost of financing and T = Time till expiration of futures contract
TT
If F < S(1 + r) or F > S(1 + r) , arbitrage opportunities would exist i.e.
whenever the futures price moves away from the fair value, there would be
chances for arbitrage. We know what the spot and futures prices are, but
what are the components of holding cost? The components of holding cost
vary with contracts on different assets. At times the holding cost may even be
negative. In the case of commodity futures, the holding cost is the cost of
financing plus cost of storage and insurance purchased etc. In the case of
equity futures, the holding cost is the cost of financing minus the dividends
returns.
The concept of discrete compounding is used, where interest rates are
compounded at discrete intervals, for example, annually or semi-annually. In
case of the concept of continuous compounding, the above equation would be
expressed as:
(rT )
F = Se
Where,
r = Cost of financing (using continuously compounded interest rate)
T = Time till expiration; and e = 2.71828
197
Example: Security XYZ Ltd trades in the spot market at Rs. 1150. Money can be
invested at 11% p.a. The fair value of a one-month futures contract on XYZ is
calculated as follows:
Pricing options:
An option buyer has the right but not the obligation to exercise on the seller.
The worst that can happen to a buyer is the loss of the premium paid by him.
His downside is limited to this premium, but his upside is potentially
unlimited. This optionality is precious and has a value, which is expressed in
terms of the option price. Just like in other free markets, it is the supply and
demand in the secondary market that drives the price of an option. On dates
prior to 31 Dec 2000, the call option on Nifty expiring on 31 Dec 2000 with a
strike of 1500 will trade at a price that purely reflects supply and demand.
There is a separate order book for each option which generates its own price.
The values shown in Table 5.5 are derived from a theoretical model, namely
the Black-Scholes option pricing model.
Table 5.5: Option prices: some illustrative values
Option strike price
1400 1450 1500 1550 1600
Calls
1 month 117 79 48 27 13
3 month 154 119 90 67 48
Puts
1 month 8 19 38 66 102
3 month 25 39 59 84 114
Assumptions: Nifty spot is 1500, Nifty volatility is 25% annualized,
interest rate is 10%, Nifty dividend yield is 1.5%.
If the secondary market prices deviate from these values, it would imply the
presence of arbitrage opportunities, which (we might expect) would be swiftly
exploited. But there is nothing innate in the market which forces the prices in
the table to come about.
There are various models which help us get close to the true price of an
option. Most of these are variants of the celebrated Black-Scholes model for
pricing European options. Today most calculators and spread-sheets come
with a built-in Black-Scholes options pricing formula so to price options we
198
don t really need to memorise the formula. What we shall do here is discuss
this model in a fairly non-technical way by focusing on the basic principles
and the underlying intuition.
Introduction to the Black Scholes formulae
Options have existed at least in concept since antiquity. It wasn't until
publication of the Black-scholes (1973) option pricing formula that a
theoretically consistent framework for pricing options became available. That
framework was a direct result of work by Robert Merton as well as Fisher
Black and Myron Scholes. In 1997, Scholes and Merton won the Nobel Prize in
economics for this work. Black had died in 1995, but otherwise would have
shared the prize.
The factors affecting the option price are: (i) The spot price of the
underlying, (ii) exercise price, (iii) risk-free interest rate, (iv) volatility
of the
underlying, (v) time to expiration and (vi) dividends on the underlying (stock
or index). Interestingly before Black and Scholes came up with their option
pricing model, there was a widespread belief that the expected growth of the
underlying ought to affect the option price. Black and Scholes demonstrate
that this is not true. The beauty of the Black and Scholes model is that like
any good model, it tells us what is important and what is not. It doesn t
promise to produce the exact prices that show up in the market, but certainly
does a remarkable job of pricing options within the framework of assumptions
of the model. Virtually all option pricing models, even the most complex ones,
have much in common with the Black Scholes model.
Black and Scholes start by specifying a simple and well known equation that
models the way in which stock prices fluctuate. This equation called
Geometric Brownian Motion, implies that stock returns will have a lognormal
distribution, meaning that the logarithm of the stock s return will follow the
normal (bell shaped) distribution. Black and Scholes then propose that the
option s price is determined by only two variables that are allowed to change:
time and the underlying stock price. The other factors, namely, the volatility,
the exercise price, and the risk free interest rate do affect the option s price
but they are not allowed to change. By forming a portfolio consisting of a long
position in stock and a short position in calls, the risk of the stock is
eliminated. This hedged portfolio is obtained by setting the number of shares
of stock equal to the approximate change in the call price for a change in the
stock price. This mix of stock and calls must be revised continuously, a
process known as delta hedging.
Black and Scholes then turn to a little known result in a specialised field of
probability known as stochastic calculus. This result defines how the option
price changes in terms of the change in the stock price and time to expiration.
They then reason that this hedged combination of options and stock should
grow in value at the risk free rate. The result then is a partial differential
199
equation. The solution is found by forcing a condition called a boundary
condition on the model that requires the option price to converge to the
exercise value at expiration. The end result is the Black and Scholes model.
5.3 TRADING SYSTEM
5.3.1 Introduction
The futures & options trading system of NSE, called National Exchange for
Automated Trading NEAT-F&O trading system, provides a fully automated
screen-based trading for Index futures & options, stock futures & options and
futures on interest rate on a nationwide basis as well as an online monitoring
and surveillance mechanism. It supports an order driven market and provides
complete transparency of trading operations. It is similar to that of trading of
equities in the cash market segment.
The software for the F&O market has been developed to facilitate efficient and
transparent trading in futures and options instruments. Keeping in view the
familiarity of trading members with the current capital market trading system,
modifications have been performed in the existing capital market trading
system so as to make it suitable for trading futures and options.
5.3.2 Trading mechanism
The NEAT F&O system supports an order driven market, wherein orders
match automatically. Order matching is essentially on the basis of security, its
price, time and quantity. All quantity fields are in units and price in rupees.
The lot size on the futures and options market is 50 for Nifty. The exchange
notifies the regular lot size and tick size for each security traded on this
segment from time to time. Orders, as and when they are received, are first
time stamped and then immediately processed for potential match. When any
order enters the trading system, it is an active order. If it finds a match, a
trade is generated. If a match is not found, then the orders are stored in
different 'books'. Orders are stored in price-time priority in various books in
the following sequence:
Best Price
Within Price, by time priority.
Entities in the trading system
There are four entities in the trading system:
1.
Trading members: Trading members are members of NSE. They can
trade either on their own account or on behalf of their clients including
200
participants. The exchange assigns a Trading member ID to each trading
member. Each trading member can have more than one user.
2.
Clearing members: Clearing members are members of NSCCL. They
carry out risk management activities and confirmation/inquiry of trades
through the trading system.
3.
Professional clearing members: professional clearing members is a
clearing member who is not a trading member. Typically, banks and
custodians become professional clearing members and clear and settle for
their trading members.
4.
Participants: A participant is a client of trading members like financial
institutions. These clients may trade through multiple trading members
but settle through a single clearing member.
Corporate hierarchy
In the F&O trading software, a trading member has the facility of defining a
hierarchy amongst users of the system. This hierarchy comprises corporate
manager, Admin user, branch manager and dealer.
1.
Corporate manager: The term Corporate manager is assigned to a
user placed at the highest level in a trading firm. Such a user can
perform all the functions such as order and trade related activities,
receiving reports for all branches of the trading member firm and also all
dealers of the firm. Additionally, a corporate manager can define
exposure limits for the branches of the firm. This facility is available only
to the corporate manager.
2.
Branch manager: The branch manager is a term assigned to a user who
is placed under the corporate manager. Such a user can perform and
view order and trade related activities for all dealers under that branch.
3.
Dealer: Dealers are users at the lower most level of the hierarchy. A
Dealer can perform view order and trade related activities only for
oneself and does not have access to information on other dealers under
either the same branch or other branches.
Below given cases explain activities possible for specific user categories:
1. Clearing member corporate manager: He can view outstanding orders,
previous trades and net position of his client trading members by putting the
TM ID (Trading member identification) and leaving the Branch ID and and
Dealer ID blank.
201
2. Clearing member and trading member corporate manager: He can
view:
(a) Outstanding orders, previous trades and net position of his client
trading members by putting the TM ID and leaving the Branch ID and
the Dealer ID blank.
(b) Outstanding orders, previous trades and net positions entered for
himself by entering his own TM ID, Branch ID and User ID. This is his
default screen.
(c) Outstanding orders, previous trades and net position entered for his
branch by entering his TM ID and Branch ID fields.
(d) Outstanding orders, previous trades, and net positions entered for any
of his users/dealers by entering his TM ID, Branch ID and user ID
fields.
3. Clearing member and trading member dealer: He can only view
requests entered by him.
4. Trading member corporate manager: He can view
(a) Outstanding requests and activity log for requests entered by him by
entering his own Branch and User IDs. This is his default screen.
(b) Outstanding requests entered by his dealers and/or branch managers
by either entering the Branch and/or User IDs or leaving them blank.
5. Trading member branch manager: He can view
(a) Outstanding requests and activity log for requests entered by him by
entering his own Branch and User IDs. This is his default screen.
(b) Outstanding requests entered by his users either by filling the User ID
field with a specific user or leaving the User ID field blank.
6. Trading member dealer: He can only view requests entered by him.
Order types and conditions
The system allows the trading members to enter orders with various
conditions attached to them as per their requirements. These conditions are
broadly divided into the following three categories:
Time conditions
Day order: A day order, as the name suggests is an order which is

valid for the day on which it is entered. If the order is not executed
during the day, the system cancels the order automatically at the end
of the day.
Immediate or Cancel(IOC): An IOC order allows the user to buy or sell
a contract as soon as the order is released into the system, failing
which the order is cancelled from the system. Partial match is possible
for the order, and the unmatched portion of the order is cancelled
immediately.
202
Price condition
Stop loss: This facility allows the user to release an order into the
system, after the market price (Last Traded Price) of the security
reaches or crosses a threshold price e.g. if for stop loss buy order, the
trigger is 1027.00, the limit price is 1030.00 and the market (last
traded) price is 1023.00, then this order is released into the system
once the market price reaches or exceeds 1027.00. This order is added
to the regular lot book with time of triggering as the time stamp, as a
limit order of 1030.00. For the stop loss sell order, the trigger price
has to be greater than the limit price.
Other conditions
Market price: Market orders are orders for which no price is specified
at the time the order is entered (i.e. price is market price). For such
orders, the system determines the price.
Limit price: Price of the order after triggering from Stop Loss Book.
Pro: Pro means that the orders are entered on the trading member s
own account.
Cli: Cli means that the trading member enters the orders on behalf of
a client.
Trigger Price: Price at which an order gets triggered from Stop-loss
book.
Several combinations of the above are allowed thereby providing enormous
flexibility to the users.
Market watch window
The following windows are displayed on the trader workstation screen.
Title bar
Ticker window of futures and options market
Ticker window of underlying(capital) market
Tool bar
Market watch window
Inquiry window
Snap quote
Order/trade window
System message window
The purpose of market watch is to allow continuous monitoring of contracts or
securities that are of specific interest to the user. It displays trading
information for contracts selected by the user. The user also gets a broadcast
of all the cash market securities on the screen. This function also will be
available if the user selects the relevant securities for display on the market
watch screen. Display of trading information related to cash market securities
will be on Read only format i.e. the dealer can only view the information on
203
cash market but, cannot trade in them through the system. This is the main
window from the dealer s perspective.
Inquiry window
The inquiry window enables the user to view information such as Market by
Price (MBP), Previous Trades (PT), Outstanding Orders (OO), Activity log (AL),
Snap Quote (SQ), Order Status (OS), Market Movement (MM), Market Inquiry
(MI), Net Position, On line backup, Multiple index inquiry, Most active security
and so on.
Placing orders on the trading system
For both the futures and the options market, while entering orders on the
trading system, members are required to identify orders as being proprietary
or client orders. Proprietary orders should be identified as Pro and those of
clients should be identified as Cli . Apart from this, in the case of Cli trades,
the client account number should also be provided. The futures and options
market is a zero sum game i.e. the total number of long in the contract
always equals the total number of short in any contract. The total number of
outstanding contracts (long/short) at any point in time is called the Open
interest . This Open interest figure is a good indicator of the liquidity in the
contract. Based on studies carried out in international exchanges, it is found
that open interest is maximum in near month expiry contracts.
Market spread/combination o rder entry
The NEAT F&O trading system also enables to enter spread/combination
trades. This enables the user to input two or three orders simultaneously into
the market. These orders will have the condition attached to it that unless
and until the whole batch of orders finds a counter match, they shall not be
traded. This facilitates spread and combination trading strategies with
minimum price risk.
Basket trading
In order to provide a facility for easy arbitrage between futures and cash
markets, NSE introduced basket-trading facility. This enables the generation
of portfolio offline order files in the derivatives trading system and its
execution in the cash segment. A trading member can buy or sell a portfolio
through a single order, once he determines its size. The system automatically
works out the quantity of each security to be bought or sold in proportion to
their weights in the portfolio.
Charges
The maximum brokerage chargeable by a trading member in relation to
trades effected in the contracts admitted to dealing on the F&O segment of
NSE is fixed at 2.5% of the contract value in case of index futures and stock
futures. In case of index options and stock options it is 2.5% of notional value
204
of the contract [(Strike Price + Premium) * Quantity)], exclusive of statutory
levies. The transaction charges payable to the exchange by the trading
member for the trades executed by him on the F&O segment are fixed at the
rate of Rs. 2 per lakh of turnover (0.002%) subject to a minimum of Rs.
1,00,000 per year. However for the transactions in the options sub-segment
the transaction charges are levied on the premium value at the rate of 0.05%
(each side) instead of on the strike price as levied earlier. Further to this,
trading members have been advised to charge brokerage from their clients on
the Premium price(traded price) rather than Strike price. The trading
members contribute to Investor Protection Fund of F&O segment at the rate
of Re. 1/-per Rs. 100 crores of the traded value (each side).
5.3.3 Adjustments for corporate actions
The basis for any adjustment for corporate actions is such that the value of
the position of the market participants, on the cum and ex-dates for the
corporate action, continues to remain the same as far as possible. This
facilitates in retaining the relative status of positions, namely in-the-money,
at-the-money and out-of-money. This also addresses issues related to exercise an
d
assignments.
Corporate actions can be broadly classified under stock benefits and cash
benefits. The various stock benefits declared by the issuer of capital are
bonus, rights, merger/de-merger, amalgamation, splits, consolidations, hive-
off, warrants and secured premium notes (SPNs) among others. The cash
benefit declared by the issuer of capital is cash dividend.
Any adjustment for corporate actions is carried out on the last day on which a
security is traded on a cum basis in the underlying equities market, after the
close of trading hours. Adjustments may entail modifications to positions and/or
contract specifications as listed below, such that the basic premise of adjustme
nt
laid down above is satisfied:
1.
Strike price
2.
Position
3.
Market lot/multiplier
The adjustments are carried out on any or all of the above, based on the nature
of the
corporate action. The adjustments for corporate actions are carried out on all
open, exercised as well as assigned positions.
5.3.4 Eligibility criteria for securities/indices traded in
F&O
Eligibility criteria of stocks
The stock is chosen from amongst the top 500 stocks in terms of
average daily market capitalisation and average daily traded value in
205
the previous six months on a rolling basis.
The stock's median quarter-sigma order size over the last six months
should be not less than Rs. 1 lakh. For this purpose, a stock's quarter-
sigma order size should mean the order size (in value terms) required
to cause a change in the stock price equal to one-quarter of a standard
deviation.
The market wide position limit in the stock should not be less than
Rs.50 crore. The market wide position limit (number of shares) is
valued taking the closing prices of stocks in the underlying cash
market on the date of expiry of contract in the month. The market
wide position limit of open position (in terms of the number of
underlying stock) on futures and option contracts on a particular
underlying stock should be lower of:
-20% of the number of shares held by non-promoters in the
relevant underlying security i.e. free-float holding.
If an existing security fails to meet the eligibility criteria for three months
consecutively, then no fresh month contract will be issued on that
security.
However, the existing unexpired contracts can be permitted to trade till
expiry and new strikes can also be introduced in the existing contract
months.
For unlisted companies coming out with initial public offering, if the net publi
c
offer is Rs.500 crores or more, then the exchange may consider introducing
stock options and stock futures on such stocks at the time of its listing in the
cash market.
Eligibility criteria of indices
The exchange may consider introducing derivative contracts on an index if the
stocks contributing to 80% weightage of the index are individually eligible for
derivative trading. However, no single ineligible stocks in the index should
have a weightage of more than 5% in the index. The above criteria is applied
every month, if the index fails to meet the eligibility criteria for three month
s
consecutively, then no fresh month contract would be issued on that index,
However, the existing unexpired contacts will be permitted to trade till expiry
and new strikes can also be introduced in the existing contracts.
206
Eligibility criteria of stocks for derivatives trading especially on
account of corporate restructuring
The eligibility criteria for stocks for derivatives trading on account of corpor
ate
restructuring is as under:
I.
All the following conditions shall be met in the case of shares of a
company undergoing restructuring through any means for eligibility to
reintroduce derivative contracts on that company from the first day of
listing of the post restructured company/(s) (as the case may be)
stock (herein referred to as post restructured company) in the
underlying market,
a)
the Futures and options contracts on the stock of the original
(pre restructure) company were traded on any exchange prior
to its restructuring;
b)
the pre restructured company had a market capitalisation of at
least Rs.1000 crores prior to its restructuring;
c)
the post restructured company would be treated like a new
stock and if it is, in the opinion of the exchange, likely to be at
least one-third the size of the pre restructuring company in
terms of revenues, or assets, or (where appropriate) analyst
valuations; and
d)
in the opinion of the exchange, the scheme of restructuring
does not suggest that the post restructured company would
have any characteristic (for example extremely low free float)
that would render the company ineligible for derivatives
trading.
II.
If the above conditions are satisfied, then the exchange takes the
following course of action in dealing with the existing derivative
contracts on the pre-restructured company and introduction of fresh
contracts on the post restructured company
a)
In the contract month in which the post restructured company
begins to trade, the Exchange introduce near month, middle
month and far month derivative contracts on the stock of the
restructured company.
b)
In subsequent contract months, the normal rules for entry and
exit of stocks in terms of eligibility requirements would apply. If
these tests are not met, the exchange shall not permit further
derivative contracts on this stock and future month series shall
not be introduced.
207
5.3.5 Products and Contract specifications
The F&O segment of NSE provides trading facilities for the following derivative
products/instruments:
1. Index futures
2. Index options
3. Individual stock options
4. Individual stock futures
Index futures
NSE trade S&P CNX Nifty, CNX IT, BANK Nifty, CNX Nifty Junior, CNX 100, Nifty
Midcap 50 and Mini Nifty 50 futures contracts having one-month, two-month
and three-month expiry cycles. All contracts expire on the last Thursday of
every month. Thus a January expiration contract would expire on the last
Thursday of January and a February expiry contract would cease trading on
the last Thursday of February. On the Friday following the last Thursday, a
new contract having a three-month expiry would be introduced for trading.
Thus, as shown in Figure 5A at any point in time, three contracts would be
available for trading with the first contract expiring on the last Thursday of
that month. Depending on the time period for which you want to take an
exposure in index futures contracts, you can place buy and sell orders in the
respective contracts.
Figure 5A Contract cycle
The figure shows the contract cycle for futures contracts on NSE's derivatives
market. As can be seen, at any given point of time, three contracts are availabl
e
for trading -a near-month, a middle-month and a far-month. As the January
contract expires on the last Thursday of the month, a new three-month contract
starts trading from the following day, once more making available three index
futures contracts for trading.
The Instrument type FUTIDX refers to Futures contract on index and

Contract symbol NIFTY denotes a Futures contract on Nifty index and the
208
Expiry date represents the last date on which the contract will be available for
trading. Each futures contract has a separate limit order book. All passive
orders are stacked in the system in terms of price-time priority and trades
take place at the passive order price (similar to the existing capital market
trading system). The best buy order for a given futures contract will be the
order to buy the index at the highest index level whereas the best sell order
will be the order to sell the index at the lowest index level.
Table 5.5 Contract specification: S&P CNX Nifty Futures
Underlying index S&P CNX Nifty
Exchange of trading National Stock Exchange of India Limited
Security descriptor NFUTIDX NIFTY
Contract size Permitted lot size shall be 50
(minimum value Rs.2 lakh)
Price steps Re. 0.05
Price bands Not applicable
Trading cycle The futures contracts will have a maximum of three
month trading cycle -the near month (one), the next
month(two) and the far month(three). New contract
will be introduced on the next trading day following
the Expiry of near month contract.
Expiry day The last Thursday of the expiry month or the previous
trading day if the last Thursday is a trading holiday
Settlement basis Mark to market and final settlement will be cash
settled on T+1 basis.
Settlement price Daily settlement price will be the closing price of the
futures contracts for the trading day and the final
settlement price shall be the closing value of the
underlying index on the last trading day.
Index Options
On NSE's index options market, there are one-month, two-month and three-
month expiry contracts with minimum nine different strikes available for
trading. Hence, if there are three serial month contracts available and the
scheme of strikes is 4-1-4, then there are minimum 3 x 9 x 2 (call and put
options) i.e. 54 options contracts available on an index. Option contracts are
specified as follows: DATE-EXPIRYMONTH-YEAR-CALL/PUT-AMERICAN /
EUROPEAN-STRIKE. For example the European style call option contract on
the Nifty index with a strike price of 2040 expiring on the 30th June 2005 is
specified as '30 JUN 2005 2040 CE'.
Just as in the case of futures contracts, each option product (for instance, the
28 JUN 2005 2040 CE) has it's own order book and it's own prices. All index
options contracts are cash settled and expire on the last Thursday of the
209
month. The clearing corporation does the novation. The minimum tick for an
index options contract is 0.05 paise.
Table 5.6 gives the contract specifications for index options trading on the
NSE.
Table 5.6 Contract specification: S&P CNX Nifty Options
Underlying index S&P CNX Nifty
Exchange of trading National Stock Exchange of India Limited
Security descriptor NOPTIDX NIFTY
Contract size Permitted lot size shall be 50
(minimum value Rs.2 lakh)
Trading cycle The options contracts will have a maximum
of three month trading cycle -the near
month (one), the next month (two) and the
far month (three). New contract will be
introduced on the next trading day following
the expiry of near month contract.
Expiry day The last Thursday of the expiry month or the
previous trading day if the last Thursday is a
trading holiday.
Settlement basis Cash settlement on T+1 basis.
Style of option European
Daily settlement price N.A
Final settlement price Closing value of the index on the last
trading day of the options contract
Stock Futures
Trading in stock futures commenced on the NSE from November 2001. These
contracts are cash settled on a T+1 basis. The expiration cycle for stock future
s is
the same as for index futures, index options and stock options. A new contract i
s
introduced on the trading day following the expiry of the near month contract.
Table 5.7 gives the contract specifications for stock futures.
Table 5.7 Contract specification: Stock futures
Underlying Individual securities
Exchange of National Stock Exchange of India Limited
Security N FUTSTK
Contract
size
As specified by the exchange
(minimum value of Rs.2 lakh)
210
Table 5.7 Contract specification: Stock futures
Trading
cycle
The futures contracts will have a maximum of
three month trading cycle -the near month (one),
the next month (two) and the far month (three).
New contract will be introduced on the next
trading day following the expiry of near month
contract.
Expiry day The last Thursday of the expiry month or the
previous trading day if the last Thursday is a
trading holiday.
Settlement In Cash on T+1 Basis
Settlement
price
Daily settlement price will be the closing price of
the futures contracts on the trading day and the
the final settlement price will be the closing price
of the the underlying on the last trading day of
the options contract.
Stock Options
Trading in stock options commenced on the NSE from July 2001. These contracts
are American style and are settled in cash. The expiration cycle for stock
options is the same as for index futures and index options. A new contract is
introduced on the trading day following the expiry of the near month contract. N
SE
provides a minimum of seven strike prices for every option type (i.e. call and p
ut)
during the trading month. There are at least three in-the-money contracts, three
out-of-the-money contracts and one at-the-money contract available for
trading.
Table 5.8 gives the contract specifications for stock options.
Table 5.8 Contract specification: Stock options
Underlying Individual securities available
for trading in cash market
Exchange of trading National Stock Exchange of India
Security descriptor NOPTSTK.
Style of option American.
Strike price interval As specified by the exchange
Contract size As specified by the exchange
(minimum value of Rs.2 lakh)
211
Table 5.8 Contract specification: Stock options
Trading cycle The options contracts will have a
maximum of three month trading cycle
-the near month(one), the next
month(two) and the far month(three).
New contract will be be introduced on the
next trading day following the expiry of
near month contract.
Expiry day The last Thursday of the expiry month
or the previous trading day if the last
Thursday is a trading holiday.
Settlement basis T+1 Basis
Daily settlement price Closing price of underlying on the day
of exercise
Final settlement price Closing price of underlying on the last
trading day of the options contract
Settlement day Last trading day
5.4 CLEARING AND SETTLEMENT
5.4.1 Introduction
National Securities Clearing Corporation Limited (NSCCL) undertakes clearing
and settlement of all trades executed on the futures and options (F&O)
segment of the NSE. It also acts as legal counterparty to all trades on the
F&O segment and guarantees their financial settlement. Clearing and
settlement activities in the F&O segment are undertaken by NSCCL with the
help of the following entities:
Clearing members: Primarily, the Clearing Member (CM) performs

the following functions:
1.
Clearing: Computing obligations of all his TM's i.e. determining
positions to settle.
2.
Settlement: Performing actual settlement. Currently, all the
Futures and Options contracts are cash settled.
3.
Risk Management: Setting position limits based on upfront
deposits/margins for each TM and monitoring positions on a
continuous basis.
In the F&O segment, some members, called self clearing members,
clear and settle their trades executed by them only either on their own
account or on account of their clients. Some others, called trading
member cum clearing member (TM-CM), clear and settle their own
212
trades as well as trades of other trading members (TMs). Besides, there
is a special category of members, called professional clearing
members (PCM) who clear and settle trades executed by TMs. The
members clearing their own trades and trades of others, and the PCMs
are required to bring in additional security deposits in respect of every
TM whose trades they undertake to clear and settle.
Clearing Member Eligibility Norms
a.
Net worth of atleast Rs.300 lakh. The net worth requirement for a CM
who clears and settles only deals executed by him is Rs. 100 lakh.
b.
Deposit of Rs. 50 lakh to NSCCL which forms the Base Minimum
Capital (BMC) of the CM.
c.
Additional incremental deposits of Rs.10 lakh to NSCCL for each
additional TM in case the CM undertakes to clear and settle deals for
other TMs.
Clearing banks: Funds settlement takes place through clearing banks.
For the purpose of settlement all clearing members are required to open a
separate bank account with NSCCL designated clearing bank for F&O
segment. The Clearing and Settlement process comprises of the following
three main activities:
1) Clearing
2)
Settlement
3) Risk Management
5.4.2 Clearing mechanism
The first step in clearing process is working out open positions and obligations
of clearing (self-clearing/trading-cum-clearing/professional clearing) members
(CMs). The open positions of a CM is arrived at by aggregating the open
positions of all the trading members (TMs) and all custodial participants (CPs)
clearing through him, in the contracts which they have traded. The open
position of a TM is arrived at by summing up his proprietary open position and
clients' open positions, in the contracts which they have traded. While
entering orders on the trading system, TMs identify orders as either
proprietary or client through 'Pro / Cli' indicator provided in the order entry
screen. Proprietary positions are calculated on net basis (buy -sell) for each
contract and that of clients are arrived at by summing together net positions
of each individual client i.e., a buy trade is off-set by a sell trade and a sel
l
trade is off-set by a buy trade. A TM's open position is the sum of proprietary
open position, client open long position and client open short position.
5.4.3 Settlement mechanism
The settlement amount for a CM is netted across all their TMs/clients, with
respect to their obligations on MTM, premium and exercise settlement.
213
Settlement of futures contracts on Index or Individual Securities
Futures contracts have two types of settlements, the MTM settlement which
happens on a continuous basis at the end of each day, and the final
settlement which happens on the last trading day of the futures contract.
MTM settlement: All futures contracts for each member are marked-tomarket
(MTM) to the daily settlement price of the relevant futures contract at
the end of each day.
The CMs who have a loss are required to pay the mark-to-market (MTM) loss
amount in cash which is in turn passed on to the CMs who have made a MTM
profit. This is known as daily mark-to-market settlement. CMs are responsible
to collect and settle the daily MTM profits/losses incurred by the TMs and their
clients clearing and settling through them. Similarly, TMs are responsible to
collect/pay losses/profits from/to their clients by the next day. The pay-in and
pay-out of the mark-to-market settlement are affected on the day following
the trade day (T+1). The mark to market losses or profits are directly debited
or credited to the CMs clearing bank account. In case a futures contract is not
traded on a day, or not traded during the last half an hour, a theoretical
settlement price for unexpired futures contracts is computed as per the
following formula:
F = S * e rT
where
F = Theoretical futures price
S = Value of the underlying index
r = Cost of financing (using continuously compounded interest rate) or rate of
interest (MIBOR)
T = Time till expiration
e = 2.71828
After completion of daily settlement computation, all the open positions are
reset to the daily settlement price. Such positions become the open positions
for the next day.
Final settlement for futures: On the expiry day of the futures contracts,
after the close of trading hours, NSCCL marks all positions of a CM to the final
settlement price and the resulting profit/loss is settled in cash. Final
settlement of future contracts is similar to the daily settlement process except
for the method of computation of final settlement price. The final settlement
profit / loss is computed as the difference between trade price or the previous
day s settlement price, as the case may be, and the final settlement price of
the relevant futures contract. Final settlement loss/profit amount is debited/
credited to the relevant CM s clearing bank account on the day following
214
expiry day of the contract. Open positions in futures contracts cease to exist
after their expiration day
Settlement prices for futures: Daily settlement price on a trading day is the
closing price of the respective futures contracts on such day. The closing price
for
a futures contract is currently calculated as the last half an hour weighted
average price of the contract in the F&O Segment of NSE. Final settlement
price is the closing price of the relevant underlying index/security in the capi
tal
market segment of NSE, on the last trading day of the contract. The closing pric
e
of the underlying Index/security is currently its last half an hour weighted ave
rage
value in the capital market segment of NSE.
Settlement of options contracts on Index or Individual Securities
Options contracts have three types of settlements, daily premium settlement,
interim exercise settlement in the case of option contracts on securities and
final settlement.
Daily premium settlement
Buyer of an option is obligated to pay the premium towards the options purchased
by him. Similarly, the seller of an option is entitled to receive the premium fo
r the
option sold by him. The premium payable amount and the premium receivable
amount are netted to compute the net premium payable or receivable amount
for each client for each option contract.
Exercise settlement
Although most option buyers and sellers close out their options positions by
an offsetting closing transaction, an understanding of exercise can help an opti
on
buyer determine whether exercise might be more advantageous than an offsetting
sale of the option. There is always a possibility of the option seller being ass
igned
an exercise. Once an exercise of an option has been assigned to an option seller
,
the option seller is bound to fulfill his obligation (meaning, pay the cash
settlement amount in the case of a cash-settled option) even though he may not
yet have been notified of the assignment.
Interim exercise settlement
Interim exercise settlement takes place only for option contracts on securities.
An
investor can exercise his in-the-money options at any time during trading
hours, through his trading member. Interim exercise settlement is effected for
such options at the close of the trading hours, on the day of exercise. Valid
exercised option contracts are assigned to short positions in the option contrac
t
with the same series (i.e. having the same underlying, same expiry date and same
strike price), on a random basis, at the client level. The CM who has exercised
the
option receives the exercise settlement value per unit of the option from the CM
who has been assigned the option contract.
215
Final exercise settlement
Final exercise settlement is effected for all open long in-the-money strike
price options existing at the close of trading hours, on the expiration day of
an option contract. All such long positions are exercised and automatically
assigned to short positions in option contracts with the same series, on a
random basis. The investor who has long in-the-money options on the expiry
date will receive the exercise settlement value per unit of the option from the
investor who has been assigned the option contract.
Exercise process: The period during which an option is exercisable depends
on the style of the option. On NSE, index options are European style, i.e.
options are only subject to automatic exercise on the expiration day, if they
are in the money. As compared to this, options on securities are American
style. In such cases, the exercise is automatic on the expiration day, and
voluntary prior to the expiration day of the option contract, provided they are
in the money. Automatic exercise means that all in the money options
would be exercised by NSCCL on the expiration day of the contract. The buyer
of such options need not give an exercise notice in such cases. Voluntary
exercise means that the buyer of an in the money option can direct his
TM/CM to give exercise instructions to NSCCL. In order to ensure that an
option is exercised on a particular day, the buyer must direct his TM to
exercise before the cut-off time for accepting exercise instructions for that
day. Usually, the exercise requests will be accepted by the system till the
close of exercise period. An option, which expires unexercised, becomes
worthless. Some TMs may accept standing instructions to exercise, or have
procedures for the exercise of every option, which is in the money at
expiration. Once an exercise instruction is given by a CM to NSCCL, it cannot
ordinarily be revoked. Exercise notices given by a buyer at anytime on a day
are processed by NSCCL after the close of trading hours on that day. All
exercise notices received by NSCCL from the NEAT F&O system are processed
to determine their validity. Some basic validation checks are carried out to
check the open buy position of the exercising client/TM and if option contract
is in the money. Once exercised contracts are found valid, they are assigned.
Assignment process: The exercise notices are assigned in standardized
market lots to short positions in the option contract with the same series (i.e.
same underlying, expiry date and strike price) at the client level. Assignment
to the short positions is done on a random basis. NSCCL determines short
positions, which are eligible to be assigned and then allocates the exercised
positions to any one or more short positions. Assignments are made at the
end of the trading day on which exercise instruction is received by NSCCL and
notified to the members on the same day. It is possible that an option seller
may not receive notification from its TM that an exercise has been assigned to
him until the next day following the date of the assignment to the CM by
NSCCL.
216
Exercise settlement computation: In case of index option contracts, all open
long positions at in-the-money strike prices are automatically exercised on the
expiration day and assigned to short positions in option contracts with the same
series on a random basis. For options on securities, where exercise settlement
may be interim or final, interim exercise for an open long in-the-money option
position can be effected on any day till the expiry of the contract. Final exerc
ise
is automatically effected by NSCCL for all open long in-the-money positions in t
he
expiring month option contract, on the expiry day of the option contract. The
exercise settlement price is the closing price of the underlying (index or secur
ity)
on the exercise day (for interim exercise) or the expiry day of the relevant opt
ion
contract (final exercise). The exercise settlement value is the difference betwe
en
the strike price and the final settlement price of the relevant option contract.
For
call options, the exercise settlement value receivable by a buyer is the differe
nce
between the final settlement price and the strike price for each unit of the
underlying conveyed by the option contract, while for put options it is differen
ce
between the strike price and the final settlement price for each unit of the
underlying conveyed by the option contract. Settlement of exercises of options o
n
securities is currently by payment in cash and not by delivery of securities. It
takes
place for in-the-money option contracts.
The exercise settlement value for each unit of the exercised contract is
computed as follows:
Call options = Closing price of the security on the day of exercise Strike price
Put options = Strike price Closing price of the security on the day of exercise
For final exercise the closing price of the underlying security is taken on the
expiration day. Exercise settlement value is debited/ credited to the relevant
CMs clearing bank account on T+1 day (T= exercise date).
All derivative contracts are currently cash settled. During 2007-08, such cash
settlement amounted to Rs. 1,565,192.40 crore. The settlement of futures
and options involved Rs.1,459,668 crore and Rs. 105,524.30 respectively.
Settlement of institutional deals
NSCCL provides a special facility to Institutions/Foreign Institutional Investor
s
(FIIs)/Mutual Funds etc. to execute trades through any TM, which may be
cleared and settled by their own CM. Such entities are called custodial
participants (CPs). To avail of this facility, a CP is required to register with
NSCCL through his CM. A unique CP code is allotted to the CP by NSCCL. All
trades executed by a CP through any TM are required to have the CP code in
the relevant field on the F&O trading system at the time of order entry. Such
trades executed on behalf of a CP are confirmed by their own CM (and not the
CM of the TM through whom the order is entered), within the time specified
by NSE on the trade day through the on-line confirmation facility. Till such
217
time the trade is confirmed by CM of concerned CP, the same is considered as
a trade of the TM and the responsibility of settlement of such trade vests with
CM of the TM. Once confirmed by CM of concerned CP, such CM is responsible
for clearing and settlement of deals of such custodial clients.
FIIs have been permitted to trade in all the exchange traded derivative
contracts subject to compliance of the position limits prescribed for them and
their sub-accounts, and compliance with the prescribed procedure for
settlement and reporting. A FII/a sub-account of the FII, as the case may be,
intending to trade in the F&O segment of the exchange, is required to obtain
a unique Custodial Participant (CP) code allotted from the NSCCL. FIIs/sub
accounts of FIIs which have been allotted a unique CP code by NSCCL are
only permitted to trade on the F&O segment. The FII/sub account of FII
ensures that all orders placed by them on the Exchange carry the relevant CP
code allotted by NSCCL.
5.4.4 Risk management
NSCCL has developed a comprehensive risk containment mechanism for the
F&O segment. The salient features of risk containment mechanism on the
F&O segment are:
1.
The financial soundness of the members is the key to risk management.
Therefore, the requirements for membership in terms of capital
adequacy (net worth, security deposits) are quite stringent.
2.
NSCCL charges an upfront initial margin for all the open positions of a
CM. It specifies the initial margin requirements for each futures/options
contract on a daily basis. It also follows value-at-risk (VaR) based
margining through SPAN. The CM in turn collects the initial margin from
the TMs and their respective clients.
3.
The open positions of the members are marked to market based on
contract settlement price for each contract. The difference is settled in
cash on a T+1 basis.
4.
NSCCL s on-line position monitoring system (PRISM) monitors a CM s
open positions on a real-time basis. Limits are set for each CM based on
his capital deposits. The on-line position monitoring system generates
alerts whenever a CM reaches a position limit set up by NSCCL.
Clearing members are automatically disabled after exceeding prescribed
limits.
5.
CMs are provided a trading terminal for the purpose of monitoring the
open positions of all the TMs clearing and settling through him. A CM
may set exposure limits for a TM clearing and settling through him.
NSCCL assists the CM to monitor the intra-day exposure limits set up
by a CM and whenever a TM exceed the limits, it stops that particular
TM from further trading.
6.
A member is alerted of his position to enable him to adjust his exposure
or bring in additional capital. Position violations result in withdrawal of
trading facility for all TMs of a CM in case of a violation by the CM.
218
7.
A separate settlement guarantee fund for this segment has been
created out of the capital of members.
The most critical component of risk containment mechanism for F&O segment
is the margining system and on-line position monitoring. The actual position
monitoring and margining is carried out on line through Parallel Risk
Management System (PRISM). PRISM uses SPAN(r) (Standard Portfolio
Analysis of Risk) system which is a portfolio based system, for the purpose of
computation of on-line margins, based on the parameters defined by SEBI.
NSE SPAN
The objective of NSE-SPAN is to identify overall risk in a portfolio of all futu
res
and options contracts for each member. The system treats futures and
options contracts uniformly, while at the same time recognising the unique
exposures associated with options portfolios, like extremely deep out-of-themone
y
short positions, inter-month risk and inter-commodity risk.
As SPAN is used to determine performance bond requirements (margin
requirements), its over-riding objective is to determine the largest loss that a
portfolio might reasonably be expected to suffer from one day to the next day
based on 99% VaR methodology.
SPAN considers uniqueness of option portfolios. The following factors affect
the value of an option at a given point of time:
i. Underlying market price.
ii. Volatility (variability) of underlying instrument
iii. Time to expiration.
iv. Interest rate
v. Strike price
As these factors change, the value of options maintained within a portfolio
also changes. Thus, SPAN constructs scenarios of probable changes in
underlying prices and volatilities in order to identify the largest loss a portf
olio
might suffer from one day to the next. It then sets the margin requirement to
cover this one-day loss.
The complex calculations (e.g. the pricing of options) in SPAN are executed by
NSCCL. The results of these calculations are called risk arrays. Risk arrays,
and other necessary data inputs for margin calculation are provided to
members daily in a file called the SPAN Risk Parameter file. Members can
apply the data contained in the Risk Parameter files, to their specific portfoli
os
of futures and options contracts, to determine their SPAN margin
requirements.
Hence, members need not execute complex option pricing calculations, which
are performed by NSCCL. SPAN has the ability to estimate risk for combined
219
futures and options portfolios, and also re-value the same under various
scenarios of changing market conditions.
Types of Margins
Initial margin: Margin in the F&O segment is computed by NSCCL

upto client level for open positions of CMs/TMs. These are required to
be paid up-front on gross basis at individual client level for client
positions and on net basis for proprietary positions. NSCCL collects
initial margin for all the open positions of a CM based on the margins
computed by NSE-SPAN. A CM is required to ensure collection of
adequate initial margin from his TMs up-front. The TM is required to
collect adequate initial margins up-front from his clients.
Premium margin: In addition to initial margin, premium margin is
charged at client level. This margin is required to be paid by a buyer of
an option till the premium settlement is complete.
Assignment margin for options on securities: Assignment margin is
levied in addition to initial margin and premium margin. It is required
to be paid on assigned positions of CMs towards interim and final
exercise settlement obligations for option contracts on individual
securities, till such obligations are fulfilled. The margin is charged on
the net exercise settlement value payable by a CM towards interim and
final exercise settlement.
Client margins: NSCCL intimates all members of the margin liability
of each of their client. Additionally members are also required to report
details of margins collected from clients to NSCCL, which holds in trust
client margin monies to the extent reported by the member as having
been collected form their respective clients.
Margining System
Derivatives enable traders to take on leveraged positions. This can be very
risky because a small movement in prices of underlying could result in either
big gains or big losses. Hence the margining system for derivatives becomes
an important aspect of market functioning and determines the integrity of this
market. In this chapter we look at some margining concepts and the
methodology used for computing margins.
NSCCL has developed a comprehensive risk containment mechanism for the
Futures & Options segment. The most critical component of a risk containment
mechanism is the online position monitoring and margining system. The
actual margining and position monitoring is done on-line, on an intra-day
basis using PRISM (Parallel Risk Management System) which is the real-time
220
position monitoring and risk management system. The risk of each trading and
clearing member is monitored on a real-time basis and alerts/disablement
messages are generated if the member crosses the set limits. NSCCL uses the
SPAN (Standard Portfolio Analysis of Risk) system, a portfolio based margining
system, for the purpose of calculating initial margins.
SPAN approach of computing initial margins
The objective of SPAN is to identify overall risk in a portfolio of futures and
options contracts for each member. The system treats futures and options
contracts uniformly, while at the same time recognizing the unique exposures
associated with options portfolios like extremely deep out-of-the-money short
positions, inter-month risk and inter-commodity risk.
Because SPAN is used to determine performance bond requirements (margin
requirements), its overriding objective is to determine the largest loss that a
portfolio might reasonably be expected to suffer from one day to the next
day.
In standard pricing models, three factors most directly affect the value of an
option at a given point in time:
1. Underlying market price
2. Volatility (variability) of underlying instrument
3. Time to expiration
As these factors change, so too will the value of futures and options
maintained within a portfolio. SPAN constructs sixteen scenarios of probable
changes in underlying prices and volatilities in order to identify the largest l
oss
a portfolio might suffer from one day to the next. It then sets the margin
requirement at a level sufficient to cover this one-day loss.
The computation of worst scenario loss has two components. The first is the
valuation of each contract under sixteen scenarios. The second is the
application of these scenario contract values to the actual positions in a
portfolio to compute the portfolio values and the worst scenario loss. The
scenario contract values are updated at least 5 times in the day, which may be
carried out by taking prices at the start of trading, at 11:00 a.m., at 12:30
p.m., at 2:00 p.m., and at the end of the trading session.
Mechanics of SPAN
The complex calculations (e.g. the pricing of options) in SPAN are executed by
NSCCL. The results of these calculations are called risk arrays. Risk arrays,
221
and other necessary data inputs for margin calculation are then provided to
members on a daily basis in a file called the SPAN Risk Parameter file. Members
can apply the data contained in the risk parameter files, to their specific
portfolios of futures and options contracts, to determine their SPAN margin
requirements. Hence members do not need to execute complex option pricing
calculations. SPAN has the ability to estimate risk for combined futures and
options portfolios, and re-value the same under various scenarios of changing
market conditions.
Risk arrays
The SPAN risk array represents how a specific derivative instrument (for
example, an option on NIFTY index at a specific strike price) will gain or lose
value, from the current point in time to a specific point in time in the near
future, for a specific set of market conditions which may occur over this time
duration.
The results of the calculation for each risk scenario i.e. the amount by which
the futures and options contracts will gain or lose value over the look-ahead
time under that risk scenario -is called the risk array value for that scenario.
The set of risk array values for each futures and options contract under the
full set of risk scenarios, constitutes the risk array for that contract.
In the risk array, losses are represented as positive values, and gains as
negative values. Risk array values are represented in Indian Rupees, the
currency in which the futures or options contract is denominated.
Risk scenarios
The specific set of market conditions evaluated by SPAN, are called the risk
scenarios, and these are denned in terms of:
1.
How much the price of the underlying instrument is expected to change
over one trading day, and
2.
How much the volatility of that underlying price is expected to change over
one trading day.
SPAN further uses a standardized definition of the risk scenarios, defined in
terms of:
1.
The underlying price scan range or probable price change over a one day
period, and
2.
The underlying price volatility scan range or probable volatility change of the
underlying over a one day period.
Table 5.9 gives the sixteen risk scenarios. +1 refers to increase in volatility
and -1 refers to decrease in volatility.
222
Table 6.7 Worst scenario loss
Risk scenario Price move in Volatility move in Fraction of loss
number multiples of price multiples of considered
(%)
1 0 +1 100
2 0 -1 100
3 +1/3 +1 100
4 +1/3 -1 100
5 -1/3 +1 100
6 -1/3 -1 100
7 +2/3 +1 100
8 +2/3 -1 100
9 -2/3 +1 100
10 -2/3 -1 100
11 +1 +1100
12 +1 -1100
13 -1 +1100
14 -1 -1100
15 +2 035
16 -2 035
Method of computation of volatility
The exponential moving average method is used to obtain the volatility
estimate every day. The estimate at the end of day t, st is estimated using the
previous day's volatility estimate s t-1 (as at the end of day t-1), and the
return rt observed in the futures market on day t.
where
is a parameter which determines how rapidly volatility estimates

change. A value of 0.94 is used for
SPAN uses the risk arrays to scan probable underlying market price changes
and probable volatility changes for all contracts in a portfolio, in order to
determine value gains and losses at the portfolio level. This is the single most
important calculation executed by the system.
Scanning risk charge

As shown in the table giving the sixteen standard risk scenarios, SPAN starts
at the last underlying market settlement price and scans up and down three
223
even intervals of price changes (price scan range). At each price scan point,
the program also scans up and down a range of probable volatility from the
underlying market's current volatility (volatility scan range). SPAN calculates
the probable premium value at each price scan point for volatility up and
volatility down scenario. It then compares this probable premium value to the
theoretical premium value (based on last closing value of the underlying) to
determine profit or loss.
Deep-out-of-the-money short options positions pose a special risk identification
problem. As they move towards expiration, they may not be significantly
exposed to "normal" price moves in the underlying. However, unusually large
underlying price changes may cause these options to move into-the-money,
thus creating large losses to the holders of short option positions. In order to
account for this possibility, two of the standard risk scenarios in the risk arr
ay,
Number 15 and 16, reflect an "extreme" underlying price movement, currently
denned as double the maximum price scan range for a given underlying.
However, because price changes of these magnitudes are rare, the system
only covers 35% of the resulting losses.
After SPAN has scanned the 16 different scenarios of underlying market price
and volatility changes, it selects the largest loss from among these 16
observations. This "largest reasonable loss" is the scanning risk charge for the
portfolio.
Calendar spread margin
A calendar spread is a position in an underlying with one maturity which is
hedged by an offsetting position in the same underlying with a different
maturity: for example, a short position in a July futures contract on Reliance
and a long position in the August futures contract on Reliance is a calendar
spread. Calendar spreads attract lower margins because they are not exposed
to market risk of the underlying. If the underlying rises, the July contract wou
ld
make a profit while the August contract would make a loss.
As SPAN scans futures prices within a single underlying instrument, it assumes
that price moves correlate perfectly across contract months. Since price moves
across contract months do not generally exhibit perfect correlation, SPAN adds
a calendar spread charge (also called the inter-month spread charge) to the
scanning risk charge associated with each futures and options contract. To put
it in a different way, the calendar spread charge covers the calendar basis risk
that may exist for portfolios containing futures and options with different
expirations.
For each futures and options contract, SPAN identifies the delta associated each
futures and option position, for a contract month. It then forms spreads using
these deltas across contract months. For each spread formed, SPAN assesses
a specific charge per spread which constitutes the calendar spread charge.
224
The margin for calendar spread is calculated on the basis of delta (delta is a
measure of change in option price with respect to change in the price of the
underlying asset) of the portfolio in each month. Thus a portfolio consisting
of a near month option with a delta of 100 and a far month option with a delta
of 100 would bear a spread charge equivalent to the calendar spread charge
for a portfolio which is long 100 near month futures contract and short 100
far month futures contract. A calendar spread would be treated as a naked
position in the far month contract three trading days before the near month
contract expires.
Margin on calendar spreads is levied at 0.5% per month of spread on the far
month contract of the spread subject to a minimum margin of 1% and a
maximum margin of 3% on the far month contract of the spread.
Short option minimum margin
Short options positions in extremely deep-out-of-the-money strikes may
appear to have little or no risk across the entire scanning range. However, in
the event that underlying market conditions change sufficiently, these options
may move into-the-money, thereby generating large losses for the short
positions in these options. To cover the risks associated with deep-out-of-themo
ney
short options positions, SPAN assesses a minimum margin for each
short option position in the portfolio called the short option minimum charge,
which is set by the NSCCL. The short option minimum charge serves as a
minimum charge towards margin requirements for each short position in an
option contract.
For example, suppose that the short option minimum charge is Rs.50 per short
position. A portfolio containing 20 short options will have a margin
requirement of at least Rs. 1,000, even if the scanning risk charge plus the
calendar spread charge on the position is only Rs. 500.
The short option minimum margin equal to 3% of the notional value of all
short index options is charged if sum of the worst scenario loss and the
calendar spread margin is lower than the short option minimum margin. For
stock options it is equal to 7.5% of the notional value based on the previous
days closing value of the underlying stock. Notional value of option positions i
s
calculated on the short option positions by applying the last closing price of
the relevant underlying.
Net option value
The net option value is calculated as the current market value of the option
times the number of option units (positive for long options and negative for
short options) in the portfolio.
225
Net option value is added to the liquid net worth of the clearing member.
This means that the current market value of short options are deducted
from the liquid net worth and the market value of long options are added
thereto. Thus mark to market gains and losses on option positions get
adjusted against the available liquid net worth.
Net buy premium
To cover the one day risk on long option positions (for which premium
shall be payable on T+1 day), net buy premium to the extent of the net
long options position value is deducted from the Liquid Networth of the
member on a real time basis. This would be applicable only for trades
done on a given day. The net buy premium margin shall be released
towards the Liquid Networth of the member on T+1 day after the
completion of pay-in towards premium settlement.
Overall portfolio margin requirement
The total margin requirements for a member for a portfolio of futures and
options contract would be computed by SPAN as follows:
1.
Adds up the scanning risk charges and the calendar spread
charges.
2.
Compares this figure to the short option minimum charge and
selects the larger of the two. This is the SPAN risk requirement.
3.
Total SPAN margin requirement is equal to SPAN risk requirement
less the net option value, which is mark to market value of
difference in long option positions and short option positions.
4.
Initial margin requirement = Total SPAN margin requirement +
Net Buy Premium.
Trading Member-wise Position Limit
Trading member position limits are specified as given below:
1.
Trading member position limits in equity index option contracts: The
trading member position limits in equity index option contracts is higher
of Rs.500 crore or 15% of the total open interest in the market in
equity index option contracts. This limit is applicable on open positions
in all option contracts on a particular underlying index.
2.
Trading member position limits in equity index futures contracts: The
trading member position limits in equity index futures contracts is higher
of Rs.500 crore or 15% of the total open interest in the market in
equity index futures contracts. This limit is applicable on open
positions in all futures contracts on a particular underlying index.
3.
Trading member position limits for combined futures and options
226
position:
For stocks having applicable market-wise position limit(MWPL) of

Rs.500 crores or more, the combined futures and options
position limit is 20% of applicable MWPL or Rs.300 crores,
whichever is lower and within which stock futures position cannot
exceed 10% of applicable MWPL or Rs.150 crores, whichever is
lower.
For stocks having applicable market-wise position limit (MWPL)
less than Rs.500 crores, the combined futures and options
position limit is 20% of applicable MWPL and futures position
cannot exceed 20% of applicable MWPL or Rs.50 crore which
ever is lower. The Clearing Corporation shall specify the trading
member-wise position limits on the last trading day month
which shall be reckoned for the purpose during the next month.
Client level position limits
The gross open position for each client, across all the derivative contracts on
an underlying, should not exceed 1% of the free float market capitalization (in
terms of number of shares) or 5% of the open interest in all derivative
contracts in the same underlying stock (in terms of number of shares)
whichever is higher.
Market wide position limits
The market wide limit of open position (in terms of the number of underlying
stock) on futures and option contracts on a particular underlying stock is 20%
of the number of shares held by non-promoters in the relevant underlying
security i.e. free float holding. This limit is applicable on all open positions i
n
all futures and option contracts on a particular underlying stock. The
enforcement of the market wide limits is done in the following manner:
At end of the day the exchange tests whether the market wide open
interest for any scrip exceeds 95% of the market wide position limit for
that scrip. In case it does so, the exchange takes note of open position
of all client/TMs as at end of that day for that scrip and from next day
onwards they can trade only to decrease their positions through
offsetting positions.
At the end of each day during which the ban on fresh positions is in force
for any scrip, the exchange tests whether any member or client has
increased his existing positions or has created a new position in that
scrip. If so, that client is subject to a penalty equal to a specified
percentage (or basis points) of the increase in the position (in terms of
notional value). The penalty is recovered before trading begins next
227
day. The exchange specifies the percentage or basis points, which is set
high enough to deter violations of the ban on increasing positions.
The normal trading in the scrip is resumed after the open outstanding
position comes down to 80% or below of the market wide position
limit. Further, the exchange also checks on a monthly basis, whether a
stock has remained subject to the ban on new position for a significant
part of the month consistently for three months. If so, then the
exchange phases out derivative contracts on that underlying.
The performance of derivatives markets can be analysed on the basis of
various parameters like prices, turnover, open interest and cost of carry. The
interplay of prices, volumes and open interest indicates the health of the
market. Generally, if prices, volumes and open interest are rising, the market
is healthy. If the prices are rising, while volume and open interest are falling
,
then the market is weakening. The total turnover on the F&O Segment surged
by an impressive 77.95 % to Rs. Rs.13,090,478 crore during 2007-08 as
compared with Rs.7,356,271 crore during 2006-07. The average daily
turnover during 2007-08 was Rs.52,153 crore (US $ 13,048 million), a year
on year growth of 76.53 %.
Open Interest
Open interest is the total number of outstanding contracts that are held by
market participants at the end of each day. Putting it simply, open interest is
a measure of how much interest is there in a particular option or future.
Increasing open interest means that fresh funds are flowing in the market,
while declining open interest means that the market is liquidating.
Implied Interest Rate
In the futures market, implied interest rate or cost of carry is often used
inter-changeably. Cost of carry is more appropriately used for commodity
futures, as by definition it means the total costs required to carry a
commodity or any other good forward in time. The costs involved are storage
cost, insurance cost, transportation cost, and the financing cost. In case of
equity futures, the carry cost is the cost of financing minus the dividend
returns. Assuming zero dividend, the only relevant factor is the cost of
financing.
One could work out the implied interest rate incorporated in futures prices,
which is the percentage difference between the future value of an index and
the spot value, annualised on the basis of the number of days before the
expiry of the contract. Carry cost or implied interest rate plays an important
role in determining the price differential between the spot and the futures
market. By comparing the implied interest rate and the existing interest rate
level, one can determine the relative cost of futures market price. Implied
interest rate is also a measure of profitability of an arbitrage position.
Theoretically, if the futures price is less than the spot price plus cost of car
ry
228
or if the futures price is greater than the spot price plus cost of carry,
arbitrage opportunities exist.
Nifty futures close prices for the near month contracts, which are most liquid,
and the spot Nifty close values from June 2000 to June 2001. The difference
between the future price and the spot price is called basis. As the time to
expiration of a contract reduces, the basis reduces.
Implied Volatility
Volatility is one of the important factors, which is taken into account while
pricing options. It is a measure of the amount and speed of price changes, in
either direction. Everybody would like to know what future volatility is going
to be. Since it is not possible to know future volatility, one tries to estimate
it.
One way to do this is to look at historical volatility over a certain period of
time and try to predict the future movement of the underlying. Alternatively,
one could work out implied volatility by entering all parameters into an option
pricing model and then solving for volatility. For example, the Black Scholes
model solves for the fair price of the option by using the following parameters
days to expiry, strike price, spot price, volatility of underlying, interest rat
e,
and dividend. This model could be used in reverse to arrive at implied
volatility by putting the current price of the option prevailing in the market.
Putting it simply, implied volatility is the market s estimate of how volatile the
underlying will be from the present until the option s expiration, and is an
important input for pricing options - when volatility is high, options premiums
are relatively expensive; when volatility is low, options premiums are
relatively cheap. However, implied volatility estimate can be biased, especially
if they are based upon options that are thinly traded. Options trading was
introduced at NSE only in June 2001. The data points are therefore quite
limited to enable meaningful estimates of implied volatility.
MODEL QUESTIONS
Ques.1 The underlying asset of a derivative contract can be ______.
(a) only equity
(b) only interest rate
(c) only commodities
Correct answer: (d)
Ques.2 The losses of option buyer are ______.
(a) unlimited
(b) limited to the extent of premium paid
229
(c) generally larger than the premium paid
Correct answer: (b)
Ques.3 In the F&O trading system, execution priority of orders stored in the
order book is based on:
(a) Time price priority (i.e. first priority is given to the time of the
order entry)
(b) Price time priority(i.e. first priority is given to the price of the order
entry)
(c) Both price and time is given equal priority
(d) The first order which comes to the system will get executed
first
irrespective of the price of the order.
Correct Answer: (b)
Ques:4 The minimum tick for an index options contract is:
(a) 0.01 Paise
(b) 0.05 Paise
(b) 0.10 Paise
(d) 0.50 Paise
Correct Answer: (b)
Ques:5. The stock options contracts traded at NSE are of ______.
(a) American Style
(b)Asian Style
(c) Indian Style
(d)European Style
Correct answer: (a)
Ques:6 The trading cycle for Index futures contracts may be described as:
(a) The contracts with a maximum of three month trading cycle-the
near month (one), the next month (two) and the far month
(three).
(b) The contracts with a maturity period of one year with three months
continuous contracts for the first three months and fixed quarterly
contracts for the entire year
(c) The contracts with a maturity period of one year, with fixed
quarterly contracts only.
(d) None of the above.
Correct answer: (a)
Ques:7 Which of the following is false regarding the eligibility of a stock to b
e
traded in the F&O segment?
230
(a)
The stock shall be chosen from amongst the top 500 stock in
terms of average daily market capitalisation and average daily
traded value in the previous six month on a rolling basis.
(b)
For a security to be added in the F&O segment that stock s
median quarter-sigma order size over the last six months shall be
at least Rs.1 lakh.
(c)
Once a security is introduced for trading in the derivatives
segment, it will continue to be eligible for trading in derivatives
segment, even if the median quarter-sigma order size of the
security is less than Rs.5 lakh continuously.
(d)
For unlisted companies coming out with initial public offering, if
the net public offer is Rs.500 crore or more, then the exchanges
may consider introducing stock options and stock futures on such
stocks at the time of its listing in the cash market.
Correct answer: (c)
Ques:8 According to the Standard Pricing Models, what are the factors that
affect value of an option at a given point in time?
(a) Underlying Market Price
(b) Volatility (variability) of underlying instrument
(c) Time to Expiration
Correct answer: (d)
Ques:9 For which of the following derivative products/instruments trading
facilities on the F&O segment of NSE are not provided currently?
(a) Index options
(b) Individual stock futures
(c) Interest rate futures
(d) Currency Swaps.
Current answer: (d)
Ques:10 Which of the following order type/condition is not available in the F&O
trading system at NSE?
(a) Market If Touched (MIT)
(b) Day order
(c) Immediate or Cancel (IOC)
(d) Stop-Loss orders.
Correct answer: (a)
Ques:11 Mr. Paul has placed a stop loss buy order for the security XYZ Ltd, in
the F&O trading system. The following are the details of the order:
the trigger price is kept at Rs.1027.00 and the limit price is kept at
231
Rs.1030.00. This order will be released into the system in which of
the following scenarios:
(a) The market price of the security reaches or exceeds Rs.1027.00
(b) Only if the market price of the security reaches or exceeds
Rs.1030.00
(c) Only if the market price of the security falls below Rs.1027.00
(d) The market price of the security reaches or exceeds Rs.1024.00
Correct answer: (a)
Ques:12 Revenue securities Ltd., a trading member in F&O segment has
executed a client trade in options segment. Given the following
details of the trade, what is the maximum brokerage the trading
member can charge from the client for the above trade?
The Strike price of the contract is 250, Traded premium is 10 and
The traded quantity is 800.
(a) Rs.520 (b) Rs.200
(c) Rs.5000 (d) Rs.5200
Correct answer: (d)
Ques:13 Spot value of Nifty is 1240. An investor buys a one month Nifty 1255
call option for a premium of Rs. 7. The option is said to be
_________.
(a) in-the-money (b) at-the-money
(c) out-of-the-money (d) above-the money
Correct answer: (c)
Ques:14 A stock is current selling at Rs.70. The call option to buy the stock at
Rs. 65 costs Rs. 12. What is the time value of the option?
(a) Rs. 7 (b) Rs. 5
(c) Rs. 4 (d) Rs. 2
Correct answer: (a)
232
CHAPTER 6: REGULATORY
FRAMEWORK
This chapter deals with legislative and regulatory provisions relevant for
Securities Market in India.
Legislations
The five main legislations governing the securities market are:(a) the
Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act, 1956, preventing undesirable
transactions in securities by regulating the business of dealing in securities;
(b) the Companies Act, 1956, which is a uniform law relating to companies
throughout India; (c) the SEBI Act, 1992 for the protection of interests of
investors and for promoting development of and regulating the securities
market; (d) the Depositories Act, 1996 which provides for electronic
maintenance and transfer of ownership of dematerialised securities and (e)
the Prevention of Money Laundering Act, 2002 which prevents money
laundering and provides for confiscation of property derived from or involved
in money laundering.
Rules and Regulations
The Government has framed rules under the SC(R)A, SEBI Act and the
Depositories Act. SEBI has framed regulations under the SEBI Act and the
Depositories Act for registration and regulation of all market intermediaries,
for prevention of unfair trade practices, insider trading, etc. Under these Acts
,
Government and SEBI issue notifications, guidelines, and circulars, which
need to be complied with by market participants. The self-regulatory
organizations (SROs) like stock exchanges have also laid down their rules and
regulations for market participants.
Regulators
The regulators ensure that the market participants behave in a desired
manner so that the securities market continue to be a major source of finance
for corporates and government and the interest of investors are protected.
The responsibility for regulating the securities market is shared by
Department of Economic Affairs (DEA), Department of Company Affairs
(DCA), Reserve Bank of India (RBI), Securities and Exchange Board of India
(SEBI) and Securities Appellate Tribunal (SAT).
6.1 SECURITIES CONTRACTS (REGULATION) ACT, 1956
The Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act, 1956 [SC(R)A] provides for direct
and indirect control of virtually all aspects of securities trading and the
running of stock exchanges and aims to prevent undesirable transactions in
securities. It gives Central Government regulatory jurisdiction over (a) stock
233
exchanges through a process of recognition and continued supervision, (b)
contracts in securities, and (c) listing of securities on stock exchanges. All t
he
three are discussed subsequently in this section. The SC(R)A, 1956 was
enacted to prevent undesirable transactions in securities by regulating the
business of dealing therein and by providing for certain other matters
connected therewith. This is the principal Act, which governs the trading of
securities in India. As a condition of recognition, a stock exchange complies
with conditions prescribed by Central Government. Organised trading activity
in securities takes place on a recognised stock exchange.
Key Definitions
1.Recognised Stock Exchange means a stock exchange, which is for the
time being recognised by the Central Government under Section 4 of the
SC(R)A.
2. Stock Exchange means
(a) any body of individuals, whether incorporated or not, constituted
before corporatisation and demutualization under sections 4A and
4B, or
(b) a body corporate incorporated under the Companies Act, 1956 (1
of 1956) whether under a scheme of corporatisation and
demutualization or otherwise,
for the purpose of assisting, regulating or controlling the business
of buying, selling or dealing in securities.
3. Securities: As per Section 2(h), the term "securities" include(
i) shares, scrips, stocks, bonds, debentures, debenture stock or other
marketable securities of a like nature in or of any incorporated
company or other body corporate,
(ii) derivative,
(iii) units or any other instrument issued by any collective investment
scheme to the investors in such schemes,
(iv) Security receipts as defined in clause (zg) of section 2 of the
Securisation and Reconstruction of Financial Assets and
Enforcement of Security Interest Act 2002 (SARFAESI)
(v) units or any other such instrument issued to the investors under
any mutual fund scheme,
(vi) any certificate or instrument issued to an investor by any issuer
being a special purpose distinct entity which possesses any debt or
receivable, including mortgage debt, assigned to such entity, and
acknowledging beneficial interest of such investor in such debt or
receivable, including mortgage debt, as the case maybe.
(vii) government securities,
(viii) such other instruments as may be declared by the Central
Government to be securities, and
(ix) rights or interests in securities.
234
4. Derivatives: As per section 2(aa), Derivative includes-
A. a security derived from a debt instrument, share, loan whether secured
or unsecured, risk instrument or contract for differences or any other
form of security;
B. a contract which derives its value from the prices, or index of prices, of
underlying securities;
Further, Section 18A provides that notwithstanding anything contained in
any other law for the time being in force, contracts in derivative shall be
legal and valid if such contracts are (i) traded on a recognised stock
exchange; and (ii) settled on the clearing house of the recognised stock
exchange, in accordance with the rules and bye-laws of such stock
exchanges, in accordance with the rules and bye-laws of such stock
exchange.
5.
Spot delivery contract has been defined in Section 2(i) to mean a
contract which provides for(
a) actual delivery of securities and the payment of a price therefor either on
the same day as the date of the contract or on the next day, the actual
period taken for the despatch of the securities or the remittance of
money therefor through the post being excluded from the computation of
the period aforesaid if the parties to the contract do not reside in the
same town or locality;
(b) transfer of the securities by the depository from the account of a
beneficial owner to the account of another beneficial owner when such
securities are dealt with by a depository.
As mentioned earlier, the SC(R)A, 1956 deals with
1.
stock exchanges, through a process of recognition and continued
supervision,
2.
contracts & options in securities, and
3.
listing of securities on stock exchanges.
1. Recognition of stock exchanges
By virtue of the provisions of the Act, the business of dealing in securities
cannot be carried out without registration from SEBI. Any Stock Exchange
which is desirous of being recognised has to make an application under
Section 3 of the Act to SEBI, which is empowered to grant recognition and
prescribe conditions. This recognition can be withdrawn in the interest of the
trade or public.
Section 4A of the Act was added in the year 2004 for the purpose of
corporatisation and demutualisation of stock exchange. Under section 4A of
the Act, SEBI by notification in the official gazette may specify an appointed
date on and from which date all recognised stock exchanges have to
corporatise and demutualise their stock exchanges. Each of the Recognised
235
stock exchanges which have not already being corporatised and demutualised
by the appointed date are required to submit a scheme for corporatisation
and demutualization for SEBI s approval. After receiving the scheme SEBI
may conduct such enquiry and obtain such information as be may be required
by it and after satisfying that the scheme is in the interest of the trade and
also in the public interest, SEBI may approve the scheme.
SEBI is authorised to call for periodical returns from the recognised Stock
Exchanges and make enquiries in relation to their affairs. Every Stock
Exchange is obliged to furnish annual reports to SEBI. Recognised Stock
Exchanges are allowed to make bylaws for the regulation and control of
contracts but subject to the previous approval of SEBI and SEBI has the
power to amend the said bylaws. The Central Government and SEBI have the
power to supersede the governing body of any recognised stock exchange.
The Central Government and SEBI also have power to suspend the business
of the recognised stock exchange to meet any emergency as and when it
arises, by notifying in the official gazette.
2. Contracts and Options in Securities
Organised trading activity in securities takes place on a recognised stock
exchange. If the Central Government is satisfied, having regard to the nature
or the volume of transactions in securities in any State or States or area, that
it is necessary so to do, it may, by notification in the Official Gazette, decla
re
provisions of section 13 to apply to such State or States or area, and
thereupon every contract in such State or States or area which is entered into
after date of the notification otherwise than between members of a
recognised stock exchange or recognised in stock exchanges in such State or
States or area or through or with such member shall be illegal. The effect of
this provision clearly is that if a transaction in securities has to be validly
entered into, such a transaction has to be either between the members of a
recognised stock exchange or through a member of a Stock Exchange.
3. Listing of Securities
Where securities are listed on the application of any person in any recognised
stock exchange, such person shall comply with the conditions of the listing
agreement with that stock exchange (Section 21). Where a recognised stock
exchange acting in pursuance of any power given to it by its bye-laws,
refuses to list the securities of any company, the company shall be entitled to
be furnished with reasons for such refusal and the company may appeal to
Securities Appellate Tribunal (SAT) against such refusal.
Delisting of Securities
A recognised stock exchange may delist the securities of any listed companies
on such grounds as are prescribed under the Act. Before delisting any
236
company from its exchange, the recognised stock exchange has to give the
concerned company a reasonable opportunity of being heard and has to
record the reasons for delisting that concerned company. The concerned
company or any aggrieved investor may appeal to SAT against such delisting.
(Section 21A)
6.2 SECURITIES CONTRACTS (REGULATION) RULES,
1957
The Central Government has made Securities Contracts (Regulation) Rules,
1957, in the exercise of the powers conferred by section 30 of SC(R) Act.,
1956 for carrying out the purposes of that Act. The powers under the SC(R)R,
1957 are exercisable by SEBI.
Contracts between members of recognised stock exchange
All contracts between the members of a recognised stock exchange shall be
confirmed in writing and shall be enforced in accordance with the rules and
bye-laws of the stock exchange of which they are members (Rule 9).
Books of account and other documents to be maintained and
preserved by every member of a recognised stock exchange :
(i) Every member of a recognised stock exchange shall maintain and
preserve the following books of account and documents for a period of five
years:
(a) Register of transactions (Sauda book).
(b) Clients' ledger.
(c) General ledger.
(d) Journals.
(e) Cash book.
(f) Bank pass-book.
(g) Documents register showing full particulars of shares and securities
received and delivered.
(2) Every member of a recognised stock exchange shall maintain and
preserve the following documents for a period of two years:
(a) Member s contract books showing details of all contracts entered into
by him with other members of the same exchange or counter-foils or
duplicates of memos of confirmation issued to such other members.
(b) Counter-foils or duplicates of contract notes issued to clients.
(c) Written consent of clients in respect of contracts entered into as
principals.(Rule 15)
237
6.3 SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE BOARD OF INDIA ACT,
1992
Capital Issues (Control) Act, 1947
The Act had its origin during the war in 1943 when the objective was to
channel resources to support the war effort. It was retained with some
modifications as a means of controlling the raising of capital by companies
and to ensure that national resources were channelled into proper lines, i.e.,
for desirable purposes to serve goals and priorities of the government, and to
protect the interests of investors. Under the Act, any firm wishing to issue
securities had to obtain approval from the Central Government, which also
determined the amount, type and price of the issue.
As a part of the liberalisation process was the repeal of the Capital Issues
(Control) Act, 1947, in May 1992. With this, Government s control over issues
of capital, pricing of the issues, fixing of premia and rates of interest on
debentures etc. ceased, and the office which administered the Act was
abolished: the market was allowed to allocate resources to competing uses.
However, to ensure effective regulation of the market, SEBI Act, 1992 was
enacted to establish SEBI with statutory powers for:
(a) protecting the interests of investors in securities,
(b) promoting the development of the securities market, and
(c) regulating the securities market.
Its regulatory jurisdiction extends over companies listed on Stock Exchanges
and companies intending to get their securities listed on any recognized stock
exchange in the issuance of securities and transfer of securities, in addition t
o
all intermediaries and persons associated with securities market. SEBI can
specify the matters to be disclosed and the standards of disclosure required
for the protection of investors in respect of issues; can issue directions to al
l
intermediaries and other persons associated with the securities market in the
interest of investors or of orderly development of the securities market; and
can conduct enquiries, audits and inspection of all concerned and adjudicate
offences under the Act.
In short, it has been given necessary autonomy and authority to regulate and
develop an orderly securities market. All the intermediaries and persons
associated with securities market, viz., brokers and sub-brokers,
underwriters, merchant bankers, bankers to the issue, share transfer agents
and registrars to the issue, depositories, Participants, portfolio managers,
debentures trustees, foreign institutional investors, custodians, venture
capital funds, mutual funds, collective investments schemes, credit rating
agencies, etc., shall be registered with SEBI and shall be governed by the
SEBI Regulations pertaining to respective market intermediary.
238
Constitution of SEBI
The Central Government has constituted a Board by the name of SEBI under
Section 3 of SEBI Act. The head office of SEBI is in Mumbai. SEBI may
establish offices at other places in India.
SEBI consists of the following members, namely:
(a) a Chairman;
(b) two members from amongst the officials of the Ministry of the Central
Government dealing with Finance and administration of Companies Act,
1956;
(c) one member from amongst the officials of the Reserve Bank of India;
(d) five other members of whom at least three shall be whole time members
to be appointed by the Central Government.
The general superintendence, direction and management of the affairs of
SEBI vests in a Board of Members, which exercises all powers and do all acts
and things which may be exercised or done by SEBI.
The Chairman also have powers of general superintendence and direction of
the affairs of the Board and may also exercise all powers and do all acts and
things which may be exercised or done by the Board.
The Chairman and members referred to in (a) and (d) above shall be
appointed by the Central Government and the members referred to in (b) and
(c) shall be nominated by the Central Government and the Reserve Bank
respectively.
The Chairman and the other members are from amongst the persons of
ability, integrity and standing who have shown capacity in dealing with
problems relating to securities market or have special knowledge or
experience of law, finance, economics, accountancy, administration or in any
other discipline which, in the opinion of the Central Government, shall be
useful to SEBI.
Functions of SEBI
SEBI has been obligated to protect the interests of the investors in securities
and to promote and development of, and to regulate the securities market by
such measures as it thinks fit. The measures referred to therein may provide
for:
(a) regulating the business in stock exchanges and any other securities
markets;
(b) registering and regulating the working of stock brokers, sub-brokers,
share transfer agents, bankers to an issue, trustees of trust deeds,
registrars to an issue, merchant bankers, underwriters, portfolio
managers, investment advisers and such other intermediaries who may be
associated with securities markets in any manner;
239
(c) registering and regulating the working of the depositories, participants,
custodians of securities, foreign institutional investors, credit rating
agencies and such other intermediaries as SEBI may, by notification,
specify in this behalf;
(d) registering and regulating the working of venture capital funds and
collective investment schemes including mutual funds;
(e) promoting and regulating self-regulatory organisations;
(f) prohibiting fraudulent and unfair trade practices relating
to securities
markets;
(g) promoting investors' education and training of intermediaries of securities
markets;
(h) prohibiting insider trading in securities;
(i) regulating substantial acquisition of shares and take-over of companies;
(j) calling for information from, undertaking inspection, conducting inquiries
and audits of the stock exchanges, mutual funds, other persons associated
with the securities market, intermediaries and self-regulatory
organisations in the securities market;
(k) calling for information and record from any bank or any other authority or
board or corporation established or constituted by or under any Central,
State or Provincial Act in respect of any transaction in securities which is
under investigation or inquiry by the Board;
(l) performing such functions and exercising according to Securities Contracts
(Regulation) Act, 1956, as may be delegated to it by the Central
Government;
(m)
levying fees or other charges for carrying out the purpose of this
section;
(n) conducting research for the above purposes;
(o) calling from or furnishing to any such agencies, as may be specified by
SEBI, such information as may be considered necessary by it for the
efficient discharge of its functions;
(p) performing such other functions as may be prescribed.
SEBI may, for the protection of investors, (a) specify, by regulations for (i)
the matters relating to issue of capital, transfer of securities and other
matters incidental thereto; and (ii) the manner in which such matters, shall
be disclosed by the companies and (b) by general or special orders : (i)
prohibit any company from issuing of prospectus, any offer document, or
advertisement soliciting money from the public for the issue of securities, (ii)
specify the conditions subject to which the prospectus, such offer document
or advertisement, if not prohibited may be issued. (Section 11A).
SEBI may issue directions to any person or class of persons referred to in
section 12, or associated with the securities market or to any company in
respect of matters specified in section 11A. if it is in the interest of investo
rs,
or orderly development of securities market to prevent the affairs of any
intermediary or other persons referred to in section 12 being conducted in a
manner detrimental to the interests of investors or securities market to
240
secure the proper management of any such intermediary or person (Section
11B).
Registration of Intermediaries
The intermediaries and persons associated with securities market shall buy,
sell or deal in securities after obtaining a certificate of registration from SE
BI,
as required by Section 12:
1) Stock-broker,
2) Sub-broker,
3) Share transfer agent,
4) Banker to an issue,
5) Trustee of trust deed,
6) Registrar to an issue,
7) Merchant banker,
8) Underwriter,
9) Portfolio manager,
10) Investment adviser
11) Depository,
12) Participant
13) Custodian of securities,
14) Foreign institutional investor,
15) Credit rating agency or
16) Collective investment schemes,
17) Venture capital funds,
18) Mutual fund, and
19) Any other intermediary associated with the securities market
6.4 SEBI (STOCK BROKERS & SUB-BROKERS)

REGULATIONS, 1992
In terms of regulation 2(g), small investor' means any investor buying or
selling securities on a cash transaction for a market value not exceeding
rupees fifty thousand in aggregate on any day as shown in a contract note
issued by the stock-broker.
Registration of Stock Broker
A stock broker applies in the prescribed format for grant of a certificate
through the stock exchange or stock exchanges, as the case may be, of which
he is admitted as a me mber (Regulation 3). The stock exchange forwards the
application form to SEBI as early as possible as but not later than thirty days
from the date of its receipt.
241
SEBI takes into account for considering the grant of a certificate all matters
relating to buying, selling, or dealing in securities and in particular the
following, namely, whether the stock broker:
(a) is eligible to be admitted as a member of a stock exchange,
(b) has the necessary infrastructure like adequate office space, equipment
and man power to effectively discharge his activities,
(c) has any past experience in the business of buying, selling or dealing in
securities,
(d) is subjected to disciplinary proceedings under the rules, regulations and
bye-laws of a stock exchange with respect to his business as a stockbroker
involving either himself or any of his partners, directors or
employees, and
(e) is a fit and proper person.
SEBI on being satisfied that the stock-broker is eligible, grants a certificate
to
the stock-broker and sends intimation to that effect to the stock exchange or
stock exchanges, as the case may be. Where an application for grant of a
certificate does not fulfill the requirements, SEBI may reject the application
after giving a reasonable opportunity of being heard.
Fees by stock brokers
Every applicant eligible for grant of a certificate shall pay such fees and in
such manner as specified in Schedule III or schedule IIIA, as the case may
be.Provided that SEBI may on sufficient cause being shown permit the stockbroker
to pay such fees at any time before the expiry of six months from the
date for which such fees become due (Regulation 10). Where a stock-broker
fails to pay the fees, SEBI may suspend the registration certificate,
whereupon the stock- broker shall cease to buy, sell or deal in securities as a
stock-broker.
Appointment of Compliance Officer
Every stock broker shall appoint a compliance officer who shall be responsible
for monitoring the compliance of the Act, rules and regulations, notifications,
guidelines, instructions etc issued by SEBI or the Central Government and for
redressal of investors grievances. The compliance officer shall immediately
and independently report to SEBI any non-compliance observed by him
(Regulation 18A).
Code of conduct
The stock-broker holding a certificate at all times abides by the Code of
Conduct as given hereunder:
I. General
1.
Integrity: A stock-broker, shall maintain high standards of integrity,
promptitude and fairness in the conduct of all his business.
242
2.
Exercise of Due Skill and Care: A stock-broker, shall act with due skill,
care and diligence in the conduct of all his business.
3.
Manipulation: A stock-broker shall not indulge in manipulative, fraudulent
or deceptive transactions or schemes or spread rumours with a view to
distorting market equilibrium or making personal gains.
4.
Malpractices: A stock-broker shall not create false market either singly or
in concert with others or indulge in any act detrimental to the investors'
interest or which leads to interference with the fair and smo oth
functioning of the market. A stock-broker shall not involve himself in
excessive speculative business in the market beyond reasonable levels not
commensurate with his financial soundness.
5.
Compliance with Statutory Requirements: A stock-broker shall abide by all
the provisions of the Act and the rules, regulations issued by the
Government, SEBI and the stock exchange from time to time as may be
applicable to him.
II. Duty to the investor
1.
Execution of Orders: A stock-broker, in his dealings with the clients and
the general investing public, shall faithfully execute the orders for buying
and selling of securities at the best available market price and not refuse
to deal with a small investor merely on the ground of the volume of
business involved. A stock-broker shall promptly inform his client about
the execution or non-execution of an order, and make prompt payment in
respect of securities sold and arrange for prompt delivery of securities
purchased by clients.
2.
Issue of Contract Note: A stock-broker shall issue without delay to his
client or client of the sub-broker, as the case may be a contract note for
all transactions in the form specified by the stock exchange.
3.
Breach of Trust: A stock-broker shall not disclose or discuss with any
other person or make improper use of the details of personal investments
and other information of a confidential nature of the client which he comes
to know in his business relationship.
4.
Business and Commission:
(a) A stock-broker shall not encourage sales or purchases of securities
with the sole object of generating brokerage or commission.
(b) A stock-broker shall not furnish false or misleading quotations or give
any other false or misleading advice or information to the clients with a
view of inducing him to do business in particular securities and enabling
himself to earn brokerage or commission thereby.
5.
Business of Defaulting Clients: A stock-broker shall not deal or transact
business knowingly, directly or indirectly or execute an order for a client
who has failed to carry out his commitments in relation to securities with
another stock-broker.
6.
Fairness to Clients: A stock-broker, when dealing with a client, shall
disclose whether he is acting as a principal or as an agent and shall ensure
at the same time that no conflict of interest arises between him and the
243
client. In the event of a conflict of interest, he shall inform the client
accordingly and shall not seek to gain a direct or indirect personal
advantage from the situation and shall not consider clients' interest
inferior to his own.
7.
Investment Advice: A stock-broker shall not make a recommendation to
any client who might be expected to rely thereon to acquire, dispose of,
retain any securities unless he has reasonable grounds for believing that
the recommendation is suitable for such a client upon the basis of the
facts, if disclosed by such a client as to his own security holdings, financial
situation and objectives of such investment. The stock-broker should seek
such information from clients, wherever he feels it is appropriate to do so.
7A.Investment Advice in publicly accessible media:
(a) A stock broker or any of his employees shall not render, directly or
indirectly, any investment advice about any security in the publicly
accessible media, whether real -time or non real-time, unless a
disclosure of his interest including the interest of his dependent
family members and the employer including their long or short
position in the said security has been made, while rendering such
advice.
(b) In case, an employee of the stock broker is rendering such advice,
he shall also disclose the interest of his dependent family members
and the employer including their long or short position in the said
security, while rendering such advice.
8.
Competence of Stock Broker: A stock-broker should have adequately
trained staff and arrangements to render fair, prompt and competent
services to his clients.
III. Stock-brokers vis-a-vis other stock-brokers
1.
Conduct of Dealings: A stock-broker shall co-operate with the other
contracting party in comparing unmatched transactions. A stock-broker
shall not knowingly and willfully deliver documents which constitute bad
delivery and shall co-operate with other contracting parties for prompt
replacement of documents which are declared as bad delivery.
2.
Protection of Clients Interests: A stock-broker shall extend fullest cooperation
to other stock-brokers in protecting the interests of his clients
regarding their rights to dividends, bonus shares, right shares and any
other rights related to such securities.
3.
Transactions with Stock-Brokers: A stock-broker shall carry out his
transactions with other stock-brokers and shall comply with his obligations
in completing the settlement of transactions with them.
4.
Advertisement and Publicity: A stock-broker shall not advertise his
business publicly unless permitted by the stock exchange.
5.
Inducement of Clients: A stock-broker shall not resort to unfair means of
inducing clients from other stock-brokers.
6.
False or Misleading Returns: A stock-broker shall not neglect or fail or
refuse to submit the required returns and not make any false or
244
misleading statement on any returns required to be submitted to the
Board and the stock exchange.
IV. 1. A stock broker, shall enter into an agreement as specified by the Board
with his client.
2. A stock broker shall also enter into an agreement as specified by the
Board with the client of the sub-broker.
Registration of Sub-Broker
An application by a sub-broker for the grant of a certificate is made in the
prescribed format accompanied by a recommendation letter from a stockbroker
of a recognised stock exchange with whom he is to be affiliated along
with two references including one from his banker (Regulation 11A). The
application form is submitted to the stock exchange of which the stockbroker
with whom he is to be affiliated is a member.
The eligibility criteria for registration as a sub-broker are as follows:
(i) in the case of an individual:
(a) the applicant is not less than 21 years of age,
(b) the applicant has not been convicted of any offence involving fraud or
dishonesty,
(c) the applicant has atleast passed 12th standard equivalent examination
from an institution recognised by the Government, and
Provided that SEBI may relax the educational qualifications on merits
having regard to the applicant's experience.
(d) the applicant is a fit and proper person.
(ii) In the case of partnership firm or a body corporate the partners or
directors, as the case may be, shall comply with the following
requirements:
(a)
the applicant is not less than 21 years of age,
(b)
the applicant has not been convicted of any offence involving fraud
or dishonesty, and
(c)
the applicant has atleast passed 12th standard equivalent
examination from an institution recognised by the Government.
Provided that SEBI may relax the educational qualifications on
merits having regard to the applicant's experience.
The stock exchange on receipt of an application, verifies the information
contained therein and certifies that the applicant is eligible for registration.
The stock exchange forwards the application form of such applicants who
comply with all the requirements specified in the Regulations to SEBI as early
as possible, but not later than thirty days from the date of its receipt.
SEBI on being satisfied that the sub-broker is eligible, grants a certificate to
the sub-broker and sends intimation to that effect to the stock exchange or
245
stock exchanges as the case may be. SEBI grants a certificate of registration
to the appellant subject to the terms and conditions.
Where an application does not fulfill the requirements, SEBI may reject the
application after giving a reasonable opportunity of being heard.
The sub-broker shall
(a)
pay the fees as specified in Schedule III,
(b)
abide by the Code of Conduct specified in Schedule II,
(c)
enter into an agreement with the stock-broker for specifying the
scope of his authority and responsibilities.
(d)
comply with the rules, regulations and bye-laws of the stock
exchange.
(e)
not be affiliated to more than one stock broker of one stock
exchange.
Code of conduct
The sub-broker at all times abides by the Code of Conduct as given
hereunder:
I. General
1.
Integrity: A sub-broker, shall maintain high standards of integrity,
promptitude and fairness in the conduct of all investment business.
2.
Exercise of Due Skill and Care: A sub-broker, shall act with due skill,
care and diligence in the conduct of all investment business.
II. Duty to the Investor
1.
Execution of Orders: A sub-broker, in his dealings with the clients and
the general investing public, shall faithfully execute the orders for
buying and selling of securities at the best available market price. A
sub-broker shall promptly inform his client about the execution or non-
execution of an order.
2.
A sub-broker shall render necessary assistance to his client in
obtaining the contract note from the stock-broker.
3.
Breach of Trust: A sub-broker shall not disclose or discuss with any
other person or make improper use of the details of personal
investments and other information of a confidential nature of the client
which he comes to know in his business relationship.
4.
Business and Commission:
a) A sub-broker shall not encourage sales or purchases of securities
with the sole object of generating brokerage or commission.
b)
A sub-broker shall not furnish false or misleading quotations or
give any other false or misleading advice or information to the
clients with a view of inducing him to do business in particular
246
securities and enabling himself to earn brokerage or commission
thereby.
c)
A sub-broker shall not charge from his clients a commission
exceeding one and one-half of one percent of the value mentioned
in the respective sale or purchase notes.
5.
Business of Defaulting Clients: A sub-broker shall not deal or transact
business knowingly, directly or indirectly or execute an order for a
client who has failed to carry out his commitments in relation to
securities and is in default with another broker or sub-broker.
6.
Fairness to Clients: A sub-broker, when dealing with a client, shall
disclose that he is acting as an agent ensuring at the same time, that
no conflict of interest arises between him and the client. In the event
of a conflict of interest, he shall inform the client accordingly and shall
not seek to gain a direct or indirect personal advantage from the
situation and shall not consider clients' interest inferior to his own.
7.
Investment Advice: A sub-broker shall not make a recommendation to
any client who might be expected to rely thereon to acquire, dispose
of, retain any securities unless he has reasonable grounds for believing
that the recommendation is suitable for such a client upon the basis of
the facts, if disclosed by such a client as to his own security holdings,
financial situation and objectives of such investment. The sub-broker
should seek such information from clients, wherever they feel it is
appropriate to do so.
7A. Investment Advice in publicly accessible media
(a)
A sub-broker or any of his employees shall not render, directly
and indirectly any investment advice about any security in the
publicly accessible media, whether real-time or non-real-time,
unless a disclosure of his interest including his long or short
position in the said security has been made, while rendering
such advice.
(b)
In case, an employee of the sub-broker is rendering such
advice, he shall also disclose the interest of his dependent
family members and the employer including their long or short
position in the said security, while rendering such advice.
8.
Competence of Sub-broker: A sub-broker should have adequately
trained staff and arrangements to render fair, prompt and competent
services to his clients and continuous compliance with the regulatory
system.
III. Sub-Brokers vis-à-vis Stock Brokers
1.
Conduct of Dealings: A sub-broker shall co-operate with his broker in
comparing unmatched transactions. A sub-broker shall not knowingly
and willfully deliver documents, which constitute bad delivery. A sub-
broker shall co-operate with other contracting party for prompt
replacement of documents, which are declared as bad delivery.
247
2.
Protection of Clients Interests: A sub-broker shall extend fullest cooperation
to his stock-broker in protecting the interests of their clients
regarding their rights to dividends, right or bonus shares or any other
rights relatable to such securities.
3.
Transaction with Brokers: A sub-broker shall not fail to carry out his
stock broking transactions with his broker nor shall he fail to meet his
business liabilities or show negligence in completing the settlement of
transactions with them.
4.
Agreement between sub-broker, client of the sub-broker and main
broker: A sub-broker shall enter into a tripartite agreement with his
client and with the main stock broker specifying the scope of rights
and obligations of the stock broker, sub-broker and such client of the
sub-broker.
5.
Advertisement and Publicity: A sub-broker shall not advertise his
business publicly unless permitted by the stock exchange.
6.
Inducement of Clients: A sub-broker shall not resort to unfair means of
inducing clients from other brokers.
IV. Sub-brokers vis-a-vis Regulatory Authorities
1.
General Conduct: A sub-broker shall not indulge in dishonourable,
disgraceful or disorderly or improper conduct on the stock exchange
nor shall he willfully obstruct the business of the stock exchange. He
shall comply with the rules, bye-laws and regulations of the stock
exchange.
2.
Failure to give Information: A sub-broker shall not neglect or fail or
refuse to submit to SEBI or the stock exchange with which he is
registered, such books, special returns, correspondence, documents,
and papers or any part thereof as may be required.
3.
False or Misleading Returns: A sub-broker shall not neglect or fail or
refuse to submit the required returns and not make any false or
misleading statement on any returns required to be submitted to SEBI
or the stock exchanges.
4.
Manipulation: A sub-broker shall not indulge in manipulative,
fraudulent or deceptive transactions or schemes or spread rumours
with a view to distorting market equilibrium or making personal gains.
5.
Malpractices: A sub-broker shall not create false market either singly
or in concert with others or indulge in any act detrimental to the public
interest or which leads to interference with the fair and smooth
functions of the market mechanism of the stock exchanges. A sub-
broker shall not involve himself in excessive speculative business in
the market beyond reasonable levels not commensurate with his
financial soundness.
248
6.5 SEBI (PROHIBITION OF INSIDER TRADING)
REGULATIONS, 1992
Insider trading is prohibited and is considered an offence vide SEBI (Insider
Trading) Regulations, 1992.
The definitions of some of the important terms are given below :
Dealing in securities means an act of subscribing, buying, selling or
agreeing to subscribe, buy, sell or deal in any securities by any person either
as principal or agent.
Insider means any person who, is or was connected with the company or is
deemed to have been connected with the company, and who is reasonably
expected to have access to unpublished price sensitive information in respect
of securities of a company, or who has received or has had access to such
unpublished price sensitive information.
A connected person means any person who
(i)
is a director, as defined in clause (13) of section 2 of the Companies Act,
1956 of a company, or is deemed to be a director of that company by
virtue of sub-clause (10) of section 307 of that Act, or
(ii) occupies the position as an officer or an employee of the company or
holds a position involving a professional or business relationship between
himself and the company whether temporary or permanent and who may
reasonably be expected to have an access to unpublished price sensitive
information in relation to that company.
A person is deemed to be a connected person if such person
(i) is a company under the same management or group or any subsidiary

company thereof within the meaning of section (1B) of section 370, or
sub-section (11) of section 372, of the Companies Act, 1956 or sub-clause
(g) of section 2 of the Monopolies and Restrictive Trade Practices Act,
1969 as the case may be; or
(ii) is an intermediary as specified in section 12 of SEBI Act, 1992,
Investment company, Trustee Company, Asset Management Company or
an employee or director thereof or an official of a stock exchange or of
clearing house or corporation;
(iii) is a merchant banker, share transfer agent, registrar to an issue,
debenture trustee, broker, portfolio manager, Investment Advisor, sub-
broker, Investment Company or an employee thereof, or, is a member of
the Board of Trustees of a mutual fund or a member of the Board of
Directors of the Asset Management Company of a mutual fund or is an
employee thereof who have a fiduciary relationship with the company;
(iv)is a member of the Board of Directors, or an employee, of a public
financial institution as defined in Section 4A of the Companies Act, 1956;
(v) is an official or an employee of a self regulatory organisation recognised o
r
authorised by the Board of a regulatory body;
249
(vi) is a relative of any of the aforementioned persons;
(vii) is a banker of the company.
(viii) Relatives of the connected person; or
(ix)
is a concern, firm, trust, Hindu Undivided Family, company or
association of persons wherein any of the connected persons mentioned in
sub-clause (i) of clause (c) of this regulation or any of the persons
mentioned in sub-clauses (vi), (vii) or (viii) of this clause have more than
10% of the holding or interest
Price sensitive information" means any information which relates directly
or indirectly to a company and which if published is likely to materially affect
the price of securities of that company.
The following shall be deemed to be price sensitive information:
(i) periodical financial results of the company;

(ii) intended declaration of dividends (both interim and final);
(iii) issue of securities or buy-back of securities;
(iv) any major expansion plans or execution of new projects;
(v) amalgamation, mergers or takeovers;
(vi) disposal of the whole or substantial part of the undertaking;
(vii) any significant changes in policies, plans or operations of the company.
Unpublished means information which is not published by the company or its
agents and is not specific in nature.
Speculative reports in print or electronic media shall not be considered as
published information.
Prohibition on dealing, communicating or counseling (Regulation 3)
No insider shall
either on his own behalf or on behalf of any other person, deal in

securities of a company listed on any stock exchange when in possession
of any unpublished price sensitive information;
communicate, counsel or procure, directly or indirectly, any unpublished
price sensitive information to any person who while in possession of such
unpublished price sensitive information shall not deal in securities;
Provided that nothing contained above shall be applicable to any
communication required in the ordinary course of business or profession
or employment or under any law.
Regulation 3A
No company shall deal in the securities of another company or associate of
that other company while in possession of any unpublished price sensitive
information.
250
Violation of provisions relating to insider trading
Any insider, who deals in securities in contravention of the provisions of
regulation 3 or 3A shall be guilty of insider trading (regulation 4).
If SEBI suspects any person of having violated the provisions of insider
regulation, it may make inquiries with such person or with the stock
exchanges, mutual funds, other persons associated with the securities
market, intermediaries and self-regulatory organisation in the securities
market to form a prima facie opinion as to whether there is any violation of
insider regulations.
Where SEBI forms a prima facie opinion that it is necessary to investigate and
inspect the books of accounts, either documents and records of an insider or
the stock exchanges, mutual funds, other persons associated with the
securities market, intermediaries and self-regulatory organisation in the
securities market, it may appoint an investigating authority for the following
purpose
i) to investigate into the complaints received from investors,
intermediaries or any other person on any matter having a bearing on
the allegations of insider trading; and
ii) to investigate sou moto upon its own knowledge or information in its
possession to protect the interest of investors in securities against
breach of insider trading regulations.
A reasonable notice has to be given to the insider before undertaking any
investigation. Such notice is not required to be given if SEBI is satisfied that
it
is in the public interest or in the interest of the investors. During such
investigation and inspection of the books of accounts, the insider or the stock
exchanges, mutual funds, other persons associated with the securities
market, intermediaries and self-regulatory organisation in the securities
market shall be bound to discharge their obligations as provided in the
regulations. The investigating authority has to submit his report to SEBI
within reasonable time.
SEBI after considering the report shall communicate its findings to the
suspected person and seek a reply from such person. Such suspected person
shall reply to the findings within 21 days to SEBI. After receipt of such reply,
SEBI may take such measures to safeguard and protect the interest of
investors, securities market and for due compliance with the insider trading
regulations.
SEBI also has powers to appoint an auditor to investigate into the books of
accounts or the affairs of the insider or the stock exchanges, mutual funds,
251
other persons associated with the securities market, intermediaries and self-
regulatory organisation in the securities market.
To protect the interest of investor and securities market and for due
compliance of the insider trading regulations, SEBI may issue order as per
Regulation 11 in accordance with SEBI(Prohibition of Insider Trading)
Regulations, 1992 , or initiate criminal prosecution under Section 24 or any
action under Chapter VIA of the Securities and Exchange Board of India Act,
1992.
Policy on disclosures and internal procedure for prevention of insider
trading: Chapter IV of the Regulations deals with policy on disclosures and
internal procedure for prevention of insider trading. Accordingly, all listed
companies and organisations associated with securities markets including:
(a) the intermediaries as mentioned in section 12 of the Act, asset
management company and trustees of mutual funds;
(b) the self regulatory organisations recognised or authorised by the Board;
(c) the recognised stock exchanges and clearing house or corporations;
(d) the public financial institutions as defined in Section 4A of the Companies
Act, 1956; and
(e) the professional firms such as auditors, accountancy firms, law firms,
analysts, consultants, etc., assisting or advising listed companies, shall frame
a code of internal procedures and conduct as near there to the Model Code
specified in Schedule I of these Regulations.
Disclosures
Disclosure of interest or holding by directors and officers and substantial
shareholders in listed companies
Initial Disclosure:
(1) Any person who holds more than 5% shares or voting rights in any listed
company shall disclose to the company in Form A, the number of shares or
voting rights held by such person, on becoming such holder, within 4 working
days of:(
a) the receipt of intimation of allotment of shares; or
(b) the acquisition of shares or voting rights, as the case may be.
(2) Any person who is a director or officer of a listed company, shall disclose
to the company in Form B, the number of shares or voting rights held by such
person, within 4 working days of becoming a director or officer of the
company.
252
Continual Disclosure
(3) Any person who holds more than 5% shares or voting rights in any listed
company shall disclose to the company in Form C the number of shares or
voting rights held and change in shareholding or voting rights, even if such
change results in shareholding falling below 5%, if there has been change in
such holdings from the last disclosure made under sub-regulation (1) or
under this sub-regulation; and such change exceeds 2% of total shareholding
or voting rights in the company.
(4) Any person who is a director or officer of a listed company, shall disclose
to the company in Form D, the total number of shares or voting rights held
and change in shareholding or voting rights, if there has been a change in
such holdings from the last disclosure made under sub-regulation (2) or
under this sub-regulation, and the change exceeds Rupees 5 lakh in value
or 25000 shares or 1% of total shareholding or voting rights, whichever is
lower.
(5) The disclosure mentioned in sub-regulations (3) and (4) shall be made
within 4 working days of :
(a) the receipt of intimation of allotment of shares, or
(b) the acquisition or sale of shares or voting rights, as the case may be.
Disclosure by company to stock exchanges
(6) Every listed company, within five days of receipt, shall disclose to all sto
ck
exchanges on which the company is listed, the information received under
sub-regulations (1), (2),(3) and (4) of Regulation 13.
Code of Ethics
SEBI has advised stock exchanges to adopt the Code of Ethics for their
directories and functionaries with effect from 31st May 2001. This is aimed at
improving the professional and ethical standards in the functioning of
exchanges thereby creating better investors confidence in the integrity of the
market.
6.6 SEBI (PROHIBITION OF FRAUDULENT AND UNFAIR
TRADE PRACTICES RELATING TO SECURITIES
MARKETS) REGULATIONS, 2003
The SEBI (Prohibition of Fraudulent and Unfair Trade Practices relating to the
Securities Market) Regulations, 2003 enable SEBI to investigate into cases of
market manipulation and fraudulent and unfair trade practices. The
253
regulations specifically prohibit market manipulation, misleading statements
to induce sale or purchase of securities, unfair trade practices relating to
securities. SEBI can conduct investigation, suo moto or upon information
received by it, by an investigating officer in respect of conduct and affairs of
any person dealing, buying/selling/dealing in securities. Based on the report
of the investigating officer, SEBI can initiate action for suspension or
cancellation of registration of an intermediary.
The term fraud has been defined by Regulation 2(1)(c). Fraud includes any
act, expression, omission or concealment committed whether in a deceitful
manner or not by a person or by any other person or his agent while dealing
in securities in order to induce another person with his connivance or his
agent to deal in securities, whether or not there is any wrongful gain or
avoidance of any loss, and shall also include
(a) a knowing misrepresentation of the truth or concealment of material fact

in order that another person may act to his detriment;
(b) the suggestion as to a fact which is not true by one who does not believe
it to be true;
(c) an active concealment of a fact by one having knowledge or belief of the
fact;
(d) a promise made without any intention of performing it;
(e) a representation made in a reckless and careless manner whether it be
true or false;
(f) any such act or omission as any other law specifically declares to be
fraudulent;
(g) deceptive behaviour by a person depriving another of informed consent or
full participation;
(h) a false statement made without reasonable ground for believing to be
true;
(i) the act of an issuer of securities giving out misinformation that affects th
e
market price of the security, resulting in investors being effectively misled
even though they did not rely on the statement itself or anything derived
from it other than the market price.
And fraudulent shall be construed accordingly :
Nothing contained in this clause shall apply to any general comments made in
good faith in regard to
(a) the economic policy of the Government;
(b) the economic situation of the country;
(c) trends in the securities market;
(d) any other matter of a like nature;
Whether such comments are made in public or in private.
254
The regulation prohibits:
(a) dealings in securities in a fraudulent manner,
(b) market manipulation,
(c) misleading statements to induce sale or purchase of securities, and
(d) unfair trade practice relating to securities
Prohibition of certain dealings in securities
No person shall directly or indirectly
(a) buy, sell or otherwise deal in securities in a fraudulent manner
(b) use or employ, in connection with issue, purchase or sale of any security
listed or proposed to be listed in a recognised stock exchange, any
manipulative or deceptive device or contrivance in contravention of the
provisions of the Act or the rules or the regulations made thereunder.
(c) employ any device, scheme or artifice to degraud in connection with
dealing in or issue of securities which are listed or proposed to be listed on
a recognised stock exchange;
(d) engage in any act, practice, course of business which operates or would
operate as fraud or deceit upon any person in connection with any dealing
in or issue of securities which are listed or proposed to be listed on a
recognised stock exchange in contravention of the act, rules and
regulations. (Regulation 3).
Prohibition against Manipulative, fraudulent and unfair trade
practices
Regulation 4 provides that no person shall indulge in a fraudulent or an unfair
trade practice in securities.
Further any dealing in securities shall be deemed to be fraudulent or an
unfair trade practice if it involves fraud and may include all or any of the
following :
(i) indulging in an act which creates false or misleading appearance of trading

in the securities market.
(ii) dealing in a security not intended to effect transfer of beneficial ownersh
ip
but intended to operate only as a device to inflate, depress or cause
fluctuations in the price of such security for wrongful gain or avoidance of
loss.
(iii) advancing or agreeing to advance any money to any person thereby
inducing any other person to offer to buy any security in any issue only with
the intention of securing the minimum subscription to such issue.
(iv) paying, offering or agreeing to pay or offer, directly or indirectly, to an
y
person any money or money s worth for inducing such person for dealing in
any security with the object of inflating, depressing, maintaining or causing
fluctuation in the price of such security.
(v) any act or omission amounting to manipulation of the price of a security.
255
(vi) publishing or causing to publish or reporting or causing to report by a
person dealing in securities any information which is not true or which he
does not believe to be true prior to or in the course of dealing in securities.
(vii) entering into a trasaction in securities without intention of performing i
t
or without intention of change in ownership of such security.
(viii) selling, dealing or pledging of stolen or counterfeit security whether in
physical or dematerialized form.
(ix) an intermediary promising a certain price in respect of buying or selling o
f
a security to a client and waiting till a discrepancy arises in the price of suc
h
security and retaining the difference in prices as profit for himself.
(x) an intermediary providing his clients with such information relating to a
security as cannot be verified by the clients before their dealing in such
security.
(xi) an advertisement that is misleading or that contains information in a
distorted manner and which may influence the decision of the investors.
(xii) an intermediary reporting trading transactions to his clients entered into
on their behalf in an inflated manner in order to increase his commission and
brokerage.
(xiii) an intermediary not disclosing to his client transactions entered into on
his behalf including taking an option position.
(xiv) circular transactions in respect of a security entered into between
intermediaries in order to increase commission to provide a false appearance
of trading in such security or to inflate, depress or cause fluctuations in the
price of such security.
(xv) encouraging the clients by an intermediary to deal in securities solely
with the object of enhancing his brokerage or commission.
(xvi) an intermediary predating or otherwise falsifying records such as
contract notes.
(xvii) an intermediary buying or selling securities in advance of a substantial
client order or whereby a futures or option position is taken about an
impending transaction in the same or related futures or options contract.
(xviii) planting false or misleading news which may induce sale or purchase of
securities.
6.7 THE DEPOSITORIES ACT, 1996
The Depositories Act, 1996 was enacted to provide for regulation of
depositories in securities and for matters connected therewith or incidental
thereto. It came into force from 20th September, 1995.
The terms used in the Act are defined as under:
(1) "Beneficial owner" means a person whose name is recorded as such
with a depository.
(2)
"Depository" means a company, formed and registered under the
Companies Act, 1956 and which has been granted a certificate of
registration under sub-section (1A) of section 12 SEBI Act, 1992.
256
(3) "Issuer" means any person making an issue of securities.
(4) "Participant" means a person registered as such under sub-section (1A)
of section 12 of SEBI Act, 1992.
(5) "Registered owner" means a depository whose name is entered as such
in the register of the issuer.
Agreement between depository and participant: A depository shall enter
into an agreement in the specified format with one or more participants as its
agent.
Services of depository: Any person, through a participant, may enter into
an agreement, in such form as may be specified by the bye-laws, with any
depository for availing its services.
Surrender of certificate of security: Any person who has entered into an
agreement with a depository shall surrender the certificate of security, for
which he seeks to avail the services of a depository, to the issuer in such
manner as may be specified by the regulations. The issuer, on receipt of
certificate of security, shall cancel the certificate of security and substitute
in
its records the name of the depository as a registered owner in respect of that
security and inform the depository accordingly. A depository shall, on receipt
of information enter the name of the person in its records, as the beneficial
owner.
Registration of transfer of securities with depository: Every depository
shall, on receipt of intimation from a participant, register the transfer of
security in the name of the transferee. If a beneficial owner or a transferee of
any security seeks to have custody of such security, the depository shall
inform the issuer accordingly.
Options to receive security certificate or hold securities with
depository: Every person subscribing to securities offered by an issuer shall
have the option either to receive the security certificates or hold securities
with a depository. Where a person opts to hold a security with a depository,
the issuer shall intimate such depository the details of allotment of the
security, and on receipt of such information the depository shall enter in its
records the name of the allottee as the beneficial owner of that security.
Securities in depositories to be in fungible form: All securities held by a
depository shall be dematerialised and shall be in a fungible form.
Rights of depositories and beneficial owner: A depository shall be
deemed to be the registered owner for the purposes of effecting transfer of
ownership of security on behalf of a beneficial owner. The depository as a
registered owner shall not have any voting rights or any other rights in
respect of securities held by it. The beneficial owner shall be entitled to all
the
257
rights and benefits and be subjected to all the liabilities in respect of his
securities held by a depository.
Pledge or hypothecation of securities held in a depository: A beneficial
owner may with the previous approval of the depository create a pledge or
hypothecation in respect of a security owned by him through a depository.
Every beneficial owner shall give intimation of such pledge or hypothecation
to the depository and such depository shall thereupon make entries in its
records accordingly. Any entry in the records of a depository shall be evidence
of a pledge or hypothecation.
Furnishing of information and records by depository and issuer: Every
depository shall furnish to the issuer information about the transfer of
securities in the name of beneficial owners at such intervals and in such
manner as may be specified by the bye-laws. Every issuer shall make
available to the depository copies of the relevant records in respect of
securities held by such depository.
Option to opt out in respect of any security: If a beneficial owner seeks
to opt out of a depository in respect of any security he shall inform the
depository accordingly. The depository shall on receipt of intimation make
appropriate entries in its records and shall inform the issuer. Every issuer
shall, within thirty days of the receipt of intimation from the depository and
on fulfillment of such conditions and on payment of such fees as may be
specified by the regulations, issue the certificate of securities to the benefic
ial
owner or the transferee, as the case may be.
Depository to indemnify loss in certain cases: Any loss caused to the
beneficial owner due to the negligence of the depository or the participant,
the depository shall indemnify such beneficial owner. Where the loss due to
the negligence of the participant is indemnified by the depository, the
depository shall have the right to recover the same from such participant.
Securities not liable to stamp duty
As per Section 8-A of Indian Stamp Act, 1899:
(a)
an issuer, by the issue of securities to one or more depositories shall, in
respect of such issue, be chargeable with duty on the total amount of
security issued by it and such securities need not be stamped;
(b)
where an issuer issues certificate of security under sub-section (3) of
Section 14 of the Depositories Act, 1996, on such certificate duty shall
be payable as is payable on the issue of duplicate certificate under the
Indian Stamp Act, 1899;
(c)
transfer of registered ownership of securities from a person to a
depository or from a depository to a beneficial owner shall not be liable
to any stamp duty;
258
(d)
the transfer of beneficial ownership of shares, such securities dealt with
by depository shall not be liable to duty under Article 62 of Schedule I of
the Indian Stamp Act, 1899;
(e)
transfer of beneficial ownership of units, such units being units of mutual
fund including units of the Unit Trust of India, dealt with by a depository
shall not be liable to duty under Article 62 of Schedule I of the Indian
Stamp Act, 1899;
6.8 INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872
Contract
According to section 2(h) of the Indian Contract Act, 1872, a contract is an
agreement enforceable by law. Therefore, there has to be an agreement to
create a contract and secondly, it has to satisfy certain requirements
mentioned in section 10 of the Act, i.e., the agreement has to be between
parties competent to contract, with their free consent, for a lawful object and
with lawful consideration, and it should not have been expressly declared as
void agreement.
Standard Form Contracts
With an enormous increase in commercial transactions, the concept of
Standard Form Contracts has come into existence. Various business
organisations like insurance companies, airways, securities market regulator,
other businessman etc. generally get the terms of the contract printed on a
standard form and the other side is simply required to agree to the same, or
sometimes to sign in token of his having agreed to the terms of the contract
so drafted. A standard form contract is a pre-established record of legal terms
regularly used by a business entity or firm in transactions with customers.
The record specifies the legal terms governing the relationship between the
firm and another party. The firm requires the other party to accept the
record without amendment and without expecting the other party to know or
understand its terms. A Standard Form Contract is effective upon acceptance.
Agency contract
An agent is a person employed to do any act for another or to represent
another in dealings with third persons, as per section 182 of the Indian
Contract Act, 1872. The person for whom such act is done, or who is so
represented, is called the Principal. Principal is bound by the acts done by an
agent or the contracts entered into by him on behalf of the principal in the
same manner, as if the acts had been done or the contracts had been entered
into by the principal himself, in person.
259
An agent has a dual capacity: one, he serves as a connecting link between his
principal and the third person, and second, he can have a contractual
relationship with his principal.
An agent, having an authority to do an act, has authority to do every lawful
thing which is necessary in order to do such act. An agent having authority to
carry on a business, has authority to do every lawful thing necessary for the
purpose, or usually done in the course, of conducting such business.
Sub-agent
A sub-agent is a person employed by, and acting under the control of, the
original agent in the business of the agency. Though the general rule is
against delegation of authority by an agent or the appointment of a subagent,
there could be such an appointment in exceptional situations
recognised by law. Thus, when any act does not need personal performance
by the agent himself, or the principal agrees to the appointment of a subagent,
or the ordinary custom of trade permits the same, or the nature of the
business of agency so warrants, nature of the agency so warrants, a subagent
may be validly appointed by an agent.
When a sub-agent has been properly appointed the position of various parties
is as under:
(a) The principal is, so far as regards third persons, represented by the subage
nt,
and is bound by and responsible for his acts, as if he were an agent
originally appointed by the principal.
(b) The agent is responsible to the principal for the acts of the sub-agent.
(c) The sub-agent is responsible for his acts to the agent, but not to the
principal except in case of fraud or willful wrong.
6.9 THE COMPANIES ACT, 1956
There are two types of Companies, viz., Private and Public.
Private company means a company which has a minimum paid-up capital of
one lakh rupees or such higher paid-up as may be prescribed and by its
articles:
(a) restricts the right to transfer its shares, if any;
(b) limits the number of its members to fifty;
(c) prohibits any invitation to the public to subscribe for any shares in or
debentures of the company;
(d) prohibits any invitation or acceptance of deposits from persons other
than its members, directors or their relatives
Public company means a company which
260
(a) is not a private company;
(b) has a minimum paid-up capital of five lakh rupees or such higher paid-
up capital, as may be prescribed;
(c) is a private company which is a subsidiary of a company which is not a
private company.
The minimum number of persons required to form a public company is seven
and the minimum number of persons required to form a private company is
two.
Shares
The shares or debentures or other interest of any member in a company shall
be moveable property, transferable in the manner provided by the articles of
the company (section82). A certificate, under common seal of the company,
specifying any shares held by any member shall be prima facie evidence of
the title of the member to such shares (section 84).
Buy-back of securities (Section 77A)
A company may purchase its own shares or other specified securities out of:
(a) free reserves; or
(b) the securities premium account; or
(c) the proceeds of any shares of other specified securities.
Conditions to be satisfied for buy-back
The following conditions must be satisfied by the company before buying-back
its own shares or other specified securities:
(i)
the buy-back must be authorised by its articles;
(ii)
a special resolution shall be passed in general meeting of the company
authorizing buy-back;
(iii)
the buy-back in any financial year shall be equal to or less than 25% of
the total paid-up capital and free reserves of the company in that
financial year
(iv)
the ratio of debt owed by the company is not more than twice the capital
and its free reserves after such buy-back
(v)
all the shares or other specified securities for buy-back are fully paid-up;
(vi)
the buy-back of listed securities is in accordance with SEBI Regulations;
(vii) the buy-back of un-listed securities is in accordance with guidelines
prescribed by Central Government.
Every buy-back shall be completed within twelve months from the date of
passing the special resolution or a resolution passed by the Board.
261
Share Capital
According to section 86, the share capital of a company limited by shares
formed after the commencement of this Act, or issued after such
commencement, shall be of two kinds only, namely:
a) equity share capital with voting rights; or with differential rights as to
dividend, voting or otherwise, and
b) preference share capital.
As per section 85, preference share capital means, with reference to any
company limited by shares, whether formed before or after the
commencement of this Act, that part of the share capital of the company
which fulfils both the following requirements, namely:
a) that as respects dividends, it carries or will carry a preferential right to
be
paid a fixed amount or an amount calculated at a fixed rate, which may be
either free of or subject to income tax, and
b) that as respects capital, it carries or will carry, on a winding-up or
repayment of capital, a preferential right to be repaid the amount of the
capital paid-up or deemed to have been paid-up, whether or not there is a
preferential right to the payment of either or both of the following
amounts, namely:
(i) any money remaining unpaid, in respect of the amounts specified in
clause (a), up to the date of the winding-up or repayment of capital,
and
(ii) any fixed premium or premium on any fixed scale, specified in the
memorandum or articles of the company.
Equity share capital means with reference to any such company, all share
capital which is not preference share capital.
Every public listed company, making initial public offer of any security for a
sum of rupees of ten crores or more, shall issue the same only in
dematerialized form by complying with the requisite provisions of the
Depositories Act, 1996 and the regulations made thereunder.
No allotment shall be made of any shares in or debentures of a company in
pursuance of a prospectus issued generally, and no proceedings shall be
taken on applications made in pursuance of a prospectus so issued, until the
beginning of the fifth day after that on which the prospectus is first so issued
or such later time, if any, as may be specified in the prospectus (section 72).
Every company intending to offer shares or debentures to the public for
subscription by the issue of a prospectus shall, before such issue, make an
application to one or more recognised stock exchanges for permission for the
shares or debentures intending to be so offered to be dealt with in the stock
exchange or each such stock exchange (section 73).
262
Transfer of shares (Section 108)
A company shall register a transfer of shares in, or debentures of, the
company, if a proper instrument of transfer duly stamped and executed by or
on behalf of the transferor and by or on behalf of the transferee and
specifying the name, address and occupation, if any, of the transferee, has
been delivered to the company along with the certificate relating to the
shares or debentures, or if no such certificate is in existence, along with the
letter of allotment of the shares or debentures.
Section 108, however, does not apply to transfer of securities affected by the
transferor and the transferee both of whom are entered as beneficial owners
in the records of a depository.
As per section 111A, the shares or debentures and any interest therein of a
public limited company are freely transferable.
Annual Return (Sections 159 & 160)
Every Company shall within sixty days from the day on which the Annual
General Meeting is held, prepare and file Annual Return with Registrar of
Companies.
Annual General Meeting (Section 166)
Every company shall in each year hold in addition to any other meetings a
general meeting as its annual general meeting and shall specify the meeting
as such in the notices calling it. Every AGM shall be called for a time during
business hours, on a day that is not a public holiday, and shall be held either
at the registered office of the company or at some other place within the city,
town or village in which the registered office of the company is situated. The
annual general meeting should be held on the earliest of the three relevant
dates as prescribed under section 166 together with section 210:
a) 15 months from the previous annual general meeting;

b) last day of the calendar year.
c) 6 months from the close of the financial year,
A general meeting of a company may be called by giving at least twenty-one
days notice in writing.
Dividend (Section 205)
Dividend shall be declared or paid by a company for any financial year
(a) out of the profits of the company for that year arrived at after providing
for depreciation in accordance with the provisions of section 205 (2) of
the Act, or
263
(b) out of the profits of the company for any previous financial year or years
arrived at after providing for depreciation in accordance with those
provisions and remaining undistributed, or
(c) out of both (a and b above), or
(d) out
of moneys provided by the Central Government or a State
Government for the payment of dividend in pursuance of a guarantee
given by that Government.
The amount of dividend shall be deposited in a separate bank account within
five days from the date of declaration of dividend. The dividend shall be paid
within thirty days from the date of its declaration. (section 205A)
Investor Education and Protection Fund (Section 205C)
The Central Government notified the establishment of a Fund called the
Investor Education and Protection Fund. The fund shall be credited with:
a) amounts in the unpaid dividend accounts of companies,
b) application moneys received by companies for allotment of any
securities and due for refund,
c) matured deposits with companies,
d) matured debentures with companies,
e) the interest accrued on the amounts referred to above (a to d),
f) grants and donations given to the Fund by the Central Government,
State Governments, companies or any other institutions for the
purposes of the Fund; and
g) the interest or other income received out of the investments made
from the Fund: Provided that no such amounts referred to in clauses
(a) to (d) shall form part of the Fund unless such amounts have
remained unclaimed and unpaid for a period of seven years from the
date they became due for payment.
The Investor Education and Protection Fund shall be utilised for promotion of
awareness amongst the investors and for the protection of the interests of
investors in accordance with such rules as may be prescribed.
6.10 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES ACT 2006
With a view to consolidating and amending the law relating to the
Government Securities and its management by the Reserve Bank of India, the
Parliament had enacted the Government Securities Act, 2006. The Act
received the presidential assent on August 30, 2006.
The Government Securities Act also provides that RBI may make regulations
to carry out the purposes of the Act. Government Securities Regulations,
2007 have been made by the Reserve Bank of India to carry out the purposes
of the Government Securities Act, 2006.
264
The Government Securities Act, 2006 and Government Securities Regulations,
2007 have come into force with effect from December 1, 2007. The
Government Securities Act applies to Government securities created and
issued by the Central and the State Government.
The new Act and Regulations would facilitate widening and deepening of the
Government Securities market and its more effective regulation by the
Reserve Bank in various ways such as:
(i)
Stripping or reconstitution of Government securities
(ii)
Legal recognition of beneficial ownership of the investors in
Government Securities through the Constituents Subsidiary
General Ledger (CSGL).
(iii)
Statutory backing for the Reserve Bank's power to debar
Subsidiary General Ledger (SGL) account holders from trading,
either temporarily or permanently, for misuse of SGL account
facility;
(iv)
Facility of pledge or hypothecation or lien of Government
securities for availing of loan;
(v)
Extension of nomination facility to hold the securities or receive
the amount thereof in the event of death of the holder;
(vi)
Recognition of title to Government security of the deceased
holder on the basis of documents other than succession
certificate such as will executed by the deceased holder,
registered deed of family settlement, gift deed, deed of
partition, etc., as prescribed by the Reserve Bank of India.
(vii)
Recognition of mother as the guardian of the minor for the
purpose of holding Government Securities;
(viii)
Statutory powers to the Reserve Bank to call for information,
cause inspection and issue directions in relation to Government
securities.
Every Regulation made by the Reserve Bank of India are to be approved by
the Parliament.
GOVERNMENT SECURITIES ACT 2006
Government security means a security created and issued by the
Government for the purpose of raising a public loan or for any other purpose
as may be notified by the Government in the Official Gazette.
A Government security may be issued in the form of a
(i) a Government promissory note,

(ii) a bearer bond payable to bearer,
(iii) a stock or
265
(iv) a bond held in a bond ledger account.
A stock means a Government security (i) registered in the books of the RBI
for which a stock certificate is issued; or (ii) held at the credit of the holde
r in
the subsidiary general ledger account including the constituents subsidiary
general ledger account maintained in the books of the RBI, and transferable
by registration in the books of the RBI.
A transfer of a government security shall be valid only if it purports to convey
the full title to the security. The transfer of the Government securities shall
be
made in such form and in such manner as may be prescribed.
GOVERNMENT SECURITIES REGULATIONS, 2007
Government Securities Regulations, 2007 have been made by the Reserve
Bank of India to carry out the purposes of the Government Securities Act.
The Government Securities Regulations, 2007 provides for transfer of
Government securities held in different forms. Government security held in
the form of Government Promissory Notes is transferable by endorsement
and delivery. A bearer bond is transferable by delivery and the person in
possession of the bond shall be deemed to be the holder of the bond.
Government securities held in the form of Stock Certificate , Subsidiary
General Ledger account including a constituent Subsidiary General Ledger
Account ) & Bond Ledger Account are transferable, before maturity, by
execution of forms -III, IV & V respectively appended to the Government
Securities Regulations. Government securities held in subsidiary general
ledger account including a constituents subsidiary general ledger account or
bond ledger account, shall also be transferable by execution of a deed in an
electronic form under digital signature.
A person unable to write, execute or endorse a document, may apply to the
Executive Magistrate to execute the document or make endorsement on his
behalf after producing sufficient documentary evidence about his identity and
satisfying the Executive Magistrate that he has understood the implications of
such execution or endorsement.
6.11 INCOME TAX ACT, 1961
The Income-tax Act, 1961 has been enacted to consolidate and amend the
law relating to income-tax. It deals with matters relating to levy and
collection of taxes on income. There are many provisions in the Income-tax
Act which have a direct or indirect bearing on the financial securities market.
Some key provisions having bearing on the financial markets are lucidly
stated in the following paragraphs. The reader is also expected to refer to the
relevant provisions of Income-tax Act, 1961 for the complete text of the
266
provisions, proper understanding and interpretation thereof. The finance Act
which is passed in the parliament every year has some or the other
amendments to the existing provisions of the Income Tax Act, 1961.
BASICS CONCEPTS
Charge of income-tax
Income-tax is generally chargeable for any assessment year in respect of
total income of the previous year of every person. Further tax is also
required to be deducted at source or paid in advance under certain provisions
of this Act (section 4).
st
Assessment year means the period of twelve months commencing on 1
day of April every year (clause 9 of section 2).
Previous year means the financial year immediately preceding the

assessment year (section 3).
For the purpose of this Act, a person includes-

an individual,
a Hindu undivided family,
a company,
a firm,
an association of persons or a body of individuals,
a local authority,
every artifical juridical person, not falling above.
(clause 31 of section 2)
Assessee means a person by whom any tax or any other sum of money is
payable under this Act and includes every person in respect of whom any
proceedings under this Act has been taken for the assessment of his income,
loss or refund or income, loss or refund of any other person in respect of
which he is assessable. (clause 7 of section 2)
Heads of income (section 14)
The income should be classified under the following heads of income for the
purpose of computation of total income and charge of income-tax thereon
1. Salaries
2. Income from house property
3. Profits and gains of business or profession
4. Capital gains
5. Income from other sources
Computation of total income for determining tax liability
Taxable income is determined separately under each of the heads of income,
as applicable to the assessee, after deducting allowable expenditures or other
267
amounts and setting off of current year or earlier year s losses there from, as
per the provisions of the Act. Gross Total Income is the summation of
income under various heads of income. Certain deductions are allowable
from the Gross Total Income to determine the Total Income . Tax is
calculated on the Total Income as per the prescribed rates. Surcharge (as
applicable) and Education & Higher Education Cess is levied on the tax
liability, to arrive at the total tax liability of the assessee.
It may be noted that loss under certain heads of income can be set off
against income under the same head of income or other heads of income as
allowable under various provisions of the Act. Certain losses which cannot be
set off in any particular year due to insufficiency of income can be carried
forward and set off against income in subsequent year as per specific
provision of the Act.
NON-TAXABLE INCOME
Incomes which do not form part of Total Income
Section 10 of this Act specifies the incomes which should not to be included
as income while computing the total income of a person subject to fulfillment
of certain conditions. Some of the incomes pertaining to securities
transactions which do not form a part of total income are given below-
Income arising from the transfer of a unit of the Unit Scheme, 1964 Income
arising from the transfer of a capital asset, being a unit of the Unit Scheme,
1964 referred to in Schedule I to the Unit Trust of India (Transfer of
Undertaking and Repeal) Act, 2002 and where the transfer of such assets
takes place on or after the 1st day of April, 2002 (clause 33 of section 10).
Dividend income referred to in section 115-O (clause 34 of section 10).
Income received in respect of units of a Mutual Fund specified under clause
23D of section 10 (Sub-clause (a) of clause 35 of section 10).
Income received in respect of units from the Administrator of the specified
undertaking. For the purpose of this clause, the Administrator means the
Administrator as referred to in clause (a) of section 2 of the Unit Trust of
India (Transfer of Undertaking and Repeal) Act, 2002 (sub-clause (b) of
clause 35 of section 10).
Income received in respect of units from the specified company (sub-clause
(c) of clause 35 of section 10).
Income arising from the transfer of a long-term capital asset, being an eligible
equity share in a company purchased on or after the 1st day of March, 2003
and before the 1st day of March, 2004 and held for a period of twelve months
268
or more. For the purpose of this clause, eligible equity share means (1) an
equity share in a company being a constituent of BSE-500 Index on the Stock
Exchange, Mumbai as on the 1st day of March, 2003 and the transactions of
purchase and sale of such equity share are entered into on a recognized stock
exchange in India, or (2) any equity share in a company allotted through a
public issue on or after the 1st day of March, 2003 and listed in a recognized
stock exchange in India before the 1st day of March, 2004 and the transaction
of sale of such share is entered into on a recognized stock exchange in India
(clause 36 of section 10).
Any income arising from the transfer of a long-term capital asset, being
equity share in a company or a unit of an equity oriented fund where such
transaction is chargeable to securities transaction tax. Equity oriented fund
means a fund where the investible funds are invested by way of equity
shares in domestic companies to the extent of more than sixty five per cent of
the total proceeds of such fund and is set up under a scheme of a Mutual
Fund specified under clause (23D) of section 10. (clause 38 of section 10).
Income by way of contribution received from recognised stock exchange and
members thereof, to Investor Protection Fund which is set up by recognized
stock exchanges in India and notified in the Official Gazatte by the Central
Government. (clause 23EA of section 10).
TAXABILITY OF CAPITAL MARKET TRANSACTIONS IN THE HANDS OF
ASSESSEE
It is pertinent to note that there has been a long drawn controversy between
the assessee and the income tax authorities in respect of treating the gains
from capital market transactions as Business Income or Capital Gains . In
order to give some direction to the classification, Central Board of Direct
Taxes (CBDT) has vide instruction no.1827 dated 31st August, 1989 and also
vide Circular no.4/2007 dated 15th June, 2007, has given some guidelines in
order to determine whether the income is a Business Income or Capital
Gains . The detailed text of the Circular and the instructions may be referred
to which is given as Annexure 1 to this chapter.
BUSINESS INCOME
An amount equal to securities transaction tax paid by the assessee in respect
of taxable securities transactions entered into in the course of his business
during the previous year, if the income arising from such taxable securities
transactions is included as Business Income . (clause xv of section 36(1)).
269
EXPENDITURE NOT ALLOWABLE
Expenditure incurred in relation to income not includible in total
income
For the purposes of computing the total income, deduction is not allowed in
respect of expenditure incurred by the assessee in relation to income which
does not form part of the total income (section 14A).
PROVISIONS RELATING TO SPECULATION
Speculative Transactions
"Speculative Transaction" means a transaction in which a contract for the
purchase or sale of any commodity, including stocks and shares, is
periodically or ultimately settled otherwise than by the actual delivery or
transfer of the commodity or scrips.
However the following contracts are not deemed to be speculative
transactions for the purpose of this clause
(a) a contract in respect of raw materials or merchandise entered into by a

person in the course of his manufacturing or merchandise business to
guard against loss through future price fluctuations in respect of his
contracts for actual delivery of goods manufactured by him or
merchandise sold by him; or
(b) a contract in respect of stocks and shares entered into by a dealer or
investor therein to guard against loss in his holdings of stocks and shares
through price fluctuations; or
(c) a contract entered into by a member of a forward market or a stock
exchange in the course of any transaction in the nature of jobbing or
arbitrage to guard against loss which may arise in the ordinary course of
his business as such member.
(d) an eligible transaction in respect of trading in derivatives referred to in
clause (ac) of section 2 of Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act, 1956
carried out in a recognised stock exchange.
It should be noted that it is important to identify a speculation income / loss
in view of the restrictive provisions regarding setting off and carry forward of
such losses in the event of inadequacy of profits under other heads of income.
Speculation Business
As per explanation 2 to section 28, where speculative transactions carried on
by an assessee are of such a nature as to constitute a business, the business
should be deemed to be distinct and separate from any other business and
referred to as speculation business .
270
Further, as per explanation to section 73, where any part of the business of a
company consists in purchase and sale of shares of other companies, such
companies shall be deemed to be carrying on a speculation business to the
extent to which the business consists of the purchase and sale of such shares.
This explanation does not apply to investment companies and companies
whose principal business is of banking or granting loans / advances.
Speculation loss of any assessment year is allowed to be set off only against
the profits and gains of another speculation business in the same assessment
year. But, if a speculation loss could not be set off from the income of
another speculation business in the same assessment year, it is allowed to be
carried forward to be claimed as a set off in the subsequent year, but only
against the income of any speculation business in that year. Such loss can be
carried forward for four assessment years immediately succeeding the
assessment year for which the loss was first computed (section 73).
INCOME CHARGEABLE UNDER THE HEAD OF CAPITAL GAINS
Capital Gains
Any profits or gains arising from the transfer of a capital asset effected in th
e
previous year subject to deductions and adjustments under other provisions is
chargeable to income-tax under the head Capital gains , and is deemed to
be the income of the previous year in which the transfer took place (section
45).
Capital asset means property of any kind held by an assessee, whether or
not connected with his business or profession, but does not include
1.
any stock-in-trade, consumable stores or raw materials held for the
purposes of his business or profession;
2.
personal effects, that is to say, movable property (including wearing
apparel and furniture, but excluding jewellery, archaeological collections,
drawings, paintings, sculptures or any work of art) held for personal use
by the assessee or any member of his family dependent on him.
3.
agricultural land in India
4.
6 1/2 per cent. Gold Bonds, 1977, or 7 per cent. Gold Bonds, 1980 or
National Defence Gold Bonds, 1980 issued by the Central Government;
5.
Special Bearer Bonds, 1991, issued by the Central Government;
6.
Gold Deposit Bonds issued under the Gold Deposit Scheme, 1999 notified
by the Central Government;
Transfer , in relation to a capital asset, includes
1.
the sale, exchange or relinquishment of the asset,
2.
the extinguishment of any rights therein,
3.
the compulsory acquisition thereof under any law,
271
4.
in a case where the asset is converted by the owner thereof into, or is
traded by him, as stock-in-trade of a business carried on by him, such
conversion or treatment,
5.
maturity or redemption of zero coupon bonds;
6.
any transaction involving the allowing of the possession of any immovable
property to be taken or retained in part performance of a contract of the
nature referred to in section 53A of the Transfer of Property Act, 1882,
7.
any transaction (whether by way of becoming a member of, or acquiring
shares in a co-operative society, company or other association of persons
or by way of any agreement or any arrangement or in any other manner
whatsoever) which has the effect of transferring, or enabling the
enjoyment of any immovable property.
Transactions not regarded as Transfers
Section 47 of this Act pertains to transactions which are not regarded as
transfers. Instances of transactions which are not regarded as transfers are
given below
1.
Any transfer of a capital asset under a gift or will or an irrevocable trust.
However, this does not apply to shares, debentures or warrants allotted
by a company directly or indirectly to is employees under Employees
Stock Option Plan or Scheme.
2.
Any transfer of capital asset by a company to its subsidiary company
where the parent company or its nominees hold the whole of the share
capital of the subsidiary company, and the subsidiary company is an
Indian company.
3.
Any transfer of a capital asset by a subsidiary company to the holding
company and the whole of the share capital of the subsidiary company is
held by the holding company and the holding company is an Indian
company.
4.
Any transfer of a capital asset or intangible asset by a firm or a company
in the business carried on by the firm, or any transfer of a capital asset to
a company in the course of demutualization or corporatisation of a
recognized stock exchange in India as a result of which an association of
persons or body of individuals is succeeded by such company subject to
certain conditions.
5.
Any transfer of a capital asset being a membership right held by a
member of a recognized stock exchange in India for acquisition of shares
and trading or clearing rights acquired by such member in that recognized
stock exchange in accordance with a scheme for demutualisation or
corporatisation which is approved by SEBI.
The exemption from certain transactions from being regarded as transfers is
however subject to fulfillment of specified conditions provided for in section
47 and section 47A.
272
Types of Capital Gains
Capital gains can either be short term capital gains or long term capital gains.
Short term capital gain means capital gain arising from the transfer of a
short term capital asset (clause 42B of section 2).
Short term capital asset means a capital asset held by an assessee for not
more than thirty-six months immediately preceding the date of its transfer.
However, the following assets are considered short term capital asset if the
same are held by an assessee for not more than twelve months immediately
preceding the date of its transfer
1.
shares held in a company or any other security listed in a recognised stock
exchange in India, or
2.
units of the Unit Trust of India established under the Unit Trust of India
Act, 1963, or
3.
units of a Mutual Fund specified under clause (23D) of section 10, or
4. zero coupon bonds.
(clause 42A of section 2).
Long term capital gain means capital gain arising from the transfer of a
long-term capital asset (clause 29B of section 2).
Long term capital asset means a capital asset which is not a short term
capital asset (clause 29A of section 2).
Computation of Capital Gains

The capital gains on short term capital assets is computed by deducting the
following from the full value of consideration received or accruing as a result
of transfer of the capital asset
1.
Expenditure incurred wholly and exclusively in connection with such
transfer
2.
The cost of acquisition of the asset and the cost of any improvement
thereto. (section 48)
The capital gains on long term capital assets is computed in the same way as
mentioned above but instead of reducing the cost of acquisition of the asset
and the cost of any improvement thereto, the indexed cost of acquisition and
the indexed cost of any improvement is considered (second proviso to
section 48).
Indexed cost of acquisition or improvement means an amount which bears to
the cost of acquisition or improvement the same proportion as cost inflation
index for the year in which the asset is transferred bears to the cost inflation
index for the first year in which the asset was held by the assessee or for the
year beginning on 1-4-1981, whichever is later. The cost inflation index (CII)
is notified by the Central Government every year (explanation (v) to section
48). The cost inflation index notified for the financial year 1981-82 is 100
and for financial year 2007-2008 is 551.
273
Specific provisions pertaining to determination of cost of acquisition /
cost of improvement
However, it should be noted that for the purpose of computation of long term
capital gain / loss arising out of transfer of bonds or debenture other than
capital indexed bonds issued by the Government, the cost of acquisition and
improvements cannot be indexed (third proviso to section 48).
It may be noted that first-in-first-out (FIFO) method is to be applied for the
purpose of computation of capital gains in respect of securities held in
dematerlised form. Further, where an investor has more than one security
account in the depository system, FIFO method will be applied account wise
(clause 2A to section 45).
Capital Gains Exemptions
The Act provides for exemption from taxation of long term capital gains under
various provisions.
Section 54EC provides for exemption of tax on capital gains arising from
transfer of a long term capital asset, if the gains are invested in a long term
specified asset within a period of 6 months from the date of transfer or sale of
the original asset. Provided that the investments made in long-term specified
asset by an assessee during any financial year does not exceed fifty lakh
rupees. If the cost of the long term specified asset is less than the capital
gain, then, capital gain proportionate to part of capital gain invested will be
exempt. After availing the exemption, the assessee has to retain the long
term specified asset for a minimum period of three years from the date of its
acquisition. Long term specified asset for the purpose of this section are
redeemable bonds issued by National Highway Authority of India and Rural
Electrification Corporation Ltd.
Computation of tax on capital gains
Short term capital gain which occurs out of transactions not subject to
Securities Transaction Tax, is taxed alongwith other income at normal rates.
Short term capital gains which occurs out of transactions subject to Securities
Transaction Tax, is taxed at a concessional rate of 15% for AY 2009-10.
(section 111A (1)(i)).
Long term capital gain which occurs out of transactions not subject to
Securities Transaction Tax, is taxed at special rate of 20% subject to certain
exceptions. It is further provided that the income-tax on long term capital
gains on listed securities or units or zero coupon bonds, considering indexed
cost of acquisition and improvement is subjected to a maximum of 10% of
capital gains on the said securities or units or zero coupon bonds, computed
without indexation of cost. (section 112). Long Term Capital Gains which
274
occurs out of transactions subject to Securities Transaction Tax are exempt
from tax. (section 10(38)).
Where the gross total income of an assessee includes any income arising from
the transfer of a long term capital asset, the gross total income shall be
reduced by the amount of such income and the deduction under Chapter VI-A
shall be allowed as if the gross total income as so reduced were the gross
total income of the assessee.
Where the total income of an assessee includes any income arising from the
transfer of a long-term capital asset, the total income shall be reduced by the
amount of such income and the rebate shall be allowed from the income-Tax
on the total income as so reduced.
Set off and Carry-forward of losses under the head Capital Gains
Loss relating to short term capital asset is to be set off against gains from
long term capital assets and / or gains from any other short term capital
assets in the same assessment year. (clause 2 of section 70). Unabsorbed
loss relating to short-term capital asset can be carried forward for eight
succeeding assessment years and set off against income from capital assets,
both long-term and short-term. (clause 2 of section 74).
Loss relating to long term capital asset is to be set off only against gains fro
m
long term capital assets in the same assessment year (clause 3 of section
70). Unabsorbed loss relating to long-term capital asset can be carried
forward for eight succeeding assessment years and set off only against long
term capital gains (clause 2 of section 74).
DIVIDEND AND INTEREST INCOME
Dividend Income
The term dividend has a wide meaning in the Income-tax Act and has been
comprehensively defined under clause 22 of section 2.
Dividend is deemed to be the income of the previous year in which it is
declared, distributed or paid. The date of accrual of the dividend is taken as
the date on which it is declared at the annual general meeting of the
company. Interim dividend is deemed to be the income of the year in which
the amount of such dividend is unconditionally made available by the
company to its shareholders (section 8).
Tax on distributed profits of domestic companies
In respect of dividend declared, distributed or paid by a domestic company on
or after 1-4-2003, additional income-tax at the rate of 15% as income-tax
plus surcharge at the rate of 10% and education cess at the rate of 3% of the
income-tax is payable by such company (section 115-O). This amount is
thereafter not taxable as income in the hands of the shareholder.
275
Dividends declared by Mutual Funds
In respect of dividend distributed by a Mutual Fund, additional income-tax at
the rate of 25% plus surcharge at the rate of 10% and education cess at the
rate of 3%, is payable by money market mutual fund or a liquid fund. (section
115-R(2)(i)). For other than money market mutual fund or a liquid fund,
additional tax at the rate of 12.50% plus surcharge at the rate of 10% and
education cess at the rate of 3%, is payable, if income is distributed to an
individual or HUF and at the rate of 20% plus surcharge at the rate of 10%
and education cess at the rate of 3%, is payable, if income is distributed to
others. This amount is thereafter not taxable as income in the hands of the
shareholder. (section 115-R(2)(ii)&(iii))
Interest on securities
Interest on securities means:
1.
interest on any security of the Central Government or a State
Government,
2.
interest on debentures or other securities for money issued by or on
behalf of a local authority or a company or a corporation established by a
Central, State or provincial Act.
Income from interest on securities is chargeable under the head Profits and
gains of business or profession , if the securities are held as stock-in-trade.
If they are held as investment, the interest there from will be chargeable
under the head Income from other sources .
Any person paying interest on securities is liable to deduct tax at source at
specified rates. However, deduction of tax is not required on interest payable
on any security of the Central Government or State Government. Deduction
of tax is also not required on interest payable in certain other cases as per
provisions of this Act.
OTHER PROVISIONS
Deductions to be made in computing total income
Chapter VI-A of the Act specifies the deductions to be made from the total
income of an assessee.
Amount paid or deposited in previous year by an individual assessee in
respect of life insurance premiua, deferred annuity, contributions to provident
fund, subscription to certain equity shares or debentures, etc. subject to an
amount of Rs. 1,00,000. (section 80C)
276
Permanent Account Number
Clause 5 of section 139A of the Act provides for quoting of permanent account
number in all documents pertaining to specified transactions, class of
transactions or different class of persons as prescribed by the Central Board
of Direct Taxes from time to time. It has also been provided that a person
should intimate General Index Register Number till allotment of permanent
account number.
Accordingly, sub-rule (e) of rule 114B of the Income-tax Rules, 1962 requires
every person entering into a contract of a value exceeding one lakh rupees for
sale or purchase of securities to quote permanent account number or General
Index Register Number.
6.12 MONEY LAUNDERING ACT, 2002
The Money Laundering Act, 2002 was enacted to prevent money laundering
and to provide for confiscation of property derived from, or involved in,
money-laundering and for matters connected therewith or incidental thereto.
The terms used in the Act are defined as under:
(1) intermediary means a stock-broker, sub-broker, share transfer
agent, banker to an issue, trustee to a trust deed, registrar to an
issue, merchant banker, underwriter, portfolio manager, investment
adviser and any other intermediary associated with securities market
and registered under section 12 of the Securities and Exchange Board
of India Act, 1992.
(2) proceeds of crime means any property or assets of every description,
whether corporeal or incorporeal, movable or immovable, tangible or
intangible and includes deeds and instruments evidencing title to, or
interest in, such property or assets, wherever located;
The term Money Laundering has been defined in Section 3 of the Act as
Whosoever directly or indirectly attempts to indulge or knowingly assists or
knowingly is a party or is actually involved in any process or activity
connected with the proceeds of crime and projecting it as untainted property
shall be guilty of offence of money-laundering.
Punishment for money-laundering
The punishment for money-laundering is rigorous imprisonment for a term
which shall not less than three years but which may extend to seven years
and shall also be liable to fine which may extend to five lakh rupees.
277
Banking companies, financial institutions and intermediaries to
maintain records.
Section 12 of the Prevention of Money Laundering Act, 2002 lays down
following obligations on banking companies, financial institutions and
intermediaries.
(1) Every banking company, financial institution and intermediary shall
(a) maintain a record of all transactions, the nature and value of which
may be prescribed, whether such transactions comprise of a single
transaction or a series of transactions integrally connected to each
other, and where such series of transactions take place within a
month;
(b) furnish information of transactions referred to in clause (a) to the
Director within such time and as may be prescribed;
(c) verify and maintain the records of the identity of all its clients, in such
manner as may be prescribed:
Provided that where the principal officer of a banking company or financial
institution or intermediary, as the case may be, has reason to believe that a
single transaction or series of transactions integrally connected to each other
have been valued below the prescribed value so as to defeat the provisions of
this section, such officer shall furnish information in respect of such
transactions to the Director within the prescribed time.
(2) The records referred to in sub-section (1) shall be maintained for a period
of ten years from the date of cessation of the transactions between the
clients and the banking company or financial institution or intermediary,
as the case may be."
The Financial Intelligence Unit India (FIU- IND) has been set up as a multidisci
plinary
unit for establishing links between suspicious or unusual financial
transactions and underlying criminal activities. It coordinates and support
efforts of national and international intelligence, investigation and
enforcement agencies in pursuing the global efforts against money laundering
and related crimes. The FIU-IND is the central nodal agency responsible for
receiving, processing, analyzing and disseminating information relating to
suspect financial transactions to these agencies who shall protect the
information against misuse.
Authorities under the Act
The Act provides that every order of attachment of property involved in
money-laundering, order of seizure of property/records etc. shall be
forwarded along with a complaint or application to the Adjudicating Authority
within a period of thirty days. Such order is to be confirmed by the
278
Adjudicating Authority within a certain time-limit. The Adjudicating Authority
is constituted separately. The appeal against the orders of the Director or the
Adjudicating Authority can be filed before the Appellate Tribunal being set up
under the Prevention of Money Laundering Act.
The following are classes of authorities for the purposes of the Act, namely:
(a) Director or Additional Director or Joint Director,
(b) Deputy Director,
(c) Assistant Director, and
(d) Such other class of officers as may be appointed for the purposes of
this Act.
6.13 SECURITIES TRANSACTION TAX
Chapter VII of Finance (No.2) Act, 2004 has introduced a tax on taxable
securities transactions of purchase or sale of an equity share in a company or
a derivative or a unit of an equity oriented fund, entered into a recognised
stock exchange or a sale of a unit of an equity oriented fund to the Mutual
Fund. (section 97(13))
Taxable securities transactions and tax thereon is given in the below table :
Sr.No. Taxable securities transaction New rates
from
01.06.2006
Payable by
A B D E
1. Purchase of an equity share in a company or a
unit of an equity oriented fund, where
(a) the transaction of such purchase is
entered into in a recognised stock
exchange; and
(b) the contract for the purchase of such
share or unit is settled by the actual
delivery or transfer of such share or unit.
0.125 per
cent.
Purchaser.
2. Sale of an equity share in a company or a unit of
an equity oriented fund, where
(a) the transaction of such sale is entered
into in a recognised stock exchange; and
(b) the contract for the sale of such share or
unit is settled by the actual delivery or
transfer of such share or unit.
0.125 per
cent.
Seller.
3. Sale of an equity share in a company or a unit of
an equity oriented fund, where
(a) the transaction of such sale is entered
into in a recognised stock exchange; and
(b) the contract for the sale of such share or
unit is settled otherwise than by the
actual delivery or transfer of such share
or unit.
0.025 per
cent.
Seller.
279
Sr.No. Taxable securities
transaction
Effective rate
till 31.05.2008
New rate
from
01.06.2008
Payable by
A B C D E
4. Sale of a derivative, where the
transaction of such sale is
entered into in a recognised
stock exchange
0.017 per cent Refer 4(a,b,c)
below
Seller
4(a) Sale of an option in securities 0.017 per
cent
Seller
4(b) Sale of an option in securities, where option is
exercised
0.125 per
cent
Purchaser
4(c ) Sale of a futures in securities 0.017 per
cent
Seller
Sr.No. Taxable securities transaction New rates
from
01.06.2006
Payable by
A B D E
5 Sale of unit of equity oriented fund to the Mutual
Fund
0.25 per cent Seller
The tax rates given in the above table are to be applied on the value of
taxable securities. The value of taxable securities transaction in case of
option in securities shall be the option premium in respect of transactions at
4(a) of the table and the settlement price in respect of transactions at 4(b) of
the table above. Value in case of taxable securities transaction being futures,
shall be the price at which such futures is traded. The value of other taxable
securities transaction shall be the price at which such securities are purchased
or sold.
Annexure 1.
Circular No.4/2007
Government of India
Ministry of Finance
Department of Revenue
Central Board of Direct Taxes
New Delhi, the 15th day of June, 2007

Sub : Distinction between shares held as stock-in-trade and
shares held as investment tests for such a distinction.
1. The Income Tax Act, 1961 makes a distinction between a capital asset
and a trading asset .
2. Capital asset is defined in Section 2(14) of the Act. Long-term capital
assets and gains are dealt with under Section 2(29A) and Section 2(29B).
Shortterm capital assets and gains are dealt with under Section 2(42A) and
Section 2(42B).
280
3. Trading asset is dealt with under Section 28 of the Act.
4. The Central Board of Direct Taxes (CBDT) through Instruction No.1827
dated August 31, 1989 had brought to the notice of the assessing officers that
there is a distinction between shares held as investment (capital asset) and
shares held as stock-in-trade (trading asset). In the light of a number of
judicial decisions pronounced after the issue of the above instructions, it is
proposed to update the above instructions for the information of assessees as
well as for guidance of the assessing officers.
5. In the case of Commissioner of Income Tax (Central), Calcutta Vs
Associated Industrial Development Company (P) Ltd (82 ITR 586), the
Supreme Court observed that:
Whether a particular holding of shares is by way of investment or forms part
of the stock-in-trade is a matter which is within the knowledge of the
assessee who holds the shares and it should, in normal circumstances, be in a
position to produce evidence from its records as to whether it has maintained
any distinction between those shares which are its stock-in-trade and those
which are held by way of investment.
6. In the case of Commissioner of Income Tax, Bombay Vs H. Holck Larsen
(160 ITR 67), the Supreme Court observed :
The High Court, in our opinion, made a mistake in observing whether
transactions of sale and purchase of shares were trading transactions or
whether these were in the nature of investment was a question of law. This
was a mixed question of law and fact.
7. The principles laid down by the Supreme Court in the above two cases
afford adequate guidance to the assessing officers.
8. The Authority for Advance Rulings (AAR) (288 ITR 641), referring to the
decisions of the Supreme Court in several cases, has culled out the following
principles : (
i) Where a company purchases and sells shares, it must be shown that they
were held as stock-in-trade and that existence of the power to purchase and
sell shares in the memorandum of association is not decisive of the nature of
transaction;
(ii) the substantial nature of transactions, the manner of maintaining books of
accounts, the magnitude of purchases and sales and the ratio between
purchases and sales and the holding would furnish a good guide to determine
the nature of transactions;
(iii) ordinarily the purchase and sale of shares with the motive of earning a
profit, would result in the transaction being in the nature of trade/ adventure
in the nature of trade; but where the object of the investment in shares of a
company is to derive income by way of
281
dividend etc. then the profits accruing by change in such investment (by sale
of shares) will yield capital gain and not revenue receipt .
9. Dealing with the above three principles, the AAR has observed in the case
of Fidelity group as under:
We shall revert to the aforementioned principles. The first principle requires
us to ascertain whether the purchase of shares by a FII in exercise of the
power in the memorandum of association/trust deed was as stock-in-trade as
the mere existence of the power to purchase and sell shares will not by itself
be decisive of the nature of transaction. We have to verify as to how the
shares were valued/held in the books of account i.e. whether they were
valued as stock-in-trade at the end of the financial year for the purpose of
arriving at business income or held as investment in capital assets. The
second principle furnishes a guide for determining the nature of transaction
by verifying whether there are substantial transactions, their magnitude, etc.,
maintenance of books of account and finding the ratio between purchases and
sales. It will not be out of place to mention that regulation 18 of the SEBI
Regulations enjoins upon every FII to keep and maintain books of account
containing true and fair accounts relating to remittance of initial corpus of
buying and selling and realizing capital gains on investments and accounts of
remittance to India for investment in India and realizing capital gains on
investment from such remittances. The third principle suggests that ordinarily
purchases and sales of shares with the motive of realizing profit would lead to
inference of trade/adventure in the nature of trade; where the object of the
investment in shares of companies is to derive income by way of dividends
etc., the transactions of purchases and sales of shares would yield capital
gains and not business profits.
10. CBDT also wishes to emphasise that it is possible for a tax payer to have
two portfolios, i.e., an investment portfolio comprising of securities which are
to be treated as capital assets and a trading portfolio comprising of stock-intr
ade
which are to be treated as trading assets. Where an assessee has two
portfolios, the assessee may have income under both heads i.e., capital gains
as well as business income.
11. Assessing officers are advised that the above principles should guide them
in determining whether, in a given case, the shares are held by the assessee
as investment (and therefore giving rise to capital gains) or as stock-in-trade
(and therefore giving rise to business profits). The assessing officers are
further advised that no single principle would be decisive and the total effect
of all the principles should be considered to determine whether, in a given
case, the shares are held by the assessee as investment or stock-intrade.
12. These instructions shall supplement the earlier Instruction no. 1827 dated
August 31, 1989.(Vandana Ramachandran)Under Secretary (TPL-I)
(F.No.149/287/2005-TPL from Central Board of Direct Taxes)
282
Instruction No. 1827 dated 31.08.1989
Subject : Distinction between shares held as stock-in-trade and
shares held as investment - Tests For
The question whether a particular assessee is a trader in shares or the shares
are held as capital assets sometimes gives rise to disputes and litigation. Over
the years the courts have laid down the various tests or factors to be taken
into account in determining this question.
2. Certain general principles in this regard were laid down by the Supreme
Court in the case of G.Venkata Swami Naidu & co. Vs. CIT (1959) 35 ITR 594.
In this case the Supreme Court was dealing with a question whether the
excess sum realised on the sale of certain plots was assessable as income
from an adventure in the nature of business. The Supreme Court held that in
deciding the character of such transaction, several factors were relevant. For
instance:i.
Whether the purchaser was a trader and the purchase of the commodity
and its resale were allied to his usual trade or business or were incidental to
it.
ii. The nature and quantity of the commodity purchased and resold - if the
commodity purchased is in very large quantity, it could tend to eliminate the
possibility of investment for personal use, possession or enjoyment.
iii. The repetition of the transaction.
3. The Supreme court observed that the presence of all these factors may be
held in the court to draw an inference that a transaction is in the nature of
trade' but it is not a matter of merely counting the number of facts and
circumstances pro and con what is important to consider is their distinctive
character. In each case, it is the total effect of all relevant factors and
circumstances that determines the character of the transaction.
4. The Supreme Court in this case also discussed the test of intention. It held
that in cases where the purchase has been made solely and exclusively with
the intention of resale at a profit and the purchaser has no intention of
holding the property for himself or otherwise enjoying it or using it, the
presence of such intention is a relevant factor and unless it is off-set by the
presence of other factors, it would raise a strong presumption that a
transaction is an adventure in the nature of trade.
5. In the case of H. Mohammad & Co. Vs. CIT (1977) 107 ITR 637 the Gujarat
High Court observed that a stock-in-trade is something in which a trader or a
business man deals, whereas his capital asset is something with which he
deals. According to the High Court one of the indicators for deciding as to
what is stock-in-trade is whether a particular assessee is buying or selling the
goods or commodity or whether he has merely invested his money with a
view to earning further income or with a view to carrying on his other
283
business. It was further held by the High court that the distinction between
stock-in-trade and investment is that of selling outright in the course of the
business activity and deriving income from exploitation of one's own assets.
6. These general principles hold good in respect of shares also. However
certain specific issues relevant for determining this question with reference to
shares have also been decided by the courts. In the case of Sarder Indra
Singh & sons Ltd. Vs. CIT (1953) 24 ITR 415, the Supreme Court was dealing
with the case of a company which was incorporated with the object, inter alia
of carrying on the business of bankers, financiers, managing agents and
secretaries and was also empowered to invest and deal with the monies of the
company not immediately required for its business upon such securities and
in such manner as might from time to time be determined. It was held by the
Supreme Court in this case that to constitute business income, it was not
necessary that surplus should have resulted from such a course of dealing in
securities as by itself would amount to the carrying on of business or if the
realisation of securities is a normal step in carrying on the assessee's
business. The Supreme Court observed that the principle applicable in all such
cases was well settled and the question always was whether the sales which
produced the surplus were so connected with the carrying on of the assessees
business that it could fairly be said that the surplus was the profit and gains
of such business. On the facts of this case it was held that the surplus
resulting from sale of shares and securities constituted business income.
7. The aforesaid principles laid down by the Supreme Court was followed by
Andhra Pradesh High court in the case of SBH. Vs.CIT (1988) 151 ITR 703.
The main business of the SBH was to accept deposits and to advance loans
and the money constituted its stock-in-trade. The banking company has to
carry on its business in accordance with the provisions of the banking
regulation act, 1949. Sec.24 of the said act requires every banking company
to maintain in India either in cash or in the shape of gold or in the shape of
unincumbered approved securities, 20% of its total time and demand
liabilities at any given point of time. It was held by the High Court that what
section 24 of the said Act did was to insist on the observance of a normal
prudent banking business practice. If the banking company chooses to invest
the money in unincumbered approved securities it is only one mode of
keeping a portion of its deposits in ready cash or readily-convertible-into-cash
securities. Any income arising from the sale of such securities is, therefore
closely connected with the banking business and is business income, it was
concluded by the High court.
8. In the case of Karam Chand Thapar and brothers (P) Ltd Vs. CIT (1971) 83
ITR 899 it was held by the Supreme Court that the circumstance that the
assessee had shown certain shares as investment in its books as well as its
balance sheet was by itself not a conclusive circumstances, though it was a
relevant circumstance.
284
9. The decisions in the CIT Vs. Associated Industrial Development co. (1971)
82 ITR 586 (SC) and A.N. Ramaswami Chettiar Vs. CIT (1963) 48 ITR 771
(Madras) may also be referred to for guidance.
10. Although the tests laid down by the courts may help determine the issue
in particular cases the decision will ultimately turn on the facts of each case.
11. These instructions may please be brought to the notice of the Assessing
officers in your region.
[F.No 181/1/89 -IT(AI) dated 31/08/1989 from Central Board of Direct
Taxes]
MODEL QUESTIONS
Ques:1 Every member of a recognised stock exchange shall maintain and
preserve the Register of transactions (Sauda book) for a period of
______years.
(a) five;
(c) two;
(b) three;
(d) seven
Correct Answer: (a)
Ques:2 The intermediaries and persons associated with securities market
shall be registered with ____.
(a) DCA;
(b) MoF;
(c) SEBI;
(d) ROC
Correct Answer: (c)
Ques:3
As per the provisions of SEBI (Prohibition of Insider Trading)
Regulations, any person who holds more than ___ shares or voting
rights in any listed company shall make such disclosure to the
company.
(a) 10 %;
(b) 5%;
(c) 2%;
(d) 3%.
Correct Answer: (b)
285
Ques:4 The minimum paid-up capital of private company is Rs. 1 lakh.
(a) 10 lakh;
(b) 5 lakh;
(c) 1 lakh;
(d) 2 lakh
Correct Answer: (c)
Ques:5 The minimum paid-up capital of public company is Rs. ___ .
(a) 10 lakh;
(b) 5 lakh;
(c) 1 lakh;
(d) 2 lakh
Correct Answer: (b)
Ques:6 Assessment year means _________.
(a) the period of twelve months commencing on 1st day of April every year
(b) the period of twelve months commencing on 1st day of January every
year
(c) the 1st day of January every year
(d) the 1st day of April every year
Correct Answer: (a)
Ques:7 Short term capital asset in relation to shares and units of UTI &
mutual funds means a capital asset held by an assessee ________
(a) for more than twelve months immediately preceding the date of its
transfer.
(b) for more than thirty six months immediately preceding the date of its
transfer.
(c) for not more than twelve months
immediately preceding the date of
its transfer.
(d) for not more than thirty six months immediately preceding the date of
its transfer.
Correct Answer: (c)
Ques:8 Permanent account number or General Index Register Number is
required to be quoted by every person entering into a contract of
value_______.
(a) exceeding Rs. 10,000/(
b) exceeding Rs. 50,000/286
(c) exceeding Rs. 1,00,000/(
d) none of the above
Correct Answer: (c)
Ques:9 Loss relating to long term capital asset is to be set off ________.
(a) against gains from short term or long term capital assets in the same
assessment year
(b) only against gains from long term capital assets in the same
assessment year
(c) against
income from any other heads of income in the same
assessment year
(d) none of the above
Correct Answer: (b)
287
CHAPTER 7 : MATHEMATICS AND
STATISTICS
7.1 MEASURES OF CENTRAL TENDENCY
An average is a value that is typical, or representative, of a set of given data
.
Since such typical values tend to lie centrally within a set of data arranged
according to magnitude, averages are also called measures of central
tendency.
7.1.1 Mean
Mean is an average value of a set of the values. It indicates the central value
of the overall population. It equals to the sum of all the values over (divided
by) the number of observations. It is also known as arithmetic mean. The
arithmetic mean, or briefly the mean, of a set of N numbers X1 , X2 , X3 , ,
X N is denoted by X (read X bar ) and is defined as:
N
å X
X + X + X + ...Xj =1
j å X
12 3 N
X = ==
N NN
Example 1: The arithmetic mean of the numbers 8, 3, 5, 12, and 10 is
8 + 3 + 5 + 2 +12 +10 38
X = = =7.6
55
7.1.2 The weighted Arithmetic mean.
The mean is computed either without weights or with weights. The weighted
mean refer to assigning the weights ( w , w ,..., w ) to each value (X1 , X 2 ,
12 n
X 3 , , XN ) multiplying them and summing such values. Each weight depends
on the significance or importance attributed to each value. In this case,
288
wX + wX + ... + wX å wXå wX
11 22 nN
X ==
w + w + ...ww
12 n
is called the weighted arithmetic mean.
Example 2: If a final examination in a course, is weighted 3 times as much as
each of the two internal assignments and a student has a final examination
grade of 85 and internal assignment grades of 70 and 90, the mean grade is:
(1)(70) + (1)(90) + (3)(85) 415
X = = =83
1+1+ 35
Thus, it is simply sum of weighted value of each observation.
7.1.3 Geometric Mean
Geometric Mean (GM) is theoretically considered to be the best average in
measuring returns from securities.
The geometric mean, G, of a set on N positive numbers X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , , Xn is
the Nth root of the product of the numbers:
G= N
nXXXX ....321
Example 3: The geometric mean of the numbers 2, 4, and 8 is:
G = 3 )8)(4)(2(= 3 64 =4.
If there are two items, square root is taken; if there are three items, then
cube root and so on. Geometric mean can be computed through logarithmic
method or by using a calculator.
7.1.4 Variance and Standard Deviation
Variance: The occurrence of an event may deviate from the mean or an
expected value. The spread of such occurrences around the expected value
can be measured by variance. Thus, variance equals to average of squares of
the deviation of each value from the mean. It may be expressed as:
N
å( Xj -X )2)2 2
å(X -X å x
22 j =1
Variance = s = OR s = = =
N NN
where x represents the deviations of each of the numbers X j from the mean
X .
Standard deviation has been used as a proxy measure for risk of a security.
It measures the fluctuations around mean returns. It equals to the positive
square root of variance.
289
N
(X -X )2å j å( X -X )2
j=1
Standard deviation = Variance = s / S =
=
NN
Where it is necessary to distinguish the standard deviation of a population
from the standard deviation of a sample drawn from this population, we often
use the symbol s for the letter and s (lower case Greek sigma) for the
2
former. Thus, s 2 and s would represent the sample variance and
population variance, respectively. Sometimes the standard deviation of a
sample s data is defined with (N-1) replacing N in the denominations in above
equations because the resulting value represents a better estimate for the
standard deviation of a population from which the sample is taken. For large
values of N (certainly N>30), there is practically no difference between the
two definitions.
Example 5: The stock returns of the company A for past five years are 10%,
20% 5%, 30% and 35%. What is the standard deviation of the returns for the
returns of the company A?
10 + 20 + 5 + 30 + 35
X = =20
5
s =
N
XX
N
j
jå
=
-
1
2)(
s =
5
)]2035[()]2030[()]205[()]2020[()]2010[(22222 -+-+-+-+-
s =
5
)15()10()15()0()10( 22222 ++-++-
=
5
2251002250100 ++++
=
5
650
s = 130 =11.40
7.1.5 Coefficient of Variation
The actual dispersion/variation as determined by standard deviation, is called
absolute dispersion. Relative dispersion, on the other hand gives feel about
absolute dispersion relative to mean/average. In other words, If the absolute
dispersion is the standard deviation (s ) and average is the mean ( X ), then
290
the relative dispersion is called coefficient of dispersion or coefficient of
variation (V). It is given by:
s
V=
It is generally expressed as a percentage.
Example 6: Security A gives a return of 12% with a dispersion of 4%, while
security B gives a return of 20% with a dispersion of 5%. Which security is
more risky?
Coefficient of Variation for Security A = (4/12) = 0.33 or 33% and
Coefficient of Variation for Security B = (5/20) = 0.25 or 25%. Therefore, the
security A is more risky in relation to its return.
7.1.6 Covariance
Covariance describes the nature of relationship between two
variables/securities. If X and Y are two securities, then the covariance
between the two securities is given by the following formula:
[ (Xi-X)(Yi-Y)]
covxy = where i = (1, 2, 3,..,n)
N
When two securities are combined, if rates of return of two securities move
together, their interactive risk/covariance is said to be positive and vice
versa. If rates of return are independent, then the covariance is zero.
7.1.7 Coefficient of Correlation
Coefficient of correlation is another measure designed to indicate the
similarity or dissimilarity in the behaviour of two variables (here two
securities x and y). The total variation consists of explained variation as well
as unexplained variation. The ratio of the explained variation to the total
variation is called the co-efficient of determination . Since the ratio is always
2
non-negative, it is denoted by r .The quantity rxy is called the coefficient of
correlation and is given by:
cov
xy
r =
xy
ss
xy
where,s = standard deviation of x
x
s y = standard deviation of y
It ranges between 1 and +1 (+1 perfectly correlated, 0 uncorrelated and 1
perfectly negatively correlated).
291
7.1.8 Normal Distribution
A distribution function is often used to define a behaviour of a population
(values in a population). A function can be discrete (Binomial, Poisson etc.) or
continuous (Normal, Gaussian etc.). The Normal distribution is a continuous
probability distribution function defined in terms of mean and standard
deviation. The shape of a normal distribution is a symmetrical and bell-
shaped curve. The mean, median and mode are the same under normal
distribution. The probability of any value falling within any range can be
determined. With ±1s from the mean, there will be a 68.5% probability of an
outcome occurring, with ±2s from the mean there will be a 95% probability,
and with ±3s deviation from the mean, there will be a 99% probability. The
stock price over a period of time tends to follow a pattern which is similar to
the normal distribution.
1. Example : A stock is at Rs.1000 on day 1. The total risk 's' of the stock
is 3% per day. What range of prices would be observed on day 2 with 99%
probability?
At 99% probability, the value can lie anywhere between ±3s from the mean
That is, the price can vary from 1000 (3 * 3% * 1000) = 1000 90 =
Rs.910
to 1000 + (3 * 3% * 1000) = 1000 + 90 = Rs.1090
Hence, the price can vary between Rs.910 to Rs.1090 on the next day.
7.2 RETURN AND RISK
Return and risk are the two key determinants of security prices or values.
This calls for an explicit and quantitative understanding of the concepts.
7.2.1 Return and Risk of a Single Asset
Return on an investment/asset for given period, say a year, consists of
annual income (dividend) receivable plus change in market price.
Symbolically,
Ydt +(Pt -Pt -1)
Rate of Return (R) = Pt -1
Where,
Yd = annual income/cash dividend at the end of time period t .
t
P = security price at time period t which is closing/ending price.
t
P = security price at time period t-1 which is opening/beginning price.
For example, for a security if price at the beginning of the year is Rs. 50.00;
dividend receivable at the end of the year is Rs. 2.50; and price at the end of
the year is Rs. 55.00 then, the rate of return on this security is:
292
2.50 + (55.00 -50.00)
= 0.15 = 15% .
50
The rate of return of 15 per cent has two components:
(i) Current yield i.e annual income ÷ opening/beginning price = 2.50 ÷ 50.00
=.05 = 5% and
(ii) Capital gains/loss yield, i.e. (end price-opening price) ÷
opening/beginning price = (Rs.55 Rs. 50) ÷ Rs. 50 =0.1 = 10%
Risk may be described as variability/fluctuation/deviation of actual return
from expected return from a given asset/investment. Higher the variability,
greater is the risk. In other words, the more certain the return from an asset,
lesser is the variability and thereby lesser is the risk.
Types of Risks:
The risk of a security can be broadly classified into two types such as
systematic risk and unsystematic risk. Standard deviation has been used as a
proxy measure for total risk.
Systematic Risk
Systematic Risk refers to that portion of total variability (/risk) in return
caused by factors affecting the prices of all securities. Economic, political, a
nd
sociological changes are the main sources of systematic risk. Though it affects
all the securities in the market, the extend to which it affects a security will
vary from one security to another. Systematic risk can not be diversified.
Systematic risk can be measured in terms of Beta (ß), a statistical measure.
The beta for market portfolio is equal to one by definition. Beta of one (ß=1),
indicates that volatility of return on the security is same as the market or
index; beta more than one (ß>1) indicates that the security has more
unavoidable risk or is more volatile than market as a whole, and beta less
than one (ß<1) indicates that the security has less systematic risk or is less
volatile than market.
Unsystematic risk
Unsystematic Risk refers to that portion of total risk that is unique or peculia
r
to a firm or an industry, above and beyond that affecting securities markets
in general. Factors like consumer preferences, labour strikes, management
capability etc. cause unsystematic risk (/variability of returns) for a
company s stock. Unlike systematic risk, the unsystematic risk can be
reduced/avoided through diversification. Total risk of a fully diversified
portfolio equals to the market risk of the portfolio as its specific risk become
s
zero.
Measurement of Risk for a Single Asset:
The statistical measures of a risk of an asset are: (a) Standard Deviation and
(b) Co-efficient of variation.
(a) Standard Deviation of Return: Standard deviation, as discussed earlier,
is the most common statistical measure of risk of an asset from the expected
293
value of return. It represents the square root of average squared deviations
of individual returns from the expected return. Symbolically,
n
(Ri -R)2
s =å
i=1 N
(b) Co-efficient of variation: is a measure of risk per unit of expected
return. It converts standard deviation of expected values into relative values
to enable comparison of risks associated with assets having different expected
values. The coefficient of variation (CV) is computed by dividing the standard
deviation of return, s R , for an asset by its expected value, R . Symbolically,
s R
CV =
R
The larger the CV, the larger the relative risk of the asset.
7.2.2 Return and Risk of a portfolio
Investors prefer investing in a portfolio of assets (combination of two or more
securities/assets) rather than investing in a single asset. The expected
returns on a portfolio is a weighted average of the expected returns of
individual securities or assets comprising the portfolio. The weights are equal
to the proportion to amount invested in each security to the total amount.
For example, when a portfolio consists of two securities, its expected return
is:
RP = w1 R1 + (1 -w1)R2
where,
RP = Expected return on a portfolio
w1 = proportion of portfolio invested in security 1
(1-w1 ) = proportion of portfolio invested in security 2.
In general, expected return on a portfolio consisting of n securities is
expressed as:
n
RP =åwi Ri
i =1
Illustration: What is the portfolio return, if expected returns for the three
assets such as A, B, and C, are 20%, 15% and 10% respectively, assuming
that the amount of investment made in these assets are Rs. 10,000, Rs.
20,000, and Rs. 30,000 respectively.
Weights for each of the assets A, B, and C respectively may be calculated as
follows:
294
Total Amount invested in the portfolio of 3 assets (A, B, and C) = Rs. 10,000
+ Rs. 20,000 + Rs.30,000 = Rs. 60,000.
Weight for the asset A = 10000/60000 = 1/6 = 0.1667
Weight for the asset B = 20000/60000 = 1/3 = 0.3333
Weight for the asset C = 30000/60000 = 1/2 = 0.5
Given expected returns for the three assets A, B, and C, as 20%, 15% and
10% respectively, Returns on Portfolio
= (0.1667*0.20)+(0.3333*0.15)+(0.5*0.10)
= 0.13334*100 =13.33%
Measurement of Risk for a portfolio

According to the Modern Portfolio Theory, while the expected return of a
portfolio is a weighted average of the expected returns of individual securities
(or assets) included in the portfolio, the risk of a portfolio measured by
variance(or standard deviation) is not equal to the weighted average of the
risk of individual securities included in the portfolio. The risk of a portfolio
not
only depends on variance/risk of individual securities but also on co-variances
between the returns on the individual securities.
Given the covariance between the returns on the individual securities, the
portfolio variance consisting of n securities is calculated as:
nn
2
Cov(RR )the returns on two securities, [] may be expressed as:,
å
=
a 1 b 1
Since the covariance between two variables is the product of their standard
deviations multiplied by their co-efficient of correlation, covariance between
ab
Cov(R , R ) = r ss
a b abab
where,
rab = coefficient of correlation between Ra and Rb
s = standard deviation of Ra
a
s b = standard deviation of Rb
Hence, in case co-variances are not known and correlation co-efficients are
2
given, the Portfolio variance (s p ) can be calculated with following formula:
n
n
a 1 b 1
wa wbCov(R , R )
Var (R p ) =
(7.1)
s P
=
b
a
ww r ss
s
=
b
ab
b
a
a
p
(7.1a)
295
Portfolio with Two Securities:
Assuming a portfolio consisting of two securities (i.e. n=2), Portfolio Variance
for the two securities is calculated by substituting n=2 in the formula (7.1) as
follows:
Var (R p )=
+
ww r ss
212.1 2
+
2
(7.2)
s
ww r ss
1 1 1.1 1
ww r ss
11
ww r ss
22
P
1
2
1.2
2
1
2
2.2
The first and the last terms can be simplified. Clearly the return on a security
is perfectly (positively) correlated with itself. Thus, r1.1 =1, as does r2.2 =1
.
Because r2.1 = r1.2 , the second terms can be combined. The result is:
s
2
22
s
2
1+ w2
Portfolio Variance, Var(RP )
2+2 w1 w2 r1.2 s1s
=s P
= w
1
2
2
OR substituting r1.2 s1s by Cov (1, 2), we get,
2
2
22
s
s
2
1+ w2
Var(RP )
2+2 w1 w2Cov (1, 2)
=s P
= w
1
2
Portfolio Risk (standard deviation)s P = PorfolioVariance
Illustration: The standard deviation of the two securities (a, b) are 20% and
10% respectively. The two securities in the portfolio are assigned equal
weights. If their correlation coefficient is +1, 0 or 1 what is the portfolio
risk?
(i)When the correlation is +1
Portfolio Variance = 0.52*0.22+ 0.52*0.102+2 *0.5*0.5* Cov (a, b)
= 0.25*0.04 +0.25*0.01+2 *0.25 *1*0.2*0.1
= 0.0100 +0.0025 +2 *0.25 *1*0.02
= 0.0100 +0.0025 +0.0100
=0.0225
Portfolio Risk (Standard Deviation) =
(ii) When the correlation is 0
Portfolio Variance
= 0.52*0.22+ 0.52*0.102+2 *0.5*0.5* Cov (a, b)
= 0.0100 +0.0025 + 0
=0.0125
Portfolio Risk (Standard Deviation) = PorfolioVariance = 0.1118
(iii) When the correlation is -1
Portfolio Variance
= 0.52*0.22+ 0.52*0.102+2 *0.5*0.5* Cov (a, b)
= 0.0100 +0.0025 + (-0.0100)
= 0.0025
Portfolio Risk (Standard Deviation) =
riancePorfolioVa= 0.15
riancePorfolioVa= 0.05
296
Portfolio with Three Securities:
Illustration:
Consider the following three securities and the relevant data on each:
Security1 Security2 Security3
Expected return 10 12 8
Standard deviation 10 15 5
Correction coefficients:
Stocks 1, 2 = .3
2, 3 = .4
1, 3 = .5
The proportion (weights) assigned to each of the securities as security 1=
0.2; security 2=0.4; and security 3=0.4. What is portfolio risk?
Using the formula for portfolio risk (equation 7.1)and expanding it for N = 3,
we get:
22 2 2
s p =W 12 s 1 +W 22 s 2 +W 32 s 3 +2W 1 W 2 r1.2 s 1 s 2 +2W 3 W 2 r2.3 s 3 s 2
+2W 3
W 1 r1.3 s 3 s 1
Capital Asset Pricing Model (CAPM)
Portfolio Theory developed by Harry Markowitz is essentially a normative
approach as it prescribes what a rational investor should do. On the other
hand, Capital Asset Pricing Model (CAPM) developed by William Sharpe and
others is an exercise in positive economics as it is concerned with (i) what is
the relationship between risk and return for efficient portfolio? and (ii) What
is
the relationship between risk and return for an individual security? CAPM
assumes that individuals are risk averse.
CAPM describes the relationship/trade-off between risk and expected/required
return. It explains the behaviour of security prices and provides mechanism
to assess the impact of an investment in a proposed security on risks and
return of investors overall portfolio. The CAPM provides framework for
understanding the basic risk-return trade-offs involved in various types of
investment decisions. It enables drawing certain implications about risk and
the size of risk premiums necessary to compensate for bearing risks.
Using beta (ß) as the measure of nondiversifiable risk, the CAPM is used to
define the required return on a security according to the following equation:
R s =R f + b (R - R f )
sm
Where:
R = the return required on the investment
s
297
R f = the return that can be earned on a risk-free investment (e.g.
Treasury bill)
R = the average return on all securities (e.g., S&P 500 Stock Index)
m
b = the security s beta (systematic) risk
s
It is easy to see the required return for a given security increases with
increases in its beta.
Application of the CAPM can be demonstrated. Assume a security with a beta
of 1.2 is being considered at a time when the risk-free rate is 4 percent and
the market return is expected to be 12 percent. Substituting these data into
the CAPM equation, we get
R = 4%+ [1.20* (12%-4%)]
s
= 4%+ [1.20* 8%]
= 4%+ 9.6% = 13.6%
The investor should therefore require a 13.6 percent return on this
investment a compensation for the non-diversifiable risk assumed, given the
security s beta of 1.2. If the beta were lower, say 1.00, the required return
would be 12 percent [4%+ [1.00*(12%-4%)]: and if the beta had been
higher, say 1.50, the required return would be 16 percent [4%+ [1.50*
(12%-4%)]. Thus, CAPM reflects a positive mathematical relationship
between risk and return, since the higher the risk (beta) the higher the
required return.
7.3 FUNDAMENTAL ANALYSIS
Fundamental analysis is an examination of future earnings potential of a
company, by looking into various factors that impact the performance of the
company. The prime objective of a fundamental analysis is to value the stock
and accordingly buy and sell the stocks on the basis of its valuation in the
market. The fundamental analysis consists of economic, industry and
company analysis. This approach is sometimes referred to as a top-down
method of analysis.
7.3.1 Valuation of a Stock
Dividend Discount Model
According to Dividend Discount Model (DDM), the value of a stock is equal to
the present value of all future cash flows in the form of dividends plus the
present value of the sale price expected when the equity share is sold. The
298
DDM assumes that the a constant amount of dividend is paid annually and
that the first dividend is received one year after the equity share is bought.
If investors expect to hold an equity share for one year, then the current price
of the share can be calculated as:
DP
P = 1 + 1
0 (1 + r) (1 + r)
Where
P0 = Current price/market price of the share today
D1 = Dividend expected at end of year 1
r = required rate of return/discount rate
P1 = market price/expected price of share at end of year 1
Illustration
In future, a company is expected to consistently pay dividend of 15% p.a on
its share par value of Rs. 100. If the investors required rate of return on the
share is 12%, What would be the current theoretical value (sell price) of the
share now?
Given, Dividend = D1 = Rs. 15; r = 12%; P1 = 100 the current price (P0 ) will
be:
D1 P1 15 100
P0 =+ = + = Rs. 102.68
(1 + r) (1 + r) 1.12 1.12
Constant Growth DDM:
Constant Growth DDM presumes that the dividend per share is growing at
constant rate (g). The value of the share ( P0 ) can be calculated as:
D1
P0 =
r -g
Where,
D1 = Dividend per share at the end of first year.
r = Expected rate of return/Discount rate
g = Constant growth rate
Illustration: In future, company is expected to pay dividend of 15% p.a with
growth rate of 5% on its share par value of Rs. 100. If the required rate of
return on the share is 12%, What is the theoretical value of the share?
15 15
P0 = == Rs.214.29
(0.12 -0.05) 0.07
299
7.3.2 Economic Analysis
It is important to analyse the economic activity in which all the companies
operate. The economic activity affects profits of a company, investor s
attitude as well as expectations and, value of a security.
Economic Indicators
Global Economy
The top-down analysis of a company starts with global and domestic
economy. The globalization affects a company s prospects of exports, price
competition, and exchange rate.
Domestic Economy
GDP is the measure of the total production of goods and services in an
economy. Growing GDP indicates an expanding economy. An Indian economy
is affected by both agricultural production as well as industrial production and
services. The good and normal monsoon indicates a good and normal
agricultural production and increasing income of farmers and agricultural
labour. Industrial production statistics reveals the status of industrial activi
ty
in the country.
Employment: Unemployment rate is the percentage of the total labour force
in the country. The unemployment rate indicates how the economy operates
at full capacity.
Inflation is the rate at which the general level of prices is rising. High rate
of
inflation indicates economy is operating with full associated with demand for
goods and services exceed production capacity. The government should try to
trade-off between inflation rate and unemployment rate to increase the
employment as well as decrease the inflation rate.
Interest Rates: As interest rate determines the present value of cash flows,
high interest rate affects demand for housing and high-value consumer
durables. The real interest rate is an important factor for business activity.
Budget Deficit: The budget deficit is the difference between government
spending and revenues. Higher budget deficit indicates higher government
borrowing which pressure up interest rates. The excessive government
borrowing will crowd out private borrowing if the borrowing is unchecked.
Fiscal deficit is budget deficit plus borrowing. Higher fiscal deficit indicates
higher government spending on unproductive spending.
Other Factors: Money supply, Fiscal Policy, Monetary Policy, Manufacturing
and trade sales, Labour productivity, Index of consumer expectations, New
acquisition of plants and machinery by corporates, Stock prices, Personal
300
income, Tax collections by the government, FII investments, FDI investments,
Credit off takes etc.
7.3.3 Industry Analysis
Recessions or expansions in economic activity may translate into falling or
rising stock markets with different relative price changes among industry
groups. For the analyst, industry analysis calls for insight into (1) the key
sectors or subdivisions of overall economic activity that influence particular
industries, and (2) the relative strength or weakness of particular industry or
other groupings about economic activity.
Major Classifications
The industry can be classified by product and services in the categories like
Basic Industries, Capital Goods, Consumer Durables, Consumer Non-
Durables, Consumer Services, Energy, Financial Services, Health Care, Public
Utilities, Technology, Transportation etc.
Classification based on Business Cycles: Industry can be classified on the
basis of it s reaction to upswings and downswings of the economy which is
known as business cycles. General classifications of the industry based on the
business cycles are growth industry, cyclical industry, defensive industry, and
cyclical-growth industry.
Growth industry: The major characteristics of a growth industry are

higher rate of expansion, growth in earnings, and independent of the
business cycles. Often associated with technological changes or
innovative means of carrying out things. Between 40 s and 60 s,
industries like photography, colour television, computers,
pharmaceuticals, office equipments were growth industries.
Communication equipments, Software, genetic engineering, and
environmental/waste management are the recent growth industries.
Cyclical industry: It is most likely to benefit from a period of economic
prosperity and suffer from economic recession. Consumer durables are
the major cyclical industry.
Defensive industry: is likely to get least affected during the periods of
economic downswing as consists of items necessary for existence. The
demand for these products is considered to be counter cyclical. Food
processing industry, consumer non-durables fall in the category of
defensive industry.
Other Factors: Past Sales and Earnings Performance, Government policy and
regulation toward industry, Labour conditions, Competitive conditions,
Industry life cycle, International investing community attitude, Industry share
price etc.
301
7.4 TECHNICAL ANALYSIS
In fundamental analysis, a value of a stock is predicted with risk-return
framework based on economic environment. An alternative approach to
predict stock price behaviour is known as technical analysis. It is frequently
used as a supplement rather than as a substitute to fundamental analysis.
Technical analysis is based on notion that security prices are determined by
the supply of and demand for securities. It uses historical financial data on
charts to find meaningful patterns, and using the patterns to predict future
prices.
Edwards and Magee formulate the basic assumptions underlying technical
analysis:
The interaction of supply and demand determines the market value of

the security.
The various factors, both rational and irrational factors, govern the
supply and demand of the securities.
Stock price tend to move in trend which persist for an appreciable
length of time.
Changes in trend are caused by shifts in supply and demand.
Shifts in supply and demand can be detected sooner or later in charts
of market action.
Some chart patterns tend to repeat themselves.
However, the fundamental analysis estimates the intrinsic value of a security,
while technical analysis seeks to estimate security prices rather than values.
7.4.1 Dow Theory
The ideas of Charles H. Dow, the first editor of the Wall Street Journal, form
the basis of technical analysis today. According to the hypothesis of Dow, the
stock market does not perform on random basis but is influenced by three
cyclical trends, namely, (a) Primary trend, (b) secondary or intermediate
trend, and (3) Tertiary or minor trend. The general market direction can be
predicted by following these trends. The primary trends are the long-term
movement of prices, lasting from several months to several years. They are
commonly called bear or bull markets. Secondary trends are caused by short-
term deviations of prices from the underlying trend line. They last only a few
months. The secondary trend acts as a restraining force on the primary trend,
tending to correct deviations from its general boundaries. Minor trends are
daily fluctuations in either directions (bull or bear) which are of little analy
tical
value. In terms of bull and bear markets the trends are described as follows:
The first phase of a bull market is the accumulation phase. This is

when prices are depressed and financial reports don't look good.
However, farsighted investors use this period of depressed prices to
take advantage and buy shares.
302
The second phase of the bull market is characterized by increased
activity, rising prices, and better financial reports. This is the period
where the large gains are made. At this point, the market becomes
vulnerable to a reversal.
The first phase of a bear market is the distribution phase. This is
where farsighted investors see the uninformed investors scrambling to
buy shares. The farsighted investors begin to sell shares. Oversupply
leads to weakening prices and profits are harder to come by.
The second phase of the bear market is characterized by near panic
selling. Prices accelerate to the downside and more and more people
begin to liquidate their holdings.
The third phase of the bear market is characterized by further
weakening and erosion of prices. Lesser quality issues erase the gains
of the previous bull market. The news is full of bad market news.
The second part of the Dow Theory is that the Industrial Average and the
Railroad Average must corroborate each other's direction for there to be a
reliable market direction signal. Dow created the Industrial Average, of top
blue chip stocks, and a second average of top railroad stocks (now the
Transport Average). He believed that the behavior of the averages reflected
the hopes and fears of the entire market. The behavior patterns that he
observed apply to markets throughout the world. (at the time of Dow's
writing there was only the Railroad Average. In 1969, Dow Jones & Company
broadened this to include truckers and airlines so that today it would be
confirmation by the Industrial Average and the Transportation Average).
According to Dow theory, large active stocks will generally reflect the market
averages. However, individual issues may deviate from the broad averages
because of circumstances peculiar to them.
The logic behind the makeup of the specific averages is that both the
industrials and the transports are independent of each other. Yet, for the
industrials to get their products to market, they must use the transports.
When the industrials are doing well, the transports will do well. However,
when one sector is doing substantially better than the other, a divergence is
taking place. This demonstrates that one sector is much stronger than the
other; and if it continues, without the other sector catching up, a major
reversal in the market will take place.
Dow Theory also specifies that closing prices should only be used. This is
because closing prices reflect the price level at which informed investors are
willing to carry positions overnight.
Thus, Dow theory is used to indicate reversals and trends in the markets as
well as individual security. The basic tenet of Dow theory is that there is a
positive relationship between trend and volume of shares traded.
303
7.4.2 Charts
Charting represents a key activity for a technical analyst during individual
stock analysis. The probable future performance of a stock can be predicted
and evolving and changing patterns of price behaviour can be detected based
on historical price-volume information of the stock. Technical analysis
involves three basic types of charts. They are (a) Line charts, (b) Bar charts,
and (3) Point and figure charts. The line charts indicate the lines which are
used to connect successive days prices. The Bar charts indicate vertical bars
representing each day s price movement. Each bar spans the distance from
the day s highest price to the lowest price with a small cross on the bar marks
the closing price. Point and figure charts are more complex than line and bar
charts. Point and figure chart are not only used to detect reversals in a trend,
but also used to forecasts the price, called price targets. The only significant
price changes are posted to point and figure charts. Three or five point price
changes as posted for high prices securities, only one point changes are
posted follow prices securities. While line and bar charts have two dimensions
with vertical column indicating trading day, point and figure chart represents
each column as a significant reversals instead of a trading day.
7.5 FINANCIAL STATEMENT ANALYSIS
Financial statement consists of Balance Sheet, Profit and Loss Account,
Sources and Uses of Funds Statements, and Auditors Notes to the Financial
statements. The Balance sheet shows the financial position of the firm at a
particular point of time. The profit and loss account (Income Statement)
shows the financial performance of the firm over a period of time. The
sources and uses of funds statements reflect the flow of funds through the
business during a given period of time.
7.5.1 Balance Sheet
The balance sheet of a company, according to the Companies Act, should be
either in account form or the report form.
Balance Sheet: Account Form
Liabilities Assets
Share Capital Fixed Assets
Reserves and Surplus Investments
Secured loans Current Assets, loans and Advances
Unsecured loans Miscellaneous expenditure
Current liabilities and provisions
304
Liabilities:
Share Capital: Share capital has been divided into equity capital and
preference capital. The share capital represents the contribution of
owners of the company. Equity capital does not have fixed rate of
dividend. The preference capital represents contribution of preference
shareholders and has fixed rate of dividend.
Reserves and Surplus: The reserves and surpluses are the profits
retained in the company. The reserves can be divided into revenue
reserves and capital reserves. Revenue reserves represent
accumulated retained earnings from the profits of business operations.
Capital reserves are those gained which are not related to business
operations. The premium on issue of shares and gain on revaluation of
assets are examples of the capital reserves.
Secured and Unsecured Loans: Secured loans are the borrowings
against the security. They are in the form of debentures, loans from
financial institutions and loans from commercial banks. The unsecured
loans are the borrowings without a specific security. They are fixed
deposits, loans and advances from promoters, inter-corporate
borrowings, and unsecured loans from the banks.
Current Liabilities and Provisions: They are amounts due to the
suppliers of goods and services brought on credit, advances payments
received, accrued expenses, unclaimed dividend, provisions for taxes,
dividends, gratuity, pensions, etc.
Assets:
Fixed Assets: Theses assets are acquired for long-terms and are used
for business operation, but not meant for resale. The land and
buildings, plant, machinery, patents, and copyrights are the fixed
assets.
Investments: The investments are the financial securities either for
long-term or short-term. The incomes and gains from the investments
is not from the business operations.
Current Assets, Loans, and Advances: This consists of cash and
other resources which can be converted into cash during the business
operation. Current assets are held for a short-term period. The current
assets are cash, debtors, inventories, loans and advances, and prepaid
expenses.
305
Miscellaneous Expenditures and Losses: The miscellaneous
expenditures represent certain outlays such as preliminary expenses
and pre-operative expenses not written off. Though loss indicates a
decrease in the owners equity, the share capital can not be reduced
with loss. Instead, Share capital and losses are shown separately on
the liabilities side and assets side of the balance sheet.
Balance Sheet: Report Form
I. Sources of Funds
1. Shareholders Funds
(a) Share Capital
(b) Reserves & surplus
2. Loan Funds
(a) Secured loans
(b) Unsecured loans
II. Application of Funds
(i) Fixed Assets
(ii) Investments
(iii) Current Assets, loans and advances
Less: Current liabilities and provisions
Net current assets
(iv) Miscellaneous expenditure and losses
7.5.2 Profit and Loss Account
Profit and Loss account is the second major statement of financial
information. It indicates the revenues and expenses during particular period
of time. The period of time is an accounting period/year, April-March. The
profit and loss account can be presented broadly into two forms: (i) usual
account form and (ii) step form. The accounting report summarizes the
revenue items, the expense items, and the difference between them (net
income) for an accounting period.
Mere statistics/data presented in the different financial statements do not
reveal the true picture of a financial position of a firm. Properly analyzed and
interpreted financial statements can provide valuable insights into a firm s
performance. To extract the information from the financial statements, a
number of tools are used to analyse such statements. The most popular tool
is the Ratio Analysis.
7.5.3 Ratio Analysis
Financial ratio is a quantitative relationship between two items/variables.
Financial ratios can be broadly classified into three groups: (I) Liquidity rati
os,
(II) Leverage/Capital structure ratio, and (III) Profitability ratios.
306
(I) Liquidity ratios
Liquidity refers to the ability of a firm to meet its financial obligations in t
he
short-term which is less than a year. Certain ratios which indicate the liquidit
y
of a firm are: (i) Current Ratio, (ii) Acid Test Ratio, (iii) Turnover Ratios. I
t is
based upon the relationship between current assets and current liabilities.
Current.Assets
(i) Current ratio =
Current.Liabilitie s
The current ratio measures the ability of the firm to meet its current liabiliti
es
from the current assets. Higher the current ratio, greater the short-term
solvency (i.e. larger is the amount of rupees available per rupee of liability).
Quick.Assets
(ii) Acid-test Ratio =
Current.Liabilities
Quick assets are defined as current assets excluding inventories and prepaid
expenses. The acid-test ratio is a measurement of firm s ability to convert its
current assets quickly into cash in order to meet its current liabilities.
Generally speaking 1:1 ratio is considered to be satisfactory.
(iii) Turnover Ratios:
Turnover ratios measure how quickly certain current assets are converted into
cash or how efficiently the assets are employed by a firm. The important
turnover ratios are:
-Inventory Turnover Ratio,
-Debtors Turnover Ratio,
-Average Collection Period,
-Fixed Assets Turnover and
-Total Assets Turnover
CostofGoodsSold
Inventory Turnover Ratio =
AverageInventoty
Where, the cost of goods sold means sales minus gross profit. Average
Inventory refers to simple average of opening and closing inventory. The
inventory turnover ratio tells the efficiency of inventory management. Higher
the ratio, more the efficient of inventory management.
NetCreditSales
Debtors Turnover Ratio =
AverageAccountsRe ceivable(Debtors)
The ratio shows how many times accounts receivable (debtors) turn over
during the year. If the figure for net credit sales is not available, then net
307
sales figure is to be used. Higher the debtors turnover, the greater the
efficiency of credit management.
AverageDebtors
Average Collection Period =
AverageDailyCreditSales
Average Collection Period represents the number of days worth credit sales
that is locked in debtors (accounts receivable).
Please note that the Average Collection Period and the Accounts Receivable
(Debtors) Turnover are related as follows:
365 Days
Average Collection Period =
DebtorsTurnover
Fixed Assets turnover ratio measures sales per rupee of investment in fixed
assets. In other words, how efficiently fixed assets are employed. Higher ratio
is preferred. It is calculated as follows:
Net.Sales
Fixed Assets turnover ratio =
NetFixedAssets
Total Assets turnover ratio measures how efficiently all types of assets are
employed.
Net.Sales
Total Assets turnover ratio =
AverageTotalAssets
(II) Leverage/Capital structure ratios
Long term financial strength or soundness of a firm is measured in terms of
its ability to pay interest regularly or repay principal on due dates or at the
time of maturity. Such long term solvency of a firm can be judged by using
leverage or capital structure ratios. Broadly there are two sets of ratios: Firs
t,
the ratios based on the relationship between borrowed funds and owner s
capital which are computed from the balance sheet. Some such ratios are:
Debt to Equity and Debt to Asset ratios. The second set of ratios which are
calculated from Profit and Loss Account are: The interest coverage ratio and
debt service coverage ratio are coverage ratio for leverage risk.
(i) Debt-Equity ratio reflects relative contributions of creditors and owners to
finance the business.
Debt
Debt-Equity ratio =
Equity
The desirable/ ideal proportion of the two components (high or low ratio)
varies from industry to industry.
308
(ii) Debt-Asset Ratio: Total debt comprises of long term debt plus current
liabilities. The total assets comprise of permanent capital plus current
liabilities.
Total Debt
Debt-Asset Ratio =
Total Assets
The second set or the coverage ratios measure the relationship between
proceeds from the operations of the firm and the claims of outsiders.
Earnings Before Interest and Taxes
(iii) Interest Coverage ratio =
Interest
Higher the interest coverage ratio better is the firm s ability to meet its
interest burden. The lenders use this ratio to assess debt servicing capacity of
a firm.
(iv)Debt Service Coverage Ratio (DSCR) is a more comprehensive and apt to
compute debt service capacity of a firm. Financial institutions calculate the
average DSCR for the period during which the term loan for the project is
repayable. The Debt Service Coverage Ratio is defined as follows:
Pr ofit.after.tax + Depreciation + OtherNoncashExpenditure + Interest.on.term.lo
an
Interest onterm loan + Re paymentof termloan
(III) Profitability ratios
Profitability and operating/management efficiency of a firm is judged mainly
by the following profitability ratios:
Gross Profit
(i) Gross Profit Ratio =
Net Sales
Net Profit
(ii) Net Profit Ratio =

Net Sales
Some of the profitability ratios related to investments are:
Net Income
(iii) Return on Total Assets =
Average Total Assets
Net Profit
(iv) Return on Capital Employed =
Capital Employed
(Here, Capital Employed = Fixed Assets + Current Assets -Current Liabilities)
309
Return on Shareholders Equity
Net IncomeAfterTax
=
AverageTotal Shareholders' Equity or NetWorth
(Net worth includes Shareholders equity capital plus reserves and surplus)
A common (equity) shareholder has only a residual claim on profits and
assets of a firm, i.e., only after claims of creditors and preference
shareholders are fully met, the equity shareholders receive a distribution of
profits or assets on liquidation. A measure of his well being is reflected by
return on equity. There are several other measures to calculate return on
shareholders equity:
(i) Earnings Per Share (EPS): EPS measures the profit available to the equity
shareholders per share, that is, the amount that they can get on every share
held. It is calculated by dividing the profits available to the shareholders by
number of outstanding shares. The profits available to the ordinary
shareholders are arrived at by net profits after taxes and preference dividend.
It indicates the value of equity in the market.
Net Profit
EPS =
Number of Ordinary Shares Outstanding
Market Pr ice per Share
(ii) Price-earnings ratios = P/E Ratio =
EPS
Illustration:
Balance Sheet of ABC Co. Ltd. as on March 31, 2008
(Rs. in Crore)
Liabilities Amount Assets Amount
Share Capital
(1,00,00,000 equity shares
of Rs.10 each)
Reserves & Surplus
Secured Loans
Unsecured Loans
Current Liabilities & Provisions
Total
16.0022.0021.0025.0016.00100Fixed Assets (net)
Current Assets:
Cash & Bank
Debtors
Inventories
Pre-paid expenses
Investments
Total
0.20
11.80
10.60
0.80
60.0023.40
16.60
100
310
Profit & Loss Account of ABC Co. Ltd.
for the year ending on March 31, 2008:
(Rs. in Crore)
Particulars Amount Particulars Amount
Opening Stock
Purchases
Wages and Salaries
Other Mfg. Expenses
Gross Profit
13.0069.0012.00
10.00
16.00
Sales (net)
Closing Stock
105.00
15.00
Total 120.00Total 120.00
Administrative and Personnel
Expenses
Selling and Distribution Expenses
Depreciation
Interest
Net Profit
1.502.00
2.50
1.00
9.00
Gross Profit 16.00
Income Tax
Equity Dividend
Retained Earning
4.003.00
2.00
Net Profit 9.00
Market price per equity share -Rs. 20.00
Current Ratio = Current Assets / Current Liabilities
= 23.40/16.00 = 1.46
Quick Ratio = Quick Assets / Current Liabilities
=Current Assets-(inventory + prepaid expenses)/Current Liabilities
= [23.40-(10.60+0.8)]/16.00 = 12.00/16.00 = 0.75
Inventory Turnover Ratio = Cost of goods sold/Average Inventory
= (Net Sales-Gross Profit)/ [(opening stock+closing stock)/2]
= (105-16)/ [(15+13)/2] = 89/14 = 6.36
Debtors Turnover Ratio= Net Sales/Average account receivables (Debtors)
=105/11.80 =8.8983
Average Collection period = 365 days / Debtors turnover
= 365 days/8.8983 = 41 days
311
Fixed Assets Turnover ratio = Net Sales / Net Fixed Assets
= 105/60 = 1.75
Debt to Equity Ratio = Debt/ Equity
= (21.00+25.00)/(16.00+22.00) = 46/38 = 1.21
Gross Profit Ratio = Gross Profit/Net Sales

= 16.00/105.00 = 0.15238 or 15.24%
Net Profit Ratio = Net Profit / Net Sales = 9/105.00 = 0.0857 or 8.57 %
Return on Shareholders Equity = Net Profit after tax/Net worth

= 5.00/(16.00+22.00) =0.13157 or 13.16%
MODEL QUESTIONS
Ques:1 Security A gives a return of 10% with a dispersion of 4%, while
security B gives a return of 18% with a dispersion of 6%. Which
security is more risky?
(a) Security A
(b) Security B
(c) Both securities are equally risky
(d) Neither of the securities are risky
Correct Answer: (a) (refer to section 7.1.5)
Ques:2 How much is the correlation coefficient between the companies A and
B, If their covariance
respectively are 6 and 5?
are 20 and their standard deviations
(a) 1.5
(c) >0.67
(b) 0.67
(d) <1.5
Correct Answer: (b) (refer to section 7.1.7)
Ques:3
The market prices of the security A are Rs. 130 and Rs. 110 at the
end of the month and at the end of the last month respectively.
What is the total return on the security A for the current month,
assuming there is no dividend?
(a) 20%
(b) 30%
(c) 18.18%
(d) 33%
312
Correct Answer: (c) (refer to section 7.2.1)
Ques:4. The standard deviation of two securities A and B are 15% and
20%, and their correlation coefficient is 0.5. What is the portfolio risk
for both the securities, if the investments are made equally?
(a) 15.21% (b) 15%
(c) 20% (d) 17.5%
Ques:5 Calculate the expected returns for a company under Capital Asset
Pricing Model, assuming that risk free return is 8% p.a., its beta is
1.5 and market return is 20% p.a.
(a) 22% (b) 26%
(c) 30% (d) 38%
Correct Answer: (b) (refer to sub-section of 7.2.2 on Capital Asset Pricing
Model)
Ques:16. If the company pays dividend of Rs. 25 every year and the
expected return for the investor is 20%, What is the theoretical value of
share of the company?
(a) Rs.125 (b) Rs. 100
(c) Rs. 75 (d) Rs. 250
313
CHAPTER 8: CORPORATE FINANCE
8.1 COST OF CAPITAL
Capital like any other factor of production involves a cost. The cost of capital
is an important element in capital expenditure management. The cost of
capital of a company is the average cost of various components of capital of
all long term sources of finance. Understanding the concept of the Cost of
capital is very helpful in making investment and financing decision. For e.g. if
a company is in need of Rs.30 crore, cost of capital will be the major factor
determining whether the same should be financed by debt or equity capital.
There are three types of capital costs, namely, (i) Cost of Debt, (ii) Cost of
preferred Shares and (iii) Cost of Equity.
8.1.1Cost of Debt
The debt capital can be broadly classified as Perpetual Debt Capital or
redeemable debt capital. The cost of perpetual debt capital (Kdp) is calculated
by
I
Kdp= (1-tx)
SV
Where
I= Annual Interest Rate
SV= Sales proceed of the bond/debenture
tx = tax rate
Kdp is the tax adjusted cost of capital (i.e. the cost of debt is on after tax
basis). To calculate before tax cost of debt (1-tx) will not be considered.
The cost of debt is generally the lowest among all sources partly because the
risk involved is low but mainly because interest paid on debt is tax deductible.
8.1.2Cost of Preference Shares

The preference capital can be broadly classified as perpetual preference
capital or redeemable preference capital. The cost of perpetual preference
capital (Kpsp) is calculated by
d(1+ tx)
Kpsp=
p(1 -f )
Where
d = constant annual dividend
314
p = expected sale price of preference share
f = floatation cost
tx = Tax on preference dividend
Kpsp is the tax adjusted cost of preference capital. To calculate before tax
cost of preference capital (1+tx) will not be considered.
It may be noted that while assessing tax liability, the preference dividend paid
to the preference shareholders is not allowed as a deductible item of expense.
8.1.3Cost of Equity
There are two approaches to compute cost of equity capital: (1) Dividend
growth Model approach which is discussed in this section and (2) Capital
Asset Pricing Model which is discussed in section 7.2.2 of the previous chapter
of this book.
Dividend growth Model approach: Dividend growth Model approach
assumes that the price of equity stock depends ultimately on the dividend
expected from it.
Dividend Growth Model:
D
Ke = + g
Pe
Where
Ke = Cost of Equity Capital
D = Dividend
g = rate at which dividends are expected to grow
Pe = Price of equity shares
Illustration:
Stock price of XYZ Ltd. is trading at Rs. 66. The firm is expected to declare
dividend of Rs. 7 per share and is expected to grow at rate of 10 per cent per
year. What is the cost of equity under dividend growth model?
D
Ke = + g
Pe
Ke = (7/66) + .10
= .10606 +.10
= .20606 x 100 = 20.61%
8.1.4The Weighted Average Cost of Capital
The weighted average cost of capital is the weighted average of the after-tax
costs of each of the sources of capital used by a firm to finance a project
315
where the weights reflect the proportion of total financing raised from each
source.
Kwacc = Wd Kd (1- Tc) + Wps Kps + We Ke
W = Weight
Kd = cost of Debt Capital
Kps = Cost of Preference Share Capital
Ke = Cost of Equity capital
Illustration:
What is the average cost of capital of XYZ Ltd.?, if the cost of capital from
each source such as debt, preferred stock and equity is 7%, 16% and 23%
respectively and being financed with 40% from the debt, 10% from the
preferred stock and 50% from the equity.
Kwacc = 40% *7% + 10%*16% + 50%*23% = 15.9%
8.2 CAPITAL STRUCTURE

The objective of the firm is to maximize shareholder s wealth or in other
words the value of the firm. The main sources of finance for a firm are equity
and debt. The question arises is what should be the proportion of the equity
and debt so that the shareholders wealth is maximized. It may be noted that
the value of the firm and the cost of capital is inversely related i.e. the valu
e
of the firm is maximized when the cost of capital is minimized and vice versa.
8.2.1Net Income Approach
Under the net income approach, the cost of debt capital (kd) and the cost of
equity capital (ke) remain unchanged, when the degree of leverage varies
meaning
B
æç
L
ö÷
l
æç
L
ö÷
l
ko
=
k
d
+
k
e
B
Where
Ko
Kd
Ke
B
S
= Overall Capitalisation rate for the firm= Cost of Debt Capital= Cost of Equity
Capital= Market value of the Debt= Market value of the Equity
316
Cost of capital
Ke
Ko
Kd
Degree of leverage (debt/equity)
As leverage increases, the overall cost of capital decreases, because the
weight of debt capital which is relatively a cheaper means of finance in the
capital structure increases.
8.2.2Net Operating Income Approach
Under net operating income approach, the overall capitalization rate and the
cost of debt remains constant for all degrees of leverage. The reason for the
same being that the market capitalizes the firm as a whole at a rate which is
independent of its debt-equity ratio.
Ke
Ko
Kd
The market value of the firm depends on its net operating income and
business risk and not on change in degree of leverage. An increase in use of
debt fund is offset by the higher equity capitalization rate. This approach was
advocated by David Durand. Modigliani and Miller advanced the proposition
that the cost of capital of a firm is independent of its capital structure.
8.2.3Traditional Approach
The Traditional approach is the midway between the Net Income and Net
Operating Income Approaches. The crux of the traditional view relating to
leverage and valuation is that through proper use of debt and equity
proportions, a firm can increase its value and thereby reduce the overall cost
of capital. The rational behind the same is that debt is a comparatively
cheaper source of funds to equity.
317
The main propositions of the traditional approach are:
o
The Cost of debt capital remains constant up to a certain degree of
leverage but rises afterwards at an increasing rate.
o
The Cost of equity capital remains constant or rises only gradually up
to a certain degree of leverage and rises sharply afterwards
o
The average cost of capital decreases up to a certain point, remains
constant for moderate increase in leverage afterwards, and rises
beyond certain point.
Ke
Ko
Kd
8.2.4Modigliani and Miller Approach
The Modigliani and Miller (MM) thesis relating to the relationship between the
capital structure, cost of capital and valuation is similar to the NOI approach.
The MM approach maintains that the weighted average cost of capital does
not change with the change in cost of capital (or degree of leverage). The
basic propositions of the theory are:
1.
The overall cost of capital and the value of the firm are independent of
its capital structure. The cost of capital and the value of the firm are
constant for all degrees of leverage. The total value is given by
capitalizing the expected stream of operating earnings at a discount
rate appropriate to its risk class.
2.
The expected return on equity is equal to the expected rate of return
on assets plus a premium. The premium is equal to the debt-equity
ratio times the difference between the expected return on assets and
the expected return on debt.
3.
The cut off rate (of expected return) for investment purposes is
completely independent of the way in which the investments are
financed.
318
The MM theory assumes that:
1. The Capital Markets are perfect. The information is perfect and is
readily available to the investors. Securities are infinitely divisible.
Investors are free to buy and sell. There are no transaction costs.
Investors are rational
2. The expectations of the investors about the future operating earnings
are identical
3. The business risk is equal among all firms within similar operating
environment.
4. Dividend payout ratio is 100 percent (The entire earnings are
distributed as dividend)
5. There are no taxes.
8.3 CAPITAL BUDGETING
Capital expenditures typically involve a current or future outlay of funds in
expectation of stream of benefits extending far in future. The basic
characteristics of the same are: (a) They have long term consequences. (b)
They involve substantial outlays (c) They may not be reversed. Capital
budgeting decisions are of utmost importance in financial decision making as
they affect the profitability and competitive position of the firm.
Capital budgeting involves the following phases.
· Identification of projects
· Assembling of proposed projects
· Decision making
· Preparation of capital budget and appropriations
· Implementation
· Performance evaluation of projects
In order to evaluate the project the following five methods are adopted.
· Net Present Value
· Benefit-Cost Ratio
· Internal rate of return
· Payback period
· Accounting rate of return
8.3.1 Net Present Value
Net present value of a project is the sum of the present values of all the cash
flows associated with it. The cash flows can be positive or negative.
n
CFCF CF CF
01 nt
NPV =+ ..... =å
01 nt
(1 + r) (1 + r) (1 + r) t=0 (1 + r)
319
Where NPV = Net present value
CF = Cash flow occurring at the end of the year t (t=0, 1 , n)
N = Life of the Project
r = Discount rate or required rate of return
The project is feasible or acceptable if the net present value is positive. The
project is rejected if the net present value is negative. It is indifferent, if
the
net present value is zero. Similarly if there are various projects to be
evaluated the project which has the highest NPV will get the highest rank and
the project that has the lowest NPV will get the lowest rank
Illustration:
A firm requires an initial cash outlay of Rs. 10000, yields the following set of
annual cash flows. The required rate of return of the firm is 10% p.a. What is
its Net Present Value of the firm?
Year After-tax Cash flows
1 Rs.4000
2 Rs.3000
3 Rs.3000
4 Rs.1000
5 Rs. 2000
Year Cash flows
Present Value Factor:
1/(1+r)t
Present
Value(2)*(3)
(1) (2) (3) (4)
0 -10000 1 -10000
1 4000 0.909091 3636.364
2 3000 0.826446 2479.339
3 3000 0.751315 2253.944
4 1000 0.683013 683.0135
5 2000 0.620921 1241.843
Net Present Value: 294.503
The Advantages of the NPV method are:
1.
It takes into account the time value of money with changing discount
rate.
2.
It can be used to evaluate mutually exclusive projects.
3.
It takes into consideration the total benefits arising out of the project
over its lifetime.
The disadvantages being:
1.
It does not take into account the life of the project and may not give
dependable result for projects having different lives.
2.
The NPV method is an absolute method and may not give dependable
results in case the projects have different outlays.
320
8.3.2 Benefit-Cost Ratio
Cost Benefit Ratio (BCR), also known as profitability index (PI), measures the
present value of the returns per rupee invested.
BCR= Present value of inflows/Initial Investments
PI= Present value of cash inflows/Present value of cash outflows
Using the BCR the project may be accepted when BCR is greater than 1 and
may be rejected if the BCR is less than 1. When BCR equals 1 the firm is
indifferent to the project. PI is the superior method than BCR in terms as it
can be used in projects where outflows occur beyond the current period.
Illustration:
A firm requires an initial cash outlay of Rs.10000, yields the following set of
annual cash flows. The required rate of return of the firm is 10% p.a. What is
its Benefit-Cost Ratio?
Using the same illustration as in NPV calculation, where NPV=294.503, we
can calculate BCR as follows:
BCR = Present value of inflows/Initial Investments
= 294.503/10000 = 0.029
Since the BCR is less than 1 it is better to reject the project.

Advantages
1.
BCR method is superior to NPV method as it evaluates the project in
relative rather than in absolute terms.
2.
Two projects having different cash outlays and lifetime can be
evaluated.
3.
It also takes into account the important elements of capital budgeting
such as time value of money, totality of the benefits and so on.
8.3.3 Internal Rate of Return
Internal rate of return (IRR) is the discount rate which makes its net present
value equal to zero. It is the discount rate which equates the present value of
the future benefits with the initial outlay.
n
CF0 CF1 CFn CFt
0 =+ ..... =å
01 nt
(1 + r) (1+ r) (1 + r) t=0 (1+ r)
Where, CF = Cash flow
321
r = Discount rate or required rate of return
n = Life of the Project
It may be noted that the discount rate is not known while calculating the IRR.
In IRR calculation the NPV is set to zero to determine the discount rate that
satisfies the condition. The calculation of r is a trial and error process.
Different values are tried as r till the condition is satisfied.
Illustration:
A firm requires an initial cash outlay of Rs. 10000, yields the following set of
annual cash flows. What is the required rate of return of the firm for these
cash flows?
1 Rs.4000
2 Rs.3000
3 Rs.3000
4 Rs.1000
5 Rs. 2000
Year Cash flows Present Value
Factor is assumed
to be 11.3675%
Present
Value(2)*(3)
(1) (2) (3) (4)
0 -10000 1 -10000
1 4000 0.897928 3591.712
2 3000 0.806275 2418.824
3 3000 0.723977 2171.93
4 1000 0.650079 650.079
5 2000 0.583724 1167.448
Net Present Value: -0.0063
Therefore, the Internal Rate of Return is 11.367%
Advantage of the IRR method is apart from taking into account the important
elements of capital budgeting such as time value of money, totality of the
benefits and so on, it does not take use the concept of required return or the
cost of the capital. It itself provides a rate of return which is indicative of
profitability of the proposal.
322
The disadvantages being:
1.
It involves tedious calculations.
2.
IRR may not give dependable results while evaluating mutually
exclusive projects as the project with Highest IRR will be selected.
However in practice it may not turned out to be the same
3.
IRR assumes that all intermediate cash flows are reinvested at IRR.
This is not the case in practice
8.3.4 Payback Period
The payback period is the number of years required to recover the initial
project cost. Shorter the payback period, more desirable is the project.
Payback period = Number of years required to equal cash flows with initial
project cost.
Illustration:
A firm requires an initial cash outlay of Rs. 10000, yield the following set of
annual cash flows, what is its payback period?
1 Rs.4000
2 Rs.3000
3 Rs.3000
4 Rs.1000
5 Rs. 2000
Its payback period is 3 years as the firm is able to recover the initial outlay
of
Rs. 10000 only in the 3rd year.
Advantages
1.
it is simple in concept and application
2.
it emphasizes on the early recovery of the project cost it may be
useful for the firms which are looking for liquidity
Disadvantages
1.
It does not take into account the time value of money.
2.
It ignores cash flows beyond the payback period. Projects which have
substantial inflows in the later part are ignored.
3.
It concentrates only on capital recovery and not on profitability
323
8.3.5 Accounting Rate of Return
Profit AfterTax
Accounting rate of return =
Book Value of the Investment
Higher the accounting rate of return, the better the project. Generally
projects which returns equal to or greater than pre specified cut of return are
accepted.
As it is evident that though ARR is easy to calculate and apply, it does not
take into account time value of money and is based on the accounting profit
and not cash flows.
8.4 TIME VALUE OF MONEY
One of the most important principles in all of finance is the relationship
between value of a rupee today and value of rupee in future. This relationship
is known as the time value of money . A rupee today is more valuable than a
rupee tomorrow. This is because current consumption is preferred to future
consumption by the individuals, firms can employ capital productively to earn
positive returns and in an inflationary period, rupee today represents greater
purchasing power than a rupee tomorrow. The time value of the money may
be computed in the following circumstances.
(a) Future value of a single cash flow
(b) Future value of an annuity
(c) Present value of a single cash flow
(d) Present value of an annuity
8.4.1 Future Value of a Single Cash Flow
For a given present value (PV) of money, future value of money (FV) after a
period t for which compounding is done at an interest rate of r , is given by
the equation
FV = PV (1+r)t
This assumes that compounding is done at discrete intervals. However, in
case of continuous compounding, the future value is determined using the
formula
FV = PV * ert
Where e is a mathematical function called exponential the value of
exponential (e) = 2.7183. The compounding factor is calculated by taking
natural logarithm (log to the base of 2.7183).
324
Example 1: Calculate the value of a deposit of Rs.2,000 made today, 3 years
hence if the interest rate is 10%.
By discrete compounding:
FV = 2,000 * (1+0.10)3 = 2,000 * (1.1)3 = 2,000 * 1.331 = Rs. 2,662
By continuous compounding:
FV = 2,000 * e (0.10 *3) =2,000 * 1.349862 = Rs.2699.72
Example 2: Find the value of Rs. 70,000 deposited for a period of 5 years at
the end of the period when the interest is 12% and continuous compounding
is done.
(0.12*5)
Future Value = 70,000* e = Rs. 1,27,548.827.
The future value (FV) of the present sum (PV) after a period t for which
compounding is done m times a year at an interest rate of r , is given by the
following equation:
FV = PV (1+(r/m))^mt
Example 3: How much a deposit of Rs. 10,000 will grow at the end of 2
years, if the nominal rate of interest is 12 % and compounding is done
quarterly?
æ 0.12 ö4*2
Future value = 10,000 * ç1 +÷ = Rs. 12,667.70
è 4 ø
8.4.2 Future Value of an Annuity
An annuity is a stream of equal annual cash flows. The future value (FVA) of a
uniform cash flow (CF) made at the end of each period till the time of
maturity t for which compounding is done at the rate r is calculated as
follows:
FVA = CF*(1+r)t-1 + CF*(1+r)t-2 + ... + CF*(1+r)1+CF
æ (1 + r) t -1 ö
= CF çç ÷÷
r
èø
æ (1 + r)t-1 ö
The term çç ÷÷ is referred as the Future Value Interest factor for an
r
èø
annuity (FVIFA). The same can be applied in a variety of contexts. For e.g. to
know accumulated amount after a certain period,; to know how much to save
annually to reach the targeted amount, to know the interest rate etc.
325
Example 4: Suppose, you deposit Rs.3,000 annually in a bank for 5 years and
your deposits earn a compound interest rate of 10 per cent, what will be
value of this series of deposits (an annuity) at the end of 5 years? Assume
that each deposit occurs at the end of the year.
Future value of this annuity is:
=Rs.3000*(1.10)4 + Rs.3000*(1.10)3 + Rs.3000*(1.10)2 + Rs.3000*(1.10) +
Rs.3000
=Rs.3000*(1.4641)+Rs.3000*(1.3310)+Rs.3000*(1.2100)+Rs.3000*(1.10)
+ Rs.3000
= Rs. 18315.30
Example 5: You want to buy a house after 5 years when it is expected to cost
40 lakh how much should you save annually, if your savings earn a compound
return of 12 %?
ö÷÷÷
÷
ø
æççç
ç
è
5
(1
0.12)
FVIFA
=
t = 5, r=12%
=6.353
0.12
The annual savings should be:

4000000/6.353=6,29,623.80
In case of continuous compounding, the future value of annuity is calculated
using the formula: FVA = CF * (ert -1)/r.
8.4.3 Present Value of a Single Cash Flow
Present value of (PV) of the future sum (FV) to be received after a period t
for which discounting is done at an interest rate of r , is given by the
equation
In case of discrete discounting: PV = FV / (1+r)t
Example 6: What is the present value of Rs.5,000 payable 3 years hence, if
the interest rate is 10 % p.a.
PV = 5000 / (1.10)3 i.e. = Rs.3756.57
In case of continuous discounting: PV = FV * e-rt
Example 7: What is the present value of Rs. 10,000 receivable after 2 years
at a discount rate of 10% under continuous discounting?
Present Value = 10,000/(exp^(0.1*2)) = Rs. 8187.297
326
8.4.4 Present Value of an Annuity
The present value of annuity is the sum of the present values of all the cash
inflows of this annuity.
Present value of an annuity (in case of discrete discounting)
PVA = FV [{(1+r)t -1 }/ {r * (1+r)t}]
The term [(1+r)t -1/ r*(1+r)t] is referred as the Present Value Interest factor
for an annuity (PVIFA).
Example 8: What is the present value of Rs. 2000/-received at the end of
each year for 3 continuous years
= 2000*[1/1.10]+2000*[1/1.10]^2+2000*[1/1.10]^3
= 2000*0.9091+2000*0.8264+2000*0.7513
= 1818.181818+1652.892562+1502.629602
= Rs. 4973.704
Example 9: Assume that you have taken housing loan of Rs.10 lakh at the
interest rate of Rs.11 percent per annum. What would be you equal annual
installment for repayment period of 15 years?
Loan amount = Installment (A) *PVIFA n=15, r=11%
10,00,000 = A* [(1+r)t -1/ r*(1+r)t]
10,00,000 = A* [(1.11)^15 -1/ 0.11(1.11^15]
10,00,000 = A* 7.19087
10,00,000/7.19087 = A
A = Rs. 1,39,065.24
Present value of an annuity (in case of continuous discounting) is calculated
as:
PVa = FVa * (1-e-rt)/r
MODEL QUESTIONS
Ques:1 Calculate the weighted average cost of capital for a company, if the
cost of capital from sources such as equity, preferred stock and debt is
20%, 18% and 15% respectively and being financed with 50% from
equity capital, 10% from Preference capital and remaining 40% from
Debt capital.
327
(a) 17.25% (b) 17.67%
(c) 17.50% (d) 17.80%
Correct Answer: (d) (refer to section 8.1.4)
Ques:2 Suppose your annual savings are Rs. 30,000. You opt for pension
fund that offers compounded interest rate of 10% annually. How
much will your PF account have after 25 years if you are contributing
your savings to the PF at the end of every year?
(a) 29,50,412 (b) 3,25,041
(c) 32,50,412 (d) 2,95,041
Correct Answer: (a) 29,50,412 (refer section 8.4.2)
Ques:3 Calculate the value 5 years hence of a deposit of Rs. 1,000 made
today if the interest rate is 8% (compounded annually).
(a) Rs. 1,400 (b) Rs. 1,469
(c) Rs. 1,000 (d) Rs. 1,040
Correct Answer: (b) Rs. 1,469 (refer section 8.4.1)
Ques:4 What is the present value of Rs. 1,000 payable 3 years hence if the
interest rate is 9% per annum?
(a) Rs. 715 (b) Rs. 1,295
(c) Rs. 1,000 (d) Rs. 772
Correct Answer: (d) (refer to section 8.4.3)
Ques:5 What is the present value of Rs. 12,000 receivable after 3 years at a
discount rate of 10 % under continuous discounting?
(a) Rs. 8889.80 (b) Rs. 12000.90
(c) Rs. 10000.20 (d) Rs. 9880.80
Correct Answer: (a)
328
MODEL TEST
SECURITIES MARKETS (BASIC) MODULE
1) ______ is a volatility index launched by NSE. [1 Mark ]

(a) India VIX
(b) Nifty VIX
(c) Nifty India VIX
(d) India Nifty VIX
(e) I am not attempting the question
2) The settlement system for transaction in government securities was
standardized to ________ on May 11, 2005.
[1 Mark]
(a) T+1
(b) T+2
(c) T+3
(d) T+4
3) Securities , which is defined in the Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act,
1956, includes ________. [2 Marks]
(a) Derivatives
(b) Bonds
(c) Stocks
4) Which of the following is a participant in the Securities Markets? [2 Mark ]
(a) FIIs
(b) Merchant Bankers
(c) Mutual Funds
5) The securities market has two interdependent and inseparable segments,
______________. [2 Marks]
(a) OTC and Exchange Traded markets
(b) the new issues (primary market) and the stock (secondary) market.
(c) Cash and Derivatives markets
(d) Commodity and Equity markets
329
6) _________ enables participants who hold securities to adjust their
holdings in response to changes in their assessment of risk and return.
[2 Marks]
(a) Over the Counter market
(b) Derivatives market
(c) The Primary market
(d) The Secondary market
7) A company making a public issue of securities has to file a draft
prospectus with SEBI, through an eligible merchant banker, at least
_____ prior to the filing of prospectus with the Registrar of Companies
(RoCs). [1 Mark]
(a) 30 days
(b) 15 days
(c) 10 days
(d) 60 days
8) The promoters contribution in case of public issues by unlisted companies
and promoters shareholding in case of offers for sale should not be less
than _____ of the post issue capital. [1 Mark]
(a) 30%
(b) 15%
(c) 20%
(d) 50%
9)
For any issue of capital to the public, the minimum promoter s
contribution is locked in for a period of _____. [2 Marks]
(a) 5 years
(b) 3 years
(c) 2 years
(d) 1 year
10)Out of the portion available for allocation to qualified institutional buyers
in case when the company makes an issue through 100% or 75% book
building, ________ should be allocated proportionately to mutual fund.
[2 Marks ]
330
(a) five percent
(b) ten percent
(c) fifteen percent
(d) twenty percent
11)Under book building, the bids must remain open for atleast ____ days.
[2 Marks ]
(a) 3
(b) 4
(c) 5
(d) 7
12)As per SEBI mandate, all new IPOs are compulsorily traded in
dematerialised form. True or False? [2 Marks]
(a) True
(b) False
(c) I am not attempting the question
13) Demutualization means the segregation of ownership and management
from the trading rights of the members of a recognized stock exchange in
accordance with the scheme approved by the Securities and Exchange
Board of India. True or False. [2 Marks]
(a) True
(b) False
14)A networth of _____ is required for members clearing for self as well as
for other Trading Members in the Futures & Options Segment of NSE.
[3 Marks]
(a) Rs. 200 lakhs
(b) Rs. 100 lakhs
(c) Rs. 500 lakhs
(d) Rs. 300 lakhs
331
15) A trading member applying for membership of the Capital Market, F&O
and WDM segments of NSE must meet the following eligibility criteria : At
least two directors should be graduates. Dealers should also have passed
SEBI approved certification test for derivatives and NCFM Capital Market
(Basic or Dealers) Module. True or False? [2 Marks]
(a) True
(b) False
16)The prime objective of admission to dealings on the Exchange is to
provide liquidity and marketability to securities, as also to provide a
mechanism for effective management of trading. True or False? [1 Mark]
(a) True
(b) False
17) At the time of listing securities of a company on a stock exchange, the
company is required to enter into a(n) _____ with the exchange. [1 Mark]
a) listing agreement
b) MOU
c) understanding
d) back to back arrangement
e) I am not attempting the question
18) The stock exchanges may de-list companies which have been suspended
for a minimum period of six months for non-compliance with the listing
agreement. True or False? [1 Mark]
a) True
b) False
c) I am not attempting the question
19) In order to list on the Capital Market segment of the NSE through an IPO,
a company should have a minimum paid up equity capital of Rs. ___ and a
market capitalization of Rs. _____. [3 Marks]
(a) 100, 250
(b) 25, 10
(c) 10, 25
332
(d) 250, 100
20) The Depositories Act envisages transfer of ownership of securities
electronically by book entry without making the securities move from person
to person. True or False? [2 Marks]
a) True
b) False
21) In order to promote dematerialisation of securities, NSE joined hands with
leading financial institutions to establish the __________. [1 Mark]
a) National Securities Depository Ltd. (NSDL)
b) Central Depository Services Ltd. (CDSL)
c) Depository Services of India Ltd. (DSIL)
d) Stock Holding Corporation of India Ltd. (SHCIL)
22) The NEAT system of NSE supports a(n) ________. [1 Mark]
a) Quote driven market
b) Market maker system
c) Order driven market
d) Jobber driven system
23) All orders which are of regular lot size or multiples thereof are traded in
the Normal Market in the Capital Market Segment of NSE. True or False?
[1 Mark]
a) True
b) False
24) In the case of a public issue through 100% book building route what is
the minimum percentage of shares that can be allocated to the retail
investors applying for Rs.1000 worth shares for subscription? [2 Marks]
a) 35%
b) 20%
c) 25%
d) 45%
333
25) The main instruments in the government securities market are fixed rate
bond, floating rate bonds, zero coupon bonds and inflation index bonds, partly
paid securities, securities with embedded derivatives, treasury bills and the
state government bonds. True or False? [1 Mark]
(a) True
(b) False
26) The market for government securities comprises the securities issued by
the _________ [1 Mark]
(a) Central Govt.
(b) State Govt.
(c) State sponsored entities
27) The best buy order in the trading system is the order with the ______?
[2 Marks]
(a) Lowest quantity
(b) Highest quantiy
(c) Lowest price
(d) Highest price
28) If an order does not find a match in the trading system, it is _____
[2 Marks]
(a) removed from the trading system after seven days
(b) removed from the trading system at the end of the day
(c) removed from the trading system on the expiry day
(d) removed from the trading system when the buyer / seller wishes
29) Mr. Shah has placed a stop loss buy order for the security XYZ Ltd, in the
F&O trading system. The following are the details of the order: the trigger
price is kept at Rs.1025.00 and the limit price is kept at Rs.1030.00. This
order will be released into the system in which of the following scenarios:
[3 Marks]
334
(a) The market price of the security reaches or exceeds Rs.1025.00
(b) Only if the market price of the security reaches or exceeds Rs.1030.00
(c) Only if the market price of the security falls below Rs.1025.00
(d) The market price of the security reaches or exceeds Rs.1022.00
30) Derivative products initially
fluctuations in ________.
emerged as hedging devices against
[1 Mark]
(a) Bond prices
(b) Equity Prices
(c) Commodity prices
(d) Interest rates
31) Arbitrageurs are in business to take advantage of a discrepancy between
prices in two different markets. True or False? [1 Marks]
(a) True
(b) False
32)While entering a stop loss order, one needs to specify the _____ [1 Mark]
(a) high price
(b) trigger price
(c) low price
(d) price band
33) Forward markets world-wide are afflicted by _________. [2 Marks]
(a) Lack of centralisation of trading
(b) Illiquidity
(c) Counterparty risk
335
34) ______ can be defined as the futures price minus the spot price.
[2 Marks]
(a) Basis
(b) Cost of carry
(c) Minimum lot size
(d) Premium
35) On May 16 closing price of equity shares of ABC Ltd. is Rs. 200. Gopal
holds 8000 call options on ABC Ltd. at a strike price of Rs.195, which he
had purchased on 5th April at a premium of Rs.11 per call. What would be
his net payment to/receipt from the Clearing Corporation if he exercises
his option on 5000 on May 16. [3 Marks]
(a) Pays Rs. 25,000 to the Clearing Corporation
(b) Receives Rs. 25,000 from the Clearing Corporation
(c) Receives Rs. 40,000 from the Clearing Corporation
36) A trading member has the following position in a particular security : ABC
Ltd. :
Client Buy Quantity Sell Quantity
A 2000 1000
B 4300 200
C 2000 4600
D 0 4800
E 3400 0
What will be the final settlement obligation in ABC Ltd. for the member?
[3 Marks]
(a) Pay-in obligation of 10600 shares
(b) Pay-out obligation of 11700 shares
(c) Pay-out obligation for 1100 shares
37) Spot value of Nifty is 4240. An investor buys a one-month Nifty 4227
put option for a premium of Rs.70. The option is ________. [2 Marks]
336
(a) Out of the money
(b) In the money
(c) At the money
(d) Above the money
38) Spot value of Nifty is 4245. An investor buys a one-month Nifty 4225
call option for a premium of Rs.120. The option is ________. [2 Marks]
(a) Out of the money
(b) In the money
(c) At the money
(d) Above the money
39) Trading member Mr. Shantilal took proprietary purchase in a March
2008 contract. He bought 1500 units @Rs.1200 and sold 1300 @ Rs. 1220.
The end of day settlement price was Rs. 1221. What is the outstanding
position on which initial margin will be calculated? [2 Marks]
(a) 1500 units
(b) 200 units
(c) 1300 units
(d) 2800 units
40) Calculate the value 5 years hence of a deposit of Rs. 1,000 made today if
the interest rate is 7% (compounded annually). [2 Marks]
(a) Rs. 5000
(b) Rs. 1305
(c) Rs. 1300
(d) Rs. 1403
NOTE : THIS IS A SAMPLE TEST. THE ACTUAL TEST WILL CONTAIN 60
QUESTIONS TO BE ANSWERED IN 120 MINS.
337
Answers :
(a) 21 (a)
(a) 22 (c)
(d) 23 (a)
(d) 24 (a)
(b) 25 (a)
(d) 26 (d)
(a) 27 (d)
(c) 28 (b)
(b) 29 (a)
(a) 30 (c)
(a) 31 (a)
(a) 32 (b)
(a) 33 (d)
(d) 34 (a)
(a) 35 (b)
(a) 36 (c)
(a) 37 (a)
(a) 38 (b)
(c) 39 (b)
(a) 40 (d)
338

Nse Book

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Nse Book

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Nse Book

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Copyright © 2009 by National Stock Exchange of India Ltd.

3.4 CLEARING AND SETTLEMENT ....................................................

3.4.1 Clearing and Settlement Mechanism.........................................

3.4.2 Rolling Settlement........................................................

3.5 RISK MANAGEMENT ............................................................

3.5.1 Capital Adequacy Requirements.............................................

3.5.2 Margins ..................................................................

3.5.3 On-Line Exposure Monitoring ..............................................

3.5.4 Off-line Monitoring.......................................................

3.5.5 Index-based Market-wide Circuit Breakers/ Price Bands for

3.5.7 Investor Protection Fund..................................................

3.6 MARKET INDEX................................................................

3.6.1 Understanding the index number............................................

3.6.2 Understanding S&P CNX NIFTY...............................................

CHAPTER 4: GOVERNMENT SECURITIES MARKET.........................................

4.1 INTRODUCTION TO INDIAN DEBT MARKETS.........................................

4.1.1 Market Subgroups..........................................................

4.2 PRIMARY MARKET..............................................................

4.2.1 Issuance Process-Government securities....................................

4.2.2 Issuance Process Treasury Bills ............................................

4.3 SECONDARY MARKET............................................................

4.3.1 Trading of Government Securities on Stock Exchanges.......................

4.3.2 Repo and Reverse Repo.....................................................

4.3.3 Negotiated Dealing System.................................................

4.3.4 Wholesale Debt Market of NSE..............................................

4.3.6 Retail Debt Market........................................................

4.3.7 Interest Rate Derivatives.................................................

4.3.8 Zero Coupon Yield Curve...................................................

4.3.9 FIMMDA-NSE MIBID/MIBOR....................................................

4.3.10 NSE-VaR System...........................................................

4.3.11 Bond Index...............................................................

CHAPTER 5: DERIVATIVES MARKET...................................................

5.1.2 Products, participants and functions......................................

5.1.3 Types of Derivatives......................................................

5.1.4 Derivatives Market in India ..............................................

6.1 SECURITIES CONTRACTS (REGULATION) ACT, 1956.................................

7.1 MEASURES OF CENTRAL TENDENCY................................................

7.2.2 Return and Risk of a portfolio............................................

7.3 FUNDAMENTAL ANALYSIS........................................................

7.3.1 Valuation of a Stock......................................................

7.3.2 Economic Analysis ........................................................

7.3.3 Industry Analysis.........................................................

7.4 TECHNICAL ANALYSIS..........................................................

7.4.1 Dow Theory................................................................

7.5 FINANCIAL STATEMENT ANALYSIS................................................

7.5.1 Balance Sheet.............................................................

7.5.2 Profit and Loss Account...................................................

7.5.3 Ratio Analysis ...........................................................

CHAPTER 8: CORPORATE FINANCE....................................................

8.1 COST OF CAPITAL.............................................................

8.1.2 Cost of Preference Shares ................................................

8.1.3 Cost of Equity............................................................

8.1.4 The Weighted Average Cost of Capital......................................

8.2 CAPITAL STRUCTURE ..........................................................

8.2.1 Net Income Approach.......................................................

8.2.2 Net Operating Income Approach.............................................

8.2.3 Traditional Approach......................................................

8.2.4 Modigliani and Miller Approach............................................

8.3 CAPITAL BUDGETING ..........................................................